611918
698
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/701
Next page
Operation Guide
Operation and Configuration
VoIP System Telephones
Standard VoIP Telephones
COMfortel 1400 IP
COMfortel 2600 IP
COMfortel 3600 IP
2 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Important Information .......................................................................................................... 20
Symbols and Signal Words Used in this Document............................................................... 21
Safety Information .................................................................................................................. 22
Proper Use ............................................................................................................................. 24
Product Details....................................................................................................................... 25
Technical Data........................................................................................................................ 26
Scope of Delivery ................................................................................................................... 31
Minimun Requirements PC .................................................................................................... 32
Copyright and Trademarks..................................................................................................... 33
Environmental Tips................................................................................................................. 34
Introduction to the Telephone............................................................................................. 35
Device Overview .................................................................................................................... 36
Buttons and LEDs.............................................................................................................. 36
Display............................................................................................................................... 44
Overview of Connections................................................................................................... 46
Display Elements.................................................................................................................... 49
Home Screens................................................................................................................... 49
Status Bar .......................................................................................................................... 54
Status Info.......................................................................................................................... 55
Operating Instructions ............................................................................................................ 56
Android Keyboard (Screen Keyboard)............................................................................... 56
Entry and Selection Fields................................................................................................. 58
Lists ................................................................................................................................... 59
Apps ....................................................................................................................................... 60
Setup Assistant.................................................................................................................. 60
Telephony App...................................................................................................................61
All Apps.............................................................................................................................. 65
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 3
Table of Contents
Introduction to the Configuration Manager ....................................................................... 72
Configuration Manager...........................................................................................................73
Opening the Configuration Manager ................................................................................. 73
Notes for Using the Configuration Manager ...................................................................... 76
Selecting your Language................................................................................................... 81
Entering a Username for the Configuration Manager (SIP Account)................................. 81
Entering a Password for the Configuration Manager (SIP Account) ................................. 82
Deleting the Password for the Configuration Manager (SIP Account)............................... 84
Help........................................................................................................................................ 85
Opening Help..................................................................................................................... 85
Navigating in the Help Window.......................................................................................... 85
Searching in Help .............................................................................................................. 87
Printing from within the Help.............................................................................................. 88
Icons in the Help Window .................................................................................................. 89
Telephoning .......................................................................................................................... 90
Incoming Calls........................................................................................................................ 91
Options during an Incoming Call ....................................................................................... 91
Accepting an Incoming Call ............................................................................................... 92
Rejecting an Incoming Call................................................................................................ 92
Putting a Caller On Hold.................................................................................................... 93
Forwarding Incoming Calls ................................................................................................ 93
Call-Waiting Calls ................................................................................................................... 94
Options during a Call-Waiting Call..................................................................................... 94
Rejecting a Call-Waiting Call ............................................................................................. 94
Accepting a Call-Waiting Call ............................................................................................ 95
Forwarding a Call-Waiting Call .......................................................................................... 95
Switching Off the Call-Waiting Tone .................................................................................. 96
Outgoing Calls........................................................................................................................ 97
Options for Outgoing Calls ................................................................................................ 97
Picking up Receiver and Dialling Telephone Number........................................................ 97
Dialling a Telephone Number with Dial Preparation .......................................................... 98
Initiating an External Call with Calling Line Identity Restriction ......................................... 99
Options for Unsuccessful Calls.......................................................................................... 99
Initiating Callback when Line is Busy .............................................................................. 100
Initiating Callback on No Reply........................................................................................ 101
Initiating a Priority Call when Do-Not-Disturb is Enabled................................................. 102
4 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Table of Contents
Call ....................................................................................................................................... 103
Options during a Call ....................................................................................................... 103
Information about a Call .................................................................................................. 103
Sending DTMF Signals.................................................................................................... 104
Muting a Call.................................................................................................................... 104
Ending a Call ................................................................................................................... 104
Query Call ............................................................................................................................ 105
Initiating a Query Call ...................................................................................................... 105
Ending a Query Call ........................................................................................................ 106
Options during a Query Call ............................................................................................ 106
Transferring ..................................................................................................................... 107
Ending One of the Two Calls ........................................................................................... 107
Connecting the Other Two Call Partners to Each Other.................................................. 107
Call Transfer......................................................................................................................... 109
Options for Transferring a Call......................................................................................... 109
Transferring with Announcement..................................................................................... 110
Transferring without Announcement................................................................................ 110
Placing External Call Partner in Waiting Loop..................................................................111
Calling a 3rd Internal Subscriber and Transferring them to an Active Call Partner ..........111
Conference Call.................................................................................................................... 113
Initiating Conference Calls............................................................................................... 113
Options during a Conference Call ................................................................................... 113
Initiating Transferring during a Conference Call .............................................................. 114
Ending a Call With One of the Conference Call Partners................................................ 114
Connecting the Other Two Conference Call Partners to Each Other .............................. 114
Ending a Conference Call Completely............................................................................. 115
Hands-Free Calling ..............................................................................................................116
Initiating a Call in Hands-Free Calling Mode ................................................................... 116
Ending a Call in Hands-Free Calling Mode ..................................................................... 116
Switching On Hands-Free Calling during a Call .............................................................. 117
Switching Off Hands-Free Calling and Returning to Normal Calling ............................... 117
Loudspeaker Listening ......................................................................................................... 118
Switching On Loudspeaker Listening during a Call ......................................................... 118
Switching Off Loudspeaker Listening and Returning to Normal Calling .......................... 118
Ending a Call in Loudspeaker Listening Mode ................................................................ 118
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 5
Table of Contents
Headset Call......................................................................................................................... 119
Initiating Headset Calls.................................................................................................... 119
Ending a Call in Headset Operation ................................................................................ 119
Initiating the Listen-in Function on the Receiver.............................................................. 119
Ending the Listen-in Function Through the Receiver ...................................................... 120
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists ............................................................................ 121
Contacts ............................................................................................................................... 122
Searching For and Displaying a Contact ......................................................................... 122
Dialling from Within the Contacts..................................................................................... 124
Creating a Contact........................................................................................................... 124
Editing a Contact ............................................................................................................. 126
Deleting a contact............................................................................................................ 127
Sharing Contacts ............................................................................................................. 127
Options for Configuring Contacts..................................................................................... 128
Hiding a Contact .............................................................................................................. 130
Adding/Removing Favourites .......................................................................................... 131
Selecting Contacts for Display......................................................................................... 131
Adjusting Display Options................................................................................................ 132
Adopting a Telephone Number from Dial Preparation ..................................................... 133
Adopting a Telephone Number from a List of Telephone Numbers ................................. 133
Transferring Telephone Numbers to Other Dialogues ..................................................... 134
Importing/Exporting Contacts .......................................................................................... 135
Redial List............................................................................................................................. 136
Opening the Redial List ................................................................................................... 136
Dialling from Within the Redial List.................................................................................. 136
Deleting Entries from the Redial List ............................................................................... 137
Call Log ................................................................................................................................ 138
Opening the Call Log....................................................................................................... 138
Dialling from the Call Log ................................................................................................ 139
Deleting Entries from the Call Log................................................................................... 139
Caller List ............................................................................................................................. 141
Opening the Caller List ................................................................................................... 141
Dialling from Within the Caller List................................................................................... 142
Deleting Entries from the Caller List ................................................................................ 142
6 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Table of Contents
Functions ............................................................................................................................ 144
External Line Transfer (System Telephone) ......................................................................... 145
How External Line Transfer Works .................................................................................. 145
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Exchange Line Transfer ......................... 145
Call Waiting .......................................................................................................................... 149
Switching Call Waiting On/Off.......................................................................................... 149
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Waiting ............................................ 150
Do-Not-Disturb ..................................................................................................................... 154
Switching the Do-Not-Disturb Function On/Off................................................................ 154
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Do-Not-Disturb ....................................... 155
Automatic Bandwidth Amplification ...................................................................................... 159
Switching Automatic Bandwidth Amplification On/Off...................................................... 159
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Automatic Bandwidth Amplification ........ 160
Boss/Secretary Function (System Telephone) ..................................................................... 163
Procedure when Calling the Boss Telephone.................................................................. 163
Switching the Boss/Secretary Function on the Boss Telephone On/Off .......................... 164
Configuring and Operating the Secretary Key on the Boss Telephone ........................... 164
Configuring and Operating the Boss Key on the Secretary Telephone ........................... 167
Follow-Me............................................................................................................................. 171
Switching Follow-Me On/Off ............................................................................................ 171
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Follow-Me............................................... 172
Targeted Exchange Line Access (System Telephone)......................................................... 175
Initiating Targeted Exchange Line Access....................................................................... 175
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Targeted Exchange Line Access............ 176
Groups (System Telephone)................................................................................................. 179
Detailed Information About Group Functions (Call Types) .............................................. 179
Logging the Telephone In/Out ......................................................................................... 180
Logging Telephone Out of All Groups.............................................................................. 181
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Group Function ................................ 181
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Logging Out of All Groups...................... 185
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Displaying the Group State..................... 188
Headset Operation ............................................................................................................... 191
Switching Headset Operation On/Off .............................................................................. 191
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Headset Operation ................................ 192
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 7
Table of Contents
InterCom OneWay/Speakerphone ....................................................................................... 196
How InterCom OneWay Works........................................................................................ 196
Using InterCom OneWay................................................................................................. 196
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for InterCom OneWay.................................. 197
How InterCom Hands-Free Works................................................................................... 201
Using InterCom Speaker Phone...................................................................................... 201
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for InterCom Speaker Phone....................... 202
Switching InterCom Permission On/Off ........................................................................... 205
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for InterCom permission .............................. 205
Configuration Switchover (System Telephone) .................................................................... 209
Manually Switching the Configuration ............................................................................. 209
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Configuration Switchover ....................... 209
Macro Function..................................................................................................................... 213
Macro Execution Process................................................................................................ 213
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Macro Function ................................ 214
Pick-Up................................................................................................................................. 219
Performing Pick-Up ......................................................................................................... 219
Pick-Up During a Call ...................................................................................................... 219
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Pick-Up................................................... 220
Power Dialling ...................................................................................................................... 224
How Power Dialling Works .............................................................................................. 224
Initiating Power Dialling ................................................................................................... 224
Cancelling Power Dialling................................................................................................ 225
Relays (System Telephone) ................................................................................................. 226
Switching Relays On/Off.................................................................................................. 226
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Switching Relays.................................... 227
Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR) ................................................................................ 230
Switching CLIR On/Off .................................................................................................... 230
Configuring and Operating a CLIR Function Key ........................................................... 231
8 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Table of Contents
Call Forwarding .................................................................................................................... 234
Call Forwarding Variants.................................................................................................. 234
Call Forwarding Types..................................................................................................... 236
Switching Call Forwarding for Subscribers On/Off .......................................................... 236
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding for Subscribers............. 238
Switching Call Forwarding for Subscribers in the PBX On/Off ........................................ 244
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding for Subscribers in the PBX.
245
Switching Call Forwarding On/Off for External Telephone Numbers............................... 249
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding for External Phone Numbers
250
Control by External Apps...................................................................................................... 256
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Control by External App ......................... 256
Telephone Line..................................................................................................................... 259
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Telephone Line................................. 259
Announcement Before Answering for Group (System Telephone)....................................... 264
More Information on "Announcement Before Answering" for Group ............................... 264
Switching Announcement Before Answering for Group On/Off....................................... 264
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Announcement Before Answering.......... 265
Door Function (System Telephone)...................................................................................... 270
Using the Door Function.................................................................................................. 270
Own Telephone Rings (Door Call) – Opening Door......................................................... 271
Door Knock – Opening Door ........................................................................................... 272
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Door Function................................... 272
Waiting Field Function (System Telephone)......................................................................... 277
Configuring a Waiting Field.............................................................................................. 277
Sequence for Call Acceptance in Waiting Field............................................................... 278
Switching Waiting Field Reception On/Off....................................................................... 279
Configuring and Operating Function Keys for a Shared Line .......................................... 280
Configuring and Operating Function Key for Switching Waiting Field Reception On/Off. 284
Speed Dialling ...................................................................................................................... 288
Options for Using Speed Dialling Keys............................................................................ 288
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Speed Dialling ........................................ 289
Switching Automatic Dialling for Speed Dialling On/Off................................................... 292
Switching the Display of the Registration Status On/Off.................................................. 293
Local Answering Machine ................................................................................................. 294
Forwarding a Caller to the Answering Machine.................................................................... 295
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 9
Table of Contents
Answering Machine Accepts Call – Call Acceptance ........................................................... 296
Basic Settings....................................................................................................................... 297
Switching Automatic Playback On/Off ............................................................................. 297
Switching the Call Information for New Messages On/Off............................................... 298
Switching the Separator Tone for New Messages On/Off ............................................... 299
Switching the Listen-in Function On/Off .......................................................................... 300
Readiness ............................................................................................................................ 302
Switching Readiness On/Off............................................................................................ 302
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Readiness .............................................. 303
Call Acceptance ................................................................................................................... 307
Configuring the Call Acceptance Time ............................................................................ 307
Switching Acceptance of Group Calls On/Off .................................................................. 308
Call Acceptance Rules..................................................................................................... 309
Configuring Call Acceptance Rules ................................................................................. 310
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Acceptance Rules ........................... 313
Configuring the Maximum Recording Time ..................................................................... 316
Configuring the Maximum Recording Time for Door Calls .............................................. 318
Call Recording...................................................................................................................... 320
Recording a Call .............................................................................................................. 320
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Starting Call Recording........................... 321
Switching Automatic Call Recording On/Off .................................................................... 323
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Automatic Call Recording....................... 325
Switching the Announcement for Call Recording On/Off................................................. 327
Selecting an Announcement for Call Recording.............................................................. 329
Forwarding Messages by E-Mail.......................................................................................... 330
Switching the Forwarding of Messages by E-Mail On/Off ............................................... 330
Switching the Sending of E-Mail in HTML Format On/Off ............................................... 331
Switching the Attaching of Incoming Messages as Files On/Off ..................................... 332
Switching the Marking of Sent Messages as Read on the Answering Machine On/Off .. 333
Entering the Address of the E-Mail Recipient.................................................................. 334
Sending a Test E-Mail...................................................................................................... 335
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding by E-Mail ...................... 335
10 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Table of Contents
E-Mail Settings ..................................................................................................................... 339
Entering the Address of the E-Mail Sender ..................................................................... 339
Setting the IP Address of the Outgoing Mail Server ........................................................ 340
Configuring the Outgoing Mail Server Port...................................................................... 340
Setting the Type of Authentication................................................................................... 341
Entering the Username for the Outgoing Mail Server...................................................... 342
Entering a Password for the Outgoing Mail Server ......................................................... 343
Switching Encryption On/Off............................................................................................ 344
E-Mail Internationalisation.................................................................................................... 346
Language Templates ....................................................................................................... 346
Reading a Language Template........................................................................................ 346
Configuring a Language Template................................................................................... 347
Importing a Language Template ...................................................................................... 348
Exporting a Language Template...................................................................................... 349
Configuring the Language ............................................................................................... 350
Importing a Logo.............................................................................................................. 350
Remote Access .................................................................................................................... 352
Remote Access Variants.................................................................................................. 352
Configuring Remote Access ............................................................................................ 353
Switching Remote Access On/Off.................................................................................... 353
Entering the PIN for Remote Access............................................................................... 354
Entering a Quick Remote Access Number ...................................................................... 355
Performing Remote Access............................................................................................. 357
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Remote Access ...................................... 358
Answering Machine List ....................................................................................................... 362
Opening the Answering Machine List .............................................................................. 362
Listening to Recordings (Messages, Voice Memos and Call Recordings) ...................... 364
Forwarding Recordings (Messages, Voice Memos and Call Recordings) by E-Mail....... 365
Dialling from the Answering Machine List........................................................................ 366
Deleting Recordings (Messages, Voice Memos and Call Recordings) ........................... 367
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Answering Machine List ................... 367
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 11
Table of Contents
Announcements ................................................................................................................... 371
Changing the Language for the Default Announcement ................................................. 371
Uploading Language Files............................................................................................... 372
Uploading an Announcement .......................................................................................... 372
Changing an Announcement Name ................................................................................ 373
Recording an Announcement .......................................................................................... 375
Switching an Announcement On or Off ........................................................................... 376
Deleting an Announcement ............................................................................................. 376
Voice Memos........................................................................................................................ 378
Recording Memos ........................................................................................................... 378
Listening to Voice Memos................................................................................................ 379
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Recording Voice Memos ........................ 379
E-Mail and Instant Messaging ........................................................................................... 383
E-Mail Account ..................................................................................................................... 384
Creating an E-Mail Account............................................................................................. 384
Configuring an E-Mail Account ........................................................................................ 386
Removing (Deleting) an E-Mail Account.......................................................................... 387
E-Mail ................................................................................................................................... 388
Reading and Replying to E-Mail ...................................................................................... 388
Writing and Sending E-Mails ........................................................................................... 389
Instant Messaging ................................................................................................................ 391
Configuring the Instant Messaging App........................................................................... 391
Reading and Replying to an Instant Message................................................................. 392
Writing and Sending an Instant Message........................................................................ 392
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX ............................................................................................. 394
Voice Mailbox ....................................................................................................................... 395
Basic Settings....................................................................................................................... 396
Switching Automatic Playback On/Off ............................................................................. 396
Switching Call Information On/Off.................................................................................... 397
Switching the Separator Tone On/Off .............................................................................. 398
Automatic Operation............................................................................................................. 400
Switching On Automatic Operation.................................................................................. 400
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Automatic Operation .............................. 401
Readiness ............................................................................................................................ 404
Switching the Readiness On/Off...................................................................................... 404
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Readiness .............................................. 405
12 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Table of Contents
Substitute Function............................................................................................................... 409
Switching the Substitute Function On/Off........................................................................ 409
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Substitute Function .......................... 410
Message Forwarding............................................................................................................ 414
Switching Message Forwarding On/Off ........................................................................... 414
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Message Forwarding.............................. 415
Notification by E-Mail............................................................................................................ 419
Switching Notification by E-Mail On/Off........................................................................... 419
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Notification by E-Mail ............................. 420
Remote Access .................................................................................................................... 424
Performing Remote Access............................................................................................. 424
Switching Remote Access On/Off.................................................................................... 425
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Remote Access ...................................... 426
Message List ........................................................................................................................ 430
Opening the Message List of a Voice Mailbox................................................................. 430
Opening the Message List of a Fax Box.......................................................................... 432
Listening to Messages..................................................................................................... 434
Distributing Messages ..................................................................................................... 435
Dialling from the Message List ........................................................................................ 436
Deleting Messages from the Message List...................................................................... 436
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Opening a Message List ........................ 437
Announcements ................................................................................................................... 441
Recording an Announcement .......................................................................................... 441
Switching Your Own Announcement On/Off.................................................................... 442
Deleting an Existing Announcement................................................................................ 443
Voice Memos........................................................................................................................ 444
Recording Memos ........................................................................................................... 444
Listening to Voice Memos................................................................................................ 445
Distributing Voice Memos ................................................................................................ 445
Deleting Voice Memos..................................................................................................... 446
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Recording Voice Memos ........................ 447
Archive ................................................................................................................................. 450
Moving a Message into an Archive.................................................................................. 450
Opening an Archive ......................................................................................................... 450
Deleting Messages from the Archive............................................................................... 451
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 13
Table of Contents
Settings ............................................................................................................................... 452
Providers and PBXs ............................................................................................................. 453
New Provider/PBX........................................................................................................... 454
Deleting a Provider/PBX.................................................................................................. 455
Registering New Accounts............................................................................................... 456
Entering a Name for the Provider/PBX ............................................................................ 456
Configuring the VoIP Provider or PBX Type .................................................................... 457
Configuring a Domain...................................................................................................... 458
Configuring the Registrar................................................................................................. 459
Configuring the Outbound Proxy .................................................................................... 461
Configuring the SIP Port ................................................................................................. 463
Configuring the SIP Session Timer.................................................................................. 464
Configuring the SIP Transport Protocol ........................................................................... 466
Configuring SIPS and Switching It On/Off ....................................................................... 467
Configuring NAT Traversal .............................................................................................. 469
Configuring the STUN Server ......................................................................................... 472
Configuring NAT Keep Alive ............................................................................................ 474
Configuring Codecs ........................................................................................................ 475
Switching Music On Hold On/Off ..................................................................................... 476
Configuring DTMF Signalling........................................................................................... 478
Configuring the Jitter Buffer............................................................................................. 479
Configuring SRTP............................................................................................................ 480
Switching the Use of Exchange Line Numbers On/Off.................................................... 482
Entering Exchange Line Access Numbers ...................................................................... 483
Entering Keypad Sequences ........................................................................................... 485
Configuring the Evaluation of Incoming SIP Messages................................................... 487
Configuring the Presentation of Subscriber Numbers (Outgoing) ................................... 491
Configuring the Network Interface Type .......................................................................... 495
14 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Table of Contents
Accounts............................................................................................................................... 497
Creating an Account ....................................................................................................... 497
Deleting an Account ....................................................................................................... 499
Registering an Account ................................................................................................... 500
Enabling/Disabling Use of an Account ............................................................................ 501
Entering an Account Name.............................................................................................. 502
Selecting a Provider/PBX ................................................................................................ 503
Enabling/Disabling Use as a System Telephone ............................................................. 504
Enabling Use as the Default Account .............................................................................. 507
Entering a User Name for the Account............................................................................ 508
Entering a Password for the Account .............................................................................. 509
Entering an Authentication ID .......................................................................................... 511
Entering the Country and Local Area Code..................................................................... 512
Configuring the Connection Type .................................................................................... 514
Entering a DDI Main Number .......................................................................................... 515
Entering Telephone Numbers .......................................................................................... 516
Creating a BLF Resource List Subscription..................................................................... 519
Configuring the Voice Mailbox (SIP Account).................................................................. 521
Bluetooth (only COMfortel 3600 IP) ..................................................................................... 525
Switching Bluetooth On/Off and Configuring It ................................................................ 525
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Bluetooth ................................................ 526
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 15
Table of Contents
Network ................................................................................................................................ 529
Switching the DHCP Client On/Off .................................................................................. 529
Configuring the Telephone's IP Address Manually .......................................................... 530
Configuring the Subnet Mask .......................................................................................... 530
Configuring a Gateway .................................................................................................... 531
Configuring the DNS Server ............................................................................................ 532
Configuring an HTTP Proxy............................................................................................. 533
Switching DiffServ On/Off ................................................................................................ 535
Configuring the RTP Port................................................................................................. 536
VLAN ............................................................................................................................... 538
Virtual Local Area Network settings................................................................................. 538
Switching the VLAN On/Off and Configuring It ................................................................ 539
Switching the VLAN Gateway On/Off and Configuring It................................................. 540
VPN ................................................................................................................................. 542
Saving the OpenVPN Configuration File in the Telephone.............................................. 542
Saving OpenVPN Certificates in the Telephone .............................................................. 543
Switching OpenVPN On/Off............................................................................................. 543
Opening the OpenVPN Log File ...................................................................................... 544
Deleting the OpenVPN Configuration File ....................................................................... 545
Deleting OpenVPN Certificates ....................................................................................... 546
IP Blacklist and Whitelist as Protection Against Attacks from the Internet ...................... 547
Switching IP Blacklist and Whitelist On/Off...................................................................... 547
Viewing and Deleting IP Restrictions............................................................................... 548
Configuring an IP Whitelist .............................................................................................. 549
Sound................................................................................................................................... 552
Setting the Volume .......................................................................................................... 552
Setting a Default Ringtone............................................................................................... 553
Setting a Notification Ringtone ........................................................................................ 554
Switching Touch Sounds On/Off...................................................................................... 554
Setting the Headset Microphone Gain............................................................................. 555
Setting Receiver Microphone Gain.................................................................................. 555
Switching Headset Ringing On/Off .................................................................................. 556
Call Differentiation ........................................................................................................... 557
Setting a Call Type-Dependent Ringtone ........................................................................ 558
Setting a Group-Dependent Ringtone ............................................................................. 559
Switching the Ringtone On/Off ........................................................................................ 560
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Ringtone .......................................... 560
Switching Silence on User Proximity On/Off (only COMfortel 3600 IP)........................... 563
16 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Table of Contents
Display and LEDs................................................................................................................. 564
Setting the Brightness of the Display............................................................................... 564
Configuring the Wallpaper ............................................................................................... 565
Idle State (Sleep) and Power Save Mode........................................................................ 566
Configuring the Idle State (Sleep).................................................................................... 566
Configuring the Power Save Mode.................................................................................. 567
Switching Configuration-Dependent Idle State (Sleep) On/Off........................................ 568
Enabling/Disabling Automated Switching Off of the Display in Power Save Mode ......... 569
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Idle State (Sleep).............................. 570
Switching Off the Idle State (Sleep)................................................................................. 573
Configuring Screen Candy .............................................................................................. 573
Setting the Font Size ....................................................................................................... 574
Configuring the Display Profile ........................................................................................ 574
Setting the Message Key LED......................................................................................... 574
Configuring the Display LED (only COMfortel 1400 IP and COMfortel 3600 IP)............. 576
Setting the Sensitivity of the Proximity Sensors (only COMfortel 3600 IP)...................... 577
Configuring the Display ................................................................................................... 578
Apps ..................................................................................................................................... 579
Managing Apps................................................................................................................ 579
Managing Running Services............................................................................................ 579
Managing Memory Use ................................................................................................... 580
Emergency Numbers............................................................................................................ 582
Configuring Emergency Call Numbers ............................................................................ 582
Location................................................................................................................................ 584
Configuring the Location.................................................................................................. 584
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 17
Table of Contents
IP Camera ............................................................................................................................ 586
Configuring an IP Camera ............................................................................................... 586
Deleting an IP Camera .................................................................................................... 587
Entering an IP Camera Name ......................................................................................... 588
Configuring the IP Address of an IP Camera .................................................................. 589
Switching Full Screen Mode On/Off................................................................................. 590
Configuring Picture Scaling ............................................................................................. 591
Switching Picture Centring On/Off ................................................................................... 592
Configuring the Image Frequency ................................................................................... 593
Entering a User Name for the IP Camera........................................................................ 594
Entering a Password for the IP Camera .......................................................................... 595
Switching Increased Security On/Off............................................................................... 595
Configuring the IP Camera Control ................................................................................. 596
Configuring Motion Detection and Switching It On/Off .................................................... 599
Configuring a Link Between an IP Camera and a Contact .............................................. 600
Configuring the Function Key for an IP Camera.............................................................. 601
Permissions.......................................................................................................................... 604
Configuring Permissions for Settings .............................................................................. 604
Configuring Permissions for Functions............................................................................ 605
Security ................................................................................................................................ 607
Configuring Call Logging and Switching It On/Off ........................................................... 607
Screen Lock..................................................................................................................... 608
Entering a Password/PIN for the Screen Lock ................................................................ 609
Configuring the Automatic Screen Lock .......................................................................... 610
Disabling the Screen Lock............................................................................................... 610
Making Passwords Visible ............................................................................................... 610
Device Administrators...................................................................................................... 611
Permitting the Installation of Apps of Unknown Origin..................................................... 611
Trusted Credentials ......................................................................................................... 613
Installing from SD Card.................................................................................................... 613
Deleting Credentials ........................................................................................................ 614
Language and Input ............................................................................................................. 615
Configuring the Language on the Telephone .................................................................. 615
Setting up a Dictionary .................................................................................................... 616
Onscreen Keyboard Settings........................................................................................... 616
18 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Table of Contents
App Accounts ....................................................................................................................... 618
Adding an Account .......................................................................................................... 618
Deleting an Account ........................................................................................................ 619
Switching Synchronisation of an Account on/off.............................................................. 619
Synchronising an Account Manually................................................................................ 620
Date and Time...................................................................................................................... 622
Setting the Date and Time Manually................................................................................ 622
Switching Automatic Update of the Phone Time over the Network On/Off...................... 624
Configuring the Time Zone .............................................................................................. 625
Switching 24-hour Format On/Off ................................................................................... 625
Configuring the Date Format .......................................................................................... 626
Telephone Information.......................................................................................................... 628
Displaying Telephone Information ................................................................................... 628
Service and Maintenance .................................................................................................. 629
Backup and Reset................................................................................................................ 630
Creating a Backup ........................................................................................................... 630
Saving a Backup to the Telephone .................................................................................. 631
Resetting to Factory Settings .......................................................................................... 632
Update and Provisioning ...................................................................................................... 634
Update and Provisioning Variants.................................................................................... 634
Triggering a Manual Update ............................................................................................ 635
Configuring the Schedule for Updates and Provisioning ................................................. 637
Switching Automatic Provisioning On/Off ........................................................................ 638
Switching Provisioning with DHCP Data On/Off.............................................................. 640
Switching Provisioning via Redirect Server On/Off.......................................................... 641
Entering the Address of the Provisioning Server............................................................. 642
Triggering a Provisioning Test ......................................................................................... 643
Entering the Address of the Update Server..................................................................... 644
Configuring Automatic Update via the Update Server..................................................... 645
Triggering an Update Test ............................................................................................... 647
Restoring Previous Firmware .......................................................................................... 649
Configuration via SIP Messages ..................................................................................... 650
Switching Configuration via SIP Messages On/Off.......................................................... 650
Configuring a Whitelist for Configuration via SIP Messages ........................................... 651
Storage (SD Card Memory).................................................................................................. 653
Removing and Mounting an SD card............................................................................... 653
Formatting an SD card .................................................................................................... 653
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 19
Table of Contents
Shutting Down and Restarting the Telephone ...................................................................... 655
Extending the Telephone Functionality................................................................................. 656
Purchasing and Activating Extra Functions in the Upgrade Center................................. 656
Activating Extra Functions ............................................................................................... 660
Service Data......................................................................................................................... 662
Creating a Service Data Backup...................................................................................... 662
Logging the Network Data Stream................................................................................... 662
Index.................................................................................................................................... 664
20 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Important Information
Important Information
This section contains information that is necessary for you to operate your equipment safely.
Before you put the telephone into operation, it is essential that you read the safety information
described here and become familiar with how to use the device properly, and also the technical
data.
Topics
Symbols and Signal Words Used in this Document (page 21)
Safety Information (page 22)
Proper Use (page 24)
Product Details (page 25)
Technical Data (page 26)
Scope of Delivery (page 31)
Minimun Requirements PC (page 32)
Copyright and Trademarks (page 33)
Environmental Tips (page 34)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 21
Important Information
Symbols and Signal Words Used in this Document
Symbols and Signal Words Used in this
Document
The meanings of symbols and signal words are described below:
Warning:
This symbol warns of personal injury, for example, caused by hazardous
electrical voltage.
Caution:
This symbol warns of material damage.
Important:
Indicates possible application errors and circumstances which may result in
restricted functionality or interruptions to operation.
Note:
Indicates supplementary notes.
22 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Important Information
Safety Information
Safety Information
Please note the basic safety information below.
Warning: Improper handling of the device can result in life-threatening
electrical shock, or damage or destroy the device:
Read the instructions for the device and keep them for future reference.
Warning: Liquid that penetrates the casing can cause life-threatening
electric shocks and damage to, or destruction of, the system telephone.
Only operate the telephone in closed, dry rooms.
Only clean the casing of the device with a slightly damp cloth or an anti-
static cloth.
Warning: Damaged connecting cables, or damage to the casing or the
device, can cause life-threatening electrical shocks.
Only connect the device's connecting cable with the sockets that are
designed for that purpose.
Have damaged connecting cables replaced immediately.
Only use original accessories and original replacement parts.
Contract a professional to complete any necessary repairs without delay.
Please contact your qualified electrician or the manufacturer directly.
Do not touch the contact points with pointed, metallic or damp objects.
Do not carry the device by its connection cables.
Use the cable channels at the bottom of the telephone to reduce strain.
Warning: Power surges, which may occur during electrical storms, can
cause life-threatening electric shocks, or damage or destroy the devices.
Do not connect or disconnect power cables during an electrical storm.
Arrange for a qualified electrician to lay all the cables inside the building.
Protect the devices by installing over voltage protection.
Warning: When using Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) electrical circuits, there is
a risk of electric shock if you create connections with uninsulated, exposed
metal contacts, conductors, or terminal clamps.
Avoid creating connections of this kind unless the exposed metal
contacts are installed in areas with restricted access.
A restricted access area can be only be accessed by using a special
tool, lock and key or other means of security. In addition, persons who
have been granted access to these areas will have been explicitly
informed of these hazards.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 23
Important Information
Safety Information
Warning: Non-approved headsets, external speakers , or receivers may
cause hearing damage or interfere with the voice connection.
Only use this system telephone with approved accessories with the CE
mark.
Warning: The telephone receiver creates a weak magnetic field, which may
attract small magnetic objects, such as needles and paper clips.
To avoid injuries, do not put down the receiver close to such objects.
Caution: Inappropriate cleaning or operation can damage or destroy the
touch screen.
Keep the display clean. To do this, use the cloth supplied.
To operate the telephone, use your fingers or fingernails. Under no
circumstance use ballpoint pens, pencils, or other pointed objects on the
touch screen.
Never apply force or excessive pressure when touching the touch screen.
24 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Important Information
Proper Use
Proper Use
Important:
The COMfortel 1400 IP, COMfortel 2600 IP and COMfortel 3600 IP are VoIP telephones which
can be run on a local network (LAN), either as Auerswald VoIP system telephones and/or as
standard VoIP telephones.
To operate this as an Auerswald system telephone, you require one of the following Auerswald
PBXs:
COMpact 4000
COMpact 5000/R (for COMfortel 3600 IP as of firmware version 6.4D)
COMpact 5010 VoIP (as of firmware version 4.2F)
COMpact 5010 VoIP (as of firmware version 4.2F)
COMmander 6000/R/RX (for COMfortel 2600 IP as of firmware version 6.0C, for COMfortel
3600 IP as of firmware version 6.4D)
COMmander Basic.2/19" (as of firmware version 4.2F)
COMmander Business/19" (as of firmware version 4.2F)
The COMfortel 1400/2600/3600 IP can also be used as a standard VoIP telephone in the
following Auerswald PBXs:
COMpact 3000 analog/ISDN/VoIP
The telephones are intended for use in closed, dry rooms.
Auerswald products are not designed, manufactured, or intended for use or
resale, in environments that require fail-safe performance, such as in the
operation of life-support systems and/or nuclear facilities. Our products can
only be used for these purposes with prior written permission from
Auerswald in each individual case.
Improper use may cause, for example, functional restrictions or inter-
ference, the destruction of the device or, in a worst case scenario, personal
injury.
If you are still uncertain about how to use the product properly after
reading the section below, please contact your specialised dealer.
Read the instructions for the device and keep them for future reference.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 25
Important Information
Product Details
Product Details
The telephones have a display with touch function. They are operated on the basis of the
Android 4.3 operating system. Alternatively the telephones can be operated using keys.
The telephones provide 10 (COMfortel 1400 IP) or 15 (COMfortel 2600/3600 IP) program-
mable function keys with LED. This keys can each be defined with two functions (on two levels).
In addition, touch function keys can be created on the display and can each be defined with
one function.
Up to three COMfortel Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of
delivery) can be attached to the COMfortel 2600/3600 IP to add programmable function keys.
The modules are mounted on the right-hand side of the telephone. On each module 30
programmable function keys with LED are available.
There are three different ways to configure the telephone: on the telephone's own display, using
the configuration manager, or automatically via a provisioning server. The configuration
manager is accessible via the integrated web server in the telephone. The PC that is required
in this case must either be connected directly to a network port on the telephone, or must be
located in the same network. If you configure the telephone via a provisioning server, the
telephone adopts the configuration data directly from a file that has previously been created
and distributed over the network.
The telephones are corded. They enable you to make calls not only using the connected
receiver but also via the integrated loud speakers (hands-free calling). Another option is to
connect a headset (not included in the scope of delivery). The COMfortel 1400 IP supports the
use of corded headsets. The COMfortel 2600/3600 IP supports the use of corded headsets and
cordless headsets with a DHSG interface, e.g. from Auerswald, Jabra or Plantronics.
The COMfortel 3600 IP provides an integrated answering machine. The COMfortel 2600 IP
can be extended with an answering machine by plugging in an SD/SDHC card. The COMfortel
1400 IP can be extended with an answering machine by plugging in a Micro SD/SDHC card
and by means of an activation in the Upgrade Center (for a fee).
Important:
Some functions have to be activated for use in the Upgrade Center (see
Service and Maintenance> Extending the Telephone section).
Note: Accessories and service components can be purchased in specialist
shops or from the distriCOM online store at www.districom.de. (Deliveries
within Germany and Austria only.)
Insertion of an external SD card is not relevant for the answering machine
of the COMfortel 3600 IP.
26 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Important Information
Technical Data
Technical Data
Technical Data for the Telephone for COMfortel 1400IP
Technical Data for the Telephone for COMfortel 2600IP
Operating voltage Supply via the Ethernet port via PoE according to
IEEE 802.3af (if the network does not support PoE, with PoE
Injector available as an accessory)
PoE class 0 (no identification) or 2 (identification on the typeplate)
Power consumption Min. 2.4 W, max. 4.1 W
System connection 10/100 Base Tx Ethernet
Memory MicroSD/SDHC card, up to 8 GB (not in the package)
Displays 14 LEDs, 11 thereof polychromatic; 3.5" TFT colour display,
320 x 240 pixels, background lighting
User elements Keypad, 13 permanently assigned function keys, colour
display with touch function, directional pad, 10 program-
mable function keys (additional touch function keys on the
display
Receiver Wideband Audio, electret microphone, receiver with dynamic
loudspeaker, hearing aid-compatible
Loudspeakers 8 Ohm, diameter 54 mm
Headset Separate interface for dynamic headsets
Hook switch Magnetic switch contact
Casing Plastic material
Colours Black
Dimensions (W x H x D) 223 mm x 148/158/168 mm x 185 mm
Weight Approx. 980 g
Ambient temperature 0 to 40 °C
Safety CE
Operating voltage Supply via the Ethernet port via PoE according to
IEEE 802.3af (if the network does not support PoE, with PoE
Injector available as an accessory)
PoE class 0 (no identification) or 2 (identification on the typeplate)
Power consumption Min. 2.4 W, max. 4.1 W (COMfortel Xtension300: +0.6 W)
System connection 10/100 Base Tx Ethernet
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 27
Important Information
Technical Data
Technical Data for the Telephone for COMfortel 3600IP
2. Ethernet port 10/100 Base Tx Ethernet
Memory SD/SDHC card, max. 16 GB (not in the package)
Headset Separate interface for dynamic headsets, also with DHSG
support)
Displays 18 LEDs, 15 of them polychromatic ;4.3-inch TFT colour
display, 480 x 272 pixels, background lighting
COMfortel Xtension300: 30 LEDs, polychromatic
User elements Keypad, 12 permanently assigned function keys, colour
display with touch function, 5-way control element, 15
programmable function keys with function keys on the
display
COMfortel Xtension300: 30 programmable function keys
Receiver Wideband Audio, electret microphone, receiver with dynamic
loudspeaker, hearing aid-compatible
Loudspeakers 8 Ohm, diameter 54 mm
Hook switch Magnetic switch contact
Casing Plastic material
Colours White, black
Dimensions (W x H x D) 275 mm x 128/150/170 mm x 210 mm
COMfortel Xtension300: 120 mm x 68/90/110 mm x 210 mm
Weight Approx1050 g
COMfortel Xtension300: 310 g
Ambient temperature 0 to 40 °C
Safety CE
VoIP codecs G.711, G.722, iLBC
Operating voltage Suply via wall-mounted power supply 230 VAC; +/- 10 %; 50-
60 Hz; 170 mA or via Ethernet port via PoE according to
IEEE 802.3af
PoE class 0
Wall-mounted power supply
plug
Type no. FW7577/EU/40, 40 V, 350 mA
Power consumption Min. 3.1 W, max. 14.7 W (COMfortel Xtension300: + 0.6 W)
System connection 10/100/1000 MBit Ethernet
2. Ethernet port 10/100/1000 MBit Ethernet
28 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Important Information
Technical Data
USB interface 2 x USB host (1x preassigned to Bluetooth dongle)
Bleutooth Bluetooth 2.1 + EDR, hearing aid-compatible
Memory 4 GB flash eMMC, 1024 MB DDR3 RAM with 64-Bit support;
2 GB answering machine; SD/SDHC card, max. 16 GB (not
in the package)
Headset Separate interface for dynamic headsets, also with DHSG
support)
Displays 19 LEDs, 16 of them polychromatic ; 5-inch TFT colour
display, 800 x 480 pixels, background lighting
COMfortel Xtension300: 30 LEDs, polychromatic
User elements Keypad, 12 permanently assigned function keys, colour
display with touch function, 5-way control element, 15
programmable function keys with touch function keys on the
display
COMfortel Xtension300: 30 programmable function keys
Receiver Wideband Audio, electret microphone, receiver with dynamic
loudspeaker, hearing aid-compatible
Loudspeakers 8 Ohm, diameter 54 mm
Hook switch Magnetic switch contact
Casing Plastic material
Colours Black
Dimensions (W x H x D) 275 mm x 128/150/170 mm x 210 mm
COMfortel Xtension300: 120 mm x 68/90/110 mm x 210 mm
Weight Approx. 1070 g
COMfortel Xtension300: approx. 310 g
Ambient temperature 0 to 40 °C
Safety CE
VoIP codecs G.711, G.722, iLBC
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 29
Important Information
Technical Data
Maximum number of telephones on Auerswald PBXs
* Additional subscribers per VoIP channel are possible with over-commitment
Technical Data for Headset Connections
Headset Socket Pinout on COMfortel 1400 IP:
Headset Socket Pinout on COMfortel 2600 IP and COMfortel 3600 IP:
PBX Max. number of telephones when the PBX is fully
extended
COMpact 3000 series 4
COMpact 4000 16
COMpact 5010 VoIP 4
COMpact 5020 VoIP 8
COMpact 5000/R 16 (32)*
COMmander 6000/R/RX 64 (112)*
Microphone current
consumption
Max. 0.5 mA
Microphone sensitivity 45 dB
Loudspeaker impedance 150 Ohm
Loudspeaker sensitivity at
1kHz
19.5 +/- 3 dBPa/V
Sound pressure limit 24 dBPa
1 Microphone -
2 Loudspeaker -
3 Loudspeaker +
4 Microphone +
1DHSG BUS_IN
2DHSG GND
3 Microphone -
4 Loudspeaker -
5 Loudspeaker +
6 Microphone +
30 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Important Information
Technical Data
7DHSG + 3.3V
8DHSG BUS_OUT
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 31
Important Information
Scope of Delivery
Scope of Delivery
Telephone
Receiver with spiral cord (RJ-10/RJ-10) for connecting to the telephone
Network cable (RJ-45/RJ-45) to connect to the network
Setup Guide
Quick Guide
"Conditions of Guarantee, Information Service" leaflet
32 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Important Information
Minimun Requirements PC
Minimun Requirements PC
Operating systems (recom-
mended)
Windows 7 32-/64-Bit and Windows 8/8.1 32-/64-Bit
Mac OS X (as of Yosemite)
Linux (as of Kernel 2.6)
Hardware requirements CPU 1 GHz or more
512 MB RAM, 1 GB for Windows7/Windows 8/8.1 2 GB or
more for 64-Bit
Network card (the PC must be equipped with a network
interface card and the required driver has to be installed
SVGA graphics card with a resolution of 1024 x 768 (16 bit
colour depth)
Browser for the configuration
(recommended)
Mozilla Firefox, Google Chrome (current version)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 33
Important Information
Copyright and Trademarks
Copyright and Trademarks
Dissemination and reproduction of these instructions, as well as exploitation and disclosure of
the contents, even in part, is permitted only with our express permission. Compensation will be
demanded for any violations. All rights reserved. © Auerswald GmbH & Co. KG, 38162
Cremlingen, 2015
Android and Google Search are trademarks of Google, Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista and ActiveSync are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the USA and/or other countries.
All other trademarks mentioned are the property of the relevant manufacturer.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson
Licensing.
34 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Important Information
Environmental Tips
Environmental Tips
disposal
If the Auerswald device is taken out of use (retired), make sure that it is properly disposed of.
It must not be disposed of with normal household waste.
Power Consumption
Your Auerswald telephone only uses the power it absolutely requires. Despite this, please read
the following notes about energy-saving measures:
Use power save mode as often as possible.
The SD cards are only needed for data backup. Please remove them from the telephone
when they are not being used.
Additional Environmental Information
You will find our environmental information on the Internet, under www.auerswald.de at
Company > Environment.
To protect the environment, please make sure that the packaging materials
are properly disposed of.
Consult your local governmental authorities for ways to dispose of the
device in a proper and environmentally safe way.
If you would like us to handle disposal, please send the device to us.
We only accept pre-paid shipments.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 35
Introduction to the Telephone
Introduction to the Telephone
This section provides a general overview of the telephone. Here you will find a description of
the keys, displays and connections, and an overview of elements and symbols used on the
Home screen. General operating instructions for adjusting telephone settings are also
included. It also gives an overview of the apps that are installed on the telephone.
Topics
Device Overview (page 36)
Display Elements (page 49)
Operating Instructions (page 56)
Apps (page 60)
36 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Telephone
Device Overview
Buttons and LEDs
Device Overview
The device has a display with touch function and a variety of keys (some with LED). Therefore,
the device may be operated via display and key control.
The COMfortel 1400IP also has a display LED. The display LED shows the operating condition
of the telephone and missed calls, depending on the settings of the LED.
The COMfortel 3600IP is equipped with a display LED and additional sensors which provide
automatic adjustment of the display lighting and gesture control.
Buttons and LEDs
The next figure shows the keys and LEDs on the COMfortel 1400 IP.
A Microphone key with LED
BKeypad
C Contact/telephone book key
D Display LED
E Programmable function keys with LEDs
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 37
Introduction to the Telephone
Device Overview
Buttons and LEDs
F Message key with LED
G Redial list key
H Query key
I Delete key
J Back key
K Directional pad
L Menu key
M Home key
N hook key
OMinus key
PPlus key
Q Loudspeaker key with LED
The next figure shows the keys and LEDs on the COMfortel 2600 IP.
38 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Telephone
Device Overview
Buttons and LEDs
A Microphone key with LED
BKeypad
C Contact/telephone book key
D Programmable function keys with LEDs
E Message key with LED
F Redial list key
G query key
H Back key
I Directional pad
J Menu key
K Home key
L hook key
MMinus key
NPlus key
O Loudspeaker key with LED
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 39
Introduction to the Telephone
Device Overview
Buttons and LEDs
The figure below shows the keys and LEDs on the COMfortel 3600 IP.
A Microphone key with LED
BKeypad
C Proximity sensor
D Display LED
E Brightness sensor
F Contact/telephone book key
G Programmable function keys with LEDs
H Message key with LED
I Redial list key
J Query key
K Back key
L Directional pad
M Menu key
N Home key
40 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Telephone
Device Overview
Buttons and LEDs
O Hook key
PMinus key
QPlus key
R Loudspeaker key with LED
Keypad
Use the keypad to dial telephone numbers and to enter digits and letters. Press the digit keys
one or more times until the required character appears. The assignment is listed in the table
below.
Function Keys
Microphone key with LED
Switches the microphone off (mute) and on again.
The key's LED blinks red as soon as the microphone is switched off.
Loudspeaker key with LED
Switches the speaker on during a call.
Press the key twice to switch on hands-free calling (speakerphone).
Key Assignment
11-/@+
2 abc2ABC ä Ä
3 def3DEF
4 ghi4GHI
5jkl5JKL
6 mno6MNOöÖ
7pqrs7PQRSß
8 tuv8TUVüÜ
9 wxyz9WXYZ
0 Space.,0:’“?¿!¡_
* * ( ) [ ] < = > « » ^ ´ ` ~ \\\\\\\{ \\\\\\\}
# #%&§£$Euro symbol
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 41
Introduction to the Telephone
Device Overview
Buttons and LEDs
The key's LED lights up in red as soon as loudspeaker listening is switched on.
The key's LED blinks red as soon as hands-free calling is switched on.
Plus key
Increases the volume of the ringer, receiver, or loudspeaker, depending on operating mode.
Minus key
Reduces the volume of the ringer, receiver, or loudspeaker, depending on operating mode.
hook key
Starts/ends headset calls or calls in hands-free calling mode.
Contact/telephone book key
Opens the contacts stored in the telephone.
Message key with LED
Opens the caller list, message list and answering machine list.
Starts the Instant Messaging app.
The key's LED indicates the presence of new (red blinking) or previously viewed
(continuous red) entries.
redial list key
Opens the redial list.
query key
Initiates a query call.
Programmable Function Keys
The basic version of the telephone provides 10 (COMfortel 1400 IP) or 15 (COMfortel 2600/
3600 IP) programmable function keys, which the user simply presses to execute the functions
configured on them. Each function key has a multi-colour LED that indicates its status, based
on its assignment.
42 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Telephone
Device Overview
Buttons and LEDs
Note: In addition to the programmable function keys with LEDs on the right
of the device, you can use widget functions to create up to 10 touch function
keys on the Home screens and the favourites bars.
Up to three COMfortel Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the delivery) can
be attached to the COMfortel 2600/3600 IP to add freely programmable function keys.
Modules are attached to the right-hand side of the telephone. When the maximum number of
modules has been installed, 105 freely programmable function keys are available.
The programmable function keys can each be defined twice (on two levels). You can configure
how to access the second level of the function keys (Shift). Using the Shift key to access the
second set of functions ("2nd level") is always activated. If you would like to use this method,
you must assign the Level 2 function to one of your function keys. The "Double-click for shift"
(300 ms) method can be disabled if it is not required.
Note: The double click for Level 2 can be enabled or disabled either on the
telephone under Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More... >
Function keys or in the configuration manager under Settings > Auerswald
> Function keys.
Menu Key for Opening the Menu
The menu can be accessed via the Menu key.
Use the menu for quick access to notifications and system settings. Depending on from where
it is opened, the menu offers a list of options which are available from there. The following
options are available in the main menu:
Wallpaper
To select a wallpaper for the Home screens from the gallery or collection of wallpapers, press
the Menu key and tap on Wallpaper.
Managing Apps
Select the required app by pressing the Menu key and tapping on Manage Apps. You will then
have access to information and be able to manage the app:
Information: Storage and Cache
Actions: Force stop,Deactivate, Move to SD card and Delete data
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 43
Introduction to the Telephone
Device Overview
Buttons and LEDs
Settings
Press the menu button and tap on Settings to open a selection list in which you can make a
number of different system settings.
Notifications
To open the Notifications window, press the Menu key and tap on Notifications.
Using the Home and Back Keys for Navigation
Home key
Displays the Home screen on the display. Previously started actions will continue in the
background.
Back key
Returns you to the most recently opened screen and ends the current action.
Delete key (only COMfortel 1400 IP)
Delete key
Deletes the last character before the cursor.
Directional Pad
The directional pad helps you navigate on the display and enables you to use keys to operate
the telephone.
Press an arrow key on the directional pad to start key-based operation of the display and to
activate the required elements. Press the OK key on the directional pad to select the activated
element and run its function.
Elements on the screen change their background colour to indicate their state:
light blue: An element is displayed with light blue border if it was selected using the
direction keys.
•grey: The selected element is locked and cannot be selected by pressing the OK button.
44 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Telephone
Device Overview
Display
Display-LED (only COMfortel 1400 IP and COMfortel 3600 IP)
The display LED signals the operational state of the telephone, missed calls and new
messages. You can select differenet settings (see chapter Settings > Display > Configuring the
Display LED (only COMfortel 1400 IP and COMfortel 3600 IP).
Sensors (only COMfortel 3600 IP)
Brightness sensor
If the automatic brightness adjustment function is switched on, the brightness sensor is used
to adjust the display lighting to the brightness of the telephone's surroundings. The user can
choose to either set te required brightness manually or switch to automatic adjustment (see
chapter Settings > Display > Setting the Brightness of the Display).
Proximity sensor
The proximity sensors detect for example user proximity or a motion in front of the telephone.
The sensitivity of the proximity sensors can be set (see chapter Settings > Display > Setting
the Sensitivity of the Proximity Sensor (only COMfortel 3600 IP). This can be used to exit the
power save mode or the ring signal during a call via waving (see chapter Settings > Sound >
Switching Silence on User Proximity On/Off (only COMfortel 2600 IP).
Display
The following image shows the telephone display with an open Home screen.
A Status bar
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 45
Introduction to the Telephone
Device Overview
Display
B Home screen with a free area for adding apps and widgets
C Favourites bar with a free area for adding apps and widgets
D Status Info
ECall log
F Contacts
GApps
HBrowser
Using the Display
Please note the basic safety information below.
The actions listed below are available on the display:
Selecting, Opening, etc.
Tap on the corresponding position on the display briefly with your fingertip (e.g. symbol, button,
list entry).
... to select, open, start, emphasise, mark, or switch on/off.
Caution: Inappropriate cleaning or operation can damage or destroy
the display.
Keep the display clean. To do this, use the cloth supplied.
To operate the telephone, use your fingers or fingernails. Under no
circumstance use ballpoint pens, pencils, or other pointed objects
on the display.
Never apply force or excessive pressure when touching the touch
screen.
Important: Electrostatic discharge or moisture may cause the display
to malfunction.
Avoid contact with other electrical equipment.
Only clean the display with the dry cloth supplied.
Notes:
Remove the protective film from the display before use.
The display reacts most effectively to fingertip control.
The display enters its idle state (sleep) when the telephone is not
used for a certain amount of time.
To bring the display out of the idle state (sleep), press any key.
46 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Telephone
Device Overview
Overview of Connections
Selecting Elements, Opening Settings
Touch and hold the corresponding place on the display (e.g. symbol, button, list entry, free
area on the Home screen).
... as a preparation for moving or deleting elements (apps, shortcuts, widgets).
... for opening additional settings e.g. wallpaper for the Home screens.
Moving and Deleting Elements, Scrolling
Use your fingertip to drag the element up, down, right, or left across the display ...
... to move elements (e.g. to the Home screen, to the Delete symbol).
... to scroll one screen at a time (up/down, right/left).
Fast Scrolling, Scrolling through Web Pages
Swipe quickly with your fingertip to the top, bottom, right, or left...
... to quickly scroll through a list.
... to scroll through the Home screens.
... to scroll through web pages.
Tap on the display with your fingertip ...
... to immediately stop fast scrolling.
In some alphabetically ordered lists (e.g. Contacts) the symbol is displayed on the right. Drag
the symbol upwards or downwards to scroll to the required letter.
Overview of Connections
The next figure shows the connections on the underside of the COMfortel 1400 IP.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 47
Introduction to the Telephone
Device Overview
Overview of Connections
A Receiver socket
B Headset socket
C Micro SD card slot
D Network cable socket (PoE)
E PC socket
The next figure shows the connections on the underside of the COMfortel 2600 IP.
A Network cable socket (PoE)
B PC socket
48 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Telephone
Device Overview
Overview of Connections
CSD card slot
D Headset socket
E Receiver socket
F Socket for key extension module
The next figure shows the connections on the underside of the COMfortel 3600 IP.
A Network cable socket (PoE)
B PC socket
Note: The upper USB port, as seen from the bottom side of the telephone, is
exclusively intended for the Bluetooth dongle.
C USB socket
D SD/SDHC card slot
E Headset socket
F Receiver socket
G Socket for key extension module
H Power supply socket
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 49
Introduction to the Telephone
Display Elements
Home Screens
Display Elements
The telephone's display has a range of different display elements. The main Home screen, with
the status information widget, is the starting point for using the telephone and can be
customised to suit your particular requirements. The status bar tells the user about the
telephone's status at any time. The notification window, which can also be opened via the
status bar, displays warnings and other information.
Home Screens
The main Home screen is displayed after the telephone starts up, and the user presses any
key. This Home screen is the starting point for operating the telephone service using the
display. A number of useful display elements, for example the status information widget, are
already provided.
To display a different Home screen, use your fingertip to drag the Home screen to the right or
to the left.
A total of five Home screens are available. They are arranged side by side.
You can add apps and widgets to customise your Home screens to suit your own particular
requirements.
If you have exited a Home screen by using the telephone, you can use the navigation buttons
(Home and Back keys) to return to it at any time.
Apps and Widgets on the Home Screens
When the telephone is supplied, some apps and widgets are already present on the main
Home screen and the left-hand favourites bar.
Status Info
The Status Info widget displays information (such as the name of the telephone on the default
account, the name of the default account, missed calls) and warnings (such as account errors,
muted ringtone).
Call log
Tap on the symbol to open the call log
50 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Telephone
Display Elements
Home Screens
Contacts
Tap on the symbol to open the contact list.
Apps
Tap on the symbol to open an overview of all the apps and widgets installed on the telephone.
Browser
Tap on the symbol to open the browser so you can access the Internet.
Adding Apps and Widgets
You can add apps and widgets to customise your Home screens to suit your own particular
requirements.
Notes:
The apps and widgets you add to the Home screens are only displayed on
the Home screen to which they were added.
Apps and widgets which you add to the favourite bars are displayed on
every Home screen.
You can add apps as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps.
2. If necessary, use your fingertip to drag the display to the right to search an app or a
widget.
Note: Tap on APPS or WIDGETS to move quickly between the screens.
3. Touch and hold down the app or the widget.
Each Home screen appears in a separate window.
4. Drag the app or the widget to the required window and then release it.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 51
Introduction to the Telephone
Display Elements
Home Screens
Arranging or Deleting Apps and Widgets
To keep the Home screens clear and easy to read, you can arrange or delete the apps and
widgets.
You can move or delete an app or widget as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Touch and hold the symbol that you would like to move or delete.
The symbol is displayed at the top of the display.
2. Continue to hold the symbol and ...
•Move: ... drag the symbol to the required location on the Home screen.
Release the symbol.
Move to another Home screen: ... drag the symbol to the screen margin to toggle
between the Home screens.
Release the symbol when you reach the Home screen you want.
Create folders: ... quickly drag the symbol to another symbol on the Home
screen.
Release the symbol. To rename a folder, tap on its name.
Delete: ... drag the symbol to the symbol at the top of the Home screen. The
symbol changes to red.
Release the symbol.
Touch Function Keys on the Home Screens
Touch function keys
In addition to the programmable function keys with LEDs on the right of the device, you can use
the Functions widget to create up to 10 touch function keys on the Home screens and the
favourites bars.
Notes:
The touch function keys you add to the Home screens are only displayed on
the Home screen to which they were added.
52 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Telephone
Display Elements
Home Screens
The touch function keys you add to the favourites bars are displayed on
every Home screen.
The function key assignment option opens automatically when you add the Functions widget
to a Home screen or a favourites bar. You will find more detailed information about setting up
and using function keys in the Functions> Function name > Set up and use function key
section.
After a touch function key has been assigned, a symbol will appear to identify the selected
function. A symbol that is crossed out indicates a function that has been disabled. A luminous,
coloured dot on the right under the symbol represents a luminous LED. An animated, coloured
dot to the right below the symbol represents a blinking LED.
Tap on the function symbol to run the stored function.
Important: Some functions are only available when used on a PBX. These
functions must first be configured in the PBX. It may be necessary to grant
permission to use the functions.
The following functions can be assigned to the touch function keys:
Symbol Function
TAM announcement
TAM readiness
TAM e-mail
TAM remote access
TAM automatic call recording
TAM open
Call waiting
Do-not-disturb
Follow-me
Shared line
Group
Group function off
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 53
Introduction to the Telephone
Display Elements
Home Screens
Group state
Headset
InterCom permission
Ringtone
Configuration
MWI
Pick-up
Relays
Calling Line Identity Restriction
Call forwarding, external telephone number
Call fwd. (scr.)
Call forward subscriber (scr.) in PBX
Call fwd. (scr.), deactivate all
Announcement before answering
Door function
URL
VMB automatic mode
VMB readiness
VMB e-mail
VMB remote access
VMB open
VMB substitute
Symbol Function
54 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Telephone
Display Elements
Status Bar
Status Bar
The status bar at the top of the Home screen indicates the state of the telephone at any time.
Left Side and Notification Bar
On the left of the status bar, symbols for current notifications are displayed. In addition to the
symbols, an explanation text is displayed in the notification bar.
Touch and hold the status bar and drag it downwards to open it up. Press the
Backspace key or drag the notification bar upwards to close it again.
Note: If you were having a telephone conversation and, for example pressed
the Home key to switch to the Home screen, you can tap the infor-
mation text in the notification bar to return to displaying your on-going conver-
sation.
Middle
The calendar week, the date stored in the telephone, and the time are displayed in the middle
of the status bar.
Calendar week: CW and week number, e.g. CW 9
Date: Abbreviation of the weekday, day in the D format and abbreviation of the name of the
month, e.g.Fri. 2. Mar
Time: Format: hh:mm, e.g.11:20
Note: You can set the date and time of the telephone under Apps >
Settings > System > Date & Time.
Right side
The following system symbols are displayed on the right of the status bar:
VMB message fwd.
Speed dialling
Symbol Function
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 55
Introduction to the Telephone
Display Elements
Status Info
Status Info
By default, the status info widget is displayed on the Home screen. It
displays information (such as the name of the telephone on the default account, the name of
the default account, missed calls) and warnings (such as account errors, muted ringtone).
Symbol Function
Account error: No account or default account not registered.
Answering machine / voice mailbox switched on
Answering machine full
Do-not-disturb enabled
Call forwarding enabled
Headset operation enabled
ringtone off
Network error
Power supply error: Insufficient power supply for key extension modules (only
COMfortel 2600/3600 IP)
Screen lock enabled
Alarm enabled
Show additional symbols
56 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Telephone
Operating Instructions
Android Keyboard (Screen Keyboard)
Operating Instructions
The operating instructions for the telephone describe how you input text via the Android
keyboard, the entry fields and selection fields as well as the lists you need to use the telephone.
Android Keyboard (Screen Keyboard)
Use the screen keyboard to can enter text. Some apps open the keyboard automatically. In
other apps, you can call the keyboard by tapping on the place where you want to enter the text.
A Touch and hold to enter alternative letters or characters
B Tap to enter letters
C Touch and hold to display input and keyboard settings
D Tap to enter a suggestion
Note: Alternatively you can use the keypad to enter letters. Press a key on
the keypad repeatedly to display a series of characters available with that
key. The last character to be displayed is the one that is inserted.
Moving the Insertion Point
Tap on the place where you would like to enter the text. The insertion point blinks in the new
position and an arrow is displayed under it. Drag the arrow to move the insertion point.
Selecting Text
Touch and hold or tap twice on the text. The next word is highlighted and an arrow appears
at both ends of the selection. Drag the arrows to change the selection. The arrow disap-
pears after a short time. Touch the text once more to display it again.
Deleting Text
Tap on to delete the selected text or characters before the insertion point.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 57
Introduction to the Telephone
Operating Instructions
Android Keyboard (Screen Keyboard)
Entering Capital Letters
Tap once on the "shift key" to write a letter as a capital letter. Once you have entered
the letter, lower case letters are used again.
Activating the Caps Lock Key
Tap twice on the "shift key" or touch and hold down the "shift key", so that the symbol
changes to . Touch the shift key again to switch back to lower case letters.
Cutting, Copying, Pasting
Select the text you want to edit. Tap on Edit and select one of the following options:
Select all: Selects the entire text in the entry field.
–Cut: Cuts the selected text.
Copy: Copies the selected text.
Paste: Inserts the copied text at the insertion mark.
Entering Numbers and Special Characters
Tap on ?123 to input numbers and special characters. To enter other special characters, tap
on =\<. Tap on ABC to return to inputting letters.
Selecting your Language
Go to Apps > Settings > Personal > Language & input > Keyboard and input
methods > Android keyboard > Input languages to select a number of different languages
for the Android keyboard.
58 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Telephone
Operating Instructions
Entry and Selection Fields
Entry and Selection Fields
element function
An empty entry field normally provides an opportunity for you to enter a
name or number.
Tap on the entry field and enter the text.
Notes:
Any text already present in the entry field is
overwritten by the text you input.
Under Apps > Settings > Personal >
Language & input > Personal dictionary you will
find a dictionary in which you can enter the words you
use frequently. These words can then appear as
suggestions when you are entering text.
To change an existing entry, select the entry you want to edit. Tap on
Edit and select one of the following options:
Select all: Selects the entire text in the entry field.
•Cut: Cuts the selected text.
Copy: Copies the selected text.
Paste: Inserts the copied text at the insertion mark.
To input a network address, tap on the entry field and use the keypad to
enter a network address.
Some functions have list fields, in which you can choose from the
available options. The selected setting is displayed in the list field. Tap
on the list field to display the options.
Some functions have option field,s in which you can choose different
settings. The selected setting is marked by coloured dot.
Tap on an option to activate it. The previous selection is disabled at the
same time.
Use the check boxes to enable or disable the settings and functions. An
empty check box means "off", a symbol (e.g. check, X) in the check box
means "on".
Tap on the check box to enable or disable the setting or function.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 59
Introduction to the Telephone
Operating Instructions
Lists
Lists
Settings and functions are often displayed in the display as lists. Tap on an entry in the list to
select a setting or a function.
Note: If the symbol is shown after a table entry, you can tap on the entry
to open a dialogue.
Sorting function Lists
When a function list is visible you can sort it by pressing the Menu key:
Sort alphabetically: The functions are displayed in alphabetical order.
Sort by group: Some functions are brought together to form function groups. The functions
and function groups are displayed in alphabetical order. Tap on to display the individual
in a functional group so you can select one.
Use the sliders to make infinitely variable settings (e.g. volume). The
position of the slider identifies where the setting is.
Drag the slider to the left to reduce the value. Drag the slider to the right
to increase the value.
Use the toggle button to enable or disable the function.
Drag the toggle button onto "ON" to enable the function.
Drag the toggle button onto "OFF" to disable the function. Alternatively,
tap on "ON" or "OFF" to enable or disable the function.
element function
60 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Telephone
Apps
Setup Assistant
Apps
Apps are application programs which are installed on the telephone. Apps are used to control
functions or set up the telephone.
The telephone is delivered with a variety of preinstalled apps. You can download apps from the
Internet to add new functions to your telephone.
Important: If you install additional apps, the telephone's functionality may be
affected, including loss of use. When the Auerswald service team checks the
telephone, it is reset to its factory settings. This process removes any previ-
ously installed applications and data, so these must then be reinstalled
separately.
Not every available app is compatible with your telephone. Some apps will only have limited
functionality, or cannot be used. This particularly applies to apps which require the following
functions, sensors or networks:
compass
camera
accelerometer
position sensor
temperature sensor
air pressure sensor
humidity sensor
access to the SIM card
SMS functionality
3G/GSM mobile phone network
WLAN/WiFi network
Tap on Apps to display all the apps and widgets installed on the telephone.
Setup Assistant
The setup assistant will start automatically the first time the telephone is used (see Setup
Guide).
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 61
Introduction to the Telephone
Apps
Telephony App
Note: You can also use the Setup assistant whilst you are using the
telephone. Tap on Apps > Settings > Setup assistant, to open
the Setup assistant.
Use the Setup assistant to make the following basic settings:
Inactive or unregistered accounts: A displayed account can be configured as a standard
VoIP or system telephony account (see Setup Guide).
Search for PBXs: You can search the network for Auerswald PBXs that could be used as
an account.
Backup files on the SD card: When necessary, the backup file saved on the SD card can
be saved back to the telephone.
Specify provisioning server: You can enter the URL of a special provisioning server for
automatic configuration with the help of a provisioning file.
New account: You can use profiles to create an account for VoIP providers (see Setup
Guide).
Manual setup: This closes the Setup assistant and opens the Settings app.
Telephony App
You can use the telephony app to make telephone calls. The telephony app starts automatically
when you begin a telephone conversation.
The toolbar and other elements are displayed on the telephone's display.
Elements
Selection window: The selection window opens when you press the Hook key or the
Loudspeaker key, or when the receiver is picked up. In the selection window, you can select
the required VoIP account and a telephone number, or enter them in dial preparation.
Additionally, a contact list (internal or external) is displayed from which you can select the
required subscriber.
Business cards: Any data stored in the contacts for a call partner will be displayed on a
business card when a call is incoming, during call preparation, and during the call itself. The
active business card also contains information about the duration of the call, the account
that was used, and any call forwarding that was completed. The business card of a held call
shows the name of the call partner, the duration of the call, and the hold duration.
Notes:
The element that is associated with the toolbar is active.
62 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Telephone
Apps
Telephony App
Elements have various outline colours: green for the active element, light
blue for an element that requires attention, and grey for an element that is
shown only for information purposes.
Toolbar
The following symbols are displayed for standard functions:
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 63
Introduction to the Telephone
Apps
Telephony App
Symbol Function
Tap on this symbol to end dial preparation.
Tap on this symbol to open the telephone's contacts.
Tap on this symbol to switch off Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR). This
symbol will appear when CLIR is switched on (telephone number is not
displayed).
Tap on this symbol to switch on Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR). The
symbol is displayed if CLIR is switched off (telephone number is displayed).
Tap on this symbol to display the external contact list and dial an external
account (external dial tone).
Tap on this symbol to show the internal contact list. Only internal telephone
numbers can be dialled.
Tap on this symbol to call the subscriber with the telephone number in dial
preparation.
Tap on this symbol to start a callback (CCBS and CCNR).
Tap on this symbol to add the telephone number to the telephone's contacts.
Tap on this symbol to delete the most recently entered digit.
Tap on this symbol to delete all previously entered digits and dial a new
telephone number.
Tap on this symbol to end the call.
Tap on this symbol to answer the call (hands-free calling mode).
Tap on this symbol to turn off the ringtone.
Tap on this symbol to forward a call you did not answer (call deflection).
Tap on this symbol to forward a call you did not answer (call deflection).
Tap on the symbol to forward the call to the answering machine.
Tap on this symbol to reject a call.
Tap on this symbol to transfer a call.
64 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Telephone
Apps
Telephony App
The following symbols are displayed for door functions:
Tap on this symbol to transfer a call.
Tap on this symbol to start a query call.
Tap on this symbol to cancel the starting of a query call.
Tap on this symbol to connect the active call with the most recently held call.
Tap on this symbol to connect the active call with the most recently held call.
Tap on the symbol to put an external call partner into the waiting loop.
Tap on this symbol to start a conference call.
Tap on this symbol to connect both conference call partners who are in a
three-way call with you and leave the call.
Tap on this symbol to end the call with the call partner who joined first (active
business card), ending the three-way call.
Tap on this symbol to start a query call with the call partner who joined most
recently (active business card), ending the three-way call.
Tap on this symbol to end a three-way call with both partners.
Tap on this symbol to pick up a call that is coming in to another internal
telephone.
Tap on this symbol to pick up a call that is coming in to another internal
telephone.
Tap on this symbol to terminate the current action.
Tap on this symbol to open the door that is knocking or with which there is an
existing call connection.
Tap on this symbol to turn the stairwell light on.
Symbol Function
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 65
Introduction to the Telephone
Apps
All Apps
All Apps
Tap on Apps to display all the Apps and Widgets installed on the telephone.
Answering machine
Tap on the symbol to open the answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information
> Product Details).
App Provisioning
Tap on the symbol to open an app to download or update apps from a provisioning server.In
the factory settings, the telephone accesses the Auerswald provisioning server via the Internet.
For information about available apps contact your system administrator.
Browser
Tap on this symbol to start an app so you can access the Internet.
Calendar Sync
Tap on this symbol to open an app which synchronises the calendar (fee payable for activation
at the Auerswald Upgrade Center).
Contacts Sync
Tap on this symbol to open an app which synchronises your contacts (fee payable for activation
at the Auerswald Upgrade Center).
Downloads
Tap on this symbol to view and edit items that were downloaded via the browser.
E-Mail
Tap on this symbol to start an app for sending and receiving e-mail.
Settings
Tap on this symbol to open a selection list in which you can configure or run the following apps:
Setup assistant
Providers & PBXs
Accounts
Bluetooth (only COMfortel 3600IP)
66 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Telephone
Apps
All Apps
Network
Sound
Display
Storage
Apps
Answering machine
More
Emergency numbers
E-mail
My location
IP camera
Configuration manager
Permissions for settings
Permissions for functions
Activation
Phone certificates
Function keys
Call log
Safety
Language & input
Backup & reset
Auerswald
Speed dialling keys and emergency numbers
Add account
Update & Provisioning
Date & time
About phone
Shutdown/Reboot
Functions
Tap on this symbol to open a selection list in which you can configure the following telephone
functions:
TAM readiness
TAM e-mail
TAM remote access
TAM automatic call recording
Open TAM
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 67
Introduction to the Telephone
Apps
All Apps
Call waiting
Do-Not-Disturb
Automatic Bandwidth Amplification
Follow-me
Group
Headset
InterCom permission
Ringtone
Configuration
Pick-up
Relays
Calling Line Identity Restriction
Call forwarding, external telephone number
Call fwd. (scr.)
Call fwd. (scr. in PBX)
Announcement before answering
Door function
VMB automatic mode
VMB readiness
VMB e-mail
VMB remote access
VMB open
VMB substitute
VMB message fwd.
Waiting field reception telephone
Important: Some functions are only available when used on a PBX. These
functions must first be configured in the PBX. It may be necessary to grant
permission to use the functions.
Note: You can configure the structure of the telphones functions. The upper
list shows only one of the possible alternatives.
Function keys
Tap on this symbol to start an application for assigning the following functions to the function
keys:
Announcement bef. answering
Automatic bandwidth amplification
68 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Telephone
Apps
All Apps
Bluetooth
Boss
Call fwd. (scr. in PBX)
Call fwd. (scr.)
Call fwd. (scr.), deactivate all
Call fwd.: MSN/DDI
Call waiting
Calling line identity restriction
Configuration
Controlled by external app
Do-not-disturb
Door function
Exchange line
Exchange line transfer
Follow-me
Group
Group function off
Group state
Headset
InterCom (perm.)
interCom OneWay
InterCom speakerphone
IP camera
Macro
MWI
Pick-up
Power save mode & screen lock
Relay
Ringtone
Secretary
Shared line
Shift
Speed dialling
Start app
TAM automatic call recording
TAM call acceptance
TAM call recording
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 69
Introduction to the Telephone
Apps
All Apps
TAM e-mail
TAM open
TAM readiness
TAM remote access
TAM voice memo
Telephone line)
Call fwd. (scr.), deactivate all
URL
VMB automatic mode
VMB e-mail
VMB message fwd.
VMB open
VMB readiness
VMB remote access
VMB substitute
VMB voice memo
W.fld.reception
Important: Some functions are only available when used on a PBX. These
functions must first be configured in the PBX. It may be necessary to grant
permission to use the functions.
Gallery
Tap on this symbol to start an application for viewing and managing images.
Instant Messaging
Tap on this symbol to start an app for sending and receiving SIP text messages.
Important: Instant Messaging is only available if you are using the COMpact
5000/R and COMmander 6000/R/RX PBXs with an enabled SIP conven-
ience package. The PBX must be running firmware version 6.4A to support
this app.
IP Camera
Tap on this symbol to start an app for displaying the IP camera on the display (fee payable for
activation at the Auerswald Upgrade Center).
70 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Telephone
Apps
All Apps
Calendar
Tap on this symbol to open the calendar with the overview of events. You can also enter new
events or a series of events.
Contacts
Tap on this symbol to open the telephone's contact list and the call log.
Music
Tap on this icon to start an app for listening to and managing music.
Calculator
Tap on this symbol to start the calculator app for performing standard calculations such as
addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division.
Search
Tap on this symbol to perform a Google search. A keyboard will appear to help you enter a
search term more easily.
Call log
Tap on this symbol you open the call log.
Clock
Tap on this symbol to start an app which displays the time on the display. You can also switch
on an alarm clock or use the stopwatch function here.
Installing Additional Apps
Installing apps is easy in the App Shop (see Introduction to the Telephone > Apps> All Apps>
App Provisioning section).
In the App Shop you can install apps of unknown origin, which you obtained, for example, via
the App Shop, from web pages, e-mails or other sources, on your telephone.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 71
Introduction to the Telephone
Apps
All Apps
To install apps of unknown origin:
1. Go to Apps > Settings > Personal > Security > Device administration and
click on the Unknown sources check box.
2. Use the App Shop to install a file manager, e.g. ES File Explorer.
Notes:
File managers can find and install files in *apk format that are stored on the
memory card.
You will find sources for downloading apps on the Internet under the search
string apk download. Copy the files (*.apk) from your PC onto the memory
card. Use the file manager installed on the telephone to install the files.
Alternatively you can also search the files with the browser in the telephone,
and download them. After you have finished downloading the files, tap on
Downloads to display them in a list. Then tap on a file to start installing
it.
Caution: Apps and files downloaded from the Internet may contain
viruses which can damage your telephone.
To protect your telephone and your personal data, we strongly
recommend you only download apps and files from trustworthy
sources.
Note: Click on Apps > Settings > Device > Apps >
Manage apps > All > <app name> to check, which of your
telephone's functions and which personal data an app can access.
72 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Configuration Manager
Introduction to the Configuration
Manager
This section provides a general overview of the integrated configuration manager. It describes
how to open and use the configuration manager.
You can also find tips on how to use the Help function.
Topics
Configuration Manager (page 73)
Help (page 85)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 73
Introduction to the Configuration Manager
Configuration Manager
Opening the Configuration Manager
Configuration Manager
The configuration manager provides an easy way for you to set up the telephone on your
computer. The configuration manager can be accessed via the integrated web server in the
telephone. The PC you need for doing this must either be connected directly to an Ethernet port
on the telephone or be in the same network.
Opening the Configuration Manager
You can open the configuration manager using one of the recommended browsers and the
telephone's IP address.
To open the configuration manager during operation as a system telephone, you must first log
in to the telephone. You can log in at the following authority levels:
Administrator
Sub-Administrator
User
Note: Because sun-ranges of the system telephone can be closed by the
administrator, it may happen that you will be unable to make all the settings
in the telephone if you register as a user or sub-administrator (see Settings>
Permissions).
Opening the Configuration Manager when Operating the System Telephone as an
Administrator
Requirements:
– A PC meeting the minimum requirements (see chapter Important Information > Minimum
Requirements PC)
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– You need to know the admin password for the PBX
– You need to know the telephone's IP address (you can check it on the telephone by selecting
Apps > Settings > Network > Network > IP address)
– Existing network connection between the PC and the system telephone
1. Start a browser (e.g. Mozilla Firefox).
74 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Configuration Manager
Configuration Manager
Opening the Configuration Manager
2. Enter the IP address of the telephone in the address field of the browser (for example,
http://192.168.178.4).
3. Under Username, enter the admin username of the PBX.
4. Under Password enter the PBX's Admin password (8-32 characters) .
5. Click OK.
The configuration manager opens.
Opening the Configuration Manager when Operating the System Telephone as a Sub-
Administrator
Requirements:
– A PC meeting the minimum requirements (see chapter Important Information > Minimum
Requirements PC)
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– You need to know a sub-admin password for the PBX
– You need to know the telephone's IP address (you can check it on the telephone by selecting
Apps > Settings > Network > Network > IP address)
– Existing network connection between the PC and the system telephone
1. Start a browser (e.g. Mozilla Firefox).
2. Enter the IP address of the telephone in the address field of the browser (for example,
http://192.168.178.4).
3. Under Username, enter the username sub-admin.
4. Under Password enter the associated Sub-admin password (8-32 characters).
5. Click OK.
The configuration manager opens.
Opening the Configuration Manager when Operating the System Telephone as a User
Requirements:
– A PC meeting the minimum requirements (see chapter Important Information > Minimum
Requirements PC)
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– You need to know the user password for the PBX
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 75
Introduction to the Configuration Manager
Configuration Manager
Opening the Configuration Manager
– You need to know the telephone's IP address (you can check it on the telephone by selecting
Apps > Settings > Network > Network > IP address)
– Existing network connection between the PC and the system telephone
1. Start a browser (e.g. Mozilla Firefox).
2. Enter the IP address of the telephone in the address field of the browser (for example,
http://192.168.178.4).
3. Under Username, enter the internal telephone number of the telephone.
4. Under Password enter the associated User password (8-32 characters).
Note: If no user password has been entered in the PBX, leave this field
empty.
5. Click OK.
The configuration manager opens.
Opening the Configuration Manager when Operating as a Standard VoIP Telephone
Requirements:
– A PC meeting the minimum requirements (see chapter Important Information > Minimum
Requirements PC)
– Existing network connection between the PC and the telephone
– You need to know the telephone's IP address (you can check it on the telephone by selecting
Apps > Settings > Network > Network > IP address)
1. Start a browser (e.g. Mozilla Firefox).
2. Enter the IP address of the telephone in the address field of the browser (for example,
http://192.168.178.4).
The login window opens.
Note: If you start the configuration manager for the first time, a dialogue box
opens in the first step. This is where you specify the user name and the user
password. Enter the required data (32 characters, letters and numbers).
3. Under Username, enter the username of the telephone.
4. Under Password, enter the user password.
76 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Configuration Manager
Configuration Manager
Notes for Using the Configuration Manager
5. Click OK.
The configuration manager opens.
Notes for Using the Configuration Manager
The notes for using the configuration manager include the following topics:
Navigation
Logging Out
Entry and list fields
Creating, deleting, searching for, and sorting table entries
Symbols
Appearance/Legibility
Navigation
The configuration manager is divided into several areas:
Horizontal Navigation Bar
You can use the horizontal navigation bar to show or hide the Navigation area. The navigation
area contains the Help area.
Use the Log out button in the horizontal navigation bar to log out from the configuration
manager.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 77
Introduction to the Configuration Manager
Configuration Manager
Notes for Using the Configuration Manager
Navigation area
If the navigation area is shown, a vertical directory tree is displayed under Navigation. Most
topics are consolidated under a main topic ( ) to help you identify them. To select the required
topic or main topic, simply click on it. If sub-topics are available, open the list by clicking on it,
or on the plus character in front of the main topic. Then click on the required topic ( ) to select
it.
The topic you have chosen opens to the right, on the screen.
Click on the or button to open or close the directory tree completely.
A vertical line separates the Navigation area (with the directory tree) and the selected screen.
To enlarge the area, click and hold the cursor above the separator line and slide the line to the
required location (automatically makes the other areas smaller).
Click the buttons (e.g. View, Configure) on the selected screen to open subsequent screens
that are not listed in the tree. To return to the Home screen, click back.
On some screens you can select sub-topics directly by clicking on tabs. The active tab is
marked in a different colour.
Help Area
The Help area with links to a variety of Help topics is located at the bottom of the Navigation
area. This is where you see the Help topics that are relevant to the configuration screen which
is currently open (see Introduction to the Configuration Manager > Help).
Note: The Help area can be displayed or hidden.
Logging Out
The Log out button is located in the horizontal navigation bar. Click Log out to log out
of the configuration manager.
Entry, List, and Selection Fields
Important: Any settings you make in the screens with the fields described
below must be saved before you leave these screens. To save your settings,
click Save.
Note: The images/symbols shown below will vary depending on the
browser and operating system.
78 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Configuration Manager
Configuration Manager
Notes for Using the Configuration Manager
Creating, Deleting, Searching for, and Sorting Table Entries
The configuration manager displays the lists in table format across multiple screens. Only table
rows containing data are shown. A list can be expanded or shortened.
Creating Entries
1. Click New.
One line is added to the list.
2. Fill in the empty entry fields.
Element Function
An empty field normally provides an opportunity to enter a name or
value. Click in the entry field and enter the text.
The following characters must not be used:
" quotation marks
$ dollar sign
% percent sign
< pointy bracket - smaller than
> pointy bracket - higher than
\ backslash
^ caret
[ ] square brackets
{ } curly brackets
Some functions have list fields in which you can choose from the
available options. The selected setting is displayed in the list field. Click
on the list field to display the options.
For some functions, option fields are available, in which you can choose
different settings. The selected setting is marked by coloured dot.
Click on an option to activate it. The previous selection is disabled at the
same time.
Use the check boxes to enable or disable the settings and functions. An
empty check box means "off", a symbol (e.g. check, X) in the check box
means "on".
Click to jump to the check box.
Use the sliders to make infinitely variable settings (e.g. volume). The
position of the slider identifies where the setting is.
Drag the slider to the left to reduce the value. Drag the slider to the right
to increase the value.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 79
Introduction to the Configuration Manager
Configuration Manager
Notes for Using the Configuration Manager
3. Click Save.
The new entry will be added to the list.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to create additional entries.
Note: If you would like to create multiple entries simultaneously, enter the
required range in the From and To entry fields, and then click Save.
Deleting Entries
1. Click in the line of the entry that you wish to delete.
The entry will be highlighted.
Note: To select several consecutive entries, click on the first and last entry
while holding the Shift key down. To select several non-consecutive entries,
click on each required entry while holding the Ctrl key down.
2. Click Delete and confirm the dialogue with Yes.
Searching For Entries
1. Click in the open field in the header of the column that you wish to search, such as Number
or Name.
2. Enter a search term.
If, for example, you are searching for a name, and enter the letter M, all the entries that
match this criteria will be displayed automatically. If you enter "Ma", the results will be
narrowed down to the relevant entries.
Sorting Entries
Tables can be sorted according to the contents of individual columns.
Click on a column header.
An arrow will appear next to the column header:
Notes:
To reverse the sorting sequence, click on the column heading again.
The table will be sorted according to the entries in the relevant column in
ascending order.
The table will be sorted according to the entries in the relevant column in
descending order.
80 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Configuration Manager
Configuration Manager
Notes for Using the Configuration Manager
If no arrow appears, this means the column cannot be used as a sorting
criteria.
Symbols
Lower toolbar in the configuration manager
Configuration Screens
Horizontal Navigation Bar
Element Function
New: Click on this symbol to add a blank table row.
Save: Click on this symbol to save changes.
Delete: Click on this symbol to delete the selected entries.
Back: Click on this symbol to return to the previous configuration screen.
Print: Click on this symbol to print the function key label. Set the print format
on landscape and the printing scale on 100 %. Alternatively, you can save the
document and print it with PDF Viewer.
Element Function
Click on this symbol to open the Help screen for the corresponding setting
point.
Place the cursor over the symbol to see information about the associated Help
topic (tooltip).
Click on this symbol to close the dialogue without saving.
Element Function
Click on this symbol to log out from the configuration manager.
Click on this symbol to open the entire directory tree. This also saves the
directory tree's old state.
Click on this symbol to restore the directory tree to state it had before the last
time it was opened or closed completely.
Click on this symbol to close the entire directory tree. This also saves the
directory tree's old state.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 81
Introduction to the Configuration Manager
Configuration Manager
Selecting your Language
Appearance/Legibility
The appearance/legibility of the configuration manager can be affected by browser
settings, e.g.:
Scale/zoom browsers (e.g. hold down Ctrl + scroll (mouse wheel))
Note: If the configuration manager is not legible because of scaling/zooming
of the browser, you can restore the original view (e.g. Mozilla Firefox under
View> Zoom> Normal).
Selecting your Language
You have a choice of languages for the configuration manager.
You can select the required language as follows:
Using the Configuration Manager
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Configuration manager screen.
2. Select the language you require from the Language list field under Configuration
Manager.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Entering a Username for the Configuration Manager (SIP Account)
Important: If operated as a system telephone on an Auerswald PBX, the
PBX specifies the username for the configuration manager. The username
corresponds to the username entered in the PBX. The username cannot be
entered manually.
You must enter it as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
82 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Configuration Manager
Configuration Manager
Entering a Password for the Configuration Manager (SIP Account)
Using the Configuration Manager to Enter the User Name for the Configuration Manager
Requirements:
– The telephone is not a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Configuration Manager screen.
2. Enter the username in the Username entry field under User. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Enter User Names for the Configuration Manager
Requirements:
– The telephone is not a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > Configuration manager.
2. Tap on Username and enter the username in the entry field. Possible entries:
3. Tap on OK.
Entering a Password for the Configuration Manager (SIP Account)
Important: If operated as a system telephone on an Auerswald PBX, the
PBX specifies the password for the Configuration manager. The password
matches the password you input in the PBX. The password cannot be
entered manually.
You must enter it as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 83
Introduction to the Configuration Manager
Configuration Manager
Entering a Password for the Configuration Manager (SIP Account)
Using the Configuration Manager to enter a Password for the Configuration Manager
Requirements:
– The telephone is not a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Configuration manager screen.
2. Enter the password in the Password entry field under User. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Enter a Password for the Configuration Manager
Requirements:
– The telephone is not a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > Configuration manager.
2. Tap on Password and then enter the password in the entry field. Possible entries:
3. Tap on OK.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
84 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Configuration Manager
Configuration Manager
Deleting the Password for the Configuration Manager (SIP Account)
Deleting the Password for the Configuration Manager (SIP Account)
The password can only be deleted as follows:
Using the telephone
Using the Telephone to Delete a Password for the Configuration Manager
Requirements:
– The telephone is not a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > Configuration manager.
2. Tap on Delete configuration manager password.
Caution: Deleting password leaves the configuration manager
vulnerable to attacks from the Internet.
For this reason, it is vital you use a password to protect your
telephone and your personal data.
Important: If operated as a system telephone on an Auerswald PBX,
the PBX specifies the password for the configuration manager. The
password matches the password you input in the PBX. The password
cannot be deleted manually.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 85
Introduction to the Configuration Manager
Help
Opening Help
Help
Use the Help to access the telephone's Operation Guide.
Opening Help
The Help area with links to a variety of Help topics is located below the Navigation area. Help
topics related to the currently open configuration screen are provided.
At many setting points, the symbol is located next to the label for the entry, list, or option
fields, or check boxes. If you use the mouse arrow to point to a symbol, you see an information
text with the accompanying Help topic (tool tip). Click on the symbol to open the associated
Help topic.
Click on the required Help link in the Help navigation bar or click on next to the
corresponding setting point.
The relevant Help screen opens.
Navigating in the Help Window
There are several ways to navigate in the Help.
Navigating via the Table of Contents
Click on the Contents tab (this text may have a different name in some browsers) to go to the
Table of Contents (the tab will be highlighted in yellow).
The Table of Contents will be displayed on the left-hand side of the Help window as a directory
tree.
By clicking on one of the topics in the Table of Contents you can open the Help screen
associated with it on the right-hand side of the Help window.
The symbol indicates that additional topics are available under a specific topic. Click on this
symbol to expand the sub-topics. You can close the sub-topics again by clicking on the
symbol.
86 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Configuration Manager
Help
Navigating in the Help Window
Notes:
The Index area and the selected screen are separated by a vertical line or
a scroll bar. To enlarge one of the areas (automatically makes the other
areas smaller), click and hold the cursor above the separator line and slide
the line to the location you want. This setting will only apply to the Help
window that is currently open.
The currently opened topic may be highlighted in the Table of Contents
(for example, with a grey background). Scrolling through the Table of
Contents may cause this highlighting to disappear. Click on the symbol
in the Help window to display the currently open Help screen in the Table of
Contents.
Navigation using expanding texts
Some Help texts contain expanding (foldout) texts. Expanding text is indicated by a blue font
and is underlined. In addition, the symbol appears after the foldout text.
You can expand the text by clicking on the symbol or the line. Click on the symbol or the
line again to close the text.
Navigating via the Index
Click on the Index tab (this text may have a different name in some browsers) to go to the index
(the tab is highlighted in yellow).
The index will be displayed on the left-hand side of the Help window.
Click on a letter of the alphabet to go directly to the keywords under that letter.
Click on a keyword to open the associated Help screen on the right-hand side of the Help
window.
Notes:
The index area and the selected screen are separated by a vertical line or
a scroll bar. To enlarge one of the areas (automatically makes the other
areas smaller), click and hold the cursor above the separator line and slide
the line to the location you want. This setting will only apply to the Help
window that is currently open.
Click on the symbol in the Help window to display the currently open
Help screen in the Table of Contents.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 87
Introduction to the Configuration Manager
Help
Searching in Help
Navigating by Scrolling
Click on the symbol to go to the next screen of the Instructions.
Click on the symbol to go to the previous screen of the Instructions.
Navigating with the Back Button
Click on the symbol to go back to the previously opened Help screen.
Note: You may have to scroll back to the top of the current Help screen to
access the symbol.
Navigating via Links
Some Help texts contain links to sub-topics or to more detailed information. Links are in blue
font and underlined.
Click on a link to go to the associated Help screen.
Navigating via Breadcrumbs
The path you took to get to the currently open screen is displayed above the Help text. The path
consists of the titles of the topics arranged above the current topic. The higher-level topics are
shown in a blue font and the current topic is shown in a grey font.
By clicking on a higher-level topic you can go to the associated Help screen.
Searching in Help
You can search all the Help screens for one or more terms.
1. Click on the Search tab (this text may have a different name in some browsers).
The tab is activated (highlighted in yellow). The left-hand area of the Help window
contains an entry field for the keywords and a button for starting the search.
2. Enter the required term in the entry field.
88 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Introduction to the Configuration Manager
Help
Printing from within the Help
Notes:
The character * can be used as a wildcard in a search. For example, a
search using "teleph*" will return hits for "telephone", "telephone book",
"telephoning", and other terms that begin with "teleph".
If you enter several terms, the Help texts which contain all these keywords
will be displayed irrespective of the sequence and context.
3. Click Search (this text may have a different name in some browsers).
The search in the Help is performed. This may take some time. When complete, the
topics that contain the search term are listed. The sequence within this list is deter-
mined by the number of hits and the importance of the search term found. The higher
the value displayed under In %, the more important the Help text is to the search.
4. Click on the required title in the list.
The corresponding Help screen opens on the right-hand side of the Help window.
Notes:
Some browsers also mark the found places within the Help text.
The search area and the selected screen are separated by a vertical line or
a scroll bar. To enlarge one of the areas (automatically makes the other
areas smaller), click and hold the cursor above the separator line and slide
the line to the location you want. This setting will only apply to the Help
window that is currently open.
Click on the symbol in the Help window to display the currently open
Help screen in the Table of Contents.
Printing from within the Help
You can print the currently displayed Help screen using the Help print function.
Notes:
If the displayed Help screen includes texts that can be expanded, expand all
the texts you want to print.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 89
Introduction to the Configuration Manager
Help
Icons in the Help Window
If you only want to print part of the displayed Help screen, mark the relevant
text by clicking and drawing with the left-hand mouse button. Afterwards,
select Selection as the print area in the print dialogue box.
1. In the Help window, click on the symbol.
The print dialogue box opens.
2. Select the required printer.
3. Click Print.
Icons in the Help Window
Click on this symbol to return to the previously opened Help screen.
Click on this symbol to move to the next screen of the Instructions.
Click on this symbol to return to the previous screen of the Instructions.
Click on this symbol to display the current Help screen in the Table of
Contents.
Display: Expandable text is closed.
Click on the symbol or line to expand the text.
Display: Expandable text is expanded.
Click on the symbol or line to hide the text.
Click on the symbol to open the print dialogue box.
Display: Sub-topics are closed.
Click on the symbol to open the sub-topics.
Display: Sub-topics are shown.
Click on the symbol to close the sub-topics.
Display: The topic does not have any sub-topics.
Click on the symbol to open the corresponding Help screen.
90 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Telephoning
Telephoning
This section describes the different ways in which you can use the telephone to make
telephone calls.
Important: The functions described in these instructions have been tested
on devices operating as system telephones on Auerswald PBXs. If the
telephone is operated on other VoIP PBXs or VoIP providers, functionality
may be partially or completely restricted.
Topics
Incoming Calls (page 91)
Call-Waiting Calls (page 94)
Outgoing Calls (page 97)
Call (page 103)
Query Call (page 105)
Call Transfer (page 109)
Conference Call (page 113)
Hands-Free Calling (page 116)
Loudspeaker Listening (page 118)
Headset Call (page 119)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 91
Telephoning
Incoming Calls
Options during an Incoming Call
Incoming Calls
Incoming calls are divided into the following categories:
Alarm calls
External calls
Internal calls
Group calling (a call made to a specific group)
InterCom calls
External callbacks
Internal callbacks
Door calls
Call deblockers (calls enabled despite do-not-disturb)
Wake-up calls
Other calls
Options during an Incoming Call
During an incoming call, the following actions are possible:
Accepting An Incoming Call
If you receive a call and would like to talk with the caller, you can accept the incoming call as
you would normally by picking up the receiver.
Rejecting An Incoming Call
If you receive a call but you do not want to talk to the caller, you can reject the incoming call.
The caller receives a busy signal, assuming no other telephones are called (for example, in a
group call).
Forwarding Incoming Calls
If you receive a call but you do not want to talk to the caller yourself, you can then forward the
incoming call to any internal or external destination number.
Putting a Caller On Hold
If you receive a call but would like to postpone accepting the call, you can put the incoming call
on hold. The caller hears the on-hold music.
92 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Telephoning
Incoming Calls
Accepting an Incoming Call
Disabling the Ringer
If you receive a call but would like to postpone accepting the call, you can switch off the ringer.
The call will continue to try to get through and you can accept it at any time.
Additional Options
Forwarding a Caller to the Answering Machine (page 295)
Accepting an Incoming Call
When you receive a call, proceed as described below.
Pick up the receiver or tap on .
You will be connected with the caller.
Notes:
If you are not present, on a particular occasion, or cannot accept a call for
another reason, the caller's telephone number is saved in the caller list
(provided that the telephone number is available and the call type is saved
in the caller list).
Calls made from the telephone or from the PBX (wake-up calls, alarm calls,
door calls) are displayed in plain text and can be confirmed by tapping on
(alarm calls are not confirmed until you pick up the receiver).
Rejecting an Incoming Call
When you receive a call, proceed as described below.
Tap on .
The caller receives a busy signal, assuming no other telephones are called
(for example, in a group call).
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 93
Telephoning
Incoming Calls
Putting a Caller On Hold
Putting a Caller On Hold
When you receive a call, proceed as described below.
1. Pick up the receiver or tap on .
You will be connected with the caller.
2. Tap on .
You will hear the internal dial tone. The caller on hold hears the on-hold music.
3. Tap on .
You will be connected with the caller.
Forwarding Incoming Calls
When you receive a call, proceed as described below.
1. Tap on .
2. Enter the destination number or select the required VoIP account and telephone
number in the selection window.
Important: Enter telephone numbers exactly as when dialling, for example,
always enter external telephone numbers with a leading exchange line
access number. In the factory settings, the PBX's exchange line access
number is "0", but it can be changed in some PBXs (refer to the instructions
for the PBX).
Note: Tap on to forward the call to the answering machine.
3. Tap on .
The subscriber is called.
Note: If the destination number is saved on the programmable function key
(speed dialling key), you can forward the call by simply pressing this key and
then tapping on . You no longer need to select the function in advance
via the display.
94 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Telephoning
Call-Waiting Calls
Options during a Call-Waiting Call
Call-Waiting Calls
During a call, you are notified of another call (external or internal subscriber, alarm or someone
at the door) by a call waiting tone (tone and/or notification on the display).
Options during a Call-Waiting Call
During a call waiting call, you can:
Reject a Call-Waiting Call
If you receive another call while you are already making a call, and you do not want to speak
with the second caller, or you do not want to interrupt the first call, you can reject the call-waiting
call. The caller receives a busy signal, assuming no other telephones are called (for example,
in a group call).
Accept a Call-Waiting Call
If you receive another call while you are already making a call, and you would like to speak to
the second caller, or you would like to end the current call, you can accept the call-waiting call.
After accepting, you will be connected with the other caller. Your previous call partner hears the
on-hold music.
Forward a Call-Waiting Call
If you receive another call while you are already on a call and personally do not want to talk
with the second caller, or you do not want to interrupt the current call, you can forward the call-
waiting call to any internal or external destination number.
Switch Off the Call-Waiting Tone
If you receive another call while you are already on a call, but you would like to postpone
accepting the second call, you can switch off the audible indication. The second call will
continue to try to get through and you can accept it at any time.
Rejecting a Call-Waiting Call
Requirements:
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 95
Telephoning
Call-Waiting Calls
Accepting a Call-Waiting Call
– Call waiting must be enabled
If a call-waiting call is signalled, proceed as described below.
Tap on .
The caller receives a busy signal, assuming no other telephones are called
(for example, in a group call).
Accepting a Call-Waiting Call
Requirements:
– Call waiting must be enabled
If a call-waiting call is signalled, proceed as described below.
Tap on the caller's business card or tap on .
You will be connected with the caller. Your previous call partner hears the on-hold
music.
Note: If you first hang up the receiver to end the current call, your telephone
will ring and you can accept the incoming call as you would normally.
Forwarding a Call-Waiting Call
Requirements:
– Call waiting must be enabled
If a call-waiting call is signalled, proceed as described below.
1. Tap on .
2. Enter the destination number or select the required VoIP account and telephone
number in the selection window.
96 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Telephoning
Call-Waiting Calls
Switching Off the Call-Waiting Tone
Important: Enter telephone numbers exactly as when dialling, for example,
always enter external telephone numbers with a leading exchange line
access number. In the factory settings, the PBX's exchange line access
number is "0", but it can be changed in some PBXs (refer to the instructions
for the PBX).
3. Tap on .
The subscriber is called.
Note: If the destination number is saved on the programmable function key
(speed dialling key), you can forward the call by simply pressing this key and
then tapping on . You no longer need to select the function in advance
via the display.
Switching Off the Call-Waiting Tone
Requirements:
– Call waiting must be enabled
If a call-waiting call is signalled, proceed as described below.
Tap on .
The second call will continue to try to get through and you can accept it at any time.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 97
Telephoning
Outgoing Calls
Options for Outgoing Calls
Outgoing Calls
Outgoing calls are calls that you have initiated yourself.
Options for Outgoing Calls
An outgoing call can be initiated in two ways:
Dialling the Telephone Number
If you have already picked up the receiver before dialling, the telephone number you have
entered will be dialled immediately.
Dialling a Telephone Number with Dial Preparation
Dial preparation – first dialling and then picking up the receiver – enables you to check the
telephone number you entered and, if necessary, correct it before the connection is estab-
lished.
Initiating an External Call with Calling Line Identity Restriction
If you do not want the person you are calling to see your telephone number, you can use Calling
Line Identity Restriction.
Additional Options
Initiating Targeted Exchange Line Access (page 175)
Dialling from Within the Contacts (page 124)
Dialling from Within the Caller List (page 142)
Dialling from the Call Log (page 139)
Dialling from Within the Redial List (page 136)
Picking up Receiver and Dialling Telephone Number
1. Pick up the receiver or press the hook key.
2. Dial a telephone number:
98 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Telephoning
Outgoing Calls
Dialling a Telephone Number with Dial Preparation
Manual entry: Enter the telephone number manually.
Important: Enter telephone numbers exactly as when dialling, for example,
always enter external telephone numbers with a leading exchange line
access number. In the factory settings, the PBX's exchange line access
number is "0", but it can be changed in some PBXs (refer to the instructions
for the PBX).
Notes:
When dialling through a standard SIP account, you can prevent the local
area code from being output automatically by entering a leading "#"
and thereby reach the VoIP provider's voice mailbox, for example.
As soon as you have dialled the first digit, you can cancel or restart the
selection by tapping on , or delete the most recently entered digit by
tapping on .
Selection: In the selection window, select the required VoIP account and a
telephone number.
Note: Tap on to display the external contact list and select an external
account (exchange line). Tap on to display the internal contact list. Only
internal telephone numbers can be dialled.
Once you have finished dialling the telephone number, the subscriber will be called.
Dialling a Telephone Number with Dial Preparation
1. Dial a telephone number.
Important: Enter telephone numbers exactly as when dialling, for example,
always enter external telephone numbers with a leading exchange line
access number. In the factory settings, the PBX's exchange line access
number is "0", but it can be changed in some PBXs (refer to the instructions
for the PBX).
Notes:
When dialling through a standard SIP account, you can prevent the local
area code from being output automatically by entering a leading "#"
and thereby reach the VoIP provider's voice mailbox, for example.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 99
Telephoning
Outgoing Calls
Initiating an External Call with Calling Line Identity Restriction
You can make corrections, if necessary, while entering the telephone
number.
2. Pick up the receiver or tap on .
Note: If you would like to exit dial preparation without dialling the entered
telephone number, tap on .
Initiating an External Call with Calling Line Identity Restriction
Requirements:
– CLIR 2 service feature (case by case suppression of the telephone number display) activated
by the network provider)
– Calling number presentation must be enabled on the PBX
1. Pick up the receiver or tap on .
2. Tap on .
The display will show to indicate that Calling Line Identity Restriction has been
enabled.
3. Dial a telephone number (an external telephone number with an exchange line
access number).
Once you have finished dialling the telephone number, the subscriber will be called.
Calling Line Identity Restriction will be deactivated as soon as you have ended the
call.
Options for Unsuccessful Calls
The following options are available for unsuccessful calls:
100 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Telephoning
Outgoing Calls
Initiating Callback when Line is Busy
Initiating Callback When Line is Busy
If you cannot get through to a busy subscriber despite repeated attempts, you can initiate a
callback on busy. This function is available for internal calls.
If you have initiated a callback, the PBX will call you as soon as the other subscriber has hung
up the receiver at the end of their current call. If you then pick up the receiver, the other
subscriber will be called. If the other subscriber picks up the receiver, the connection for the call
will be established. The callback procedure in the PBX is then deleted.
Initiating Callback on No Reply
If the subscriber being called does not pick up the receiver, you can initiate "callback on no
reply" to reach this subscriber without having to call them repeatedly. This function is available
for internal calls.
If you have initiated a callback, as soon as the other subscriber has hung up the receiver to end
the call, the PBX will call you. If you then pick up the receiver, the other subscriber will be called.
If the other subscriber picks up the receiver, the connection for the call will be established. The
callback procedure in the PBX is then deleted.
Note: Callback is not possible in certain situations, such as when calling an
external telephone number, when a central office is involved, or during a
provider transition. In this case, use the power dialling function.
Initiating a Priority Call when Do-Not-Disturb is Enabled
If it is essential that you reach a person (in emergencies), the do-not-disturb function can be
circumvented by a priority call from an internal telephone.
Additional Options
Power Dialling (page 224)
Initiating Callback when Line is Busy
Requirements:
– Both telephones must be connected to the same Auerswald PBX.
If the connection you are calling is busy, proceed as described below.
Note: Use the Power Dialling function to retry a busy external connection.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 101
Telephoning
Outgoing Calls
Initiating Callback on No Reply
1. Tap on .
If callback is configured, you will see the message Call completion activated.
2. Hang up the receiver.
As soon as the connection is no longer busy, the PBX will attempt to call you for 20
seconds.
3. Pick up the receiver to make the callback.
Notes:
If you do not pick up the receiver within the 20 seconds that the PBX calls
you, the callback instruction will be deleted.
If you would like to cancel the callback, tap on .
If you pick up the receiver, the subscriber will be called.
Note: A callback will be stored in the PBX for up to 45 minutes. If the called
subscriber has not yet finished their call, the callback will be deleted automat-
ically.
Initiating Callback on No Reply
Requirements:
– Both telephones must be connected to the same Auerswald PBX.
If no one answers on the connection you are calling, proceed as described below.
1. Tap on .
If callback is configured, you will see the message Call completion activated.
2. Hang up the receiver.
As soon as the connection has been occupied, the PBX will call you back for 30
seconds.
3. Pick up the receiver to make the callback.
102 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Telephoning
Outgoing Calls
Initiating a Priority Call when Do-Not-Disturb is Enabled
Notes:
If you do not pick up the receiver within the 30 seconds when the PBX calls
you, the callback instruction will be deleted.
If you would like to cancel the callback, tap on .
If you pick up the receiver, the subscriber will be called.
Initiating a Priority Call when Do-Not-Disturb is Enabled
Requirements:
– Do-not-disturb type all (PBX) selected at the call recipient
If the internal telephone you are trying to call is busy because it is set to do-not-disturb, proceed
as described below.
Wait 10 seconds.
The subscriber will now be called.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 103
Telephoning
Call
Options during a Call
Call
You can use the system telephone to make internal and external calls on the PBX.
Options during a Call
During a call, you can:
Retrieve Information About a Call
During a call, you see information about the call and your call partner on the display, as well as
general time information (date, time, calendar week, weekday).
Sending DTMF Signals
During an existing connection you can use the keypad to send DTMF signals (sounds used in
multi-frequency dialling) to operate an answering machine remotely, for example. The dialled
digits are shown on the display.
Mute
If you would like to discuss something with another person in the room without your call partner
on the telephone being able to hear, you can temporarily mute the call.
Additional Options
Initiating a Query Call (page 105)
Call Transfer (page 109)
Pick-Up During a Call (page 219)
Recording a Call (page 320)
Information about a Call
During a call, you see information about the call and your call partner on the display, as well as
general time information (date, time, calendar week, weekday).
104 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Telephoning
Call
Sending DTMF Signals
Sending DTMF Signals
During a call, proceed as described below.
Enter the numbers and characters. Possible entries:
The numbers and characters dialled are shown on the display for a few seconds and
you hear the corresponding sounds.
Muting a Call
During a call, proceed as described below.
1. Press the Microphone key.
This switches off the microphone on the receiver, device, or headset, that is currently
active. The LED on the key blinks red.
2. To switch the microphone on again, press the Microphone key again.
Ending a Call
When your call partner ends the call, your telephone goes into its idle state. If you do not hang
up the receiver, you will hear the busy signal through the base unit loudspeaker (only if the
receiver was hung up incorrectly).
During a call, proceed as described below.
Hang up the receiver.
Note: If you would like to end the current call, and then immediately make a
new call, tap on instead, and start dialling the next number within 10
seconds.
Numbers and the characters * and #
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 105
Telephoning
Query Call
Initiating a Query Call
Query Call
During a query call you are talking with one subscriber while your previous call partner is on
hold on the PBX in the background (on-hold music is playing).
The telephone supports 10 call channels, two of which may be active simultaneously. When the
channels in the telephone are put on hold in an Auerswald PBX, they become inactive, so up
to nine calls may be on hold in addition to one active call.
A query call is initiated either by calling a query call subscriber, by picking up during a call, or
by accepting a call signalled by the audible indication.
Initiating a Query Call
During a call, proceed as described below.
1. Tap on .
You will hear the internal dial tone. Your current call partner is kept on hold in the PBX
(on-hold music playing).
Note: Initiating the query call may switch off a previously initiated (manually
or automatically) call recording.
2. Enter the destination number or select the required VoIP account and telephone
number in the selection window.
Important: Enter telephone numbers exactly as when dialling, for example,
always enter external telephone numbers with a leading exchange line
access number.
The subscriber is called.
Notes:
If the telephone number of the query call subscriber is listed in the
telephone's telephone book, you can initiate a query call by dialling directly
from the telephone book (without first tapping on ).
106 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Telephoning
Query Call
Ending a Query Call
If the telephone number of the query call subscriber is saved on one of the
programmable function keys (speed dialling key), you can initiate the query
call by simply pressing this key (without first tapping on ).
Ending a Query Call
If you make a query call, and the number is busy, or there is no response, proceed as described
below.
Important: Do not hang up the receiver (this will disconnect any calls waiting
in the background or initiate an unannounced transfer of the call to another
internal telephone).
Tap on .
Note: If you would like to try this with a different telephone number, tap on
. You can then dial a new telephone number without having to explain
the repeated attempt to the person waiting on the other line.
You are now reconnected with the call partner waiting on the other line.
Options during a Query Call
The following actions are possible during a query call:
Transferring
You can use the transfer function to alternate between the call partners.
Ending One of the Two Calls
When you end a query call and would like to continue talking with one of the call partners, you
can end the call with the other call partner separately. Alternatively, one of the call partners can
simply hang up so that you can continue talking with the other call partner.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 107
Telephoning
Query Call
Transferring
Connecting the Other Two Call Partners to Each Other
If you would like to let your call partners speak with each other, you can connect them.
Transferring
During a query call, proceed as described below.
Tap on the business card of the call partner to whom you would like to switch.
The business card of the active call partner is connected to the toolbar.
You continue to make a query call. The other call partner is now active.
Ending One of the Two Calls
Requirements:
– A query call that you initiated yourself
If one of your two call partners hangs up the receiver, you will remain connected with the other
one.
Or proceed as follows during a query call.
1. Tap on the business card of the call partner with whom you would like to end the
conversation.
The business card of the active call partner is connected to the toolbar.
2. Tap on .
You will then have a one-to-one call with the call partner who had previously been on
hold.
Connecting the Other Two Call Partners to Each Other
Requirements:
– a query call that you initiated yourself
108 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Telephoning
Query Call
Connecting the Other Two Call Partners to Each Other
– to connect two external call partners: Transfer of external calls to external permission
granted in the PBX.
To connect two call partners to each other, hang up the receiver during a query call.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
Tap on .
The two call partners are connected with each other.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 109
Telephoning
Call Transfer
Options for Transferring a Call
Call Transfer
A call partner can be transferred (connected) to an internal or external subscriber.
Options for Transferring a Call
During an existing call, the following options are available for transferring a call:
Transferring with Announcement
To transfer a call, first initiate a query call, announce the call, and then connect both call
partners.
Transferring without Announcement
If you would like to transfer an external call partner to another internal subscriber, you do not
have to wait until the subscriber being called via the query call accepts the call; you can hang
up the receiver while this call is being made. The call to the internal subscriber will continue.
Placing External Call Partner in Waiting Loop
If the internal subscriber to which you would like to transfer an external call partner is busy, you
can place the external call partner in the waiting loop of this subscriber.
Note: If, for example, you have accepted a call signalled by call waiting and
have therefore established a query call, you can place this call in the waiting
loop in the same manner. The call partner to be transferred must be the active
call partner.
Calling a Third Internal Subscriber and Transferring This Subscriber To an Active Call
Partner
This assumes that you have gained an additional call partner from a call, e. g. by accepting a
call signalled by call waiting, and this second call partner would now like to be transferred to
somebody else. You can now initiate a third call that connects the second and third call partners
with each other and then continue telephoning with your first call partner.
110 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Telephoning
Call Transfer
Transferring with Announcement
Transferring with Announcement
Requirements:
– a query call that you initiated yourself
– to connect two external call partners: Transfer of external calls to external permission
granted in the PBX.
During a query call, proceed as described below.
Tap on .
The two call partners are connected with each other.
Transferring without Announcement
Requirements:
– Internal transfer destination
During a call, proceed as described below.
1. Tap on .
You will hear the internal dial tone. Your current call partner is kept on hold in the PBX
(on-hold music playing).
2. Dial an internal telephone number.
3. Tap on .
The subscriber is called.
4. Put down the receiver.
The call to the internal subscriber will continue. If the subscriber accepts the call, the
connection is established.
If the subscriber being called does not accept the call, the call is transferred back to
your telephone 60 seconds later (your telephone rings).
Note: To perform call parking, dial the internal base telephone number +
park position and hang up instead of dialling the internal telephone number
(refer to the instructions for the PBX). To make this operation more
convenient, you can save the internal base telephone number + park position
on one or more programmable function keys (speed dialling key). The LEDs
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 111
Telephoning
Call Transfer
Placing External Call Partner in Waiting Loop
for the speed dialling keys then indicate whether a park position is available
or busy.
Placing External Call Partner in Waiting Loop
Requirements:
– Internal transfer destination
– Telephone is a system telephone on an Auerswald PBX or placing in the waiting loop is
performed on an Auerswald PBX for which the sequence ##07 has been entered under
Settings > Providers & PBXs > Name of Provider/PBX > Special numbers > Keypad
sequence for waiting loop.
If the internal telephone to which you are trying to transfer a call is busy, proceed as described
below.
1. Tap on .
2. Put down the receiver.
The external call partner continues to listen to the on-hold music.
As soon as the internal subscriber hangs up the receiver, this external communication
partner is called. Once they accept the call, they are connected with the subscriber in
the waiting loop.
Notes:
If the internal subscriber does not answer the call within 60 seconds, or the
line remains busy during the three minute waiting time, the call will be trans-
ferred back to you.
If you pick up the receiver, you will be reconnected with the external call
partner. You can then place them in the waiting loop again. If you do not pick
up the call within 60 seconds, the exchange line connection is disconnected
completely (for example, even if your line was only busy for a brief period).
Calling a 3rd Internal Subscriber and Transferring them to an Active Call Partner
Requirements:
112 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Telephoning
Call Transfer
Calling a 3rd Internal Subscriber and Transferring them to an Active Call Partner
– a query call that you initiated yourself
During a query call, proceed as described below.
1. Tap on the business card of the call partner whom you would like to transfer.
The business card of the active call partner is connected to the toolbar.
2. Tap on .
3. Dial the telephone number of the subscriber to be called.
As soon as the subscriber being called picks up the receiver, you will have a third call.
Important: Enter telephone numbers exactly as when dialling, for example,
always enter external telephone numbers with a leading exchange line
access number.
4. Tap on .
Both previously active call partners are connected.
You then return to an individual call with your first call partner.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 113
Telephoning
Conference Call
Initiating Conference Calls
Conference Call
During a conference call you are talking with two subscribers at once.
Initiating Conference Calls
Requirements:
– A query call that you initiated yourself
During a query call, proceed as described below.
Tap on .
You are now making a conference call.
Options during a Conference Call
The following actions are possible during a conference call:
Initiating Transferring
When you end a conference call, and would like to talk to each of the conference call partners
separately one after the other, you can put one of the conference call partners on hold in the
background.
Ending a Call With One of the Conference Call Partners
When you end a conference call, but would like to continue talking with one of the conference
call partners, you can end the call with the other conference call partner. Or, one of the call
partners can simply hang up so you can continue talking with the other conference call partner
alone.
Connecting the Other Two Conference Call Partners to Each Other
If you would like to leave a conference call that you initiated, but your conference call partners
would like to continue talking with each other, you can connect the two parties with each other.
114 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Telephoning
Conference Call
Initiating Transferring during a Conference Call
Ending a Conference Call Completely
If you initiated the conference call, you can end the conference call completely.
Initiating Transferring during a Conference Call
Requirements:
– A conference call that you initiated yourself
During a conference call, proceed as described below.
1. Tap on the business card of the call partner to whom you would like to switch.
2. Tap on .
The business card of the active call partner is connected to the toolbar.
You are now making a query call.
Ending a Call With One of the Conference Call Partners
Requirements:
– A conference call that you initiated yourself
During a conference call, proceed as described below.
1. Tap on the business card of the call partner with whom you would like to end the
conversation.
2. Tap on .
You are making a one-to-one call with the other conference call partner.
Connecting the Other Two Conference Call Partners to Each Other
Requirements:
– A conference call that you initiated yourself
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 115
Telephoning
Conference Call
Ending a Conference Call Completely
– to connect two external call partners: Transfer of external calls to external permission
granted in the PBX.
During a conference call, proceed as described below.
Tap on .
The two conference call partners are connected with each other.
Ending a Conference Call Completely
Requirements:
– A conference call that you initiated yourself
During a conference call, proceed as described below.
Put down the receiver or tap on .
The conference call is completely disconnected.
116 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Telephoning
Hands-Free Calling
Initiating a Call in Hands-Free Calling Mode
Hands-Free Calling
During hands-free calling, the loudspeaker and microphone on the device are switched on. This
option allows you to talk on the telephone even if you need your hands for other tasks. In
addition, other people in the room can participate in the call.
Initiating a Call in Hands-Free Calling Mode
When your telephone rings, tap on or press the Loudspeaker key to
initiate the call.
You are now making the call in hands-free calling mode. The LED on the loudspeaker
key blinks red.
If you want to call someone, dial the telephone number and tap on or press the
Loudspeaker key to initiate the call.
You are now making the call in hands-free calling mode. The LED on the loudspeaker
key blinks red.
Note: If you are using a headset, only the loudspeaker key can be used
because is being used to initiate and end the headset call.
Ending a Call in Hands-Free Calling Mode
In hands-free calling mode, proceed as described below.
Press the Loudspeaker key.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 117
Telephoning
Hands-Free Calling
Switching On Hands-Free Calling during a Call
Switching On Hands-Free Calling during a Call
During a normal call or a call in loudspeaker listening mode using the receiver, proceed as
follows.
Press the Loudspeaker key twice. You can then hang up the receiver.
You are now making the call in hands-free calling mode. The LED on the
loudspeaker key blinks red.
Switching Off Hands-Free Calling and Returning to Normal Calling
In hands-free calling mode, proceed as described below.
Pick up the receiver.
You are now making a normal call.
If you have already picked up the receiver or a headset is connected, press the
Loudspeaker key.
You are now making a normal call or a headset call.
118 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Telephoning
Loudspeaker Listening
Switching On Loudspeaker Listening during a Call
Loudspeaker Listening
During loudspeaker listening, both the loudspeaker in the receiver and the loudspeaker in the
device are switched on. This enables other people in the room to listen in on the call. The call
is continued using the microphone in the receiver (no hands-free calling).
Switching On Loudspeaker Listening during a Call
During a normal call using the receiver, proceed as described below.
Press the Loudspeaker key.
You are now making a call in loudspeaker listening mode. The LED on the
loudspeaker key lights up in red.
Switching Off Loudspeaker Listening and Returning to Normal Calling
During loudspeaker listening mode, proceed as described below.
Press the Loudspeaker key twice.
You are now making a normal call.
Ending a Call in Loudspeaker Listening Mode
During loudspeaker listening mode, proceed as described below.
Hang up the receiver.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 119
Telephoning
Headset Call
Initiating Headset Calls
Headset Call
A headset enables you to participate in calls without actually holding the receiver. This is a very
useful feature, especially in certain professional areas (for example, in a call centre).
Initiating Headset Calls
Requirements:
– Headset operation must be enabled
When your telephone rings, tap on or press the hook key to initiate the
call.
You are now making a headset call.
If you want to call someone, dial the telephone number and tap on or press the
hook key to initiate the call.
You are now making a headset call.
Ending a Call in Headset Operation
Requirements:
– Headset operation must be enabled
During a headset call or other call in headset operation, proceed as described below.
Tap on or press the hook key to end the call.
Initiating the Listen-in Function on the Receiver
Requirements:
120 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Telephoning
Headset Call
Ending the Listen-in Function Through the Receiver
– Headset operation must be enabled
During a headset call or other call in headset operation, proceed as described below.
Pick up the receiver.
You are now making a headset call with an enabled receiver loudspeaker.
Ending the Listen-in Function Through the Receiver
Requirements:
– Headset operation must be enabled
During a headset call with an enabled receiver loudspeaker, proceed as described below.
Hang up the receiver.
You are now making a headset call.
If you would like to involve the listening subscribers in the call, press the
Loudspeaker key.
You are now making the call in hands-free calling mode.
Note: If you switch off headset operation during a headset call with an
enabled receiver loudspeaker, you will be able to make a normal call using
the receiver.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 121
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
This section describes the contact app and the call lists that are available in the telephone.
Topics
Contacts (page 122)
Redial List (page 136)
Call Log (page 138)
Caller List (page 141)
122 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
Contacts
Searching For and Displaying a Contact
Contacts
The Contacts app is used for storing useful or frequently dialled telephone numbers along with
their associated names. If a telephone number associated with a contact is transmitted during
a call, the assigned name will be displayed (instead of the telephone number).
Additional entries can be stored with each contact, such as telephone numbers, e-mail
addresses, postal addresses, and notes.
Internal telephone numbers (subscriber, groups, door, emergency call) and the PBX's
telephone book are also displayed. If one of these entries does not have a name, the system
telephone generates a name for use in the telephone book (for example, int. TN45, KW-A
05306, etc.). However you cannot change the contacts in the system. You can only change
them with the PBX's configuration manager.
All the contacts in the contact list are displayed in alphabetical order. Contacts with whom you
communicate frequently are displayed in the Favourites list, as well as in the contact list.
At the top of the display, you can select one of these three views: Groups , All and
Favourites.
Note: If operated on an Auerswald PBX, the accounts for synchronisation
with the PBX are created automatically. The PBX's telephone book is
synchronised automatically with the contacts App.
Searching For and Displaying a Contact
You can search for and display a contact as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Press the Contact/Telephone book key.
2. You can scroll through the contacts or search for a specific contact:
Scrolling: Draw your fingertip quickly upward or downward to scroll through the
contacts.
Notes:
Tap on the display with your fingertip to quickly stop rapid scrolling.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 123
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
Contacts
Searching For and Displaying a Contact
When you are scrolling through alphabetically sorted lists, the symbol
appears on the right. Drag the symbol upwards or downwards to scroll to the
required letter.
Search: Enter the first letter using the keypad.
Notes:
If there no contact is present for the letter you enter here or if the required
contact is not shown, you can delete this letter by tapping on and
entering a different letter.
If more than one contact is present for the letter you entered here, you can
enter additional letters to narrow the selection further.
3. Tap on the name of the contact.
All the entries for that contact are displayed.
Note: If the displayed contact is an internal telephone number or a short-code
dialling number in the PBX, only a single number will be shown for the
contact.
4. Depending on which entries are present, select one of the following options:
Notes:
To define a telephone number as a standard telephone number (default),
touch and hold the telephone number and then tap on Set default.
To define an e-mail address as the default address, touch and hold that e-
mail address and then tap on Set default.
5. To display all contacts again, press the Back key.
Dials the telephone number.
Sends an e-mail.
Starts a chat.
Displays the address on a card.
Tap on a URL to open the associated website.
124 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
Contacts
Dialling from Within the Contacts
Dialling from Within the Contacts
You can dial a telephone number from within contacts as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Press the Contact/Telephone book key.
2. Scroll to the required contact or enter its first letter using the keypad.
3. You can dial the default telephone number or a different associated telephone
number:
Default telephone number: Tap on the name of the contact. The default telephone
number is selected automatically when you initiate a call by lifting the receiver or
pressing the hook key.
Different telephone number: Tap on the name of the contact and then tap on the
required telephone number.
The subscriber is called.
Creating a Contact
In addition to the contacts that are synchronised with the PBX's telephone book, you can create
additional contacts on your telephone.
Note: Any contacts that you create on your telephone will not be synchro-
nised with the PBX's telephone book.
You can create contacts as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Press the Contact/Telephone book key.
2. Tap on .
This opens a dialogue that displays the entries available for the contact.
3. Enter the first name and surname in the Name entry field. Possible entries:
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 125
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
Contacts
Creating a Contact
Note: Tap on to open a dialogue for adding a photograph to a contact.
You can also add a photo at a later time by tapping Contact/telephone book
> Name of the contact > Menu key > Edit contact.
4. Enter the contact's telephone number in the entry field under Telephone. Possible
entries:
Important: Enter telephone numbers exactly as when dialling, for example,
always enter external telephone numbers with a leading exchange line
access number. In the factory settings, the PBX's exchange line access
number is "0", but it can be changed in some PBXs (refer to the instructions
for the PBX).
Note: Tap on Add to generate a new entry field. Tap on to delete an entry
field that is not required.
5. To assign a telephone number to an account (default setting is Undefined), select an
account from the list field to the right of the telephone number under Telephone.
Note: When selecting a telephone number, any account assigned to that
number will be considered only if you dial a telephone number using the
Contacts app.
6. Select a label under Telephone in the second list field to the right of the telephone
number, to identify that telephone number, e.g. private or work (the default setting is
Private).
7. Enter the contact's e-mail address in the entry field under E-mail. Possible entries:
8. Select a label under E-mail in the list field next to the e-mail address to identify that
e-mail address, e.g. private or work (the default setting is Private).
9. If necessary, you can enter additional information, for example Company.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
126 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
Contacts
Editing a Contact
Note: Tap Add another field to open other entry fields, for example Notes
andWeb site.
10. Tap on Done.
Editing a Contact
Contacts created on the telephone can be edited at a later time. You can also merge several
contacts into a single contact, or separate contacts with multiple entries.
Note: Contacts that are synchronised with the PBX's telephone book cannot
be edited on the telephone. You can only change the PBX's telephone book
using the PBX's configuration manager.
You can edit contacts as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– Contact created on the telephone
1. Press the Contact/Telephone book key.
2. Scroll to the required contact or enter its first letter using the keypad.
3. Tap on the name of the contact.
4. Tap the Menu key and then tap on Edit.
5. Make your changes.
Notes:
To merge two contacts, press the Menu key, then tap on Join. Then
tap on the name of the contact you want to merge with the contact that is
currently open for editing.
To separate a contact with several entries into individual contacts, press the
Menu key, tap on Separate, and tap on OK.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 127
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
Contacts
Deleting a contact
6. Tap on Done.
Deleting a contact
Contacts created on the telephone can be deleted at a later time.
Notes:
Contacts that are synchronised with the PBX's telephone book cannot be
deleted from the telephone. You can only change the PBX's telephone book
using the PBX's configuration manager.
If you no longer want to display synchronised contacts from the PBX's
telephone book in the telephone book, you can hide these contacts
(Contact/telephone book key > Name of the contact > Menu > Hide
contact).
You can delete a contact as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– contact created on the telephone
1. Press the Contact/Telephone book key.
2. Scroll to the required contact or enter its first letter using the keypad.
3. Tap on the name of the contact.
4. Press the Menu key and then tap on Delete contact.
5. Tap on OK.
Sharing Contacts
You can share contacts and pass them on to other devices.
128 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
Contacts
Options for Configuring Contacts
Notes:
Contacts are shared as business cards in vCard format.
You can also share all the contacts at once by tapping Contact/telephone
book > Menu > Import/export.
You can share contacts as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– A configured app which supports the sharing of contacts, e.g. e-mail
1. Press the Contact/Telephone book key.
2. Scroll to the required contact or enter its first letter using the keypad.
3. Tap on the name of the contact.
4. Press the Menu key and then tap on Share.
5. Select how you would like to share the contact.
Options for Configuring Contacts
You can assign an individual ring tone to every contact. You can also forward incoming calls
from that contact directly to the answering machine.
Note: You can also link an IP camera to the contact by tapping Contact and
telephone book key > Name of the contact > Menu key > Options and
input DTMF signals for the associated door station.
Configure these options as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– for call forwarding: an operational answering machine
1. Press the Contact/Telephone book key.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 129
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
Contacts
Options for Configuring Contacts
2. Scroll to the required contact or enter its first letter using the keypad.
3. Tap on the name of the contact.
4. Press the Menu key.
5. Tap on Options.
6. Tap on Ring tone and select the ring tone you want to use from the list field.
7. Tap on OK.
8. Select or clear the Incoming calls check box.
9. Only if more than one telephone number has been saved for the contact: Select or
clear the Edit rules for all phone numbers simultaneously check box.
10. Make further settings:
Contact-specific settings: Under TAM options, enable or clear the Contact-
specific rules check box.
Number-specific settings: Under Calls from, select or clear the Number-specific
settings check box.
11. Tap on Call acceptance.
12. In the Call acceptance list field, select one of the following options:
Forwards incoming calls from the contact directly to the answering machine.
Does not forward incoming calls from contact directly to the answering
machine.
The rules are edited for every telephone number at the same time (contact-
specific settings).
The rules are processed individually for each telephone number (telephone
number-specific settings).
Switches on the contact-specific settings.
Switches off the contact-specific settings. (No further action is
required.)
Switches on the telephone number-specific settings.
Switches off the telephone number-specific settings. (No further
action is required.)
130 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
Contacts
Hiding a Contact
13. Tap on Announcement.
14. Select the announcement from the list in the Announcement list field that is to be
used by the answering machine to accept a call from the contact.
15. Tap on OK.
Hiding a Contact
You can also hide a contact which is synchronised with the PBX's telephone book at a later
point in time.
Note: Contacts that are synchronised with the PBX's telephone book cannot
be deleted from the telephone. You can only change the PBX's telephone
book using the PBX's configuration manager.
You can hide contacts as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– a contact that is synchronised with the PBX's telephone book
1. Press the Contact/Telephone book key.
2. Scroll to the required contact or enter its first letter using the keypad.
3. Tap on the name of the contact.
4. Press the Menu key.
5. Tap on Hide.
Announcement and recording: The announcement selected for the contact
is played back. After this, the caller can leave a message.
Only announcement: The announcement selected for the contact is played
back; however, the caller cannot leave a message.
No call acceptance: A call from the contact is not accepted by the answering
machine.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 131
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
Contacts
Adding/Removing Favourites
Notes:
To display a single contact that has been hidden, tap on Contact/telephone
book key > Menu > Show hidden contacts > Contact name > Restore
contact.
To display all the contacts that have been hidden, tap on Contact/
telephone book > Menu > Show hidden contacts > Menu > Restore all
contacts.
Adding/Removing Favourites
Contacts with whom you communicate frequently are displayed in the Favourites list, as well
as in the contact list. Contacts that are stored in the telephone can also be added or removed
manually to/from the favourites.
You can add or remove contacts (favourites) as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Press the Contact/Telephone book key.
2. Scroll to the required contact or enter its first letter using the keypad.
3. Tap on the name of the contact.
4. You can add a contact to the favourites or remove it from the favourites:
Selecting Contacts for Display
You can select which of the contacts in the contact list are to be displayed. The default setting
is that all the contacts in your accounts are displayed in the contact list.
You can select which contacts are to be displayed as follows:
Using the telephone
Add to favourites: Tap (Contact not Favourite).
Remove from the favourites: Tap (Contact is Favourite).
132 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
Contacts
Adjusting Display Options
1. Press the Contact/Telephone book key.
2. Press the Menu key.
3. Tap Contacts to display.
4. Tap on the name of the account under Select Contacts for Display.
5. Tap on the option field next to All contacts or on the name of the account.
6. Only for a personalised contact display: Tap on the option field next to Customize.
7. Tap on the name of the account.
The contact groups in the account are displayed.
8. Select or clear the check box next to the name of the group.
9. Tap on OK.
Adjusting Display Options
You can specify how the contact list is sorted and how the contact names are displayed.
Configure these sorting and display options as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Press the Contact/Telephone book key.
2. Press the Menu key.
3. Tap on Settings.
4. Tap on Sort list by.
All the contacts or all the contacts in the account are now displayed. (No further
action is required.)
This option is disabled.
Opens a dialogue for personalising the display.
This option is disabled.
Display all contacts in the group.
Display none of the contacts in the group.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 133
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
Contacts
Adopting a Telephone Number from Dial Preparation
5. Tap on the option field next to First name or Surname.
6. Tap on Display contact names.
7. Tap on the option field next to First name first or Surname first.
Adopting a Telephone Number from Dial Preparation
Telephone numbers can be adopted from dial preparation and added to existing contacts or
new contacts.
You can adopt telephone numbers from dial preparation as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Dial a telephone number.
2. Tap on .
3. Add the telephone number to an existing contact or to a new contact:
Existing contact: Tap on the name of the contact, make the required entries, and
tap on Done.
New contact: Tap on , make the required entries, and tap on Done.
Adopting a Telephone Number from a List of Telephone Numbers
Telephone numbers can be adopted from various lists of numbers, such as the redial list, call
log, or caller list, and added to existing contacts or new contacts.
You can adopt telephone numbers from a list as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Open the required list:
Sorts the contact list by First name or Surname.
This option is disabled.
Displays the First name or the Surname first in the contact list.
This option is disabled.
134 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
Contacts
Transferring Telephone Numbers to Other Dialogues
Redial list: Press the Redial key .
Call log: Tap on .
Caller list: Press the Message key.
2. Touch and hold the telephone number and then tap on Add to contacts.
3. Add the telephone number to an existing contact or to a new contact:
Existing contact: Tap on the name of the contact, make the required entries, and
tap on Done.
New contact: Tap on , make the required entries, and tap on Done.
Transferring Telephone Numbers to Other Dialogues
Before entering the telephone number in a dialogue (for example, when configuring a speed
dialling key or call forwarding for subscribers), you can select the required telephone numbers
from the contacts.
You can transfer telephone numbers to other dialogues as follows:
Using the telephone
After opening a dialogue for entering telephone numbers, proceed as described below.
1. Tap on .
Note: If you have already entered digits, the contacts and telephone numbers
that include those digits are displayed.
2. Scroll to the required contact or enter its first letter using the keypad.
3. Tap on the name of the contact.
4. Tap on the telephone number you want.
The telephone number is transferred to the entry field.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 135
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
Contacts
Importing/Exporting Contacts
Importing/Exporting Contacts
You can import contacts from an SD card, export them to the SD card, or use apps to share
them with other devices.
Notes:
Contacts will be imported/exported as business cards in vCard format.
You can also share individual contacts under Contact/Telephone book key
> Contact name > Menu key > Share.
You can import/export contacts as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– Import/export: SD card inserted into slot
– Sharing: An app which is set up to support the sharing of contacts, e.g. e-mail
1. Press the Contact/Telephone book key.
2. Press the Menu key.
3. Tap on Import/export.
4. In the Import/export contacts list field, select one of the following options:
Import from storage: Imports contacts from the SD card. Select the vCard file.
Export to storage: Exports contacts to the SD card. Confirm that you want to
export the contacts.
Share visible contacts: Shares the contacts via an app. Confirm that the other
device has received the contacts.
136 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
Redial List
Opening the Redial List
Redial List
The redial list stores the dialled telephone numbers with the number of times they have been
dialled, the date and time of dialling, and the duration of the call.
Opening the Redial List
You can open the redial list as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Press the Redial key .
The redial list now opens. Icons show which type of telephone calls have been made:
2. You can dial a telephone number or open the detail view for a call:
Dial the telephone number: Tap on next to the required entry.
Open the detail view: Tap on the entry you want. Additional options will be
available, depending on the telephone number that has been dialled.
Dialling from Within the Redial List
You can dial from within the redial list as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Press the Redial key .
The redial list now opens.
Note: If you pick up the receiver while the redial list is open, the most recently
dialled telephone number will be dialled immediately.
Successful outgoing call
Unsuccessful outgoing call (telephone number busy or subscriber does
not answer)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 137
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
Redial List
Deleting Entries from the Redial List
2. You can either dial the telephone number without changing it or edit the number
before dialling:
Dial the telephone number without changes: Tap on next to the required entry.
Or touch and hold the required entry and then tap on Call <telephone number>.
Edit telephone number before dialling: Touch and hold the required entry and then
tap on Edit No before call. Make the required changes in the dial preparation.
Then lift the receiver or tap on .
The subscriber is called.
Note: If you want to exit the redial list without dialling a telephone number,
press the Back key.
Deleting Entries from the Redial List
You can delete an entry from the redial list as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Press the Redial key .
The redial list now opens.
2. Touch and hold the required entry and then tap on Remove from redial list.
Note: To delete the entire redial list, press the Menu key, tap on Delete
redial list and then tap on OK.
138 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
Call Log
Opening the Call Log
Call Log
The calls made (incoming and outgoing) are saved in the call log along with the telephone
number of the call partner, as well as the date, time and duration of the call. A previous call
partner can be called directly from the call log.
Note: Call logging can be switched on and switched off under Apps >
Settings > Auerswald > More... > Call log.
Opening the Call Log
You can open the call log as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on the symbol Call log.
2. Select one of the following options:
For the chronological list: The symbols in front of the telephone numbers show which
type of phone call has been made:
3. You can dial a telephone number or open the detail view for a call:
Dial the telephone number: Tap on next to the required entry.
Open the detail view: Tap on the entry you want. Additional options will be
available, depending on the telephone number that has been dialled.
Under this symbol you find you favourites, frequently calld numbers and all
contacts with phone numbers.
Under this symbol you find a chronological list of the phone calls.
Successful outgoing call
Unsuccessful outgoing call (telephone number busy or subscriber does
not answer)
Incoming call
Missed call
Forwarded call (manually or e. g. by call forwarding)
Rejected call (manually or b y the do-not-disturb function)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 139
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
Call Log
Dialling from the Call Log
Dialling from the Call Log
You can dial a telephone number from the call log as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on the symbol Call log.
The call log opens.
Note: If you pick up the receiver while the call log is open, the most recently
active telephone number will be dialled immediately.
2. You can either dial the telephone number without changing it or edit the number
before dialling:
Dial the telephone number without changes: Tap on next to the required entry.
Or touch and hold the required entry and then tap on Call <telephone number>.
Edit telephone number before dialling: Touch and hold the required entry and then
tap on Edit No before call. Make the required changes in the dial preparation.
Then lift the receiver or tap on .
The subscriber is called.
Note: If you want to exit the call log without dialling a telephone number,
press the back key.
Deleting Entries from the Call Log
You delete an entry from the call log as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on the symbol Call log.
The call log opens.
2. Touch and hold the required entry and then tap on Remove from call log.
140 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
Call Log
Deleting Entries from the Call Log
Note: To delete older entries from the call log, press the Menu key
then tap on Delete specific items. In the Age in days entry field, enter the
number of days and then tap on OK.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 141
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
Caller List
Opening the Caller List
Caller List
The caller list stores the telephone numbers of missed calls, including the number of attempts,
date, and time of the calls.
A caller can be called back directly from the caller list.
Note: Under Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More... > Call log you can
specify which types of incoming calls are saved in the call log and displayed
in the caller list.
Opening the Caller List
The LED on the Message key indicates new entries in the caller list.
You can open the caller list as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Press the Message key.
The available lists are displayed.
2. Tap on Caller list (this is ignored if the other lists are empty).
The caller list now opens. The symbols in front of the telephone numbers show which
type of phone call has been made:
3. You can dial a telephone number or open the detail view for a call:
Dial the telephone number: Tap on next to the required entry.
Open the detail view: Tap on the entry you want. Additional options will be
available, depending on the telephone number that has been dialled.
LED signalling on the message key:
off No entries present.
Red (blinking) New entries are present.
Red There are no new messages. There are only entries which you have already
viewed.
Missed call
Rejected call (manually or b y the do-not-disturb function)
142 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
Caller List
Dialling from Within the Caller List
Dialling from Within the Caller List
You can dial from the caller list as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Press the Message key.
The available lists are displayed.
2. Tap on Caller list (this is ignored if the other lists are empty).
The caller list now opens.
Note: If you pick up the receiver while the caller list is open, the most recently
active telephone number will be dialled immediately.
3. You can either dial the telephone number without changing it or edit the number
before dialling:
Dial the telephone number without changes: Tap on next to the required entry.
Or touch and hold the required entry and then tap on Call <telephone number>.
Edit telephone number before dialling: Touch and hold the required entry and then
tap on Edit No before call. Make the required changes in the dial preparation.
Then lift the receiver or tap on .
The subscriber is called.
Note: If you want to exit the caller list without dialling a telephone number,
press the back key.
Deleting Entries from the Caller List
You can delete entries from the caller list as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Press the Message key.
The available lists are displayed.
2. Tap on Caller list (this is ignored if the other lists are empty).
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 143
Contacts and Telephone Number Lists
Caller List
Deleting Entries from the Caller List
The caller list now opens.
3. Touch and hold the required entry and then tap on Remove from caller list.
Note: To delete the entire caller list, press the Menu key, tap on Delete
caller list and then tap on OK.
144 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Functions
This section describes how to configure and operate the functions on your telephone. You can
find out what the functions do, and how to assign a function to a programmable function key.
Topics
External Line Transfer (System Telephone) (page 145)
Call Waiting (page 149)
Do-Not-Disturb (page 154)
Automatic Bandwidth Amplification (page 159)
Boss/Secretary Function (System Telephone) (page 163)
Follow-Me (page 171)
Targeted Exchange Line Access (System Telephone) (page 175)
Groups (System Telephone) (page 179)
Headset Operation (page 191)
InterCom OneWay/Speakerphone (page 196)
Configuration Switchover (System Telephone) (page 209)
Macro Function (page 213)
Pick-Up (page 219)
Power Dialling (page 224)
Relays (System Telephone) (page 226)
Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR) (page 230)
Call Forwarding (page 234)
Control by External Apps (page 256)
Telephone Line (page 259)
Announcement Before Answering for Group (System Telephone) (page 264)
Door Function (System Telephone) (page 270)
Waiting Field Function (System Telephone) (page 277)
Speed Dialling (page 288)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 145
Functions
External Line Transfer (System Telephone)
How External Line Transfer Works
External Line Transfer (System Telephone)
A suitably authorised telephone, for example, the telephone exchange, can transfer the
exchange line access required for an outgoing call to another internal telephone for a short
period of time. This is useful, for example, when this telephone is located in a publicly acces-
sible room, and is only occasionally used for external calls by an employee.
How External Line Transfer Works
External line transfer works like this:
The requesting telephone must initiate an internal call with the telephone authorised to
make the exchange to request exchange line access.
Important:
For an exchange line transfer, the telephone making the transfer needs the
authority level itself to transfer external calls externally.
The requesting telephone needs at least the official exchange line
permission level for incoming external calls.
After the function key assigned to exchange line transfer has been pressed on the
telephone authorised for making exchanges, a confirmation tone is issued to both internal
subscribers and the internal call must be ended.
The requesting telephone now has access to the exchange line settings configured for this
purpose on the PBX. These exchange line settings apply until the first successful outgoing
external call or until the time limitation has elapsed for initiating the external call.
Note: The external line transfer function is configured in the PBX.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Exchange Line Transfer
Press the key during an internal call to transfer the external line access to your call partner for
a single external call. Afterwards, a confirmation tone is played on both internal telephones and
the internal call must be ended.
146 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
External Line Transfer (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Exchange Line Transfer
You can configure external line transfers as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Note: The function can only be set up on a programmable function key that
has an LED (not on a touch function key).
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Exchange Line
Transfer
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key that you would like to define, select the Ext.
line transfer function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
LED signalling on the key:
None
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 147
Functions
External Line Transfer (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Exchange Line Transfer
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
7. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Transfer of external calls to external permission granted in the PBX.
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Exchange Line Transfer
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Ext.line transfer
Functions sorted by group: Exchanges / Lines > Ext.line transfer
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
148 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
External Line Transfer (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Exchange Line Transfer
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. Tap on Assign.
7. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Transfer of external calls to external permission granted in the PBX.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 149
Functions
Call Waiting
Switching Call Waiting On/Off
Call Waiting
If you are already in a call, the call waiting function plays the call waiting tone to notify you that
another call partner is calling.
Switching Call Waiting On/Off
If call waiting is switched on, you will be notified of any incoming calls if you are already on
another call.
If the audible signal and call waiting are switched on, a tone in the receiver will notify the user
(when already on a call) that another call is incoming. If the audible signal is switched off,
incoming calls will be signalled only in the display.
Note: This function is switched on in the telephone. The call waiting function
that is accessible in the telephone should be switched on at all times to
ensure that the PBX will pass all calls to the telephone (this is unnecessary if
the telephone is being used as a system telephone on an Auerswald PBX).
You can switch call waiting on or off as follows:
Using the telephone
To enable or disable call waiting, press the function key that has been configured for call
waiting.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Apps > Functions > Call waiting
Functions sorted by group: Apps > Functions > Availability >
Call waiting
2. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
3. In the Audible indication list field, select one of the following options:
switch on: Enables call waiting.
switch off: Disables call waiting. (No further selection is required.)
150 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Call Waiting
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Waiting
4. Tap on Execute.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Waiting
Press the key to switch call waiting on or off or to switch it over.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function key for call waiting as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Call Waiting
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
switch on: Enables the audible signal.
switch off: Disables the audible signal.
LED signalling on the key:
green Call waiting is switched on and all the settings assigned to the key match up.
yellow Call waiting is switched on but at least one of the settings assigned to the key
does not match.
Off Call waiting is switched off.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 151
Functions
Call Waiting
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Waiting
4. In the list field next to the function key that you would like to define, select the Call
Waiting function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Audible indication list field, select one of the following options:
8. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to switch call waiting on or off.
switch on: Press the key to enable call waiting.
switch off: Press the key to disable call waiting. (No further selection is
required.)
switch on: Press the key to switch the call waiting tone on (when call waiting is
switched on).
switch off: Press the key to switch the call waiting tone off (when call waiting is
switched on).
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
152 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Call Waiting
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Waiting
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Call Waiting
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Call waiting
Functions sorted by group: Availability > Call waiting
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Audible indication list field, select one of the following options:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to switch call waiting on or off.
switch on: Press the key to enable call waiting.
switch off: Press the key to disable call waiting. (No further selection is
required.)
switch on: Press the key to switch the call waiting tone on (when call waiting is
switched on).
switch off: Press the key to switch the call waiting tone off (when call waiting is
switched on).
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 153
Functions
Call Waiting
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Waiting
8. Tap on Assign.
9. Tap on Exit.
154 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Do-Not-Disturb
Switching the Do-Not-Disturb Function On/Off
Do-Not-Disturb
The do-not-disturb function allows you to block calls to your own telephone. The caller then
hears the busy tone. An internal subscriber can reach a telephone with call protection in an
emergency using a priority call.
The do-not-disturb function has no effect on outgoing calls, callbacks, alarm calls, wake-up
calls or InterCom calls.
Switching the Do-Not-Disturb Function On/Off
If the do-not-disturb function is switched on, the specified call types will are not signalled on the
telephone.
The do-not-disturb type indicates which call types it affects when it is switched on.
Notes:
Rejected calls are not added to the caller list on the telephone.
The function is switched on in the telephone and can be used as an alter-
native, or in addition, to the do-not-disturb function in the Auerswald PBX. A
call deblocker that is configured and enabled in the Auerswald PBX will only
apply when the telephone is used as a system telephone in the PBX.
Likewise, a priority call made from an internal telephone on the PBX will only
apply when the telephone is used as a system telephone in the PBX.
You can switch the do-not-disturb function on or off as follows:
Using the telephone
To activate or deactivate the do-not-disturb function, press the function key that has been
configured for do-not-disturb.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Apps > Functions > Do-not-disturb
Functions sorted by group: Apps > Functions > Availability > Do-
not-disturb
2. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 155
Functions
Do-Not-Disturb
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Do-Not-Disturb
3. In the Reject callers list field, select one of the following options:
4. Tap on Execute.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Do-Not-Disturb
Press the key to switch do-not-disturb on or off or to switch it over.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function key for do-not-disturb as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Do-not-disturb
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
switch on: Enables the do-not-disturb function.
switch off: Disables the do-not-disturb function. (No further selection is
required.)
reject all callers: When do-not-disturb is switched on, all incoming calls will be
rejected.
reject anonymous: When do-not-disturb is switched on, all anonymous calls
will be rejected.
reject if not in contacts: When do-not-disturb is switched on all calls are
rejected except for calls from contacts listed in the telephone book.
LED signalling on the key:
green Do-not-disturb is switched on and all of the settings assigned to the key are in
agreement.
yellow Do-not-disturb is switched on but at least one of the settings assigned to the
key is not in agreement.
off The do-not-disturb function is disabled.
156 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Do-Not-Disturb
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Do-Not-Disturb
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key that you would like to define, select the do-not-
disturb function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Reject callers list field, select one of the following options:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to switch do-not-disturb on or off.
switch on: Enables the do-not-disturb function.
switch off: Disables the do-not-disturb function. (No further selection is
required.)
reject all callers: Press the key to switch on rejection of all incoming calls
(when do-not-disturb is switched on).
reject anonymous: Press the key to switch on rejection of anonymous calls
(when do-not-disturb is switched on).
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 157
Functions
Do-Not-Disturb
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Do-Not-Disturb
8. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Do-Not-Disturb
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Do-not-disturb
Functions sorted by group: Availability > Do-not-disturb
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
reject if not in contacts: Press the key to switch on rejection of all calls except
the ones from contacts entered in the telephone book (when do-not-disturb is
switched on).
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
158 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Do-Not-Disturb
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Do-Not-Disturb
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Reject callers list field, select one of the following options:
8. Tap on Assign.
9. Tap on Exit.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to switch do-not-disturb on or off.
switch on: Enables the do-not-disturb function.
switch off: Disables the do-not-disturb function. (No further selection is
required.)
reject all callers: Press the key to switch on rejection of all incoming calls
(when do-not-disturb is switched on).
reject anonymous: Press the key to switch on rejection of anonymous calls
(when do-not-disturb is switched on).
reject if not in contacts: Press the key to switch on rejection of all calls except
the ones from contacts entered in the telephone book (when do-not-disturb is
switched on).
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 159
Functions
Automatic Bandwidth Amplification
Switching Automatic Bandwidth Amplification On/Off
Automatic Bandwidth Amplification
The automatic bandwidth amplification function is used to improve call quality during VoIP calls.
Missing frequency ranges are added to the voice signal to achieve more natural speech repro-
duction and make speech easier to understand. In particular, the quality with which voice
signals transmitted over connections with lower band width can be reproduced can be
improved in this way.
Note: Automatic bandwidth amplification was developed to improve voice
signals. However if calls are made in environments with loud background
noises, automatic bandwidth amplification has a negative effect on voice
quality. The replaying of music, s uch as music on hold, is negatively affected
by automatic bandwidth amplification.
Switching Automatic Bandwidth Amplification On/Off
If automatic bandwidth amplification is switched on, missing frequency ranges are added to the
voice signal, to improve the call quality. If automatic bandwidth amplification is switched off, the
voice signal is reproduced unchanged.
You can switch automatic bandwidth amplification on or off as follows:
Using the telephone
To enable or disable automatic bandwidth amplification, press a function key that has been
configured for automatic bandwidth amplification.
Alternatively:
1. Tap on Apps > Functions > Automatic bandwidth amplification.
2. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
3. Tap on Execute.
switch on: Switches automatic bandwidth amplification on.
switch off: Switches automatic bandwidth amplification off.
160 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Automatic Bandwidth Amplification
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Automatic Bandwidth Amplification
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Automatic Bandwidth Amplifi-
cation
Press the key to switch the automatic bandwidth amplification function on or off or to switch it
over.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure automatic bandwidth amplification as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Note: The function can only be set up on a programmable function key that
has an LED (not on a touch function key).
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Automatic Bandwidth
Amplification
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field beside the function key you want to define, select the Automatic
bandwidth amplification function.
LED signalling on the key:
green Automatic bandwidth amplification is switched on.
Off Automatic bandwidth amplification is switched off.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 161
Functions
Automatic Bandwidth Amplification
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Automatic Bandwidth Amplification
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Automatic Bandwidth Amplifi-
cation
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to switch automatic bandwidth amplification on or off
depending on the status.
switch on: Press the key to switch automatic bandwidth amplification on.
switch off: Press the key to switch automatic bandwidth amplification off.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
162 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Automatic Bandwidth Amplification
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Automatic Bandwidth Amplification
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap on Automatic bandwidth amplification.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. Tap on Assign.
8. Tap on Exit.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to switch automatic bandwidth amplification on or off
depending on the status.
switch on: Press the key to switch automatic bandwidth amplification on.
switch off: Press the key to switch automatic bandwidth amplification off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 163
Functions
Boss/Secretary Function (System Telephone)
Procedure when Calling the Boss Telephone
Boss/Secretary Function (System Telephone)
The boss/secretary function protects the boss telephone from direct calls by forwarding them
to the secretary telephone. The most important difference from call forwarding is that the boss
telephone can still be called from the secretary telephone and the secretary can still transfer
important calls to the boss telephone.
Procedure when Calling the Boss Telephone
If the boss/secretary function has been switched on, calls to the boss telephone are made as
follows:
All internal and external calls (also call through), as well as door calls and callbacks initiated
by the caller, are rerouted to the relevant secretary's telephone. The following types of calls
are not rerouted to the secretary's telephone even when the boss/secretary function has
been switched on:
Alarm calls
InterCom calls (if permitted)
Wake-up calls
Callbacks initiated from the boss telephone
Callbacks after a system software update
Repeated calls from the boss telephone after an exchange transfer
Important: When the boss/secretary function is switched on, incoming calls
are also rerouted to the secretary telephone when the functions do-not-
disturb, call restrictor incoming or subscriber call forwarding are enabled on
the boss telephone. On the other hand, a call from the secretary telephone to
the boss telephone is rerouted if call forwarding is enabled or will give a busy
signal if do-not-disturb is enabled.
The rerouted calls are shown on the display on the boss telephone and can be accepted by
pressing the secretary key (pick-up).
If a rerouted call is picked up on the secretary's telephone, the call can be treated normally.
If multiple boss keys have been programmed, the red blinking LED lights up next to the boss
key, indicating the boss telephone it is assigned to.
Note: On the secretary's telephone, in addition to the boss key, it is also a
good idea to configure a speed dialling key for the telephone number of the
boss telephone to keep track of whether it is busy or not.
164 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Boss/Secretary Function (System Telephone)
Switching the Boss/Secretary Function on the Boss Telephone On/Off
It is possible to initiate a query call to the boss telephone or to forward a call to the boss
telephone by pressing a boss key on the secretary's telephone.
Note: In order to recognise a call that comes from the secretary's telephone,
the secretary's telephone number can be entered into the telephone book on
the manager telephone and assigned a specific ringtone.
Switching the Boss/Secretary Function on the Boss Telephone On/Off
You can switch the boss/secretary function on or off as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– A secretary key configured on the boss telephone
– A suitably configured boss key on the secretary telephone
Press the function key configured as the secretary key.
Configuring and Operating the Secretary Key on the Boss Telephone
Notes:
It is not possible to configure boss keys and secretary keys on the same
telephone at the same time. This means that a telephone cannot be both a
boss telephone and a secretary telephone at the same time.
A maximum of one secretary key can be configured on a boss telephone.
Multiple secretary telephones must be linked in a group.
Press the key while in the telephone's idle state (sleep) to switch the boss/secretary function
on or off.
During an incoming call, rerouted calls are shown on the display of the boss telephone. Press
the secretary key to pick up this call.
In addition, the corresponding LED indicates the status of the function.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 165
Functions
Boss/Secretary Function (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating the Secretary Key on the Boss Telephone
You can configure these functions as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Note: The function can only be set up on a programmable function key that
has an LED (not on a touch function key).
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the Secretary Key on the Boss Telephone
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key that you would like to define, select the
Secretary function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
LED signalling on the secretary key:
green The boss/secretary function is enabled. Press the key to switch the boss/
secretary function on and off.
red (blinking) The boss/secretary function is enabled. A call has just been forwarded to the
associated secretary. Press the key to initiate a pick-up.
off The boss/secretary function is disabled. Press the key to enable the boss/
secretary function.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
166 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Boss/Secretary Function (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating the Secretary Key on the Boss Telephone
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
7. Enter the internal telephone number of the secretary telephone in the Secretary
number entry field.
8. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– A suitably configured boss key on the secretary telephone
Using the Telephone to Configure the Secretary Key on the Boss Telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
3. Select the Level 1 option.
Important: You can only configure this function on the first key level.
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Secretary
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 167
Functions
Boss/Secretary Function (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating the Boss Key on the Secretary Telephone
Functions sorted by group: Boss/Secretary > Secretary
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. Select the telephone number of the secretary telephone:
Manual entry: Enter an internal telephone number in the Secretary number entry
field.
Selection: Tap on and select an internal telephone number.
7. Tap on Assign.
8. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– A suitably configured boss key on the secretary telephone
Configuring and Operating the Boss Key on the Secretary Telephone
Notes:
It is not possible to configure boss keys and secretary keys on the same
telephone at the same time. This means that a telephone cannot be both a
boss telephone and a secretary telephone at the same time.
A maximum of five boss keys can be configured on one telephone.
Press the key to initiate a call or a query call to the corresponding boss telephone.
In addition, the corresponding LED indicates the status of the function.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
168 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Boss/Secretary Function (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating the Boss Key on the Secretary Telephone
You can set up the boss key on the secretary telephone as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Note: The function can only be set up on a programmable function key that
has an LED (not on a touch function key).
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the Boss Key on the Secretary Telephone
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key you want to define, select the Boss function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
LED signalling on the boss key:
green The boss/secretary function is enabled.
red (blinking) The boss/secretary function is enabled. The incoming call has been forwarded
to the corresponding boss telephone. Press the key to initiate a query call to
the boss telephone.
off The boss/secretary function is disabled.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 169
Functions
Boss/Secretary Function (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating the Boss Key on the Secretary Telephone
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
7. Enter the internal telephone number of the boss telephone in the Boss number entry
field.
8. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– A suitably configured secretary key on the boss telephone
Using the Telephone to Configure the Boss Key on the Secretary Telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
3. Select the Level 1 option.
Important: You can only configure this function on the first key level.
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Boss
Functions sorted by group: Boss/Secretary > Boss
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
170 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Boss/Secretary Function (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating the Boss Key on the Secretary Telephone
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. Select the telephone number of the boss:
Manual entry: Enter an internal telephone number in the Boss number entry field.
Selection: Tap on and select an internal telephone number.
7. Tap on Assign.
8. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– A suitably configured secretary key on the boss telephone
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 171
Functions
Follow-Me
Switching Follow-Me On/Off
Follow-Me
Follow-me is a type of "unconditional internal subscriber call forwarding" that is configured on
the individual destination telephone (instead of on the forwarding telephone). This gives you
the option of moving from room to room and taking the calls with you.
Switching Follow-Me On/Off
You can switch the Follow-me function on or off as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
Controlling of the PBX via telephone permission assigned in the PBX
Call forwarding (groups)/Follow-me permission assigned in the PBX
To enable or disable the Follow-me function, press a function key that has been configured
for the Follow-me function.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Apps > Functions > Follow-me
Functions sorted by group: Apps > Functions > Availability >
Follow-me
2. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
3. Select the subscriber whose calls you want to be forwarded:
Manual entry: In the Number to forward entry field, enter an internal telephone
number.
Selection: Tap on and select an internal telephone number.
disable all: Disables all of the currently enabled Follow-me functions. (No
further action is required.)
switch on: Enables Follow-me for a subscriber.
switch off: Disables Follow-me for a subscriber.
172 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Follow-Me
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Follow-Me
Note: Follow-me can also be disabled on the forwarded telephone by using
"Disable Follow-me" on the subscriber's own phone number.
4. Tap on Execute.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Follow-Me
Press the Follow-me key to switch Follow-me on or off, or toggle it, for an internal subscriber.
You can configure the Follow-me function as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Follow-Me
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key that you would like to define, select the Follow-
me function.
LED signalling on the key:
None
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 173
Functions
Follow-Me
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Follow-Me
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Number to forward entry field, enter the internal telephone number of the
subscriber whose calls are to be forwarded.
8. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
Controlling of the PBX via telephone permission assigned in the PBX
Call forwarding (groups)/Follow-me permission assigned in the PBX
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Follow-Me
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
disable all: Press the key to switch all Follow-mes off.
switch on: Press the key to switch Follow-me on.
switch off: Press the key to switch Follow-me off.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
174 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Follow-Me
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Follow-Me
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap on Follow-me.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. Select the subscriber whose calls you want to be forwarded:
Manual entry: In the Number to forward entry field, enter an internal telephone
number.
Selection: Tap on and select an internal telephone number.
8. Tap on Assign.
9. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
Controlling of the PBX via telephone permission assigned in the PBX
Call forwarding (groups)/Follow-me permission assigned in the PBX
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
disable all: Press the key to switch all Follow-mes off.
switch on: Press the key to switch Follow-me on.
switch off: Press the key to switch Follow-me off.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 175
Functions
Targeted Exchange Line Access (System Telephone)
Initiating Targeted Exchange Line Access
Targeted Exchange Line Access (System
Telephone)
Using targeted exchange line access, you can define which MSN (your own external telephone
number) is transmitted for an external call, and which account should be used while doing so.
Initiating Targeted Exchange Line Access
You can initiate targeted exchange line access as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– A function key configured for targeted exchange line access
1. Press a function key configured for targeted exchange line access.
The VoIP account is activated for the next call. The account name is shown in the
selection window.
2. Dial a phone number (an external telephone number without an exchange line access
number).
Note: In any case, the external telephone number must be dialled with the
corresponding local area code, even if it is the local local area code. Special
numbers provided by the VoIP provider, for example numbers for account
balance enquiries or mailbox queries, do not usually have a local area code.
3. Pick up the receiver or tap on .
The subscriber is called.
Notes:
If you are called before you start the conversation, you must initiate the
specific exchange line access again for your next conversation.
If you want to transfer the specified MSN (your external telephone number)
during external calls, calling line identification must be activated (
shown in display).
176 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Targeted Exchange Line Access (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Targeted Exchange Line Access
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Targeted Exchange Line Access
Press the key to initiate targeted exchange line access. You can then immediately dial the
external telephone number (without exchange line access number).
In addition, when functions are defined on the first key level, the status of the account is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function key for targeted exchange line access as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Note: The function can only be set up on a programmable function key that
has an LED (not on a touch function key).
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Targeted Exchange
Line Access
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
LED signalling on the key:
red All the account's call channels are occupied (call not possible).
yellow At least one of the account's call channels is available. Press the key to use
the call channel that is still available.
off All the account's call channels are available. Press the key to occupy one of
the available call channels.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 177
Functions
Targeted Exchange Line Access (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Targeted Exchange Line Access
4. In the list field next to the function key that you would like to define, select the
Exchange line function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
7. In the MSN entry field, enter the external telephone number that you want to transfer
during targeted exchange line access (without an exchange line access number and
without a prefix). Possible entries:
8. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Targeted Exchange Line Access
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Up to 40 digits
Numbers
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
178 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Targeted Exchange Line Access (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Targeted Exchange Line Access
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Exchange line
Functions sorted by group: Exchanges / lines > Exchange line
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Account list field, select the required account.
7. In the MSN entry field, enter the external telephone number that you want to transfer
during targeted exchange line access (without an exchange line access number and
without a prefix). Possible entries:
8. Tap on Assign.
9. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Up to 40 digits
Numbers
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 179
Functions
Groups (System Telephone)
Detailed Information About Group Functions (Call Types)
Groups (System Telephone)
In addition to internal subscribers, the PBX can also manage groups. The internal subscribers
can become members of any (multiple) group(s). These groups can be used, for example, to
group internal subscribers into particular departments or teams (Support, Marketing, Sales).
Membership in a group does not necessarily mean that a subscriber receives calls sent to the
group. A subscriber that is logged out is not involved in any group functions. This can be
especially important for employees of a support department, who should not be available to
customers around the clock, but instead rotate in and out of the hotline.
Detailed Information About Group Functions (Call Types)
Notes:
If a group (subgroup) has been configured in the PBX as a member of a
group (main group), and a subscriber is a member of both of these groups
simultaneously, that subscriber will be handled only as a member of the
main group, during a call.
Subgroups (i.e. groups that have been configured in the PBX as members
of other groups) are "permanently logged in as incoming" and "permanently
logged in as outgoing" in the associated main group.
There are three different ways to log in:
Incoming:
When logging into a group as "incoming", the subscriber will then be in that group's call distri-
bution for internal, external, and door calls.
Outgoing:
When logging into a group as "outgoing", the subscriber acquires a number of characteristics/
access rights from the group. These replace the subscriber's own characteristics/access rights
as an individual subscriber for outgoing work-related calls. A subscriber can be logged in to a
single group as "outgoing" even if the subscriber is a member of more than one group.
Note: If a subscriber logs into different groups as "outgoing" one after the
other, the subscriber will only remain logged in as "outgoing" in the group that
they last logged into.
180 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Groups (System Telephone)
Logging the Telephone In/Out
Incoming and outgoing
When logging into a group as "incoming and outgoing", the subscriber is then in the call distri-
bution of that group for internal, exchange line and door calls and also acquires a number of
additional characteristics/permissions from the group. These replace the subscriber's own
characteristics/permissions as an individual subscriber for outgoing work-related calls.
Note: If a subscriber logs in to more than one group as "incoming and
outgoing", the subscriber will only remain logged in as "incoming and
outgoing" in the group that the subscriber last logged into. In all other groups,
the subscriber is then only "logged in as incoming".
Logging the Telephone In/Out
You can log the telephone in or out as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The telephone is a member of at least one group configured in the PBX
Controlling of the PBX via telephone permission assigned in the PBX
To log a telephone in to a group, or out of it, press the function key that has been configured
for group functions.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Apps > Functions > Group
Functions sorted by group: Apps > Functions > Groups > Group
2. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
3. In the Call direction list field, select one of the following options:
Login: Logs the telephone in to the group.
Logout: Logs the telephone out of the group.
outgoing: Select the type of call for outgoing.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 181
Functions
Groups (System Telephone)
Logging Telephone Out of All Groups
4. Select the required group:
Manual entry: In the Group entry field, enter the group telephone number.
Selection: Tap on and select the group based on its name.
5. Tap on Execute.
Logging Telephone Out of All Groups
You can log a telephone out of all groups out as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The telephone is a member of at least one group configured in the PBX
Controlling of the PBX via telephone permission assigned in the PBX
To log your telephone out of all groups, press the function key that has been configured for
logging out of all groups.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Apps > Functions > Group function
off
Functions sorted by group: Apps > Functions > Groups > Group
function off
2. Tap on Execute.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Group Function
Press the key to execute the action configured in the key for the specified group.
incoming: Select the type of call for incoming.
incoming & outgoing: Selects the type of call for incoming & outgoing.
182 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Groups (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Group Function
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure the function key for the group function as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for the Group Function
Requirements:
– The telephone is a member of at least one group configured in the PBX
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key that you would like to define, select the function
Group.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
LED signalling on the key:
green The telephone is logged in to the group for incoming and outgoing calls.
yellow The phone is logged in to the group as incoming or outgoing according to the
Call direction key assignment.
off The telephone is logged out of the group according to the Call direction key
assignment.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 183
Functions
Groups (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Group Function
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Call direction list field, select one of the following options:
8. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
9. In the Group entry field, enter the group telephone number.
10. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Controlling of the PBX via telephone permission assigned in the PBX
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle log state: press this key to log the telephone in or out, depending on
current status.
login: Press the key to log the telephone into the group.
Logout: Press the key to log the telephone out of the group.
outgoing: Press the key to switch on the "outgoing" call type.
incoming: Press the key to switch on the "incoming" call type.
incoming & outgoing: Press the key to switch on the "incoming & outgoing"
call type.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
184 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Groups (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Group Function
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for the Group Function
Requirements:
– The telephone is a member of at least one group configured in the PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Group
Functions sorted by group: Groups > Group
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Call direction list field, select one of the following options:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle log state: press this key to log the telephone in or out, depending on
current status.
login: Press the key to log the telephone into the group.
Logout: Press the key to log the telephone out of the group.
outgoing: Press the key to switch on the "outgoing" call type.
incoming: Press the key to switch on the "incoming" call type.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 185
Functions
Groups (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Logging Out of All Groups
8. Select the required group:
Manual entry: In the Group entry field, enter the group telephone number.
Selection: Tap on and select the group based on its name.
9. Tap on Assign.
10. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Controlling of the PBX via telephone permission assigned in the PBX
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Logging Out of All Groups
Press the key while the telephone is in the idle state (sleep) to log the telephone out of all
groups.
You can configure a function key for logging out of all groups as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Logging Out of All
Groups
Requirements:
incoming & outgoing: Press the key to switch on the "incoming & outgoing"
call type.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
LED signalling on the key:
green The telephone is logged in as incoming in all groups in which it is a member
and in one group as outgoing.
yellow The telephone is logged in to at least one group.
off The telephone is not logged in to any groups.
186 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Groups (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Logging Out of All Groups
– The telephone is a member of at least one group configured in the PBX
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key that you would like to define, select the Group
function off function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
7. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 187
Functions
Groups (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Logging Out of All Groups
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Controlling of the PBX via telephone permission assigned in the PBX
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Logging Out of All Groups
Requirements:
– The telephone is a member of at least one group configured in the PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Group function off
Functions sorted by group: Groups > Group function off
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. Tap on Assign.
7. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Controlling of the PBX via telephone permission assigned in the PBX
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
188 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Groups (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Displaying the Group State
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Displaying the Group State
Press the key while the telephone is in the idle state to display the current group state of the
subscribers (logged out, logged in as incoming and/or outgoing) on the LEDs of configured
speed dialling keys for approx. 10 seconds. For this purpose the speed dialling keys must be
assigned to the corresponding subscriber telephone numbers. Press the key again within 10
seconds to cancel the display.
You can configure a function key to display the group state as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Displaying the Group
State
Requirements:
– The telephone is a member of at least one group configured in the PBX
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
LED signalling on the key:
green
(blinking)
The group state is being queried.
off The group state is not being queried.
LED signalling on the speed dialling keys assigned to subscriber telephone numbers:
red The telephone is logged out of the group.
green The telephone is logged in to the group for incoming and outgoing calls.
yellow The telephone is logged in to the group for incoming calls.
yellow
(blinking)
The telephone is logged into the group for outgoing calls.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 189
Functions
Groups (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Displaying the Group State
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key that you would like to define, select the function
Group status.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
7. In the Group entry field, enter the group telephone number.
8. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– Speed dialling keys assigned to the corresponding subscriber telephone numbers.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
190 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Groups (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Displaying the Group State
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Displaying the Group State
Requirements:
– The telephone is a member of at least one group configured in the PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Group state
Functions sorted by group: Groups > Group state
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. Select the required group:
Manual entry: In the Group entry field, enter the group telephone number.
Selection: Tap on and select the group based on its name.
7. Tap on Assign.
8. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– Speed dialling keys assigned to the corresponding subscriber telephone numbers.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 191
Functions
Headset Operation
Switching Headset Operation On/Off
Headset Operation
A headset enables you to participate in calls without actually holding the receiver. This is a very
useful feature, especially in certain professional areas (for example, in a call centre).
The COMfortel 1400 IP can be used with corded headsets. The COMfortel 2600/3600 IP can
be used with corded headsets and with cordless headsets with DHSG interfaces, for example,
from Auerswald, Jabra or Plantronics.
Switching Headset Operation On/Off
If headset operation is switched on, press the Hook key to initiate or end a headset call. If
headset operation is switched off, press the Hook key to initiate or end a call without the need
to pick up the receiver (hands-free calling).
You can switch headset operation on or off as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– Connected Headset
To switch headset operation on or off, press the function key that has been configured for the
headset.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Tap on Apps > Functions > Headset.
2. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
3. In the Auto-accept list field, select one of the following options:
switch on: Switches headset operation on.
switch off: Switches headset operation off.
switch off: Switches off automatic call acceptance when headset operation is
switched on.
switch on: Switches on automatic call acceptance when headset operation is
switched on.
switch on (play tone): Switches on automatic call acceptance (with attention
tone) when headset operation is switched on.
192 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Headset Operation
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Headset Operation
Notes:
Switching on automatic call acceptance automatically switches off any
answering machine in a telephone. Conversely, switching on an answering
machine will switch off automatic call acceptance ("Auto-accept").
The COMfortel DECT headset's automatic call acceptance function
applies solely to call acceptance between the COMfortel DECT headset and
the associated base station. Its settings do not affect automatic call
acceptance between the headset and the telephone.
4. Enter a value in the Auto-accept timeout entry field. Possible entries:
5. Tap on Execute.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Headset Operation
Press the key to switch headset operation on or off or to switch it over.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function key for headset operation as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Headset Operation
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
0 to 99: After 0 to 99 seconds, an incoming call is automatically accepted,
depending on the entry.
LED signalling on the key:
green Headset operation is enabled.
yellow Headset operation is switched on but at least one of the settings assigned to
the function key is not in agreement.
off Headset operation is disabled.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 193
Functions
Headset Operation
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Headset Operation
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key that you would like to define, select the function
Headset.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Auto-accept list field, select one of the following options:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to switch headset operation on or off.
switch on: Enables headset operation.
switch off: Enables headset operation. (No further selection is required.)
switch off: Press the key to switch off automatic call acceptance when
headset operation is switched on.
switch on: Press the key to switch on automatic call acceptance when headset
operation is switched on.
switch on (play tone): Press the key to switch on automatic call acceptance
and the attention tone when headset operation is switched on.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
194 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Headset Operation
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Headset Operation
8. Enter a value in the Auto-accept timeout entry field. Possible entries:
9. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
– Connected Headset
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Headset Operation
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap on Headset.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
0 to 99: After 0 to 99 seconds, an incoming call is automatically accepted,
depending on the entry.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 195
Functions
Headset Operation
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Headset Operation
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Auto-accept list field, select one of the following options:
8. Enter a value in the Auto-accept timeout entry field. Possible entries:
9. Tap on Assign.
10. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– Connected headset
toggle: Press the key to switch headset operation on or off.
switch on: Enables headset operation.
switch off: Enables headset operation. (No further selection is required.)
switch off: Press the key to switch off automatic call acceptance when
headset operation is switched on.
switch on: Press the key to switch on automatic call acceptance when headset
operation is switched on.
switch on (play tone): Press the key to switch on automatic call acceptance
and the attention tone when headset operation is switched on.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
0 to 99: After 0 to 99 seconds, an incoming call is automatically accepted,
depending on the entry.
196 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
InterCom OneWay/Speakerphone
How InterCom OneWay Works
InterCom OneWay/Speakerphone
The InterCom function enables an announcement to a single system telephone or to all system
telephones in a group from any internal telephone without someone having to actively accept
a call (for example, in a doctor's office).
If the InterCom destination is a single system telephone, the caller can switch on the micro-
phone in addition to the loudspeaker (hands-free calling) so that a person nearby can speak
with the caller using this intercom system.
How InterCom OneWay Works
The InterCom OneWay process runs as follows:
According to the InterCom destination, either a single system telephone or all system
telephones in a group that have the InterCom function are called.
Note: The only system telephones in the group that are called are those
which are available for a conversation, e.g. those that are not busy. This
means the individual members of the group do not need to be logged into the
group. They are still called if they are logged off from the group.
Depending on InterCom destination is involved, after a short ring, either a single system
telephone or all the system telephones in the group automatically take the call.
The announcement is performed.
Note: For security reasons, the announcement is limited to 120 seconds to
prevent possible misuse of this function (for example, eavesdropping from
distant rooms).
At the end of 120 seconds the connection is automatically interrupted. If the InterCom desti-
nation is a single system telephone, the connection can be maintained by picking up the
system telephone's receiver before the 120 seconds elapses.
Using InterCom OneWay
Requirements:
– InterCom permission at the InterCom destination(s)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 197
Functions
InterCom OneWay/Speakerphone
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for InterCom OneWay
– A function key configured for InterCom OneWay
– Telephone is a system telephone on an Auerswald PBX or InterCom OneWay is performed
on an Auerswald PBX for which the sequence ##011 has been entered under Settings >
Providers & PBXs > Name of Provider/PBX > Numbers > Special numbers > Keypad
sequence for InterCom speakerphone.
Note: The InterCom OneWay announcement can also be made from any
internal telephone (see the PBX manual).
Depending on the kind of action configured on the key, proceed as described.
1. Press the function key for InterCom OneWay or press and hold the function key.
The LED next to the function key lights up green to show a call connection is present.
2. To end the announcement, press the function key again or release the function key.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for InterCom OneWay
Press the key when the telephone is in its idle state to select the subscriber telephone number
or group telephone number stored on the key and initiate the InterCom OneWay
announcement. Depending on the kind of action configured, you need to hold the key during
the announcement (as soon as you release the key again, the connection is terminated) or
switch the key over by briefly pressing the key (the key is pressed once at the start and once
at the end).
In addition, when InterCom destination is defined on the first key level, the status of the
InterCom destination connection is indicated by the corresponding LED.
LED signalling on the key (when assigned to an internal subscriber telephone
number):
green There is currently an active connection to the InterCom destination.
off There is currently no active connection to the InterCom destination.
198 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
InterCom OneWay/Speakerphone
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for InterCom OneWay
You can configure a function key for InterCom OneWay as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Note: The function can only be set up on a programmable function key that
has an LED (not on a touch function key).
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for InterCom OneWay
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key that you would like to define, select the
InterCom OneWay function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
LED signalling on the key (when defined with an internal group telephone number):
green An active connection to all InterCom destinations is present.
green
(blinking)
The InterCom call is sent to the PBX.
yellow There is currently an active connection to at least one InterCom destination.
red No InterCom destination is accessible.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 199
Functions
InterCom OneWay/Speakerphone
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for InterCom OneWay
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Account list field, select the account for the required PBX.
8. Enter the required in-house telephone number in the InterCom destination entry
field.
9. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
– Telephone is a system telephone on an Auerswald PBX or InterCom OneWay is performed
on an Auerswald PBX for which the sequence ##011 has been entered under Settings >
Providers & PBXs > Name of Provider/PBX > Special numbers > Keypad sequence for
InterCom speakerphone
– InterCom permission is present at the InterCom destination
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for InterCom OneWay
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Hold: The key must be held down during the announcement.
toggle: A short press of the key starts the announcement. Another short press
of the key ends the announcement.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
200 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
InterCom OneWay/Speakerphone
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for InterCom OneWay
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap on InterCom OneWay.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Account list field, select the account for the required PBX.
8. Enter the required in-house telephone number in the InterCom destination entry
field.
9. Tap on Assign.
10. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– Telephone is a system telephone on an Auerswald PBX or InterCom OneWay is performed
on an Auerswald PBX for which the sequence ##011 has been entered under Settings >
Providers & PBXs > Name of Provider/PBX > Special numbers > Keypad sequence for
InterCom speakerphone
– InterCom permission is present at the InterCom destination
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Hold: The key must be held down during the announcement.
toggle: A short press of the key starts the announcement. Another short press
of the key ends the announcement.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 201
Functions
InterCom OneWay/Speakerphone
How InterCom Hands-Free Works
How InterCom Hands-Free Works
The InterCom speaker phone function works like this:
A system telephone is called using the InterCom speaker phone function.
After a few rings, the system telephone automatically picks up the call.
The hands-free call is carried out.
Note: For security reasons, hands-free calling (speakerphone) is limited to
120 seconds to prevent possible misuse of this function (for example, eaves-
dropping from distant rooms).
After 120 seconds has elapsed, the connection is automatically interrupted unless the
system telephone receiver is picked up during this time.
Using InterCom Speaker Phone
Requirements:
– InterCom permission is present at the InterCom destination
– A function key configured for InterCom speaker phone
– Telephone is a system telephone on an Auerswald PBX or InterCom OneWay is performed
on an Auerswald PBX for which the sequence ##012 has been entered under Settings >
Providers & PBXs > Name of Provider/PBX > Numbers > Special numbers > Keypad
sequence for InterCom speakerphone.
Note: InterCom speaker phone calls can also be performed by any internal
telephone (see the PBX manual).
Depending on the kind of action configured on the key, proceed as described.
1. Press the function key for InterCom speaker phone or press and hold the function
key.
The LED next to the function key lights up in green to show that a call connection is
present.
2. To end the announcement or hands-free calling function, press the function key
again or release the function key.
202 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
InterCom OneWay/Speakerphone
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for InterCom Speaker Phone
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for InterCom Speaker Phone
Press the key when the telephone is in its idle state to select the telephone number stored on
the key and initiate the InterCom speaker phone announcement. Depending on the kind of
action configured, you need to hold the key during hands-free operation (as soon as you
release the key again, the connection is terminated) or switch the key over by briefly pressing
the key (the key is pressed once at the start and once at the end).
In addition, when InterCom destination is defined on the first key level, the status of the
InterCom destination connection is indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function key for the InterCom speaker phone function as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Note: The function can only be set up on a programmable function key that
has an LED (not on a touch function key).
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for InterCom Speaker
Phone
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
LED signalling on the key:
green There is currently an active connection to the InterCom destination.
green
(blinking)
The InterCom call is sent to the PBX.
red InterCom destination not accessible.
off There is currently no active connection to the InterCom destination.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 203
Functions
InterCom OneWay/Speakerphone
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for InterCom Speaker Phone
4. In the list field next to the function key that you would like to define, select the
InterCom speaker phone function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Account list field, select the account for the required PBX.
8. Enter the required in-house telephone number in the InterCom destination entry
field.
9. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Hold: The key must be held down during the announcement.
toggle: A short press of the key starts the announcement. Another short press
of the key ends the announcement.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
204 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
InterCom OneWay/Speakerphone
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for InterCom Speaker Phone
– Telephone is a system telephone on an Auerswald PBX or InterCom OneWay is performed
on an Auerswald PBX for which the sequence ##012 has been entered under Settings >
Providers & PBXs > Name of Provider/PBX > Special numbers > Keypad sequence for
InterCom speakerphone.
– InterCom permission is present at the InterCom destination
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for InterCom Speaker Phone
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap on InterCom speaker phone.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Account list field, select the account for the required PBX.
8. Enter the required in-house telephone number in the InterCom destination entry
field.
9. Tap on Assign.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Hold: The key must be held down during the announcement.
toggle: A short press of the key starts the announcement. Another short press
of the key ends the announcement.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 205
Functions
InterCom OneWay/Speakerphone
Switching InterCom Permission On/Off
10. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– Telephone is a system telephone on an Auerswald PBX or InterCom OneWay is performed
on an Auerswald PBX for which the sequence ##012 has been entered under Settings >
Providers & PBXs > Name of Provider/PBX > Special numbers > Keypad sequence for
InterCom speakerphone.
– InterCom permission is present at the InterCom destination
Switching InterCom Permission On/Off
You can switch InterCom permission on or off as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Controlling of the PBX via telephone permission assigned in the PBX
For InterCom calls, InterCom permission must be enabled for the system telephone being
called.
Press the function key configured for InterCom permission to switch InterCom permission on
or off.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Tap on Apps > Functions > InterCom permission.
2. Select one of the following options:
3. Tap on Execute.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for InterCom permission
Press the key to which InterCom permission has been assigned to switch InterCom permission
on or off, or toggle it.
switch on: Enables InterCom permission.
switch off: Disables InterCom permission.
206 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
InterCom OneWay/Speakerphone
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for InterCom permission
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function key for InterCom permission as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for InterCom Permission
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key that you would like to define, select the
InterCom Permission function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
LED signalling on the key:
green InterCom permission is enabled.
off InterCom permission is disabled.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 207
Functions
InterCom OneWay/Speakerphone
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for InterCom permission
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
Controlling of the PBX via telephone permission assigned in the PBX
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for InterCom Permission
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap on InterCom permission.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
toggle: Press the key to switch InterCom permission on or off depending on
the status.
switch on: Press the key to enable InterCom permission.
switch off: Press the key to disable InterCom permission.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
208 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
InterCom OneWay/Speakerphone
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for InterCom permission
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. Tap on Assign.
8. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
Controlling of the PBX via telephone permission assigned in the PBX
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to switch InterCom permission on or off depending on
the status.
switch on: Press the key to enable InterCom permission.
switch off: Press the key to disable InterCom permission.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 209
Functions
Configuration Switchover (System Telephone)
Manually Switching the Configuration
Configuration Switchover (System Telephone)
If different configurations (system profiles) have been set up for day, night, etc. in the PBX,
switching between the configurations can be performed either manually or on a time-specific
basis.
Manually Switching the Configuration
You can switch over the configuration manually as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– At least two configurations have been set up in the PBX
– Configuration switching permission granted in the PBX
To switch over a configuration in the PBX, press the function key configured for configuration
switchover.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Tap on Apps > Functions > Configuration.
2. Select the identification number of the required configuration:
Manual entry: Enter the identification number in the Configuration to activate
entry field.
Selection: Tap on and select the identification number based on its name.
3. Tap on Execute.
The selected configuration is switched on.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Configuration Switchover
Press the key to enable the configuration that has been set up.
210 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Configuration Switchover (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Configuration Switchover
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure the function key for configuration switchover as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Configuration
Switchover
Requirements:
– At least two configurations have been set up in the PBX
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key you would like to define, select the Configu-
ration function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
LED signalling on the key:
green The configuration saved in the key is enabled.
off The configuration saved in the key is disabled.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 211
Functions
Configuration Switchover (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Configuration Switchover
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
7. Select in the configuration in the Configuration to activate list field.
8. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– Configuration switching permission granted in the PBX
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Configuration Switchover
Requirements:
– At least two configurations have been set up in the PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
212 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Configuration Switchover (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Configuration Switchover
4. Tap on Configuration.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. Select the identification number of the required configuration:
Manual entry: Enter the identification number in the Configuration to activate
entry field.
Selection: Tap on and select the identification number based on its name.
7. Tap on Assign.
8. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– Configuration switching permission granted in the PBX
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 213
Functions
Macro Function
Macro Execution Process
Macro Function
You can use the macro function to assign digits and various consecutive commands,
for example, for accessing an answering machine remotely or programming a function on the
PBX, to a function key.
Macro Execution Process
Below you will find a description of the process based on an example key to which the
command sequence HZ300CW2Z#22#Lg has been assigned:
Command Z300: When you press the macro key, telephone number 300 (e.g. answering
machine) is entered in the dial preparation.
Command H: The telephone dials the telephone number from the dial preparation and
switches to hands-free calling.
Command C: The telephone waits for the connection.
Command W2: After the connection has been established, the telephone waits another 2
seconds.
Command Z#22#: The telephone dials the DTMF code #22#.
Command Lg: The LED next to the function key switches on (green).
Important: The state of the LED remains the same after a macro is executed
– until the next time the command Lo, Lg, Lr or Ly is executed with the same
key. If the LED is not to be used for status indication, we recommend you add
the command Lo (disable LED) to the end of a macro.
If you want to stop running the macro, press the hook key.
The macro stops running immediately when an incoming call is made to a
destination that is busy or when a connection returns that it is busy. This
occurs, for instance, when the other calling party ends the call or the macro
contains a programming code that is not authorised.
214 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Macro Function
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Macro Function
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Macro Function
Press the key while the telephone in the idle state (sleep) to execute a macro. If the H command
(hang-up/pick-up with the hook key) is located at the beginning of a macro, the macro saved in
the system is run immediately. If this is not the case, you need to first confirm you want the
macro function to start.
In addition, you can read the status of the relevant macro on the LED.
Note: The commands for controlling LEDs are used on both levels of the
keys. This makes it possible, for instance, to use the macro to switch the LED
on, on the one key level, and to use the macro to switch LED off on the other
key level. In this way the switching status of a different function that is
enabled at the same time can be seen on the LED.
You can configure a function key for the macro function as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Note: The function can only be set up on a programmable function key that
has an LED (not on a touch function key).
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for the Macro Function
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
LED signalling on the key:
Depending on the purpose of the commands Lo, Lg, Lr and Ly.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 215
Functions
Macro Function
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Macro Function
Notes:
The Macro function fills both key levels. If one level has a macro assigned
to it, the other level is also automatically filled with an empty macro.
Both macros can later be processed and executed independently of each
other.
If you delete a macro from one key level, the macro is automatically deleted
from the other key level.
4. In the list field next to the function key that you would like to define, select the Macro
function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Account list field, select the required account.
7. Enter the macro in the Macro entry field. Possible entries:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Up to 100 characters for a maximum of 10 keys, up to 40 characters for additional
keys
The following commands:
Z [number
sequence]:
Number sequence selection including * and #
W [digits 1-5]: Waiting time/pause time of 1-5 seconds
H Hang-up/pick-up with the hook key
C Wait for a connection
Lo The LED next to the function key switches off
Lr The LED next to the function key switches on (red)
216 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Macro Function
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Macro Function
Notes:
If you want to configure a programming function on the PBX as a macro,
enter a pause between the password and the programming code sequence.
Pauses cannot be entered at the beginning of a macro.
The maximum pause time is 5 seconds. This restriction does not apply for
the C command (waiting for a connection).
The commands for controlling LEDs are used on both levels of the keys.
This makes it possible, for instance, to use the macro to switch the LED on,
on the one key level, and to use the macro to switch LED off on the other
key level. In this way the switching status of a different function that is
enabled at the same time can be seen on the LED.
8. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for the Macro Function
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
Ly The LED next to the function key switches on (yellow)
Lg The LED next to the function key switches on (green)
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 217
Functions
Macro Function
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Macro Function
The list of available functions is displayed.
Notes:
The Macro function fills both key levels. If one level has a macro assigned
to it, the other level is also automatically filled with a macro.
Both macros can be executed independently of each other.
If you delete a macro from one key level, the macro is automatically deleted
from the other key level.
4. Tap on Macro.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Account list field, select the required account.
7. In the Macro (Level 1) entry field, enter the macro for key level 1. Possible entries:
Notes:
If you want to configure a programming function on the PBX as a macro,
enter a pause between the password and the programming code sequence.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Up to 100 characters for a maximum of 10 keys, up to 40 characters for additional
keys
The following commands:
Z [number
sequence]:
Number sequence selection including * and #
W [digits 1-5]: Waiting time/pause time of 1-5 seconds
H Hang-up/pick-up with the hook key
C Wait for a connection
Lo The LED next to the function key switches off
Lr The LED next to the function key switches on (red)
Ly The LED next to the function key switches on (yellow)
Lg The LED next to the function key switches on (green)
218 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Macro Function
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Macro Function
Pauses cannot be entered at the beginning of a macro.
The maximum pause time is 5 seconds. This restriction does not apply for
the C command (waiting for a connection).
8. In the Macro (Level 2) entry field, enter the macro for key level 2.
9. Tap on Assign.
10. Tap on Exit.
220 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Pick-Up
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Pick-Up
– Telephone is a system telephone on an Auerswald PBX or pick-up is performed on an
Auerswald PBX for which the sequence ##06 has been entered under Settings > Providers
& PBXs > Name of Provider/PBX > Special numbers > Keypad sequence for pickup.
If you are already taking a call, and an internal telephone rings somewhere near you, proceed
as described below.
1. Press the function key configured for pick-up.
2. In the selection window, select the required VoIP account and a telephone number.
Note: If you would like to take a call that is directed to a group, select the pick-
up for the group telephone number.
3. Tap on the caller's business card or tap on .
You are now connected with the caller. Your previous call partner hears the on-hold
music.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Pick-Up
Open the selection window by pressing the key that is not assigned to a specific pick-up
number. You can then enter the internal telephone number of the telephone that is ringing.
Open the caller's business card by pressing the key assigned to a specific pick-up number.
In addition, if you press the key, this initiates a call pick-up on telephones or answering
machines for which permission has been given (refer to the instructions for the PBX).
Note: If you frequently take pick-ups for specific telephones, you can
configure a speed dialling key for the associated internal subscriber/group
telephone number as an alternative to this key. You then see a red blinking
LED indicating that the telephone number is being called. You can press the
speed dialling key and, following confirmation, take the call on your
telephone.
You can configure a function key for pick-up as follows:
LED signalling on the key:
None
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 221
Functions
Pick-Up
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Pick-Up
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Pick-Up
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key that you would like to define, select the Pick-
up function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Account list field, select the account for the required PBX.
7. Enter the required internal telephone number in the Pick-up destination entry field.
8. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
222 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Pick-Up
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Pick-Up
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
– Telephone is a system telephone on an Auerswald PBX or pick-up is performed on an
Auerswald PBX for which the sequence ##06 has been entered under Settings > Providers
& PBXs > Name of Provider/PBX > Special numbers > Keypad sequence for pickup.
Pick-up permission granted in the PBX
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Pick-Up
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap on Pick-up.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 223
Functions
Pick-Up
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Pick-Up
6. In the Account list field, select the required account.
7. If you would like to assign a fixed pick-up number to the function key, select the
required pick-up number.
Manual entry: Enter an internal telephone number in the Pick-up destination
entry field.
Selection: Tap on and select an internal telephone number.
8. Tap on Assign.
9. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– Telephone is a system telephone on an Auerswald PBX or pick-up is performed on an
Auerswald PBX for which the sequence ##06 has been entered under Settings > Providers
& PBXs > Name of Provider/PBX > Special numbers > Keypad sequence for pickup.
Pick-up permission granted in the PBX
224 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Power Dialling
How Power Dialling Works
Power Dialling
If the telephone being called is busy, but automatic callback on busy is not possible, the power
dialling function can be activated instead. With power dialling, the telephone makes repeated
attempts to reach the subscriber being called, at short time intervals.
How Power Dialling Works
You perform power dialling as follows:
The telephone makes repeated attempts to reach the subscriber being called, at short time
intervals (every 10 seconds).
As soon as the subscriber is no longer busy, and the telephone detects a ringing tone, it
switches the loudspeaker on.
The connection is then established, when the person being called picks up the receiver. If
they do not pick up the receiver, power dialling is ended.
If power dialling is not successful, the telephone automatically cancels the function after 10
minutes.
Note: If interruptions occur (for example, calls that are initiated in the
meantime), this time period is extended accordingly.
Initiating Power Dialling
If the connection is busy and callback is not possible, proceed as described below.
1. Tap on .
Note: Avoid leaving the telephone once power dialling has been initiated
since, whenever a connection is established, the loudspeaker on the
telephone will be automatically switched on.
Power dialling is initiated.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 225
Functions
Power Dialling
Cancelling Power Dialling
Cancelling Power Dialling
Requirements:
– Power dialling has been initiated
If you would like to cancel power dialling in progress, proceed as described below.
The telephone is not in the idle state (sleep). It is currently attempting to reach the
subscriber in question: Press the hook key or tap on .
226 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Relays (System Telephone)
Switching Relays On/Off
Relays (System Telephone)
If the PBX is equipped with one or more relays, they can be switched on and off, depending on
the relay function configured for each telephone.
Switching Relays On/Off
You can switch relays on or off as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Switching of relay permission granted in the PBX
– The relay in the PBX has been set up with the Configuration-dependent, PC relayor
manual relay operating modes (refer to the PBX manual for different options here)
To switch a relay on or off, press the function key that has been configured for switching
relays.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Apps > Functions > Relay
Functions sorted by group: Apps > Functions > Door functions/
Relays > Relay
2. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
3. Select the relay:
Manual entry: Enter a relay ID in the Relay ID entry field.
Selection: Tap on and select a relay ID.
4. Tap on Execute.
switch on: Switches the relay on.
switch off: Switches the relay off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 227
Functions
Relays (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Switching Relays
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Switching Relays
Press the key to switch the configured relay on or off or to switch it over.
In addition, when functions are defined on the first key level, the status of the relay is indicated
by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function key for switching relays as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Switching Relays
Requirements:
– The relay in the PBX has been set up with the Configuration-dependent, PC relayor
manual relay operating modes (refer to the PBX manual for different options here)
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key that you would like to define, select the Relay
function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
LED signalling on the key:
green The relay configured on the key is enabled.
off The relay configured on the key is disabled.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
228 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Relays (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Switching Relays
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
8. In the Relay ID entry field, enter the relay telephone number.
9. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Switching of relay permission granted in the PBX
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Switching Relays
Requirements:
– The relay in the PBX has been set up with the Configuration-dependent, PC relayor
manual relay operating modes (refer to the PBX manual for different options here)
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to switch the relay on or off.
switch on: Press the key to switch the relay on.
switch off: Press the key to switch the relay off.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 229
Functions
Relays (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Switching Relays
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Relay
Functions sorted by group: Door functions/Relays > Relay
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. Select the relay:
Manual entry: Enter a relay ID in the Relay ID entry field.
Selection: Tap on and select a relay ID.
8. Tap on Assign.
9. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Switching of relay permission granted in the PBX
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to switch the relay on or off.
switch on: Press the key to switch the relay on.
switch off: Press the key to switch the relay off.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
230 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR)
Switching CLIR On/Off
Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR)
Calling Line Identity Restriction enables the caller to make a call without revealing their
telephone number to the person being called.
Switching CLIR On/Off
If Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR) is switched on, appears in the telephony app's
toolbar before the call is initiated.
Notes:
Anonymous calls are not possible with some VoIP providers. If you intend to
use this function, first ask your provider if this service attribute is supported.
This function can only be used on one of the PBX's land line connections if
the "case-by-case restriction of calling line identification (CLIR)" has been
requested from, and activated by, the network provider.
You can switch the Calling Line Identity Restriction function on or off as follows:
Using the telephone
To switch CLIR on or off, press the relevant button in the telephony app's toolbar or a function
key that has been configured for Calling Line Identity Restriction.
Alternatively:
1. Tap on Apps > Functions > Calling line identity restriction.
2. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
3. Tap on Execute.
toggle: Switches Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR) on or off.
switch on: Switches Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR) on.
switch off: Switches Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR) off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 231
Functions
Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR)
Configuring and Operating a CLIR Function Key
Configuring and Operating a CLIR Function Key
Press the key to switch Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR) on or off or to switch it over.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a CLIR function key as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for CLIR
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key you would like to define, select the Calling line
identification restriction function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
LED signalling on the key:
green Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR) is enabled.
off Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR) is disabled.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
232 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR)
Configuring and Operating a CLIR Function Key
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
– Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR) supported by the VoIP provider
– Land line connections for the PBX: CLIR 2 service feature (case by case suppression of the
display of the telephone number) activated by the network provider
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for CLIR
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to switch Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR) on or
off.
switch on: Press the key to switch Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR) on.
switch off: Press the key to switch Calling Line Identity Restriction off.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 233
Functions
Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR)
Configuring and Operating a CLIR Function Key
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap on Calling line identity restriction.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. Tap on Assign.
8. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR) supported by the VoIP provider
– Land line connections for the PBX: CLIR 2 service feature (case by case suppression of the
display of the telephone number) activated by the network provider
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to switch Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR) on or
off.
switch on: Press the key to switch Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR) on.
switch off: Press the key to switch Calling Line Identity Restriction off.
234 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding Variants
Call Forwarding
Call forwarding is a method for automatically forwarding calls. The following types of calls are
handled separately:
Calls to single telephones: Call forwarding for subscribers (t) in the telephone (also for
standard VoIP telephones) or call forwarding for subscribers (t) in the PBX (only for system
telephones)
Calls to groups: Call forwarding for groups in the PBX, only for system telephones
Calls to connections: Call forwarding for external telephone numbers in the PBX, only for
system telephones
Call Forwarding Variants
The telephone supports several different variations of call forwarding.
Important: Call forwarding is only possible for external telephone numbers if
the telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX. Calls for
subscribers can only be forwarded to other internal telephones if the
telephone is called via the same PBX.
Call Forwarding for Subscribers (scr) and Call Forwarding for Subscribers (scr) in the
PBX
When subscriber call forwarding is used, internal and external calls to a single telephone can
be rerouted to other internal telephones or external connections. As a result, a subscriber or
their substitute can take these calls on another telephone.
Subscriber call forwarding ensures that the subscriber in question or their substitute is always
available at their own telephone number, even if the subscriber cannot take a call on their own
telephone.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 235
Functions
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding Variants
Important: Subscriber call forwarding does not function for incoming group
calls to your telephone. If you would like to prevent your telephone from
ringing unanswered when calls to the group in which you belong come
through, you need to log yourself out of the group or set up group call
forwarding.
Note: If you want to set up subscriber call forwarding on the destination
telephone, use the Follow-me function.
Subscriber call forwarding is switched on in the telephone. Forwarded calls are saved in the
call log. The function is also available for standard VoIP telephones.
Subscriber call forwarding in the PBX is switched on in the PBX. The telephone does not have
any messages about forwarded calls. The calls are not saved in the call log.
Call Forwarding for Groups
When call forwarding for groups is used, internal and external calls to a group can be rerouted
to other internal telephones or external connections. In this way, a person who is not a member
of this group and therefore cannot log in, can receive these calls.
Group call forwarding ensures that someone is always available on the group telephone
number, even if the calls cannot be taken by a member of the group.
Please refer to the PBX Operation Guide for instructions about how to set up call forwarding
for groups.
Call Forwarding for External Telephone Numbers
When call forwarding for external telephone numbers is used, calls directed to an external
telephone number (dialled by an external caller) are rerouted to other external connections.
This allows these calls to be taken on another telephone, for example, on a mobile phone if no
one can take the call internally.
Call forwarding for external telephone numbers can be configured for the current configuration
or for the permanent configuration.
The call forwarding for external telephone numbers is set up in the PBX, using the system
telephone, and is executed there.
Note: If you also want to forward internal calls, use call forwarding for
subscribers instead of call forwarding for external telephone numbers. This
also allows calls to be forwarded to internal telephones.
236 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding Types
Call Forwarding Types
As there can be many reasons for not accepting a call, e .g. the relevant subscriber is not
present or another conversation is currently taking place on this telephone, three kinds of call
forwarding are available:
"Call fwd. unconditional" (Unconditional Call Forwarding)
The telephone being called does not ring. The call is forwarded immediately.
Call Forwarding On Busy
When the telephone being called is busy, the call is forwarded immediately.
Call Forwarding On No Reply
The telephone being called will ring for a defined period of time. If the call is not accepted, it is
forwarded.
Notes:
A different destination can be configured for each of the three kinds of call
forwarding.
If "Call fwd. on busy" and "Call fwd. on no reply" are enabled at the same
time, both will apply. The call is forwarded to the different, appropriate
telephone numbers, depending on which situation occurs – the telephone is
busy or nobody answers.
If "Call fwd. unconditional" is enabled in addition to the "Call fwd. on busy"
and/or "Call fwd. on no reply" options, all calls are forwarded immediately.
In this case, the other kinds of call forwarding are overridden, but remain
enabled. As soon as "Call fwd. unconditional" is switched off, all the other
types of call forwarding that are enabled become effective again.
Switching Call Forwarding for Subscribers On/Off
Note: This function is switched on in the telephone. Forwarded calls are
saved in the call log. The function is also available for standard VoIP
telephones.
You can switch call forwarding for subscribers on or off as follows:
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 237
Functions
Call Forwarding
Switching Call Forwarding for Subscribers On/Off
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– for in-house destination numbers: Telephone must be connected to a PBX.
To switch call forwarding for subscribers on or off, press the function key that has been
configured for Call fwd. (scr).
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Apps > Functions > Call fwd. (scr.)
Functions sorted by group: Apps > Functions > Availability >
Call fwd. (scr.)
2. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
3. In the Forwarding type list field, select one of the following options:
4. In the Account list field, select the required account.
5. Select the call forwarding destination:
Manual entry: Enter the destination number in the Forwarding destination entry
field. Possible entries:
Important: Enter telephone numbers exactly as when dialling, for example,
always enter external telephone numbers with a leading exchange line
access number (exception: selected account publ. exchange).
Selection: Tap on and select the destination number based on its name.
switch on: Switches on call forwarding for subscribers.
switch off: Switches off call forwarding for subscribers. (No further action is
required.)
unconditional: Switches "Call fwd. unconditional" (unconditional call
forwarding) on or off for subscribers.
on busy: Switches "Call fwd. on busy" (call forwarding on busy) on or off for
subscribers.
not responding: Switches call forwarding "on no reply" on or off for
subscribers.
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
238 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Call Forwarding
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding for Subscribers
6. Tap on Execute.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding for Subscribers
Press the key assigned to Call fwd. (scr.) to switch call forwarding for subscribers for the
configured destination on or off, or to switch it over, in the telephone.
Press a single key assigned to Call fwd. (scr.), deactivate all to switches off all currently
enabled call forwardings for the subscriber.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure the function key for call forwarding for subscribers as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Call Forwarding for
Subscribers
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
LED signalling on the key (not applicable if assigned with "Call fwd. (scr.), deactivate
all":
red Subscriber call forwarding is enabled for the configured destination.
yellow Subscriber call forwarding is enabled for a different destination.
off Subscriber call forwarding is disabled.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 239
Functions
Call Forwarding
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding for Subscribers
4. In the list field next to the function key you would like to define, select the Call fwd.
(scr.) function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Forwarding type list field, select one of the following options:
8. In the Account list field, select the required account.
9. Enter the destination number in the Forwarding destination entry field. Possible
entries:
Important: Enter telephone numbers exactly as when dialling, for example,
always enter external telephone numbers with a leading exchange line
access number (exception: selected account publ. exchange).
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to switch call forwarding for subscribers on or off.
switch on: Press the key to switch on call forwarding for subscribers.
switch off: Press the key to switch off call forwarding for subscribers.
unconditional: Assigns the "call forwarding (unconditional)" function to a key
for the subscriber.
on busy: Assigns the "call forwarding (on busy)" function to a key for the
subscriber.
not responding: Assigns the "call forwarding (if not responding)" function to a
key for the subscriber.
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
240 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Call Forwarding
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding for Subscribers
10. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
–for in-house destination numbers: Telephone must be connected to a PBX.
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Call Forwarding for Subscribers
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Call fwd. (scr.)
Functions sorted by group: Accessibility > Call fwd. (scr)
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 241
Functions
Call Forwarding
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding for Subscribers
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Forwarding type list field, select one of the following options:
8. In the Account list field, select the required account.
9. Select the call forwarding destination:
Manual entry: Enter the destination number in the Forwarding destination entry
field. Possible entries:
Important: Enter telephone numbers exactly as when dialling, for example,
always enter external telephone numbers with a leading exchange line
access number (exception: selected account publ. exchange).
Selection: Tap on and select the destination number based on its name.
10. Tap on Assign.
11. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
–for in-house destination numbers: Telephone must be connected to a PBX.
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Switching Off All Call
Forwarding for Subscribers
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
toggle: Press the key to switch call forwarding for subscribers on or off.
switch on: Press the key to switch on call forwarding for subscribers.
switch off: Press the key to switch off call forwarding for subscribers.
unconditional: Assigns the "call forwarding (unconditional)" function to a key
for the subscriber.
on busy: Assigns the "call forwarding (on busy)" function to a key for the
subscriber.
not responding: Assigns the "call forwarding (if not responding)" function to a
key for the subscriber.
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
242 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Call Forwarding
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding for Subscribers
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key you want to define, select the Call fwd. (scr.),
deactivate all function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
–for in-house destination numbers: Telephone must be connected to a PBX.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 243
Functions
Call Forwarding
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding for Subscribers
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Switching Off All Call Forwarding
for Subscribers
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Call fwd. (scr.), deactivate all
Functions sorted by group: Availability > Call fwd. (scr.), deactivate all)
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. Tap on Assign.
7. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
–for in-house destination numbers: Telephone must be connected to a PBX.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
244 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Call Forwarding
Switching Call Forwarding for Subscribers in the PBX On/Off
Switching Call Forwarding for Subscribers in the PBX On/Off
Note: The function is switched on in the PBX. The telephone does not have
any messages about forwarded calls. The calls are not saved in the call log.
You can switch call forwarding for subscribers on or off as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
To enable or disable call forwarding for subscribers, press a function key configured for Call
fwd (scr. in PBX).
Alternatively:
1. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Apps > Functions > Call fwd. (scr. in
PBX)
Functions sorted by group: Apps > Functions > Accessibility >
Call fwd. (scr. in PBX)
2. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
3. In the Forwarding type list field, select one of the following options:
4. Select the call forwarding destination:
Manual entry: Enter the destination number in the Forwarding destination entry
field. Possible entries:
switch on: Switches on call forwarding for subscribers.
switch off: Switches off call forwarding for subscribers. (No further action is
required.)
unconditional: Switches "Call fwd. unconditional" (unconditional call
forwarding) on or off for subscribers.
on busy: Switches "Call fwd. on busy" (call forwarding on busy) on or off for
subscribers.
not responding: Switches call forwarding "on no reply" on or off for
subscribers.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 245
Functions
Call Forwarding
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding for Subscribers in the PBX
Important: Enter telephone numbers exactly as when dialling, for example,
always enter external telephone numbers with a leading exchange line
access number (exception: selected account publ. exchange).
Selection: Tap on and select the destination number based on its name.
5. Tap on Execute.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding for Subscribers
in the PBX
Press the key to which Call fwd (scr. in PBX) has been assigned to switch call forwarding for
subscribers for the configured destination in the PBX on or off, or toggle it.
The key assigned to switch off all call forwarding for subscribers (Call fwd. (scr.), deactivate
all) switches off call forwarding for subscribers.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure the function key for call forwarding for subscribers in the PBX as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Call Forwarding for
Subscribers in the PBX
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
LED signalling on the key (not applicable if assigned with "disable all"):
red Subscriber call forwarding is enabled for the configured destination.
yellow Subscriber call forwarding is enabled for a different destination.
off Subscriber call forwarding is disabled.
246 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Call Forwarding
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding for Subscribers in the PBX
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key you would like to define, select the Call fwd
(scr. in PBX) function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Forwarding type list field, select one of the following options:
8. Enter the destination number in the Forwarding destination entry field. Possible
entries:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to switch call forwarding for subscribers on or off.
switch on: Press the key to switch on call forwarding for subscribers.
switch off: Press the key to switch off call forwarding for subscribers.
unconditional: Assigns the "call forwarding (unconditional)" function to a key
for the subscriber.
on busy: Assigns the "call forwarding (on busy)" function to a key for the
subscriber.
not responding: Assigns the "call forwarding (if not responding)" function to a
key for the subscriber.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 247
Functions
Call Forwarding
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding for Subscribers in the PBX
Important: Enter telephone numbers exactly as when dialling, for example,
always enter external telephone numbers with a leading exchange line
access number (exception: selected account publ. exchange).
9. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
–The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Call Forwarding for Subscribers in
the PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Call fwd. (scr. in PBX)
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
248 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Call Forwarding
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding for Subscribers in the PBX
Functions sorted by group: Accessibility > Call fwd. (scr. in PBX)
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Forwarding type list field, select one of the following options:
8. Select the call forwarding destination:
Manual entry: Enter the destination number in the Forwarding destination entry
field. Possible entries:
Important: Enter telephone numbers exactly as when dialling, for example,
always enter external telephone numbers with a leading exchange line
access number (exception: selected account publ. exchange).
Selection: Tap on and select the destination number based on its name.
9. Tap on Assign.
10. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
–The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to switch call forwarding for subscribers on or off.
switch on: Press the key to switch on call forwarding for subscribers.
switch off: Press the key to switch off call forwarding for subscribers.
unconditional: Assigns the "call forwarding (unconditional)" function to a key
for the subscriber.
on busy: Assigns the "call forwarding (on busy)" function to a key for the
subscriber.
not responding: Assigns the "call forwarding (if not responding)" function to a
key for the subscriber.
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 249
Functions
Call Forwarding
Switching Call Forwarding On/Off for External Telephone Numbers
Switching Call Forwarding On/Off for External Telephone Numbers
You can switch call forwarding for external telephone numbers on or off as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– Features to be configured by the network provider (fwd, keypad) permission granted in the
PBX
To switch call forwarding for external telephone numbers on or off, press a function key
configured for Call fwd.: MSN/DDI.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Tap on Apps > Functions > Call forwarding external telephone
number.
2. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
3. In the Forwarding type list field, select one of the following options:
4. In the Forwarding configuration list field, select one of the following options:
Note: Call forwarding can only be switched on for the current configuration if
all call forwarding is switched off for the permanent configuration.
switch on: Switches on call forwarding for external telephone numbers.
switch off: Switches off call forwarding for external telephone numbers. (No
further action is required.)
unconditional: Switches on or off "Call fwd. unconditional" (unconditional call
forwarding) for external telephone numbers.
on busy: Switches on or off call forwarding for external telephone numbers on
busy.
not responding: Switches on or off call forwarding for external telephone
numbers on no reply.
current configuration: Call forwarding for external telephone numbers is
switched on or off in the current configuration.
permanent configuration: Call forwarding for external telephone numbers is
switched on or off in the permanent configuration.
250 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Call Forwarding
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding for External Phone Numbers
5. Enter the PBX's external telephone number that is to be forwarded (without exchange
line access number but with area code), in the Number to forward entry field.
Possible entries:
6. Select the call forwarding destination:
Manual entry: Enter the destination number in the Forwarding destination entry
field. Possible entries:
Important: Enter telephone numbers exactly as when dialling, for example,
always enter external telephone numbers with a leading exchange line
access number.
Selection: Tap on and select the destination number based on its name.
7. Tap on Execute.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding for External
Phone Numbers
Press the key assigned to Call fwd.: MSN/DDI to switch call forwarding of external telephone
numbers for the configured destination on or off.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
LED signalling on the key:
red In the selected configuration, call forwarding for external telephone numbers
is switched on in the central office/PBX for the configured destination.
yellow Call forwarding for external telephone numbers has been configured for busy
lines or when there is no reply. However, this is overridden by "Call fwd.
unconditional" (unconditional call forwarding) for external telephone numbers.
yellow Call forwarding for external telephone numbers is switched on in the central
office/PBX for a different destination or a different configuration.
off Call forwarding for external telephone numbers is switched off in the central
office/PBX.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 251
Functions
Call Forwarding
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding for External Phone Numbers
Important: When operating the function via the key, the success/failure of the
operation is indicated by a change in colour on the LED. During the configu-
ration in the central office (this takes from a few seconds up to a minute), the
LED blinks yellow.
You configure all forwarding for external telephone numbers as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Call Forwarding for
External Phone Numbers
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key you want to define, select the Call fwd.: MSN/
DDI function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
252 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Call Forwarding
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding for External Phone Numbers
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Forwarding type list field, select one of the following options:
8. Select the configuration from the Forwarding configuration list field:
Note: Call forwarding can only be switched on for the current configuration if
all call forwarding is switched off for the permanent configuration.
9. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
10. In the Number to forward entry field, enter the external telephone number of the PBX
(without the exchange line access number, but with the area code). Possible entries:
11. Enter the destination number in the Forwarding destination entry field. Possible
entries:
toggle: Press the key to switch call forwarding for external telephone numbers
on or off.
switch on: Press the key to switch on call forwarding for external telephone
numbers.
switch off: Press the key to switch off call forwarding for external telephone
numbers.
unconditional: Assigns the "call forwarding (unconditional)" function to a key
for the external telephone number.
on busy: Assigns the "call forwarding (on busy)" function to a key for the
external telephone number.
not responding: Assigns the "call forwarding (if not responding)" function to a
key for the external telephone number.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
current configuration: Call forwarding for external telephone numbers is
switched on or off or switched over only in the current configuration.
permanent configuration: Call forwarding for external telephone numbers is
switched on or off or switched over in the permanent configuration.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 253
Functions
Call Forwarding
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding for External Phone Numbers
Important: Enter telephone numbers exactly as when dialling, for example,
always enter external telephone numbers with a leading exchange line
access number. (Exception: selected account exchange line).
12. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– Features to be configured by the network provider (fwd, keypad) permission granted in the
PBX
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Call Forwarding for External Phone
Numbers
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
254 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Call Forwarding
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding for External Phone Numbers
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap on Call fwd.: MSN/DDI.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Forwarding type list field, select one of the following options:
8. Select the configuration from the Forwarding configuration list field:
Note: Call forwarding can only be switched on for the current configuration if
all call forwarding is switched off for the permanent configuration.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to switch call forwarding for external telephone numbers
on or off.
switch on: Press the key to switch on call forwarding for external telephone
numbers.
switch off: Press the key to switch off call forwarding for external telephone
numbers.
unconditional: Assigns the "call forwarding (unconditional)" function to a key
for the external telephone number.
on busy: Assigns the "call forwarding (on busy)" function to a key for the
external telephone number.
not responding: Assigns the "call forwarding (if not responding)" function to a
key for the external telephone number.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
current configuration: Call forwarding for external telephone numbers is
switched on or off or switched over only in the current configuration.
permanent configuration: Call forwarding for external telephone numbers is
switched on or off or switched over in the permanent configuration.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 255
Functions
Call Forwarding
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding for External Phone Numbers
9. In the Number to forward entry field, enter the external telephone number of the PBX
(without the exchange line access number, but with the area code). Possible entries:
10. Select the call forwarding destination:
Manual entry: Enter the destination number in the Forwarding destination entry
field. Possible entries:
Important: Enter telephone numbers exactly as when dialling, for example,
always enter external telephone numbers with a leading exchange line
access number. (Exception: selected account exchange line).
Selection: Tap on and select the destination number based on its name.
11. Tap on Assign.
12. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– Features to be configured by the network provider (fwd, keypad) permission granted in the
PBX
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
256 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Control by External Apps
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Control by External App
Control by External Apps
You can control programmable function keys and the corresponding LEDs by externally
developed apps, e. g. apps for house automation. For information about the available apps
contact your system administrator.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Control by External App
Press the key to enable an externally developed app to control the function key and the corre-
sponding LEDs.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED. For information about LED signalling on a key contact
your system administrator.
You configure the key as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Control by External
App
Requirements:
– External app installed on the telephone
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 257
Functions
Control by External Apps
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Control by External App
4. In the list field beside the function key you want to define, select the Controlled by
external app function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the App to start entry field, enter the name of the app to control the function key.
Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
7. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Control by External App
Requirements:
– External app installed on the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
258 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Control by External Apps
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Control by External App
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap on Controlled by external app.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. Tap on Select and select the app to control the function key from the list.
7. Tap on Assign.
8. Tap on Exit.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 259
Functions
Telephone Line
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Telephone Line
Telephone Line
Use the Telephone line function to assign a function key to a specific account and then use that
function key to route outgoing calls through this account.
In addition, a function key assigned to
Telephone line can be used to monitor incoming calls
and put them on hold when required.
Several function keys can be configured for the same account.
Note: The Telephone line function uses only your own accounts, which have
been configured in the telephone (refer to Chapter Settings > Accounts).
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Telephone Line
Press the key assigned to Telephone line to initiate an outgoing call through the account
(assuming there are no pending incoming calls for the assigned account).
If you press the key assigned to the Telephone line during an incoming call through the
assigned account then, when you pick up the receiver, the system will put the caller on hold.
All the keys assigned to
Telephone line for the same account form one group. If a connection
is established through the account, one of the keys in this group, that is not yet assigned to a
call, will automatically be selected to represent the connection state.
If you have used the keys to put several callers on hold (LED lights up in yellow), you can
connect the required caller's calling card with the toolbar (LED flashes yellow) by pressing the
keys repeatedly.
Notes:
The business card connected to the toolbar is active.
Business cards have different outline colours: green for the active business
card, light blue for a business card that requires attention, and grey for a
business card that is shown only for informational purposes.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
260 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Telephone Line
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Telephone Line
Note: You cannot run this function if the account stored for a function key has
been deleted. When you press the key, a dialogue opens, in which you can
assign a new account to the key. Tap on New accountnext to the Account ID,
select a new account from the list field and then tap on Assign.
You can configure a function key for the telephone line as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Note: The function can only be set up on a programmable function key that
has an LED (not on a touch function key).
LED signalling on the key (when assigned to an internal subscriber telephone
number):
red A call is currently being held on the telephone or the user is attempting to
establish a connection.
red (blinking) The telephone is now being called, and the caller's business card is not linked
with the toolbar (in the background).
If you pick up the receiver and press the key, this puts the call on hold.
red (blinks
twice)
The telephone is now being called, and the caller's business card is linked
with the toolbar.
If you pick up the receiver and press the key, this puts the call on hold.
yellow The call is held locally in the telephone and the caller's business card is not
connected to the toolbar.
Press the key twice to pick up the call.
yellow (blinks
twice)
The call is held locally in the telephone and the caller's business card is
connected to the toolbar.
Press the key once to pick up the call.
yellow (blinks
quickly)
The telephone dials the telephone number after you press the function key.
off No call is pending. Press the key to initiate a call through the assigned
account.
Timeout: The function key is blocked for approximately 2 to 3 seconds after a
call over a Telephone line has been completed.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 261
Functions
Telephone Line
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Telephone Line
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for the Telephone Line
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
Note: The Line function fills both key levels. If one level is filled, the other
levels are also filled automatically.
4. Select the Telephone line function in the list field next to the function key that you
want to define.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. Enter the telephone number for the account in the MSN entry field:
PBX account: Enter the in-house telephone number in the MSN entry field.
Possible entries:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Max. 40 digits
Numbers
262 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Telephone Line
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Telephone Line
SIP account: Enter the telephone number of the account or, in the case of SIP
trunking, the DDI main number and DDI extension without prefix, in the MSN entry
field. Possible entries:
7. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for the Telephone Line
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
Note: The Line function fills both key levels. If one level is filled, the other
levels are also filled automatically.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Telephone line.
Functions sorted by group: Exchanges / lines > Telephone line).
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
Max. 40 digits
Numbers
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 263
Functions
Telephone Line
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Telephone Line
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Account list field, select the required account.
7. Enter the telephone number for the account in the MSN entry field:
PBX account: Enter the in-house telephone number in the MSN entry field.
Possible entries:
SIP account: Enter the telephone number of the account or, in the case of SIP
trunking, the DDI main number and DDI extension without prefix, in the MSN entry
field. Possible entries:
8. Tap on Assign.
9. Tap on Exit.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Max. 40 digits
Numbers
Max. 40 digits
Numbers
264 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Announcement Before Answering for Group (System Telephone)
More Information on "Announcement Before Answering" for Group
Announcement Before Answering for Group
(System Telephone)
For external calls, the announcement before answering ("Announcement bef. answer")
function enables the caller to be greeted with an automatic announcement before the call is
accepted. (Charges apply for the external caller.)
More Information on "Announcement Before Answering" for Group
You switch the "Announcement before answering" function on separately for each group.
Two types of "Announcement before answering" are available:
Announcement before answering on busy
The caller hears the announcement for "Announcement before answering" only if all the group
members are busy. After this, the caller is automatically connected to the appropriate queue.
Announcement before answering always
The caller hears the announcement no matter whether the group members are being called or
are busy. If all the group members are busy, the caller is automatically connected to the appro-
priate queue.
Note: Using the configuration manager on the PBX you can define whether
the telephones set to the "always" variant ring during or after an
announcement. You can also define whether the caller hears on-hold music
or the call tone after hearing the announcement.
Switching Announcement Before Answering for Group On/Off
You can switch the announcement before answering for group on or off as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The telephone is a member of at least one group configured in the PBX
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 265
Functions
Announcement Before Answering for Group (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Announcement Before Answering
– Text before answering announcement present in the PBX and assigned to the group
To switch the announcement before answering on or off for a group, press the function key
that has been configured for Announcement bef. answer.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Apps > Functions > Text before
answering
Functions sorted by group: Apps > Functions > Groups > Text
before answering
2. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
3. Select the required group:
Manual entry: In the Group entry field, enter the group telephone number.
Selection: Tap on and select the group based on its name.
4. Tap on Execute.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Announcement Before Answering
Press the key while the telephone is the idle state to switch announcement before answering
for the configured group on or off or to switch it over.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
switch off: Switches off announcement before answering for the group.
on busy: Switches on announcement before answering "on busy" for the
group.
always: Switches on continuous announcement before answering for the
group.
266 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Announcement Before Answering for Group (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Announcement Before Answering
You can configure the function key for the announcement before answering function as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Announcement
Before Answering
Requirements:
– The telephone is a member of at least one group configured in the PBX
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key that you would like to define, select the function
text before answering.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
LED signalling on the key:
green The announcement before answering function is enabled for the configured
group.
off The announcement before answering function is disabled for the configured
group.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 267
Functions
Announcement Before Answering for Group (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Announcement Before Answering
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
8. In the Group entry field, enter the group telephone number. Possible entries:
9. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– Text before answering announcement present in the PBX and assigned to the group
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
switch off: Press the key to switch off an announcement before answering for
the group.
on busy: Press the key to switch on an announcement before answering
"busy" for the group.
always: Press the key to switch on a continuous announcement before
answering for the group.
toggle on busy: Press the key to switch an announcement before answering
"busy" for the group on or off.
toggle always: Press the key to switch a continuous announcement before
answering for the group on or off.
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
268 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Announcement Before Answering for Group (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Announcement Before Answering
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Announcement Before Answering
Requirements:
– The telephone is a member of at least one group configured in the PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Announcement before answering
Functions sorted by group: Groups > Announcement bef. answer
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
switch off: Press the key to switch off an announcement before answering for
the group.
on busy: Press the key to switch on an announcement before answering
"busy" for the group.
always: Press the key to switch on a continuous announcement before
answering for the group.
toggle on busy: Press the key to switch an announcement before answering
"busy" for the group on or off.
toggle always: Press the key to switch a continuous announcement before
answering for the group on or off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 269
Functions
Announcement Before Answering for Group (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Announcement Before Answering
7. Select the required group:
Manual entry: In the Group entry field, enter the group telephone number.
Selection: Tap on and select the group based on its name.
8. Tap on Assign.
9. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– Text before answering announcement present in the PBX and assigned to the group
270 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Door Function (System Telephone)
Using the Door Function
Door Function (System Telephone)
If a door terminal system is connected to the PBX's interface you can run the following
functions. A call with the door (intercom) can be held from any telephone. During a call to the
door, the door can be opened (open door) and a stairwell light controlled by switching a relay
(switch on light).
These functions can be performed on the system telephone even without a pending door call.
Using the Door Function
You can operate the door function as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– Telephone number configured in the PBX for the door station
– Relays configured in the PBX for opening the door and the stairwell light.
Open door permission granted in the PBX
To operate the door function, press the function key configured for the door function.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Apps > Functions > Door functions
Functions sorted by group: Apps > Functions > Door functions/
relays > Door functions
2. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
3. Select a door:
Manual entry: Enter a telephone number in the Door number entry field.
Selection: Tap on and select a door.
open: Opens the door.
switch on light: Switches the stairwell light on.
open door - switch on light: Opens the door and switches the stairwell light
on.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 271
Functions
Door Function (System Telephone)
Own Telephone Rings (Door Call) – Opening Door
4. Tap on Execute.
Notes:
The Light on door function switches on the relay of the corresponding door
station separately at the time configured in the PBX.
To establish a call connection with the door station, you must press a
suitably configured speed dialling key.
Own Telephone Rings (Door Call) – Opening Door
You can accept a door call/open the door as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– Telephone number configured in the PBX for the door station
– Relays configured in the PBX for opening the door and the stairwell light.
Open door permission granted in the PBX
When you receive a door call, open the door by pressing the function key that has been
configured to open the door.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
Tap on .
The door is opened.
Note: If the relay of the associated door station is used for switching the
stairwell light, it can be switched on by tapping on within the time
defined in the PBX.
272 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Door Function (System Telephone)
Door Knock – Opening Door
Door Knock – Opening Door
During a call, you can generally handle an incoming door call as you would an incoming
external subscriber. In particular, you can reject, ignore, or accept, a door call, and open the
door for the visitor, by using the door opening function.
You can open the door as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– Telephone number configured in the PBX for the door station
– Relays configured in the PBX for opening the door and the stairwell light.
Open door permission granted in the PBX
– Call waiting must be enabled
When you receive a door call, open the door by pressing the function key that has been
configured to open the door.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
Tap on .
The door is opened.
Note: If the relay of the associated door station is used for switching the
stairwell light, it can be switched on by tapping on within the time
defined in the PBX.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Door Function
Press the key to switch on the door opening function and/or the light.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
Note: To use the intercom function, you can also assign the door number to
a speed dialling key.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 273
Functions
Door Function (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Door Function
You can configure a function key for the door function as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for the Door Function
Requirements:
– Telephone number configured in the PBX for the door station
– Relays configured in the PBX for opening the door and the stairwell light.
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key you would like to define, select the Door
function function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
LED signalling on the key:
green The door opening function and/or the light are switched on.
yellow The light is switched on.
off None of the functions configured on the key are enabled.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
274 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Door Function (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Door Function
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
Note: The Light on door function switches on the 3rd relay of the corre-
sponding door station separately at the time configured in the PBX.
7. Enter a telephone number in the Door number entry field. Possible entries:
8. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for the Door Function
Requirements:
– Telephone number configured in the PBX for the door station
– Relays configured in the PBX for opening the door and the stairwell light.
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
open: Press the key to open the door.
switch on light: Press the key to switch the stairwell light on.
open door - switch on light: Press the key to open the door and switch the
stairwell light on.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 275
Functions
Door Function (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Door Function
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Door function
Functions sorted by group: Door functions/Relays > Door functions
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
Note: The Light on door function switches on the 3rd relay of the corre-
sponding door station separately at the time configured in the PBX.
7. Select the door:
Manual entry: Enter a telephone number in the Door number entry field.
Selection: Tap on and select a door.
8. Tap on Assign.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
open: Press the key to open the door.
switch on light: Press the key to switch the stairwell light on.
open door - switch on light: Press the key to open the door and switch the
stairwell light on.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
276 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Door Function (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Door Function
9. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Open door permission granted in the PBX
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 277
Functions
Waiting Field Function (System Telephone)
Configuring a Waiting Field
Waiting Field Function (System Telephone)
Callers can be parked in a waiting field. This can either happen automatically or when you press
a key. They are then retrieved individually and their calls forwarded.
Important: The Waiting field function is only available in the COMpact 4000,
COMpact 5000/R and COMmander 6000/R/RX PBXs.
Configuring a Waiting Field
You configure a waiting field as described below:
Use the configuration manager in the PBX to configure automatic call acceptance for
the waiting field.
Use the configuration manager on the PBX or the PBX's configuration software to
select a system telephone to be a waiting field reception.
Notes:
Before you can operate the waiting field with multiple waiting field recep-
tions, a group must be configured and selected as the waiting field
reception. The maximum number of waiting field receptions is limited by the
number of possible group members.
If multiple system telephones have been configured and enabled as waiting
field receptions, more than one employee can operate the waiting field at the
same time. Incoming calls and waiting callers are then signalled in all the
waiting field receptions. However, if someone is talking to a caller in one of
the waiting field receptions, this caller is not signalled in the other waiting
field receptions.
In each waiting field reception, you will need to assign the Shared line function to one
or more function keys (waiting field keys). These keys are then used to monitor and
process the exchange line calls.
After you have configuring a waiting field key on a system telephone, the waiting field
reception function on that system telephone in question is enabled automatically and
can be switched on and off, if necessary.
278 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Waiting Field Function (System Telephone)
Sequence for Call Acceptance in Waiting Field
Sequence for Call Acceptance in Waiting Field
Call acceptance in the waiting field is carried out as follows:
If all of the waiting field receptions have been switched off, the telephones ring according to
normal call distribution.
After one or more waiting field reception telephones are switched on, calls that belong to
the waiting field are signalled on the key (waiting field keys), on the switched on waiting field
reception telephones, that have been assigned with the
Shared line function.
Important:
After the waiting field reception telephone is switched on, any subscriber call
forwarding configured for the telephone, parallel calls, and the do-not-
disturb function, are switched off. These functions (for example, call
forwarding on an answering machine) do not become available again until
the waiting field reception is switched off (on the telephone). The function in
question (except parallel calling) must be switched on again.
The caller can be accepted normally by picking up the receiver or placed in the waiting field
by pressing the associated waiting field key. If the automatic call acceptance is set to "on
busy" or "according to a time", callers are also automatically placed in the waiting field.
When a caller is put into a waiting field, they hear the on-hold music. If a group is defined
as a waiting field reception, and the "Announcement before answering" function is enabled,
the caller first hears first the "Announcement before answering" announcement.
A caller is kept a max. of 16 minutes without interruption in the waiting field. If the waiting
time is not interrupted by a call to the waiting caller or the call is forwarded, the connection
is disconnected.
Press the corresponding waiting field key to initiate a call with a caller in the waiting field.
An external caller in the waiting field can be transferred internally as normal. If the line of
the person being called is busy, the external subscriber can be placed in that person's
queue. If the person being called does not accept the call, the external caller is put back in
the waiting field.
If no one is waiting in the waiting field, you can make calls as normal and use the keys on
the telephone without any restrictions.
Some of the keys have no function for as long as information about a call in the queue is
visible on the display (LED lights up in yellow). In this case, as soon as you pick up the
receiver, you are connected to the call in the queue. You can prevent this by pressing the
Home key. After this, the LED lights up in red and the display is in the idle state (sleep). Now
you can make a call as normal, for instance, by selecting a phone number from the
telephone book.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 279
Functions
Waiting Field Function (System Telephone)
Switching Waiting Field Reception On/Off
Switching Waiting Field Reception On/Off
You can switch waiting field reception on or off as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone has been selected in the PBX as a waiting field reception
In order to switch the waiting field reception on or off, press the function key configured for the
waiting field reception.
Alternatively:
1. Tap on Apps > Functions > Waiting field reception.
2. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
Important:
It is only possible to switch a waiting field reception off if no callers are
present in the waiting field. If more than one waiting field reception is in use,
this limitation only applies when only one waiting field reception is switched
on.
When the waiting field reception is switched off, the subscriber is automati-
cally logged out of the waiting field incoming group; the subscriber is
automatically logged on again when the waiting field reception is switched
on again.
3. Tap on Execute.
switch on: Enables the waiting field reception.
switch off: Disables the waiting field reception.
280 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Waiting Field Function (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating Function Keys for a Shared Line
Configuring and Operating Function Keys for a Shared Line
Press the waiting field key that has been assigned the Shared Line function to place a caller
(indicated by the key) into the waiting field. You also press the same key to establish a
connection with the caller from the waiting field. Whether you press the key depends on the
current status as displayed by the LED next to the key.
LED signalling on the key:
red A call is currently being held on the telephone or the user is attempting to
establish a connection.
red (blinking) The telephone is now being called, and the caller's business card is not linked
with the toolbar (in the background).
Pick up the receiver and press the key, to put this call in the waiting field.
red (blinks
twice)
The telephone is now being called, and the caller's business card is linked
with the toolbar.
Pick up the receiver and press the key, to put this call in the waiting field.
green The call is being held in the waiting field and the caller's business card is not
connected with the toolbar (in the background).
green (blinks
twice)
The call is being held in the waiting field and the caller's business card is
connected with the toolbar (in the background).
yellow The call is held locally in the telephone and the caller's business card is not
connected to the toolbar.
Press the key twice to pick up the call.
yellow (blinks
twice)
The call is held locally in the telephone and the caller's business card is
connected to the toolbar.
Press the key once to pick up the call.
yellow (blinks
quickly)
The telephone dials the telephone number after you press the function key.
off No call is pending. Press the key to initiate a call through the assigned
account.
Timeout: The function key is blocked for approximately 2 to 3 seconds after a
call over a
Shared Line has been completed.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 281
Functions
Waiting Field Function (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating Function Keys for a Shared Line
Note: If you press the key to place a caller in the waiting field, the LED next
to the key lights up yellow. If a caller is placed in the waiting field either
automatically or by another waiting field reception, the LED then lights up red.
You can configure function keys for a shared line as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Note: The function can only be set up on a programmable function key that
has an LED (not on a touch function key).
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for a Shared Line
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
Note: The Shared Line function fills both key levels. If one level is filled, the
other levels are also filled automatically.
4. Select the Shared line function in the list field next to the function key you would like
to define.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
282 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Waiting Field Function (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating Function Keys for a Shared Line
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. Select the type of shared line from the Shared Line list field.
7. In the Account list field, select the account for the required PBX.
8. Enter the telephone number of the account in the MSN/URL entry field:
PBX account: Enter the in-house telephone number in the MSN/URL entry field.
Possible entries:
SIP account: Enter the telephone number of the account in the MSN/URL entry
field. Possible entries:
Important: You cannot assign calls via the DDI for SIP trunking accounts and
ISDN PBX connections (PTP). Do not enter a value in the MSN/URL entry
field. The calls are assigned via the account.
9. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The telephone has been selected in the PBX as a waiting field reception
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Max. 40 digits
Numbers
Max. 40 digits
Numbers
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 283
Functions
Waiting Field Function (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating Function Keys for a Shared Line
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for a Shared Line
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
Note: The Shared Line function fills both key levels. If one level is filled, the
other levels are also filled automatically.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Shared Line.
Functions sorted by group: Exchanges/lines > Shared Line.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. Select the type of shared line from the Shared Line list field.
7. In the Account list field, select the required account.
8. Enter the telephone number of the account in the MSN/URL entry field:
PBX account: Enter the in-house telephone number in the MSN/URL entry field.
Possible entries:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Max. 40 digits
Numbers
284 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Waiting Field Function (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating Function Key for Switching Waiting Field Reception On/Off
SIP account: Enter the telephone number of the account in the MSN/URL entry
field. Possible entries:
Important: You cannot assign calls via the DDI for SIP trunking accounts and
ISDN PBX connections (PTP). Do not enter a value in the MSN/URL entry
field. The calls are assigned via the account.
9. Tap on Assign.
10. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The telephone has been selected in the PBX as a waiting field reception
Configuring and Operating Function Key for Switching Waiting Field Reception
On/Off
Press the key while in the telephone's idle state (sleep) to switch the waiting field reception on
or off or switch it over.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function key for switching waiting field reception on and off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Max. 40 digits
Numbers
LED signalling on the key:
green The waiting field reception is enabled.
off The waiting field reception is disabled.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 285
Functions
Waiting Field Function (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating Function Key for Switching Waiting Field Reception On/Off
Configuring Function Key for Switching Waiting Field Reception On/Off via Configu-
ration Manager
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key that you would like to define, select the Waiting
field reception function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Account list field, select the required account.
8. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to switch the waiting field reception telephone on or off.
switch on: Enables the waiting field reception.
switch off: Disables the waiting field reception.
286 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Waiting Field Function (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating Function Key for Switching Waiting Field Reception On/Off
Further steps:
– Save your configuration before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone has been selected in the PBX as a waiting field reception
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Switching Waiting Field Reception
On/Off
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Waiting field reception.
Functions sorted by group: Exchange line functions/lines > Waiting
field reception.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 287
Functions
Waiting Field Function (System Telephone)
Configuring and Operating Function Key for Switching Waiting Field Reception On/Off
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Account list field, select the required account.
8. Tap on Assign.
9. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone has been selected in the PBX as a waiting field reception
toggle: Press the key to switch the waiting field reception telephone on or off.
switch on: Enables the waiting field reception.
switch off: Disables the waiting field reception.
288 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Speed Dialling
Options for Using Speed Dialling Keys
Speed Dialling
With the speed dialling function you can define a function key with not only internal and external
phone numbers, but also with programming sequences on the PBX. You can dial the saved
codes easily by simply pressing the key.
Options for Using Speed Dialling Keys
Speed dialling keys can be used in the following ways:
To Dial a Telephone Number
The telephone number will be dialled automatically when a speed dialling key is pressed. If the
receiver is hung up, the saved telephone number is first used for dial preparation.
If a speed dialling key is pressed during a call, a query call is placed and the saved telephone
number is dialled immediately.
To Dial a Portion of a Telephone Number
The telephone enables you to assign a portion of a phone number to a speed dialling key
(for example, telephone provider prefixes). You can then assemble the telephone number parts
by pressing several speed dialling keys in sequence. The names assigned to the telephone
numbers are shown one after the other on the display.
Assignment Overview
Speed dialling keys assigned to internal subscriber and group telephone numbers allow the
user to view the LEDs and gain an overview of which subscribers and groups are active or busy.
Pick-Up and Call Pick-Up
Speed dialling keys defined with internal subscriber and group phone numbers enable the pick-
up function for these subscribers and groups. If the LED next to the key is blinking red because
the saved telephone number is being called, you can take the call on your telephone by
pressing the speed dialling key and then confirming.
If a subscriber allows call take-over (for example, on an answering machine), you can still take
the call on your telephone in the same manner even after it has already been accepted.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 289
Functions
Speed Dialling
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Speed Dialling
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Speed Dialling
Press the key while the telephone is in the idle state to transfer the telephone number saved in
the key to dial preparation (can be used as an additional number).
Exception: If the saved telephone number is an internal phone number, and is currently being
called, you will pick up this call.
After picking up the receiver, press the key to dial the telephone number saved in the key.
Press the key during a call to put the active call partner on hold and to dial the telephone
number saved in the key.
In addition, when a subscriber or a group telephone number is defined on the first key level, the
status of the subscriber or group is indicated by the corresponding LED.
LED signalling on the key (when assigned to an internal subscriber telephone
number):
red A call is in progress on the internal telephone. Press the key to initiate a call
pick-up.
red (blinking) The internal telephone is currently being called or a call is waiting on that
telephone. Press the key to initiate a pick-up.
green The internal telephone is configured as a boss telephone.
green
(blinking)
A call is being made from the internal telephone and the call was not
accepted.
yellow The internal telephone is unreachable (do-not-disturb or subscriber call
forwarding has been configured).
yellow
(blinking)
Only when there is an internal VoIP subscriber and display of the registration
status is switched on: The telephone is not registered on the PBX.
off The internal telephone is available. Press the key to place a call.
LED signalling on the key (when defined with an internal group telephone number):
red Calls are in progress on all logged-in telephones or no telephone in the group
is logged in.
red (blinking) A logged in telephone is currently being called or a call is waiting on that
telephone. Press the key to initiate a pick-up.
yellow The group is not available (call forwarding is configured for the group).
off The group is available. Press the key to place a call.
290 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Speed Dialling
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Speed Dialling
Note: You cannot run this function if the account stored for a function key has
been deleted. When you press the key, a dialogue opens, in which you can
assign a new account to the key. Tap on New accountnext to the Account ID,
select a new account from the list field and then tap on Assign.
You can configure a function key for speed dialling as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Speed Dialling
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key that you would like to define, select the Speed
dialling function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
LED signalling on the key (when defined with an external telephone number):
green
(blinking)
A call was made from the external subscriber's telephone and the call was not
accepted (assuming the external number is transferred).
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 291
Functions
Speed Dialling
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Speed Dialling
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Account list field, select the required account.
7. Enter a telephone number in the Destination number entry field.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Speed Dialling
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap on Auto-dial for speed dial key.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Account list field, select the required account.
7. Select a telephone number from the Destination number entry field:
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
292 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Functions
Speed Dialling
Switching Automatic Dialling for Speed Dialling On/Off
Manual entry: Enter a telephone number in the Destination number entry field.
Selection: Tap on and select a telephone number.
8. Tap on Assign.
9. Tap on Exit.
Switching Automatic Dialling for Speed Dialling On/Off
If automatic pick-up during speed dialling is enabled, and you press a speed dialling key while
the telephone is in the idle state, this automatically picks up a call (when headset is in use) or
switches the telephone to hands-free operation.
You can switch automatic dialling for speed dialling on or off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch Auto-dial for Speed Dialling On/Off
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Function keys screen.
2. Select or clear the Auto-dial for speed dial key check box.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch Automatic Pick-Up during Speed Dialling On/Off
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > Function keys.
2. Select or clear the Auto-dial for speed dial key check box.
Switches "Auto-dial for speed dial key" on.
Switches "Auto-dial for speed dial key" off.
Switches "Auto-dial for speed dial key" on.
Switches "Auto-dial for speed dial key" off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 293
Functions
Speed Dialling
Switching the Display of the Registration Status On/Off
Switching the Display of the Registration Status On/Off
If the registration status display is switched on, the individual registration status of the
subscribers is shown by the LEDs of the speed dialling keys assigned to internal VoIP
subscribers. If a particular VoIP subscriber is not registered at the PBX, their LED will blink
yellow.
You can switch the registration status display on or off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch the Display of the Registration Status On/Off
1. Open the Settings > Device > Display screen.
2. Select or clear the Registration status for VoIP subscribers check box.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch the Display of the Registration Status On/Off
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Display > More.
2. Select or clear the Registration status display for VoIP subscribers check box
under LED settings.
Switches the display of the registration status on.
Switches the display of the registration status off.
Switches the display of the registration status on.
Switches the display of the registration status off.
294 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Local Answering Machine
This section describes how to set up and operate the functions on your answering machine
(optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details). It includes descriptions of what
the functions do and – where possible – how to define these functions on programmable
function keys.
Topics
Forwarding a Caller to the Answering Machine (page 295)
Answering Machine Accepts Call – Call Acceptance (page 296)
Basic Settings (page 297)
Readiness (page 302)
Call Acceptance (page 307)
Call Recording (page 320)
Forwarding Messages by E-Mail (page 330)
E-Mail Settings (page 339)
E-Mail Internationalisation (page 346)
Remote Access (page 352)
Answering Machine List (page 362)
Announcements (page 371)
Voice Memos (page 378)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 295
Local Answering Machine
Forwarding a Caller to the Answering Machine
Forwarding a Caller to the Answering Machine
Requirements:
– Readiness is switched off on the answering machine
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
When you receive a call, proceed as described below.
1. Tap on .
The answering machine accepts the call.
296 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Answering Machine Accepts Call – Call Acceptance
Answering Machine Accepts Call – Call
Acceptance
Note: If the listen-in function has been enabled on the answering machine,
the loudspeaker on the telephone is switched on for listening in when a call
is accepted by the answering machine.
If the answering machine has already accepted the call, proceed as described below.
1. Pick up the receiver or press the hook key.
You are now connected with the caller.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 297
Local Answering Machine
Basic Settings
Switching Automatic Playback On/Off
Basic Settings
Default settings have already been configured for the basic functions of the answering
machine. You can tailor these basic functions to suit your own specific requirements as
described below.
Switching Automatic Playback On/Off
If automatic playback is enabled, new recordings are played back automatically after the
answering machine list is opened.
You can switch automatic playback on or off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch Automatic Playback On/Off
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > TAM-App screen.
2. Select or clear the Automatic playback check box.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch Automatic Playback On/Off
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine.
2. Select or clear the Automatic playback check box.
Switches automatic playback on.
Switches automatic playback off.
298 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Basic Settings
Switching the Call Information for New Messages On/Off
Switching the Call Information for New Messages On/Off
If call information for new messages is enabled, you are told when the call was received before
the message is played.
You can switch call information for new messages on or off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch Call Information for New Messages On/Off
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > TAM-App screen.
2. Select or clear the Call information check box.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch Call Information for New Messages On/Off
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine.
2. Select or clear the Call information check box.
Switches automatic playback on.
Switches automatic playback off.
Switches on the date and time display before the message/voice memo.
Switches off the date and time display before the message/voice memo.
Switches on the date and time display before the message/voice memo.
Switches off the date and time display before the message/voice memo.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 299
Local Answering Machine
Basic Settings
Switching the Separator Tone for New Messages On/Off
Switching the Separator Tone for New Messages On/Off
If the separator tone is switched on for new messages, you will hear a tone after each message
if you listen to several new messages. This makes it easier to identify the individual messages.
You can switch the separator tone for new messages on or off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch the Separator Tone for New Messages On/
Off
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > TAM-App screen.
2. Select or clear the Separator tone check box.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch the Separator Tone for New Messages On/Off
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine.
2. Select or clear the Separator tone check box.
Switches on the separator tone between messages.
Switches off the separator tone between messages.
Switches on the separator tone between messages.
Switches off the separator tone between messages.
300 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Basic Settings
Switching the Listen-in Function On/Off
Switching the Listen-in Function On/Off
If the listen-in function is enabled, the loudspeaker on the telephone is switched on for listening
in when a call is accepted by the answering machine. Depending on whether you would also
like to listen to your own announcement on the answering machine each time, you can specify
whether the telephone loudspeaker is switched on or off when this announcement is played.
You can switch the listen-in function on or off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch the Listen-in Function On/Off
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Answering machine
screen.
2. In the Listening-in list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch the Listen-in Function On/Off
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine.
2. Tap on Listening-in and select one of the following options in the list field:
No listen-in: Switches listening-in off.
Listen-in with announcement: Switches listening-in on. The telephone's
loudspeaker is already switched on when the announcement is played.
Listen-in without announcement: Switches listening-in on. The telephone's
loudspeaker is disabled when the announcement is played.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 301
Local Answering Machine
Basic Settings
Switching the Listen-in Function On/Off
No listen-in: Switches listening-in off.
Listen-in with announcement: Switches listening-in on. The telephone's
loudspeaker is already switched on when the announcement is played.
Listen-in without announcement: Switches listening-in on. The telephone's
loudspeaker is disabled when the announcement is played.
302 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Readiness
Switching Readiness On/Off
Readiness
To enable the answering machine to take calls and record messages, readiness must be
switched on and the SD card must be inserted.
If readiness and call waiting are switched on, the answering machine can also take and record
a second incoming call at the same time as the current call.
Note: If a voice mailbox is assigned to the telephone as a system telephone
on an Auerswald PBX, this voice mailbox accepts all the calls received from
the system telephone account and takes precedence over the local
answering machine. If calls come in over a different account, the local
answering machine accepts them according to its configuration.
Switching Readiness On/Off
Notes:
Even when readiness is switched on, the system will only accept calls of the
types for which call acceptance has been enabled.
You can also switch readiness on and off remotely.
You can switch readiness on or off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch Readiness On/Off
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Answering machine
screen.
2. Select or clear the Voicemail check box.
Enables readiness.
Disables readiness.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 303
Local Answering Machine
Readiness
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Readiness
If readiness is switched on, the symbol appears in the status line.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch Readiness On/Off
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
To switch readiness on or off, press the function key that has been configured for readiness.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine.
2. Select or clear the TAM readiness check box.
If readiness is switched on, the symbol appears in the status line.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Readiness
Press the key to which TAM readiness has been assigned to switch the readiness of the
answering machine on or off, or toggle it.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function key for readiness as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Enables readiness.
Disables readiness.
LED signalling on the key:
green The readiness of the answering machine is switched on.
off The readiness of the answering machine is switched off.
304 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Readiness
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Readiness
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Readiness
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key you would like to define, select the TAM
readiness function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a name for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key name is used for printing the label.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to switch readiness on or off depending on the status.
switch on: Press the key to enable readiness mode.
switch off: Press the key to disable readiness mode.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 305
Local Answering Machine
Readiness
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Readiness
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Readiness
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: TAM readiness.
Functions sorted by group: Answering machine > TAM readiness.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
306 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Readiness
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Readiness
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. Tap on Assign.
8. Tap on Exit.
toggle: Press the key to switch readiness on or off depending on the status.
switch on: Press the key to enable readiness mode.
switch off: Press the key to disable readiness mode.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 307
Local Answering Machine
Call Acceptance
Configuring the Call Acceptance Time
Call Acceptance
You can tailor the times and rules for call acceptance to meet the needs of the user.
Configuring the Call Acceptance Time
The call acceptance time indicates the number of seconds after which the answering machine
accepts a call.
You can configure the call acceptance time as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the Call Acceptance Time
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Call acceptance screen.
2. Under Settings for call acceptance, enter a value in the Call acceptance time (1-
99 seconds) entry field. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the Call Acceptance Time
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Call
acceptance.
1 to 99: The answering machine accepts the call, depending on the entry, after
1 to 99 minutes.
308 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Call Acceptance
Switching Acceptance of Group Calls On/Off
2. Tap on Call acceptance time (seconds) and enter the required time until the call
acceptance in the relevant entry field. Possible entries:
3. Tap on OK.
Switching Acceptance of Group Calls On/Off
If the acceptance of group calls is switched on, calls for groups in which the telephone is a
member are also taken.
You can switch the acceptance of group calls on or off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch the Acceptance of Group Calls On/Off
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Call acceptance screen.
2. Select or clear the Group calls check box under the Call acceptance settings.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch the Acceptance of Group Calls On/Off
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Call
acceptance.
1 to 99: The answering machine accepts the call, depending on the entry, after
1 to 99 minutes.
Switches the acceptance of group calls on.
Switches the acceptance of group calls off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 309
Local Answering Machine
Call Acceptance
Call Acceptance Rules
2. Select or clear the Group calls check box.
Call Acceptance Rules
Call acceptance and the announcement assignment can be configured on a call-specific basis.
More Details about Call Acceptance Rules
The type of call acceptance can be configured depending on the type of call. The system distin-
guishes between the following call types:
The sequence displayed here corresponds to the sequence that is taken into account in the
settings. Relevant call types, for which call acceptance has not been configured, are ignored
when there is an inbound call. Instead, the system searches for the next applicable call type. If
no setting has been made for any of the relevant call types, the settings for the call type Miscel-
laneous calls are used.
The following call types are generally not taken by the answering machine:
Callbacks
InterCom calls
Wake-up calls
Alarm calls
The answering machine cannot differentiate between scheduled calls, fallback subscribers, or
unsuccessful attempts to connect calls, and normal internal calls, and so it takes all these calls.
Switches the acceptance of group calls on.
Switches the acceptance of group calls off.
A Anonymous calls (does not transfer a telephone number)
B From contact (caller transmits a telephone number that is present in the
telephone book)
C External calls (caller is an external subscriber)
D Internal calls (caller is an internal subscriber)
E Door calls (caller is any door terminal)
F Miscellaneous calls
310 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Call Acceptance
Configuring Call Acceptance Rules
Example
The following example illustrates taking the settings into account:
Initial Situation
Call acceptance and announcements are configured differently for external calls (call type
C), internal calls (call type D) and anonymous calls (call type A).
The call acceptance rules for calls from a telephone book contact (B) and door calls (E)
have been disabled.
The announcement and recording rules for miscellaneous calls (F) use the default
announcement.
The answering machine is switched on.
Call 1
Properties of call 1:
Caller is an external subscriber who transmits a telephone number.
The transferred telephone number is entered in the telephone book as a contact.
Sequence for call 1:
Call type A does not apply because of the current call number presentation.
No call acceptance rule has been enabled for the first applicable call type B.
The existing setting for the next applicable call type C is used.
Call 2
Properties of call 2:
The caller is a door terminal.
Sequence for call 2:
Call types A to D are not taken into account for door calls.
The call acceptance rule for call type E is disabled.
The setting for miscellaneous calls F is used, in this case, this is the Announcement and
recordingsetting with the default announcement.
Configuring Call Acceptance Rules
You can configure call acceptance rules as follows:
Using the configuration manager
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 311
Local Answering Machine
Call Acceptance
Configuring Call Acceptance Rules
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure Call Acceptance Rules
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
– At least one announcement
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Call acceptance screen.
2. If necessary, select the check box for the call type for which you would like to
configure call acceptance under Call acceptance rules.
The Call acceptance and Announcement list fields are displayed.
3. Depending on which call type you selected, proceed as follows.
All call types except From contact: Open the Call acceptance list field and select
one of the following options for the relevant call type.
Only From contact: You can only configure call acceptance for contacts from the
telephone's Contacts/Telephone book list.
4. Depending on the call type, select the required announcement from the
announcement list, as described below.
All call types except From contact: Open the Announcement list field and select
the required announcement.
Only From contact: You can only select the announcement for contacts from the
telephone's Contacts/Telephone book list.
5. Depending on the call type, enable the call acceptance rule specified above, if
necessary.
Announcement and recording: At the end, the caller hears the
selected announcement and can then leave a message on the
answering machine.
Only announcement: At the end, the caller hears the selected
announcement; however, they cannot leave a message on the
answering machine.
No call acceptance: The call from this caller is not accepted by the
answering machine.
This enables the call acceptance rule for the relevant call type.
Disables the call acceptance rule for the relevant call type.
312 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Call Acceptance
Configuring Call Acceptance Rules
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure Call Acceptance Rules
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
– At least one announcement
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Call
acceptance > Call acceptance rules.
2. If necessary, select the check box of the call type for which you would like to configure
call acceptance.
The Call acceptance and Announcement list fields are displayed.
3. Depending on which call type you selected, proceed as follows.
All call types except From contact: Tap on Call acceptance and select one of the
following options for the relevant call type.
Only From contact: Press the Contact/Telephone book key, open the
required contact, press the Menu key and then select one of the following
options in Options > Contact-specific settings > Call Acceptance:
Press the Back key to return to the Settings for call acceptance rules.
Announcement and recording: At the end, the caller hears the
selected announcement and can then leave a message on the
answering machine.
Only announcement: At the end, the caller hears the selected
announcement; however, they cannot leave a message on the
answering machine.
No call acceptance: The call from this caller is not accepted by the
answering machine.
Announcement and recording: At the end, the caller hears the
selected announcement and can then leave a message on the
answering machine.
Only announcement: At the end, the caller hears the selected
announcement; however, they cannot leave a message on the
answering machine.
No call acceptance: The call from this caller is not accepted by the
answering machine.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 313
Local Answering Machine
Call Acceptance
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Acceptance Rules
4. Depending on the call type, select the required announcement from the
announcement list, as described below.
All call types except From contact: Tap on Announcement and select the
required announcement.
Only From contact: Press the Contact/Telephone book key, open the
required contact, press the Menu key and then select the required
announcement in Options > Contact-specific settings > Announcement.
Press the Back key to return to the Settings for call acceptance rules.
The name of the announcement along with the creation date and time is displayed.
5. Depending on the call type, enable the call acceptance rule specified above, if
necessary.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Acceptance Rules
Press the key to which AB Rufannahme has been designed to enable a call acceptance rule.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function
is?indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function for call acceptance rules as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Call Acceptance Rules
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
This enables the call acceptance rule for the relevant call type.
Disables the call acceptance rule for the relevant call type.
LED signalling on the key:
green The call acceptance rule is enabled.
yellow The call acceptance rule is enabled, but call acceptance is different from key
assignment.
off The call acceptance rule is disabled.
314 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Call Acceptance
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Acceptance Rules
– At least one announcement
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose? keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key you would like to define, select the TAM call
acceptance.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Acceptance behaviour list field, select one of the following options:
7. In theType of call list field, select one of the following options:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Announcement and recording: The caller hears the announcement selected
at the end and can then leave a message on the answering machine.
Announcement only: The caller hears the announcement selected at the end;
however, they cannot leave a message on the answering machine.
No call acceptance: The call from this caller is not accepted by the answering
machine.
No rule: Switches the call acceptance rule off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 315
Local Answering Machine
Call Acceptance
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Acceptance Rules
8. Select the announcement you want from the Announcement list field.
9. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Call Acceptance Rules
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
– At least one announcement
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Default: The call type is not taken into account.
Anonymous calls: The caller does not transmit a telephone number
External calls: The caller is an external subscriber.
Internal calls: The caller is an internal subscriber.
Door calls: The caller is any door.
Any calls: Any caller.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
316 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Call Acceptance
Configuring the Maximum Recording Time
Functions listed alphabetically: TAM call acceptance.
Functions sorted by group: Answering machine > TAM call
acceptance.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Acceptance behaviour list field, select one of the following options:
7. In theType of call list field, select one of the following options:
8. Select the announcement you want from the Announcement list field.
9. Tap on Assign.
10. Tap on Exit.
Configuring the Maximum Recording Time
The maximum recording time indicates the number of minutes after which the answering
machine ends a recording automatically (provided the caller has not already hung up).
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Announcement and recording: The caller hears the announcement selected
at the end and can then leave a message on the answering machine.
Announcement only: The caller hears the announcement selected at the end;
however, they cannot leave a message on the answering machine.
No call acceptance: The call from this caller is not accepted by the answering
machine.
No rule: Switches the call acceptance rule off.
Default: The call type is not taken into account.
Anonymous calls: The caller does not transmit a telephone number
External calls: The caller is an external subscriber.
Internal calls: The caller is an internal subscriber.
Door calls: The caller is any door.
Any calls: Any caller.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 317
Local Answering Machine
Call Acceptance
Configuring the Maximum Recording Time
You can configure the maximum recording time as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the Maximum Recording Time
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Call acceptance screen.
2. Under Recording times, enter a value in the Recording time (1...99, 99->unlimited
minutes entry field. Possible entries:
Note: Recordings whose recording time is shorter than 1 second are not
saved.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the Maximum Recording Time
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Call
acceptance.
2. Tap on Recording time (minutes) and enter the required time until call acceptance
in the relevant entry field. Possible entries:
3. Tap on OK.
1 to 98: The maximum recording time is configured (1 to 98 minutes).
99: The recording time is unlimited (maximum memory use).
1 to 98: The maximum recording time is configured (1 to 98 minutes).
99: The recording time is unlimited (maximum memory use).
318 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Call Acceptance
Configuring the Maximum Recording Time for Door Calls
Note: Recordings whose recording time is shorter than 1 second are not
saved.
Configuring the Maximum Recording Time for Door Calls
The maximum recording time for door calls indicates the number of minutes after which the
answering machine ends the recording of a door call automatically.
Note that the recording cannot be actively ended from the door terminal. Therefore, a door call
recording lasts as long as you have defined it.
You can configure the maximum recording time for door calls as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the Maximum Recording Time for Door
Calls
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Call acceptance screen.
2. Under Recording times, enter a value in the Recording time for door calls (1 to 99
minutes) entry field. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the Maximum Recording Time for Door Calls
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1 to 98: The maximum recording time is configured (1 to 98 minutes).
99: The recording time is unlimited (maximum memory use).
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 319
Local Answering Machine
Call Acceptance
Configuring the Maximum Recording Time for Door Calls
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Call
acceptance.
2. Tap on Recording time for door calls (minutes) and enter the required time until
call acceptance in the relevant entry field. Possible entries:
3. Tap on OK.
1 to 98: The maximum recording time is configured (1 to 98 minutes).
99: The recording time is unlimited (maximum memory use).
320 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Call Recording
Recording a Call
Call Recording
The call recording function conversations calls to be recorded, for example, for later evaluation.
In addition to the automatic recording of all calls, it is also possible to record calls manually.
This operates independently of the automatic call recording function. This allows calls to be
recorded in pieces.
Call recordings can be played from the answering machine list.
Note: The SD card must be inserted before you can record a call.
Recording a Call
If automatic call recording is enabled, every call you make is automatically recorded.
Note: Before you record a call you must always obtain the agreement of the
call partner. If you record the call without the knowledge of the communi-
cation partner, you make yourself liable to punishment in law (for breaching
the right to confidentiality of the spoken word). For reasons of data protection,
the call partner should be notified that the call is being recorded by an
announcement.
Requirements:
– SD card inserted into slot
To start or end recording during a call, press the function key that has been configured for
starting call recording.
Alternatively, during a call, proceed as described below.
1. Tap on to start recording the call.
The call is recorded.
2. Tap on to stop recording the call.
Notes:
Recordings whose recording time is shorter than 1 second are not saved.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 321
Local Answering Machine
Call Recording
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Starting Call Recording
Call recording ends immediately when a query call is begun.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Starting Call Recording
Press the key during a call to switch call recording on. Press the key again to switch it off.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function key for starting call recording as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Note: The function can only be set up on a programmable function key that
has an LED (not on a touch function key).
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Starting Call
Recordings
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
LED signalling on the key:
red (blinking) The current call is recorded.
322 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Call Recording
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Starting Call Recording
4. In the list field next to the function key you want to define, select the TAM call
recording function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a name for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key name is used for printing the label.
6. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Starting Call Recordings
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 323
Local Answering Machine
Call Recording
Switching Automatic Call Recording On/Off
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap on:
Functions listed alphabetically: TAM call recording.
Functions sorted by group: Answering machine > TAM call recording.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. Tap on Assign.
7. Tap on Exit.
Switching Automatic Call Recording On/Off
If automatic call recording has been enabled, every call (incoming and outgoing) is recorded
completely.
Notes:
Before you record a call you must always obtain the agreement of the call
partner. If you record the call without the knowledge of the communication
partner, you make yourself liable to punishment in law (for breaching the
right to confidentiality of the spoken word). For reasons of data protection,
the call partner should be notified that the call is being recorded by an
announcement.
Recordings whose recording time is shorter than 1 second are not saved.
Automatic call recording ends immediately when a query call is begun.
You can switch automatic call recording on or off as follows:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
324 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Call Recording
Switching Automatic Call Recording On/Off
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch Automatic Call Recording On/Off
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Answering machine
screen.
2. Select or clear the Announcement prior to call recording check box under
Settings for call recording.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch Automatic Call Recording On/Off
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
To enable or disable the readiness function, press a function key that has been configured for
automatic call recording.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Call
recording.
2. Select or clear the Announcement prior to call recording check box.
Enables automatic call recording.
Disables automatic call recording.
Enables automatic call recording.
Disables automatic call recording.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 325
Local Answering Machine
Call Recording
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Automatic Call Recording
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Automatic Call Recording
Press the key to switch the automatic call recording function on or off or to switch it over.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function key for automatic call recording as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Automatic Call
Recording
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next the function key you want to define, select the TAM automatic call
recording function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
LED signalling on the key:
red Automatic call recording is enabled.
off Automatic call recording is disabled.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
326 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Call Recording
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Automatic Call Recording
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a name for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key name is used for printing the label.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Automatic Call Recording
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
switch off: Press the key to disable automatic call recording.
toggle: Press the key to switch automatic call recording on or off depending on
the status.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
switch on: Press the key to enable automatic call recording.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 327
Local Answering Machine
Call Recording
Switching the Announcement for Call Recording On/Off
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap on:
Functions listed alphabetically: TAM automatic call recording.
Functions sorted by group: Answering machine > TAM automatic call
recording.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. Tap on Assign.
8. Tap on Exit.
Switching the Announcement for Call Recording On/Off
To inform the call partner that the call is being recorded, an announcement should be played
before the call is recorded.
Note: Before you record a call you must always obtain the agreement of the
call partner. If you record the call without the knowledge of the communi-
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to switch automatic call recording on or off depending on
the status.
switch on: Press the key to enable automatic call recording.
switch off: Press the key to disable automatic call recording.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
328 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Call Recording
Switching the Announcement for Call Recording On/Off
cation partner, you make yourself liable to punishment in law (for breaching
the right to confidentiality of the spoken word).
You can switch the announcement for call recording on or off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch an Announcement for Call Recording On/Off
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
– At least one announcement
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Answering machine
screen.
2. Select or clear the Announcement prior to call recording check box under the Call
recording settings.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch an Announcement for Call Recording On/Off
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
– At least one announcement
To enable or disable the readiness function, press a function key that has been configured for
automatic call recording.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Call
recording.
2. Select or clear the Announcement prior to call recording check box.
Switches the announcement prior to call recording on.
Switches the announcement prior to call recording off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 329
Local Answering Machine
Call Recording
Selecting an Announcement for Call Recording
Selecting an Announcement for Call Recording
To inform the communications partner that the call is being recorded, you can speak or upload
your own announcements, save them on the SD card, and then select them.
You can select an announcement for call recording as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Select an Announcement for Call Recording
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
– At least one announcement
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Answering machine
screen.
2. In the Announcement list field under Call recording settings, select the required
announcement.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Select an Announcement for Call Recording
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
– At least one announcement
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Call
recording.
2. Tap on Announcement and select the announcement you want from the list field.
Switches the announcement prior to call recording on.
Switches the announcement prior to call recording off.
330 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Forwarding Messages by E-Mail
Switching the Forwarding of Messages by E-Mail On/Off
Forwarding Messages by E-Mail
If the forwarding of messages by e-mail is enabled, the answering machine can notify the e-
mail address configured in the telephone when new messages are present.
Otherwise, the message can be forwarded as an audio file (*.wav).
Note: In the configuration manager under Settings > Auerswald > E-Mail >
Internationalisation, you can set the language of the e-mails and customise
a user-defined linguistic template for e-mails to suit your requirements.
Switching the Forwarding of Messages by E-Mail On/Off
If the forwarding of messages by e-mail is enabled, new messages are forwarded by e-mail to
the e-mail address configured in the telephone.
You can switch the forwarding of messages by e-mail on or off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch the Forwarding of Messages by E-Mail On/
Off
Requirements:
– A set up e-mail account (see chapter Local Answering Machine > E-Mail Settings)
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > E-mail notification
screen.
2. Select or clear the E-mail notification check box under the Settings for forwarding
by e-mail.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Switches the forwarding of messages by e-mail on.
Switches the forwarding of messages by e-mail off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 331
Local Answering Machine
Forwarding Messages by E-Mail
Switching the Sending of E-Mail in HTML Format On/Off
Using the Telephone to Switch the Forwarding of Messages by E-Mail On/Off
Requirements:
– A set up e-mail account (see chapter Local Answering Machine > E-Mail Settings)
To enable or disable the forwarding of messages by e-mail, press a function key that has been
configured for the forwarding of messages by e-mail.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > E-mail
notification.
2. Select or clear the E-mail notification check box.
Switching the Sending of E-Mail in HTML Format On/Off
If the forwarding of e-mails in HTML format is enabled, e-mails are formatted in *.html format
and then sent.
You can switch the sending of e-mail in HTML format on or off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch the Sending of E-mail in HTML Format On/
Off
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > E-mail notification
screen.
2. Select or clear the Send e-mail in HTML format check box under the Settings for
forwarding by e-mail.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Switches the forwarding of messages by e-mail on.
Switches the forwarding of messages by e-mail off.
Switches the sending of e-mail in HTML format on.
Switches the sending of e-mail in HTML format off.
332 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Forwarding Messages by E-Mail
Switching the Attaching of Incoming Messages as Files On/Off
Using the Telephone to Switch the Sending of E-mail in HTML Format On/Off
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > E-mail
notification.
2. Select or clear the Send e-mail in HTML format check box.
Switching the Attaching of Incoming Messages as Files On/Off
If attaching messages as files attachments has been enabled, new messages are attached to
e-mail messages in .wav format, and then sent.
You can switch the attaching of incoming messages as files on or off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch the Attaching of Incoming Messages as Files
On/Off
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > E-mail notification
screen.
2. Select or clear the Attach message as file check box under the Settings for
forwarding by e-mail.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch the Attaching of Incoming Messages as Files On/Off
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > E-mail
notification.
Switches the sending of e-mail in HTML format on.
Switches the sending of e-mail in HTML format off.
Enables the attaching of incoming messages as files.
Disables the attaching of incoming messages as files.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 333
Local Answering Machine
Forwarding Messages by E-Mail
Switching the Marking of Sent Messages as Read on the Answering Machine On/Off
2. Select or clear the Attach message as file check box.
Switching the Marking of Sent Messages as Read on the Answering Machine On/
Off
If the marking of sent messages as read has been enabled, and the messages have been sent
successfully, the messages are marked as read.
You can switch the marking of sent messages as read on the answering machine on or off as
follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch the Marking of Sent Messages as Read On/
Off
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > E-mail notification
screen.
2. Select or clear the Mark sent messages as read check box under the Settings for
forwarding by e-mail.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch the Marking of Sent Messages as Read On/Off
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > E-mail
notification.
2. Select or clear the Mark sent messages as read check box.
Enables the attaching of incoming messages as files.
Disables the attaching of incoming messages as files.
Switches the marking of sent messages as read on.
Switches the marking of sent messages as read off.
334 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Forwarding Messages by E-Mail
Entering the Address of the E-Mail Recipient
Entering the Address of the E-Mail Recipient
The messages are forwarded to the e-mail address configured in the telephone.
You can enter the address of the e-mail recipient as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Enter the E-mail Recipient Address
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > E-mail notification
screen.
2. Under Settings for forwarding by e-mail enter the e-mail address in the E-mail
recipient entry field. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Enter the E-mail Recipient Address
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > E-mail
notification.
2. Tap on E-mail recipient and enter the e-mail address in the relevant entry field.
Possible entries:
3. Tap on OK.
Switches the marking of sent messages as read on.
Switches the marking of sent messages as read off.
E-mail address (example: info@auerswald.de)
E-mail address (example: info@auerswald.de)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 335
Local Answering Machine
Forwarding Messages by E-Mail
Sending a Test E-Mail
Sending a Test E-Mail
After you have configured the forwarding of messages by e-mail you can send a test e-mail.
You can send a test e-mail as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– A set up e-mail account (see chapter Local Answering Machine > E-Mail Settings)
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > E-mail
notification.
2. Tap on Send test e-mail.
The test e-mail is sent.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding by E-Mail
Press the key to which TAM e-mail has been assigned to switch the forwarding of messages
by e-mail on or off, or toggle it.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function key for call forwarding by e-mail as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Forwarding by E-Mail
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
LED signalling on the key:
green The forwarding of messages by e-mail is switched on.
off The forwarding of messages by e-mail is switched off.
336 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Forwarding Messages by E-Mail
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding by E-Mail
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key you want to assign, select the TAM e-mail
function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a name for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key name is used for printing the label.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to switch forwarding by e-mail on or off depending on the
status.
switch on: Press the key to switch forwarding by e-mail on.
switch off: Press the key to switch forwarding by e-mail off.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 337
Local Answering Machine
Forwarding Messages by E-Mail
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding by E-Mail
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
– A set up e-mail account (see chapter Local Answering Machine > E-Mail Settings)
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Forwarding by E-Mail
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap on:
Functions listed alphabetically: TAM e-mail.
Functions sorted by group: Answering machine > TAM e-mail.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to switch forwarding by e-mail on or off depending on the
status.
switch on: Press the key to switch forwarding by e-mail on.
338 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Forwarding Messages by E-Mail
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Call Forwarding by E-Mail
7. Tap on Assign.
8. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– A set up e-mail account (see chapter Local Answering Machine > E-Mail Settings)
switch off: Press the key to switch forwarding by e-mail off.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 339
Local Answering Machine
E-Mail Settings
Entering the Address of the E-Mail Sender
E-Mail Settings
You configure the settings for the answering machine's e-mail account independently of the
settings for other e-mail accounts.
Note: Please contact your e-mail provider or system administrator to obtain
the necessary information for the account settings.
Entering the Address of the E-Mail Sender
The e-mail sender address configured in the telephone is displayed to the e-mail recipient.
You can enter the e-mail sender's address as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Enter the E-Mail Sender Address
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > E-Mail > Outgoing mail server screen.
2. Under Settings for outgoing mail server enter the e-mail address in the Sender
entry field. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Enter the E-Mail Sender Address
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > E-mail.
2. Tap on Sender and enter the e-mail address in the relevant entry field. Possible
entries:
3. Tap on OK.
E-mail address (example: info@auerswald.de)
E-mail address (example: info@auerswald.de)
340 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
E-Mail Settings
Setting the IP Address of the Outgoing Mail Server
Setting the IP Address of the Outgoing Mail Server
Forwarded messages are sent using the outgoing mail server (SMTP server).
You can set the IP address of the outgoing mail server as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to set the IP Address of the Outgoing Mail Server
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > E-Mail > Outgoing mail server screen.
2. Under Outgoing mail server, enter the IP address of the outgoing mail server in the
Address entry field. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to set the IP Address of the Outgoing Mail Server
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > E-mail.
2. Under Outgoing mail server, tap on Address and then enter the IP address of the
outgoing mail server in the entry field. Possible entries:
3. Tap on OK.
Configuring the Outgoing Mail Server Port
You can configure the outgoing mail server port as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 192.168.0.240)
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 192.168.0.240)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 341
Local Answering Machine
E-Mail Settings
Setting the Type of Authentication
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the Outgoing Mail Server Port
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > E-Mail > Outgoing mail server screen.
2. Under Outgoing mail server, enter the port number of the outgoing mail server in the
Port entry field. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the Outgoing Mail Server Port
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > E-mail.
2. Under Outgoing mail server, tap on Port and then enter the port of the outgoing mail
server in the entry field. Possible entries:
3. Tap on OK.
Setting the Type of Authentication
You can set the type of authentication required by the e-mail server in the telephone.
You can set the type of authentication as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Set the Type of Authentication
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > E-Mail > Outgoing mail server screen.
2. In the Type of authentication list field under Authentication, select one of the
following options:
1to 65535 (example: default SMTP port: 25)
1to 65535 (example: default SMTP port: 25)
342 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
E-Mail Settings
Entering the Username for the Outgoing Mail Server
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Set the Type of Authentication
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > E-mail.
2. Under Authentication, tap on Type of authentication and select one of the following
options in the list field:
Entering the Username for the Outgoing Mail Server
You can enter the user name for the outgoing mail server as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Enter the User Name for the Outgoing Mail Server
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > E-Mail > Outgoing mail server screen.
2. Under Authentication, enter the username in the Username entry field. Possible
entries:
No authentication: Authentication is not performed.
Username/Password: Authentication is performed with the username and
password.
MD5 challenge-response: Authentication is performed with an MD5
challenge-response. This means the password is not transferred in plain
(unencrypted) text.
No authentication: Authentication is not performed.
Username/Password: Authentication is performed with the username and
password.
MD5 challenge-response: Authentication is performed with an MD5
challenge-response. This means the password is not transferred in plain
(unencrypted) text.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 343
Local Answering Machine
E-Mail Settings
Entering a Password for the Outgoing Mail Server
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Enter the User Name for the Outgoing Mail Server
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > E-mail.
2. Under Authentication, tap on Username and then enter the username in the entry
field. Possible entries:
3. Tap on OK.
Entering a Password for the Outgoing Mail Server
You can enter a password for the outgoing mail server as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Enter a Password for the Outgoing Mail Server
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > E-Mail > Outgoing mail server screen.
2. Under Authentication, enter the password in the Password entry field. Possible
entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
344 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
E-Mail Settings
Switching Encryption On/Off
Using the Telephone to Enter a Password for the Outgoing Mail Server
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > E-mail.
2. Under Authentication, tap on Password and then enter the password in the entry
field. Possible entries:
3. Tap on OK.
Switching Encryption On/Off
If encryption is switched on, Transport Layer Security (TLS) is used to encrypt the messages
before they are transferred to the e-mail server.
You can switch encryption on or off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch the Encryption Function On/Off
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > E-Mail > Outgoing mail server screen.
2. Under Authentication, select one of the following options from the Encryption list
field:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch Encryption On/Off
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More... > E-mail.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Encryption disabled: Switches encryption off.
Encryption (SSL) after STARTTLS: Switches encryption on after STARTTLS.
Encryption (SSL) disabled: Switches encryption immediately on.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 345
Local Answering Machine
E-Mail Settings
Switching Encryption On/Off
2. Tap on Encryption under Authentication and select one of the following options
from the list field.
Encryption disabled: Switches encryption off.
Encryption (SSL) after STARTTLS: Switches encryption on after STARTTLS.
Encryption (SSL) disabled: Switches encryption immediately on.
346 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
E-Mail Internationalisation
Language Templates
E-Mail Internationalisation
The e-mail internationalisation option allows you to set the language of the e-mails sent by the
answering machine and customise a user-defined language template for e-mails to suit your
specific requirements.
Note: In the configuration manager, you can specify that messages are
forwarded by e-mail under Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine >
E-mail forwarding.
Language Templates
There are several language templates available for e-mails that are sent by the answering
machine. These language templates include different text elements (boilerplates) which are
used to create the e-mails. The language templates are in *.xml file format.
Language Template [Language]
The language template has the following boilerplates:
•Common: General text elements
Date and Time: Boilerplates with variables for date and time
Mailbox: New Message: Boilerplates for information about a new message
Test e-mail: Boilerplates for creating a test e-mail
The language template cannot be configured by the user.
User-Defined Language Template
The user-defined language template is automatically created in the language used by the
configuration manager.
The user-defined language template has the boilerplates described above, in the relevant
language, and can be configured by the user.
Reading a Language Template
You can read a language template as follows:
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 347
Local Answering Machine
E-Mail Internationalisation
Configuring a Language Template
Using the configuration manager
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > E-mail > Internationalisation screen.
2. Under Language template management, select one of the following options from
the line of required language templates in the Selection list field:
3. In the line containing the required language template, click Read.
The selected text module opens.
Configuring a Language Template
You can configure the user-defined language template and customise the boilerplates to suit
your requirements.
You can configure a language template as follows:
Using the configuration manager
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > E-mail > Internationalisation screen.
2. Under Language template management, select one of the following options from
the line of user-defined language templates in the Selection list field:
General: General text elements
Date and Time: Boilerplates with variables for date and time
Mailbox: New Message: Boilerplates for information about a new message
Test e-mail: Boilerplates for creating a test e-mail
348 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
E-Mail Internationalisation
Importing a Language Template
3. Click Configure in the line that contains the user-defined language template.
The selected text module opens.
4. Make your changes.
Note: The boilerplates used to create the language template are displayed in
the left-hand column of the dialogue. You can make your changes in the right-
hand column.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Importing a Language Template
You can import a language template, for example, so you can use a centrally configured,
uniform language template in different telephones.
You can import a language template as follows:
Using the configuration manager
General/Allgemein: General text elements
Date and time/Datum und Uhrzeit: Boilerplates with variables for date and
time
Date:
Day: DD
Month: MM
Year: YYYY
Time:
Hour (24-hour format): hh24
Hour (12-hour format): hh12
Minute: mm
Second: ss
am/pm (English language template only): ampm
Mailbox: New message/Mailbox: New Message: Boilerplates for information
about a new message
Test e-mail/Test-E-Mail: Boilerplates for creating a test e-mail
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 349
Local Answering Machine
E-Mail Internationalisation
Exporting a Language Template
Notes:
The language template you import overwrites the user-defined language
template in the telephone.
The file structure of the imported language template must match the file
structure of the user-defined language template. For this reason, you should
export the user-defined language template to your PC. Edit the text fields in
the language template without changing the structure of the *.xml file. After
you have imported the language template, your updates are displayed in the
user-defined language template.
Requirements:
– A language template (*.xml) saved on a data medium (PC)
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > E-mail > Internationalisation screen.
2. Under Import Language Template, click Search.
A file selection dialogue opens.
3. Select the language template you want (*.xml) and click Open (this text varies
according to which operating system is in use).
The file is displayed in the entry field.
4. Click Save.
The language template is imported and displayed as the user-defined language
template under Language template management.
Exporting a Language Template
You can export a user-defined language template, for example, to configure it centrally and
then import it to different telephones.
You can export a language template as follows:
Using the configuration manager
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > E-mail > Internationalisation screen.
350 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
E-Mail Internationalisation
Configuring the Language
2. Under Language template management, click on the name of the user-defined
language template.
3. Click Export.
The user-defined language template is exported.
Configuring the Language
Select the language template to set the language in which e-mails are sent by the answering
machine.
You can configure the language as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the Language
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > E-mail > Internationalisation screen.
2. Under Language settings in the Language template list field select a language or
the User-defined language template.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the Language
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > E-mail.
2. Tap on Language and select a language or the User-defined language template from
the list field.
Importing a Logo
You can import your own logo. The logo is used in the e-mails sent by the answering machine.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 351
Local Answering Machine
E-Mail Internationalisation
Importing a Logo
You can import your own logo as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Notes:
The logo must be provided in *.jpg file format and must be 160 x 60 pixels
(width x height) in size.
The maximum permitted file size for a logo is 50 kB. The memory for all
logos is limited to 500 kB.
If you do not import your own logo, the Auerswald logo supplied with the
system will be used instead.
Requirements:
– A logo (*.jpg) saved on a data medium (PC)
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > E-mail > Internationalisation screen.
2. Under Import logo, click Search.
A file selection dialogue opens.
3. Select the file with the required logo (*.jpg) and click Open (this text varies according
to which operating system is in use).
The file is displayed in the entry field.
4. Click Save.
The logo is imported and displayed under Logo.
Note: To delete an imported logo, click on Delete under Delete logo.
352 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Remote Access
Remote Access Variants
Remote Access
Remote access is used to access and operate the answering machine from another internal
telephone or from an external telephone.
Remote Access Variants
The answering machine supports two different remote access variants:
Remote access
The answering machine always accepts a call after the configured call acceptance time.
After the answering machine has accepted the call, you can initiate remote access during the
announcement and the 10 seconds that follow (by pressing the * key + user remote access PIN
+ # key).
Remote access with quick access
The answering machine automatically accepts a call when the quick remote access number is
transmitted and new messages are present. Otherwise, if no new messages are present, the
time it takes to accept a call is 10 seconds (approx. 2 rings) longer than the configured call
acceptance time.
As soon as the answering machine has accepted the call, you can start remote access. You do
not need to enter the remote access PIN.
Notes:
When quick access is enabled, the call acceptance time varies only if the
quick remote access number has been correctly transmitted. For all other
callers, the answering machine accepts the call after the configured call
acceptance time (no matter whether new messages are present or not).
Using quick access is not appropriate if you have configured settings on
your PBX or telephone that cause the telephone to delay making a call
(for example, subscriber call forwarding on no reply).
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 353
Local Answering Machine
Remote Access
Configuring Remote Access
Configuring Remote Access
Remote access is configured as described below:
Switch remote access on.
Enter a remote access pin.
Configure remote access with quick access. This will simplify remote access for the
user because they will no longer need to enter their remote access PIN. Their
telephone number will be transmitted instead. To do so, enter one or two quick remote
access numbers.
If you would like the answering machine to notify you as soon as a new message is
present, configure message forwarding and switch it on when required.
Switching Remote Access On/Off
You can switch remote access on or off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch Remote Access On/Off
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Answering machine
screen.
2. Select or clear the Remote access check box under Remote access settings.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Enables the remote access function.
Disables the remote access function.
354 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Remote Access
Entering the PIN for Remote Access
Using the Telephone to Switch Remote Access On/Off
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
To enable or disable the remote access function, press a function key that has been
configured for the remote access function.
Alternatively:
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Remote
access.
2. Select or clear the Remote access check box.
Entering the PIN for Remote Access
To be able to use the remote access, you must enter a PIN. You can change the PIN at any
time.
Important: When operating as a system telephone on an Auerswald PBX,
the PBX specifies the remote access PIN. The remote access PIN matches
the user PIN entered on the PBX.
You can enter the PIN for remote access as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Enter a PIN for Remote Access
Requirements:
– The telephone is not a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– Remote access is enabled
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Answering machine
screen.
Enables the remote access function.
Disables the remote access function.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 355
Local Answering Machine
Remote Access
Entering a Quick Remote Access Number
2. Enter the PIN in the Remote access PIN entry field. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Set a PIN for Remote Access
Requirements:
– The telephone is not a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– Remote access permitted
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Remote
access.
2. Select the Remote Access check box.
The system displays the setting options for remote access.
3. Tap on Remote access PIN and enter the PIN in the relevant entry field. Possible
entries:
4. Tap on OK.
Entering a Quick Remote Access Number
Up to two quick access telephone numbers can be entered for remote access toll saver with
quick access. The caller who transmits this quick remote access number when they make a call
can, if quick access is configured, access all the recordings saved on the answering machine
without having to enter their remote access PIN.
You can enter a quick remote access number as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
6 digits
Numbers and the # character
6 digits
Numbers and the # character
356 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Remote Access
Entering a Quick Remote Access Number
Using the Configuration Manager to Enter Quick Remote Access Numbers
Requirements:
– Remote access is enabled
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Answering machine
screen.
2. In the Quick remote access number 1 entry field, enter quick remote access
number 1. Possible entries:
Important: Enter telephone numbers exactly as when dialling, for example,
always enter external telephone numbers with a leading exchange line
access number. (Exception: selected account exchange line).
3. Select the account you want from the Account quick remote access number 1 list
field.
4. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to enter quick access number 2.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Enter Quick Remote Access Numbers
Requirements:
– Remote access is enabled
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Remote
access.
2. Tap on Quick remote access number 1 and enter Quick remote access number 1
in the entry field. Possible entries:
Important: Enter telephone numbers exactly as when dialling, for example,
always enter external telephone numbers with a leading exchange line
access number. (Exception: selected account exchange line).
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 357
Local Answering Machine
Remote Access
Performing Remote Access
3. Tap on OK.
4. Tap on Account quick remote access number 1 and select the required account in
the list field.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to enter quick access number 2.
Performing Remote Access
You can perform remote access as follows:
Using a character string on an external telephone
Using a character string on an internal telephone
Requirements:
– Remote access is configured
– The internal or external telephone supports DTMF dialling
– You need to know the remote access PIN
– When readiness is switched off on the answering machine: quick access and transfer of a
previously entered quick remote access number by the calling telephone is configured
1. Call the telephone.
After the set call acceptance time, the answering machine takes the call. You hear the
configured announcement.
Note: When quick access is configured you also immediately hear the
announcement for remote access (REMOTE.WAV) and can start remote
access (without entering the PIN).
2. To start the remote access during the announcement, enter the following DTMF
numbers: * Remote access PIN #
Note: If you mistype the remote access PIN you can start again by typing it
again without * (asterisk).
You hear the announcement for remote access (REMOTE.WAV).
3. Execute remote access by entering the following digits.
358 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Remote Access
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Remote Access
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Remote Access
Press the key to which TAM remote access has been assigned to switch the answering
machine's remote access function on or off, or toggle it.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function key for remote access as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Remote Access
Requirements:
0 Opens the Help menu.
1 Opens the main menu.
2 Replays new messages.
3 Replays all the messages.
4 Jumps back to the previous recording.
5 Repeats the recording currently being played back.
6 Jumps to the next recording.
7 Deletes the recording currently being played back.
8 Ends playback.
* 10: Switches the answering machine off.
* 11: Switches the answering machine on.
* 70: Deletes all the recordings.
* 99: Records a voice memo. Ring off to save the memo or press #. To cancel,
press *.
Disconnect: Ends remote access.
LED signalling on the key:
green Remote access to the answering machine is switched on.
off Remote access to the answering machine is switched off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 359
Local Answering Machine
Remote Access
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Remote Access
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field beside the function key you would like to define, select the TAM remote
access function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a name for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key name is used for printing the label.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to enable or disable remote access dependent on its
status.
switch on: Press the key to enable remote access.
switch off: Press the key to disable remote access.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
360 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Remote Access
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Remote Access
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Remote Access
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap on:
Functions listed alphabetically: TAM remote access.
Functions sorted by group: Answering machine > TAM remote access.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 361
Local Answering Machine
Remote Access
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Remote Access
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. Tap on Assign.
8. Tap on Exit.
toggle: Press the key to enable or disable remote access dependent on its
status.
switch on: Press the key to enable remote access.
switch off: Press the key to disable remote access.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
362 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Answering Machine List
Opening the Answering Machine List
Answering Machine List
The telephone's answering machine list can save up to 250 messages, voice memos, and call
recordings, recorded by the answering machine, with the date and time of recording, and the
telephone number of the caller/call partner. The recordings are numbered consecutively. The
last/latest recording is assigned the number 1.
You can return the call of someone who has called you directly from the answering machine list.
From the answering machine list you can also access the following functions:
Access the answering machine archive
Record announcements for the answering machine
Record voice memos
Opening the Answering Machine List
You can open the answering machine list to check recordings (messages, voice memos and
call recordings), or to delete them, or move them into an archive, or to record announcements.
The Message key LED shows you that there are recordings present in the answering machine
list.
You can open the answering machine list as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
To open the answering machine list, press a function key that has been configured to open
the answering machine list, or tap on:
Functions listed alphabetically: Apps > Functions > TAM open.
LED signalling on the message key:
off No recordings present.
red (blinking) New recordings are present.
red No new messages are present. Only recordings that have already been
listened to are present.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 363
Local Answering Machine
Answering Machine List
Opening the Answering Machine List
Functions sorted by group: Apps > Functions > Answering machine >
TAM open.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Press the Message key.
This displays the available lists (this function is skipped if the other lists are empty).
2. Select the answering machine list.
The answering machine list is displayed.
Notes:
If you have enabled automatic playback under Apps > Settings >
Auerswald > Answering machine, the new recordings are played back
automatically, in sequence, after you open the answering machine list. The
latest recording is played first.
You can also enable or disable automatic playback from the answering
machine list by pressing the Menu key and tapping on Settings.
3. In the list field on the left, above the answering machine list, select one of the following
options:
4. Select a recording.
5. Select one of the following options:
All entries: Displays all the entries saved in the answering machine list.
Messages only: Only displays the messages saved in the answering machine
list.
Voice memos only: Only displays the voice memos saved in the answering
machine list.
Call recordings only: Only displays the call recordings saved in the answering
machine list.
Archive: Displays the answering machine list archive.
Announcements: Displays the saved and free announcements for the
answering machine.
Record voice memo: Starts the recording of a voice memo.
Starts the recording playback.
Sends the recording to the e-mail address entered for e-mail notification.
Moves the recording to the archive.
Fetches the recording from the archive.
364 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Answering Machine List
Listening to Recordings (Messages, Voice Memos and Call Recordings)
Listening to Recordings (Messages, Voice Memos and Call Recordings)
You can listen to recordings as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Open the answering machine list.
2. In the list field on the left, above the answering machine list, select one of the following
options:
3. Select a recording.
4. Tap on .
5. Select one of the following options:
Marks the recording as already listened to.
Marks the recording as new.
Deletes the displayed recording. To delete all the entries except the announce-
ments from the answering machine list, press the Menu key, tap on
Delete all messages and then tap on OK.
Calls the telephone number of the caller who has left the message.
All entries: Displays all the entries saved in the answering machine list.
Messages only: Only displays the messages saved in the answering machine
list.
Voice memos only: Only displays the voice memos saved in the answering
machine list.
Call recordings only: Only displays the call recordings saved in the answering
machine list.
Archive: Displays the answering machine list archive.
Interrupts the recording playback.
Jumps backwards 5 seconds when the recording is being played back.
Ends the recording playback.
Jumps forwards 5 seconds when the recording is being played back.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 365
Local Answering Machine
Answering Machine List
Forwarding Recordings (Messages, Voice Memos and Call Recordings) by E-Mail
Note: The and buttons are only active while the recorded voice memo
is being played back, not while the call information is being played back.
Forwarding Recordings (Messages, Voice Memos and Call Recordings) by E-Mail
From the answering machine recordings can be forwarded by e-mail with the settings made for
e-mail notification.
You can configure the forwarding of recordings as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
– Address of the e-mail recipient entered in the Apps > Settings > Auerswald >
Answering machine > E-mail forwarding menu
– A configured e-mail Outbox server entered in the Apps > Settings > Auerswald >
More > E-Mail menu
1. Open the answering machine list.
2. In the list field on the left, above the answering machine list, select one of the following
options:
3. Select a recording.
4. Tap on .
Deletes the selected recording.
Ends the recording playback and closes the menu.
All entries: Displays all the entries saved in the answering machine list.
Messages only: Only displays the messages saved in the answering machine
list.
Voice memos only: Only displays the voice memos saved in the answering
machine list.
Call recordings only: Only displays the call recordings saved in the answering
machine list.
Archive: Displays the answering machine list archive.
366 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Answering Machine List
Dialling from the Answering Machine List
The recording is forwarded to the specified e-mail recipient.
Dialling from the Answering Machine List
From the answering machine list you can initiate a callback to the caller who left the selected
message.
You can dial from the answering machine list as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Open the answering machine list.
2. In the list field on the left, above the answering machine list, select one of the following
options:
3. Select a message.
4. Tap on .
The telephone number of the caller who left the message is called.
All entries: Displays all the entries saved in the answering machine list.
Messages only: Only displays the messages saved in the answering machine
list.
Voice memos only: Only displays the voice memos saved in the answering
machine list.
Call recordings only: Only displays the call recordings saved in the answering
machine list.
Archive: Displays the answering machine list archive.
Announcements: Displays the saved and free announcements for the
answering machine.
Record voice memo: Starts the recording of a voice memo.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 367
Local Answering Machine
Answering Machine List
Deleting Recordings (Messages, Voice Memos and Call Recordings)
Deleting Recordings (Messages, Voice Memos and Call Recordings)
You can delete all the messages on the answering machine at once (together with the voice
memos and call recordings), or delete them individually.
You can delete answering machine recordings as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Open the answering machine list.
2. In the list field on the left, above the answering machine list, select one of the following
options:
3. Select the recording you want to delete.
4. Tap on .
The recording is deleted.
Note: To delete all the entries (messages, voice memos and call recordings)
in the answering machine list simultaneously, press the Menu key, tap
on Delete all messages, and then tap on OK.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Answering Machine List
Press the key to which TAM open has been assigned to open the answering machine list.
All entries: Displays all the entries saved in the answering machine list.
Messages only: Only displays the messages saved in the answering machine
list.
Voice memos only: Only displays the voice memos saved in the answering
machine list.
Call recordings only: Only displays the call recordings saved in the answering
machine list.
Archive: Displays the answering machine list archive.
368 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Answering Machine List
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Answering Machine List
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure the function key for the answering machine list as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for the Answering
Machine List
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
LED signalling on the key:
red There is a dedicated connection to the answering machine.
red (blinking) A message is currently being recorded on the answering machine. Simply
pick up the receiver to take the call.
yellow The answering machine's capacity has exceeded the warning threshold.
yellow
(blinking)
The answering machine is full.
green No new messages are present. Only recordings that have already been
listened to are present.
green
(blinking)
New messages are present.
off The answering machine is empty.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 369
Local Answering Machine
Answering Machine List
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Answering Machine List
4. Select the TAM open function in the list field next to the function key you would like
to define.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a name for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key name is used for printing the label.
6. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for the Answering Machine List
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
370 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Answering Machine List
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Answering Machine List
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap on:
Functions listed alphabetically: Open TAM.
Functions sorted by group: Answering machine > TAM open.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. Tap on Assign.
7. Tap on Exit.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 371
Local Answering Machine
Announcements
Changing the Language for the Default Announcement
Announcements
In addition to default announcements, the answering machine lets you manage 25 customised
announcements.
You can use the configuration manager to transfer existing announcements in .wav format to
the SD card or use the telephone to speak new announcements onto it.
The announcements can be assigned to different types of calls as well as to different callers.
Changing the Language for the Default Announcement
You can select the language used for the default announcement from the available languages.
Not available languages can also be uploaded in .fs format via the configuration manager.
You can change the language for the default announcement as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Change the Language of the Default Announcement
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Announcement screen.
2. In the Language list field under Language settings, select the required language
file.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Change the Language of the Default Announcement
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine.
372 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Announcements
Uploading Language Files
2. Tap on Default language and select the required language file in the list field.
Uploading Language Files
The answering machine's default announcements, and also the spoken user guidance for
remote access, are stored in "language files" (the file called "english.fs" is used for English-
language announcements).
Up to four language files can be stored and used simultaneously. This means you can use
different languages for the answering machine.
You can upload a language file as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Requirements:
– A language file (*.fs) saved on a data medium (PC)
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Announcement screen.
2. Under Language settings, click Search.
A file selection dialogue opens.
3. Select the language file you want to use (*.fs) and click Open (this text varies
according to which operating system is in use).
The file is displayed in the entry field.
4. Click Save.
The language file will be displayed in the list.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Uploading an Announcement
Announcement files that are saved on the hard disk WAV can be uploaded for use as
announcements.
You can upload an announcement as follows:
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 373
Local Answering Machine
Announcements
Changing an Announcement Name
Using the configuration manager
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
– An announcement file (*.wav) saved on the hard disk
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Announcement screen.
2. Under Announcements, click on the free announcement you want in the list field.
The system displays the Search and Save buttons.
3. Open the folder in which the announcement has been saved, and select the
announcement.
4. Click Open (this text varies according to which operating system is in use).
5. Click Save.
6. Click OK.
The selected announcement is now displayed in the announcements list.
Further steps:
– If necessary, change the name of the announcement.
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Changing an Announcement Name
To make it easier to select the announcements, you can change each individual announcement
name that has been automatically assigned by the configuration manager or that has been
entered when you recorded the announcement.
You can upload an answering machine announcement, to change it, as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Change an Announcement Name
Requirements:
374 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Announcements
Changing an Announcement Name
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
– At least one announcement
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Announcement screen.
2. Under Announcements, click on the required announcement in the announcements
list.
3. Click Change.
4. Enter the name you want in the Name entry field.
5. Click Save.
6. Click OK.
Using the Telephone to Change an Announcement Name
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
– At least one announcement
1. Press the Message key.
2. Select the answering machine list.
3. In the list field on the left, above the answering machine list, select the Announce-
ments option.
4. Select the announcement whose name you would like to change.
5. Press the Menu key.
6. Tap on Edit name.
7. In the entry field, enter the required name. Possible entries:
8. Tap on OK.
Up to 16 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 375
Local Answering Machine
Announcements
Recording an Announcement
Recording an Announcement
You can record an announcement as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Press the Message key.
2. Select the answering machine list.
3. In the list field on the left, above the answering machine list, select the Announce-
ments option.
4. Select a free announcement.
5. Tap on , to start the recording.
You now see the entry field in which you enter the announcement's name.
6. Enter a name for the announcement. Possible entries:
7. Tap on OK.
The recording starts.
8. Record your announcement.
9. Tap on to stop recording the announcement.
Notes:
You have the option of re-recording the recorded announcement ( ) or
listening to it again ( ).
To set the new announcement as the default announcement, tap on .
If you press , the announcement is no longer used as the default
announcement.
Recordings whose recording time is shorter than 3 seconds are not saved.
Up to 16 digits
Numbers and characters
376 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Announcements
Switching an Announcement On or Off
Switching an Announcement On or Off
You can switch an announcement on or off as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
– At least one announcement
1. Press the Message key.
2. Select the answering machine list.
3. In the list field on the left, above the answering machine list, select the Announce-
ments option.
4. Select an announcement.
5. Tap on:
to switch on the announcement instead of the default announcement.
, to switch off the announcement and replace it with the default
announcement.
Deleting an Announcement
You can delete an announcement as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Delete an Announcement
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
– At least one announcement
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > Announcement screen.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 377
Local Answering Machine
Announcements
Deleting an Announcement
2. Under Announcements, click on the announcement you want to delete from the
announcements list.
The system displays the Delete button.
3. Click on Delete.
4. Click OK.
The announcement is deleted from the SD card.
Using the Telephone to Delete an Announcement
You can delete an announcement as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
– At least one announcement
1. Press the Message key.
2. Select the answering machine list.
3. In the list field on the left, above the answering machine list, select the Announce-
ments option.
4. Select the announcement you want to delete.
5. Tap on .
The announcement is deleted from the SD card.
378 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Voice Memos
Recording Memos
Voice Memos
You can use the answering machine to save your own voice memos. It can store up to 250
voice memos along with the date and time at which they were recorded. The recordings are
numbered consecutively. The last/latest recording is assigned the number 1.
You can listen to, edit, and delete voice memos like any other messages.
Recording Memos
You can record a voice memo as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
To record a voice memo, press a function key that has been configured for the recording of
voice memos.
Alternatively:
1. Press the Message key.
2. Select the answering machine list.
3. In the list field on the left, above the answering machine list, select the Record voice
memo option.
4. Record your voice memo:
Speak into the telephone's microphone.
Alternatively, pick up the receiver and speak into its microphone to improve the
sound quality of the voice memo.
5. Tap on to stop recording the voice memo.
Note: Recordings whose recording time is shorter than 3 seconds are not
saved.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 379
Local Answering Machine
Voice Memos
Listening to Voice Memos
Listening to Voice Memos
You can listen to voice memos as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Open the answering machine list.
2. In the list field on the left, above the answering machine list, select the Voice memos
option.
3. Select a voice memo.
4. Tap on .
5. Select one of the following options:
Note: The and buttons are only active while the recorded voice memo
is being played back, and not while the voice memo information is being
played back.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Recording Voice Memos
Press the key to which TAM voice memo has been assigned to switch recording mode for
voice memos in the answering machine list on.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
Interrupts the recording playback.
Jumps backwards 5 seconds when the recording is being played back.
Ends the recording playback.
Jumps forwards 5 seconds when the recording is being played back.
Deletes the selected recording.
Ends the recording playback and closes the menu.
380 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Voice Memos
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Recording Voice Memos
You can configure a function key for recording voice memos as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Note: The function can only be set up on a programmable function key that
has an LED (not on a touch function key).
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Recording Voice
Memos
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key you would like to define, select TAM voice
memo.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
LED signalling on the key:
yellow
(blinking)
The connection to the answering machine is being created.
green The answering machine is in recording mode.
off Recording is not enabled on the answering machine.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 381
Local Answering Machine
Voice Memos
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Recording Voice Memos
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a name for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key name is used for printing the label.
6. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Recording Voice Memos
Requirements:
– Answering machine (optional, see chapter Important Information > Product Details)
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap on:
Functions listed alphabetically: TAM voice memo.
Functions sorted by group: Answering machine > TAM voice memo.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
382 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Local Answering Machine
Voice Memos
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Recording Voice Memos
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. Tap on Assign.
7. Tap on Exit.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 383
E-Mail and Instant Messaging
E-Mail and Instant Messaging
This section describes how to set up e-mail accounts. It also tells you how to read and write e-
mails.
It also tells you how to send and receive instant messages with the Instant Messaging app.
Topics
E-Mail Account (page 384)
E-Mail (page 388)
Instant Messaging (page 391)
384 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
E-Mail and Instant Messaging
E-Mail Account
Creating an E-Mail Account
E-Mail Account
You must add (configure) an e-mail account before you can send and receive e-mails with your
telephone. You can use more than one e-mail account on your telephone.
Creating an E-Mail Account
The dialogue in which you add (create) an account appears automatically the first time you
open the e-mail app.
Depending on your e-mail provider, you can create an account either automatically or manually.
You can create an e-mail account as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Accounts > Add account.
2. Tap on E-mail.
This opens the dialogue in which you create an account.
3. Enter the e-mail address in the E-mail address entry field. Possible entries:
4. Enter the password in the Password entry field. Possible entries:
Note: If you set up another e-mail account, you can define the new account
as the default account for new e-mails.
5. Tap on Next.
E-mail address (example: info@auerswald.de)
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 385
E-Mail and Instant Messaging
E-Mail Account
Creating an E-Mail Account
An information request is sent to your e-mail provider.
6. Depending on your e-mail provider, follow the further instructions on the display.
7. Optional: Enter a name for the account in the Give this account a name entry field.
The account name then appears in the account list. Possible entries:
8. Only for POP3/IMAP accounts: Enter a name in the Your name entry field. The name
is displayed as the sender for outgoing messages. Possible entries:
The Inbox of the e-mail account is opened and the account is synchronised. You can
now use this account to send and receive e-mails.
9. Tap on Next.
You have created the e-mail account.
10. Only for Exchange ActiveSync accounts: If necessary, make the additional security
settings specified by your system administrator, e. g. enable the device administrator
function or the screen lock if you are prompted to do so.
Further steps:
– You can make further settings for the e-mail account.
Note: If your e-mail provider's settings cannot be applied automati-
cally, tap on Manual setup. You will be given the required information
by your e-mail provider or the system administrator, e .g.:
Account type (POP3, IMAP or Exchange ActiveSync)
Name of the incoming and outgoing mail server
Domain/username (Exchange ActiveSync)
Port numbers of the incoming and outgoing server
All SSL requirements for incoming and outgoing e-mails
All authentication standards (ESMTP) for outgoing e-
mails
Root folder (IMAP accounts)
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
386 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
E-Mail and Instant Messaging
E-Mail Account
Configuring an E-Mail Account
Configuring an E-Mail Account
For each e-mail account you can make general settings, notification settings and server
settings:
General settings: These include settings for names and signatures, the Inbox check
frequency, etc.
Notification settings: These specify how you are informed about incoming messages, e.g.
using sound.
Server settings: These are the settings for the server and the elements of an account that
are to be synchronised, for example, contacts and calendar.
Note: Please contact your e-mail provider or system administrator to obtain
the necessary information for the account settings.
You can also use the E-mail app on the telephone to make multi-account settings for all your
e-mail accounts.
You can configure these settings as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > E-mail.
2. Press the Menukey and then tap on Settings
3. Tap on the account you want to configure.
Note: To make multi-account settings in the e-mail app, tap on General
above the account list and make the required settings.
4. Tap on Account name and enter a name for the account in the entry field. The
account name then appears in the account list.
5. Tap on My name and enter a name in the entry field. The name is displayed as the
sender for outgoing messages.
6. Only for POP3/IMAP accounts: Tap on Signature and enter a signature in the entry
field. The signature is added to outgoing messages.
7. Only for Exchange ActiveSync accounts: Tap on Extent of synchronisation and
select the time period during which e-mails are to be retrieved by the server from the
list field.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 387
E-Mail and Instant Messaging
E-Mail Account
Removing (Deleting) an E-Mail Account
8. Enable the Default account check box to define the account as the default account
for outgoing e-mails.
9. Tap on Inbox check frequency and make a selection in the list field to specify how
frequently e-mails are to be fetched from the server.
10. Select the E-mail notifications check box to enable notification in the status line
when e-mails arrive.
11. Only if e-mail notification is switched on: Tap on Ringtone and select a ringtone for
notifications from the list field.
12. Tap on Incoming settings and make the settings for the incoming mail server.
13. Only for POP3/IMAP accounts: Tap on Outgoing settings and make the settings for
the outgoing mail server.
14. Only for Exchange ActiveSync accounts: Select the Sync contacts and Sync
calendars check boxes to enable the synchronisation of contacts and calendars.
Removing (Deleting) an E-Mail Account
You can delete an e-mail account along with all the messages, contacts and other data that
belong to it from the telephone.
You can delete an account as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Accounts > E-mail.
2. Tap on the account you want to delete.
3. Press the Menu key and then tap on Remove account.
Note: When you delete an account, all the messages, contacts and other
data associated with it are also deleted from the telephone.
A dialogue box in which you confirm the deletion opens.
4. Tap on Remove account.
388 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
E-Mail and Instant Messaging
E-Mail
Reading and Replying to E-Mail
E-Mail
After you configure an e-mail account you can read, answer, write and send e-mails.
Reading and Replying to E-Mail
The Email app automatically fetches new e-mails from the accounts that have been set up.
Depending on the account settings you will see a message in the status line or hear a ringtone
to tell you that an e-mail has arrived.
You can then read the e-mail and reply to it as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– A set up e-mail account
1. Tap on Apps > E-mail.
This opens the most recently displayed folder.
2. To open another account, tap on Inbox in the navigation bar and then tap on the name
of the account.
Note: When the Inbox is open, tap on to display other folders for an e-
mail account, e.g. the draft or sent folders.
3. Tap on the e-mail you want to read and reply to.
This opens the e-mail. In the header you see the sender and additional information
such as the time at which the e-mail was received.
4. You can now reply to the e-mail or forward it:
Note: To mark an e-mail as unread, tap on .
To delete an e-mail, tap on .
Tap on or to respond to an e-mail. If you select , all the other e-mail
recipients will receive your reply in addition to the sender.
Tap on to forward an e-mail.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 389
E-Mail and Instant Messaging
E-Mail
Writing and Sending E-Mails
The e-mail reply opens so you can edit it (see the section on E-Mail and Instant
Messaging).
5. Tap on Send.
Writing and Sending E-Mails
You can write and send e-mails as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– A set up e-mail account
1. Tap on Apps > E-mail.
2. Tap on .
Note: If you have opened an e-mail account, the new e-mail is sent from this
account. Otherwise the e-mail is sent with the account you specified as the
default account for outgoing e-mails. The account with which you send the e-
mail is displayed in the top line.
3. Enter the recipient's e-mail address in the To entry field.
Note: While you are entering the e-mail address the system displays suitable
addresses from your contacts. Tap on an address to transfer it.
4. Enter the subject of the e-mail in the Subject entry field.
5. In the Compose Mail entry field, enter the text of the e-mail.
6. You can add other e-mail recipients and attach files to your e-mail:
7. Tap on Send.
Press the menu key and then tap on Cc/Bcc to add other e-mail recip-
ients.
Press the Menu key and then tap on Attach file to attach a file to the e-
mail.
390 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
E-Mail and Instant Messaging
E-Mail
Writing and Sending E-Mails
Notes:
If you want to send the e-mail later, press the Menu key and then tap
on Save.
To discard the e-mail, press the Menu key and then tap on Discard.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 391
E-Mail and Instant Messaging
Instant Messaging
Configuring the Instant Messaging App
Instant Messaging
The Instant Messaging app allows you to send and receive instant messages.
Important: Instant messaging is only available on the PBXs COMpact 5000/
R and COMmander 6000/R/RX with enabled SIP convenience package. The
PBXs must be running firmware version 6.4A to support this app.
Configuring the Instant Messaging App
The dialogue to configure the app will appear automatically before you write the first instant
message.
You can configure the app as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Instant Messaging.
2. Tap on . Alternatively, press the Menu key and tap on Settings.
The dialogue to configure the app opens.
3. In the Send via account list field, select the account you wish to use to send the
instant messages.
4. In the Send via number list field, select the number.
5. In the Notification tone list field, select the desired notification tone.
6. In the Alarm sound list field, select the desired alarm sound.
7. Enter the password in the Password entry field.
8. Tap on .
392 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
E-Mail and Instant Messaging
Instant Messaging
Reading and Replying to an Instant Message
Reading and Replying to an Instant Message
The Instant Messaging app automatically fetches new instant messages. Depending on your
settings, a notification tone or the LED of the message key will notify you of incoming instant
messages.
You can read and reply to instant messages as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– Configured Instant Messaging app
1. Tap on Apps > Instant Messaging.
The last page displayed (conversation or message list) opens.
Note: You can also start the Instant Messaging app by pressing the
Message key and tapping on Instant Messaging.
2. Depending on the page displayed, proceed as follows:
Conversation: To open another conversation, tap on , then tap on the desired
conversation in the message list.
Message list: Tap on the desired conversation.
3. Enter the message in the Message entry field.
4. Tap on Send.
Writing and Sending an Instant Message
You can write and send an instant message as follows:
LED signalling on the message key:
off No entry.
red (blinking) You have new instant messages.
red You have only instant messages that have already been read, but no new
messages,
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 393
E-Mail and Instant Messaging
Instant Messaging
Writing and Sending an Instant Message
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– Configured Instant Messaging app
1. Tap on Apps > Instant Messaging.
The last page displayed (conversation or message list) opens.
2. Only for an opened: Tap on to display the message list
3. Tap on .
4. Enter the message in the Message entry field.
5. Tap on Send.
394 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
This chapter describes how to configure and operate voice mailboxes. It also shows you how
to record announcements, perform remote access, and forward messages, e.g. to a substitute.
Note: To use a standard VoIP account's voice mailbox functions you must
make the settings specified by the VoIP provider (see Settings > Accounts >
Configuring the Voice Mailbox (SIP Account).
Topics
Voice Mailbox (page 395)
Basic Settings (page 396)
Automatic Operation (page 400)
Readiness (page 404)
Substitute Function (page 409)
Message Forwarding (page 414)
Notification by E-Mail (page 419)
Remote Access (page 424)
Message List (page 430)
Announcements (page 441)
Voice Memos (page 444)
Archive (page 450)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 395
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Voice Mailbox
Voice Mailbox
A voice mailbox can be operated like a local answering machine. Depending on its setting, it
records incoming calls and left messages as audio files (*.wav).
A fax box receives incoming telefaxes and stores them as *.pdf files. The maximum length of
a telefax is 50 pages.
Voice messages, announcements and telefaxes are not stored in the telephone but in the PBX
The size of a voice mail/fax box and the permission to use it are set by the PBX. A voice mail/
fax box can be assigned to an individual subscriber or to a group. In addition, a subscriber can
be granted permission for several voice mail/fax boxes.
Important: The voice mailbox function is only available for COMpact 4000,
COMpact 5010 VoIP, COMpact 5020 VoIP, COMpact 5000/R and
COMmander 6000/R/RX PBXs.
In some PBXs you will need to install another module (available as an
optional extra) to run a voice mail/fax box.
COMmander 6000/R/RX: COMmander VMF module
COMpact 5010 VoIP: COMpact 2VoIP module
COMpact 5020 VoIP: COMpact 2VoIP or 6VoIP module
If the local answering machine and a voice mail/fax box are both enabled on
a subscriber's telephone and the SD card is plugged in, it is the local
answering machine that accepts the incoming calls.
396 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Basic Settings
Switching Automatic Playback On/Off
Basic Settings
The base functionality of the voice mail/fax box includes settings that you can modify to suit
your own requirements base, as described below.
Switching Automatic Playback On/Off
If the automatic playback of messages and voice memos is switched on, the new recordings
start playing automatically as soon as you open the message list.
You can switch automatic playback on or off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Note: The Automatic replay of new messages voice mailbox setting in the
PBX's configuration manager refers to playing back messages by remote
access and not via the telephone's message list.
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch Automatic Playback On/Off
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > TAM-App screen.
2. Under TAM-App Configuration, enable or clear the Automatic playback check box.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch Automatic Playback On/Off
Requirements:
Switches automatic playback on.
Switches automatic playback off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 397
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Basic Settings
Switching Call Information On/Off
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
1. Open the voice mailbox's message list.
2. Press the Menu key.
3. Tap on Settings.
4. Select or clear the Automatic playback check box.
Note: Alternatively, tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald >
Answering machine and enable or clear the Automatic playback check
box.
Switching Call Information On/Off
If call information is enabled, you are told when the call was received before the message is
played.
You can switch call information on or off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch Call Information On/Off
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Voice mail > TAM app screen.
2. Under TAM app configuration, enable or clear the Call information check box.
Switches automatic playback on.
Switches automatic playback off.
Switches on the date and time display before the message/voice memo.
Switches off the date and time display before the message/voice memo.
398 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Basic Settings
Switching the Separator Tone On/Off
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch Call Information On/Off
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
1. Open the message list of the voice mailbox.
2. Press the Menu key.
3. Tap on Settings.
4. Select or clear the Call information check box.
Note: Alternatively tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald >
Answering machine and select or clear the Call information check box.
Switching the Separator Tone On/Off
If the separator tone is switched on, you will hear a tone after each message if you listen to
several new messages. This makes it easier to identify the individual messages.
You can switch the separator tone on or off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch the Separator Tone for New Messages On/
Off
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Switches on the date and time display before the message/voice memo.
Switches off the date and time display before the message/voice memo.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 399
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Basic Settings
Switching the Separator Tone On/Off
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Answering machine > TAM-App screen.
2. Under TAM-App Configuration, enable or clear the Separator tone check box.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch the Separator Tone for New Messages On/Off
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
1. Open the voice mailbox's message list.
2. Press the Menu key.
3. Tap on Settings.
4. Select or clear the Separator tone check box.
Note: Alternatively tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald >
Answering machine and enable or clear the Separator tone check box.
Switches on the separator tone between messages.
Switches off the separator tone between messages.
Switches on the separator tone between messages.
Switches off the separator tone between messages.
400 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Automatic Operation
Switching On Automatic Operation
Automatic Operation
In automatic operation mode, the voice mail/fax box is switched to the state of readiness (On,
Off or Depending on configuration) specified in the PBX configuration.
Switching On Automatic Operation
If you have used VMB readiness to switch a voice mail/fax box on or off, independently of the
PBX configuration, you can use this function to reset the box to the PBX configuration and the
state of readiness specified there.
You can switch the automatic operation of a voice mailbox on or off as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The voice mail/fax box has been configured and assigned in the PBX
To switch on automatic operation, press the function key that has been configured for
automatic operation.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Apps > Functions > VMB Automatic
Operation
Functions sorted by group: Apps > Functions > Voice mailbox >
VMB Automatic Operation.
2. In the VMB number entry field, enter the box's telephone number.
3. Tap on Execute.
The box is now in automatic operation and adopts the state of readiness already
predefined by the PBX.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 401
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Automatic Operation
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Automatic Operation
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Automatic Operation
Press the key that was generally assigned for VMB automatic mode to switch on automatic
operation for a voice mail/fax box that has not yet been selected.
Press the key that was specifically assigned for VMB automatic mode to switch on automatic
operation for a predefined voice mail/fax box.
Press the key that was assigned when the voice mail/fax box readiness state was switched on
(VMB readiness) to switch off automatic operation for this voice mail/fax box.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function key for automatic operation as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Automatic Operation
Requirements:
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
LED signalling on the key:
green The function key has a defined assignment: the readiness of the specified
voice mail/fax box is temporary and enabled in the PBX.
off The function key has no defined assignment.
The function key has a defined assignment and the readiness of the specified
voice mail/fax box is permanently enabled.
The function key has a defined assignment and the readiness of the voice
mail/fax box is switched off in the PBX.
402 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Automatic Operation
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Automatic Operation
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key you want to assign, select the VMB automatic
mode function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a name for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key name is used for printing the label.
6. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
7. In the VMB telephone number entry field, enter the telephone number of the voice
mailbox which is to be switched with the function key.
8. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Automatic Operation
Requirements:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 403
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Automatic Operation
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Automatic Operation
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: VMB automatic mode
Functions sorted by group: Voice mailbox > VMB automatic mode.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
7. In the VMB telephone number entry field, enter the telephone number of the voice
mailbox which is to be switched with the function key.
8. Tap on Assign.
9. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
404 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Readiness
Switching the Readiness On/Off
Readiness
Before the voice mail/fax box can accept calls and record messages, its readiness must be
enabled.
The box's readiness cannot be simply switched on permanently. You can use temporary
readiness to switch the box using the PBX configurations, e.g. switch from day to night.
Switching the Readiness On/Off
Note: You can also switch readiness on and off remotely.
You can switch readiness on or off as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mail/fax box has been configured and assigned in the PBX
To switch readiness on or off, press the function key that has been configured for readiness.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Apps > Functions > VMB readiness
Functions sorted by group: Apps > Functions > Voice mailbox >
VMB readiness.
2. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
3. In the Readiness list field, select one of the following options:
4. In the VMB number entry field, enter the voice mailbox's telephone number.
switch on: Enables readiness.
switch off: Disables readiness.
permanently: Switches readiness on permanently.
temporary: Press the key to temporarily enable readiness until the configu-
ration is changed by the PBX.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 405
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Readiness
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Readiness
5. Tap on Execute.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Readiness
Press the key generally assigned for VMB readiness to enable, disable or switch the readiness
state for a voice mail/fax box that has not yet been selected.
Press the key specifically assigned for VMB readiness to enable, disable or switch the
readiness state of a previously defined voice mail/fax box.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function key for readiness as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Readiness
Requirements:
– The voice mail/fax box has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
LED signalling on the key:
green The readiness of a voice mail/fax box that is defined as permanently enabled
is permanently switched on.
The readiness of a voice mai/fax lbox that is defined as temporarily enabled is
temporarily switched on.
yellow The readiness of a voice mail/fax box that is defined as permanently enabled
is temporarily switched on.
The readiness of a voice mail/fax box that is defined as temporarily enabled is
permanently switched on.
off Readiness is disabled.
The function key has no defined assignment.
406 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Readiness
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Readiness
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key you want to assign, select the VMB readiness
function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a name for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key name is used for printing the label.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Readiness list field, select one of the following options:
8. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
9. In the VMB number entry field, enter the telephone number of the box which is to be
switched with the function key.
10. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to enable or disable the box depending on its status.
switch on: Press the key to enable the box.
switch off: Press the key to disable the box.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
permanently: Press the key to permanently enable the box.
temporary: Press the key to temporarily enable the box until the configuration
is switched by the PBX.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 407
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Readiness
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Readiness
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Readiness
Requirements:
– The voice mail/fax box has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: VMB readiness.
Functions sorted by group: Voice mailbox > VMB readiness.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
408 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Readiness
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Readiness
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Readiness list field, select one of the following options:
8. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
9. In the VMB telephone number entry field, enter the telephone number of the box
which is to be switched with the function key.
10. Tap on Assign.
11. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
toggle: Press the key to enable or disable the box depending on its status.
switch on: Press the key to enable the box.
switch off: Press the key to disable the box.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
permanently: Press the key to permanently enable the box.
temporary: Press the key to temporarily enable the box until the configuration
is switched by the PBX.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 409
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Substitute Function
Switching the Substitute Function On/Off
Substitute Function
If the VMB substitute function is switched on, the caller can be connected with the substitute
instead of leaving a message on the voice mailbox. To do this, the caller dials "1" during the
announcement or recording phase.
You have to include this information ("You can reach my substitute by dialling the digit 1...") in
the announcement yourself by recording it in your own announcement.
Switching the Substitute Function On/Off
You can switch the substitute function on or off as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the PBX
– The substitute function has been configured for the voice mailbox in the PBX
– Recorded announcement for the voice mailbox
To enable or disable the substitute function, press the function key that has been configured
for it.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Apps > Functions > VMB substitute
Functions sorted by group: Apps > Functions > Voice mailbox >
VMB substitute.
2. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
3. In the VMB number entry field, enter the voice mailbox's telephone number.
4. In the Proxy entry field, enter the substitute's telephone number.
5. Tap on Execute.
switch on: Enables the substitute function.
switch off: Disables the substitute function.
410 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Substitute Function
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Substitute Function
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Substitute Function
Press the key generally assigned for VMB substitute to enable, disable or switch the substitute
function for a voice mailbox that has not yet been selected.
Press the key specifically assigned for VMB substitute to enable, disable or switch the
substitute function for a previously defined voice mailbox.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function key for the substitute function as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for the Substitute
Function
Requirements:
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
– The substitute function has been configured for the voice mailbox in the Auerswald PBX
– Recorded announcement for the voice mailbox
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
LED signalling on the key:
green The voice mailbox's substitute function is switched on (for a defined
assignment).
off The substitute function is switched off.
The function key has no defined assignment.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 411
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Substitute Function
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Substitute Function
4. In the list field next to the function key you want to assign, select the VMB substitute
function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a name for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key name is used for printing the label.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
8. In the VMB telephone number entry field, enter the telephone number of the voice
mailbox which is to be switched with the function key.
9. In the Proxy entry field, enter the substitute's telephone number.
10. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to enable or disable the substitute function depending on
its status.
switch on: Press the key to enable the substitute function.
switch off: Press the key to disable the substitute function.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
412 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Substitute Function
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Substitute Function
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
–The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function key for the Substitute Function
Requirements:
–The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
–The substitute function has been configured for the voice mailbox in the Auerswald PBX
–Recorded announcement for the voice mailbox
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: VMB substitute.
Functions sorted by group: Voice mailbox > VMB substitute.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 413
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Substitute Function
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Substitute Function
7. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
8. In the VMB telephone number entry field, enter the telephone number of the voice
mailbox which is to be switched with the function key.
9. In the Proxy entry field, enter the substitute's telephone number.
10. Tap on Assign.
11. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
–The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
toggle: Press the key to enable or disable the substitute function depending on
its status.
switch on: Press the key to enable the substitute function.
switch off: Press the key to disable the substitute function.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
414 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Message Forwarding
Switching Message Forwarding On/Off
Message Forwarding
The message forwarding function means you can be notified by the voice mailbox set up for
the telephone number configured on the PBX when new messages arrive.
Switching Message Forwarding On/Off
You can switch message forwarding on or off as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the PBX
– The destination for message forwarding has been configured for the voice mailbox in the PBX
To switch message forwarding on or off, press the function key that has been configured for
message forwarding.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Apps > Functions > VMB message
fwd.
Functions sorted by group: Apps > Functions > Voice mailbox >
VMB message fwd..
2. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
3. In the VMB number entry field, enter the voice mailbox's telephone number.
4. Tap on Execute.
switch on: Enables message forwarding.
switch off: Disables message forwarding.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 415
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Message Forwarding
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Message Forwarding
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Message Forwarding
Press the key generally assigned for VMB message fwd. to enable, disable or switch message
forwarding for a voice mailbox that has not yet been selected.
Press the key generally assigned for VMB message fwd. to enable, disable or switch message
forwarding.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function key for message forwarding as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Message Forwarding
Requirements:
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
– The destination for message forwarding has been configured for the voice mailbox in the PBX
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
LED signalling on the key:
green Message forwarding for the voice mailbox is enabled (for a defined
assignment).
off Message forwarding is disabled.
The function key has no defined assignment.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
416 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Message Forwarding
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Message Forwarding
4. In the list field next to the function key you want to assign, select the VMB message
fwd. function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a name for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key name is used for printing the label.
6. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
7. In the Number entry field, enter the substitute's telephone number.
8. In the VMB telephone number entry field, enter the telephone number of the voice
mailbox which is to be switched with the function key.
9. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
10. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
–The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to enable or disable message forwarding depending on
the status.
switch on: Press the key to enable message forwarding.
switch off: Press the key to disable message forwarding.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 417
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Message Forwarding
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Message Forwarding
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Message Forwarding
Requirements:
–The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
–The destination for message forwarding has been configured for the voice mailbox in the PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: VMB message fwd.
Functions sorted by group: Voice mailbox > VMB message fwd..
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to enable or disable message forwarding depending on
the status.
switch on: Press the key to enable message forwarding.
switch off: Press the key to disable message forwarding.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
418 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Message Forwarding
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Message Forwarding
8. In the VMB telephone number entry field, enter the telephone number of the voice
mailbox which is to be switched with the function key.
9. Tap on Assign.
10. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
–The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 419
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Notification by E-Mail
Switching Notification by E-Mail On/Off
Notification by E-Mail
Notification by e-mail means that the voice mail/fax box sends an e-mail to the e-mail address
configured in the PBX to tell you that new messages have arrived.
Switching Notification by E-Mail On/Off
You can switch notification by e-mail on or off as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mail/fax box has been configured and assigned in the PBX
– The outgoing mail server has been configured for the voice mail/fax box in the PBX
– E-mail transfer has been configured for the voice mail/fax box in the PBX
To switch notification by e-mail on or off, press the function key that has been configured for
this function.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Apps > Functions > VMB e-mail
Functions sorted by group: Apps > Functions > Voice mailbox >
VMB e-mail.
2. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
3. In the VMB number entry field, enter the voice mailbox's telephone number.
4. Tap on Execute.
switch on: Switches notification by e-mail on.
switch off: Switches notification by e-mail off.
420 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Notification by E-Mail
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Notification by E-Mail
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Notification by E-Mail
Press the key generally assigned for VMB e-mail to enable, disable or switch notification by e-
mail for a voice mail/fax box that has not yet been selected.
Press the key specifically assigned for VMB e-mail to enable, disable or switch notification by
e-mail.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function key for notification by e-mail as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Notification by E-Mail
Requirements:
– The voice mail/fax box has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
– The outgoing mail server has been configured for the voice mail/fax box in the PBX
– E-mail transfer has been configured for the voice mail/fax box in the PBX
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
LED signalling on the key:
green The voice mail/fax box's notification by e-mail function is switched on (for a
defined assignment).
off Notification by e-mail is disabled.
The function key has no defined assignment.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 421
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Notification by E-Mail
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Notification by E-Mail
4. In the list field next to the function key you want to assign, select the VMB e-mail
function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a name for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key name is used for printing the label.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
8. In the VMB telephone number entry field, enter the telephone number of the voice
mail/fax box which is to be switched with the function key.
9. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to enable or disable notification by e-mail dependent on
its status.
switch on: Press the key to enable notification by e-mail.
switch off: Press the key to disable notification by e-mail.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
422 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Notification by E-Mail
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Notification by E-Mail
Requirements for using the function:
–The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for E-mail Notification
Requirements:
– The voice mail/fax box has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
– The outgoing mail server has been configured for the voice mail/fax box in the PBX
– E-mail transfer has been configured for the voice mail/fax box in the PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: VMB e-mail.
Functions sorted by group: Voice mailbox > VMB e-mail.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to enable or disable notification by e-mail dependent on
its status.
switch on: Press the key to enable notification by e-mail.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 423
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Notification by E-Mail
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Notification by E-Mail
7. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
8. In the VMB number entry field, enter the box's telephone number.
9. Tap on Assign.
10. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
switch off: Press the key to disable notification by e-mail.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the options.
424 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Remote Access
Performing Remote Access
Remote Access
Remote access is used to access and operate the voice mailbox from an internal telephone or
from an external telephone.
Performing Remote Access
You can perform remote access as follows:
Using a character string on an external telephone
Using a character string on an internal telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the PBX
1. Call the voice mailbox.
The voice mailbox accepts the call. You hear the configured announcement.
2. Dial *.
Note: If the querying internal telephone is the owner/user of the voice
mailbox, step 3 will be omitted.
3. Enter the user PIN or the PIN for remote access and press #.
This starts the remote access procedure. You are led through the remote access
menu with the help of various announcements.
4. Execute remote access by entering the following digits.
0 Opens the Help menu.
1 Opens the main menu.
2 Replays new messages.
3 Replays all the messages.
4 Jumps back to the previous message.
5 Repeats the message currently being replayed.
6 Jumps to the next message.
7 Deletes the message currently being replayed.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 425
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Remote Access
Switching Remote Access On/Off
Note: By dialling 9 while a message is being replayed, the telephone number
of the caller will be displayed—provided it has been transferred. By pressing
the # key, you can initiate a callback to the caller's telephone number.
Switching Remote Access On/Off
You can switch remote access on or off as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
8 Ends playback.
* 10: Disables the voice mailbox.
* 11: Enables the voice mailbox.
* 20: Enables you to record and change to different announcements.
Note: The default announcement and your announcements
are played, if present. The following functions are available
whilst your own announcements are being played back:
#: Selects the announcement currently being played as an
active announcement.
4: Jumps back to the previous announcement.
5: Repeats the announcement currently being played.
6: Jumps to the next announcement.
7 Selects the announcement that is currently being played,
so you can change it or record it. Press # to save your
announcement, or * to exit the function.
* 30: Disables message forwarding.
* 31: Enables message forwarding.
* 70: Deletes all messages and voice memos.
* 99: Records a voice memo.
Disconnect: Ends remote access.
426 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Remote Access
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Remote Access
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the PBX
To enable or disable the remote access function, press a function key that has been
configured for the remote access function.
Alternatively:
1. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Apps > Functions > VMB remote
access
Functions sorted by group: Apps > Functions > Voice mailbox >
VMB remote access.
2. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
3. In the VMB number entry field, enter the voice mailbox's telephone number.
4. Tap on Execute.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Remote Access
Press the key generally assigned for VMB remote access to enable, disable or switch the
function for remotely accessing a voice mailbox.
Press the key specifically assigned for VMB remote access to enable, disable or toggle the
remote access function.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function key for remote access as follows:
Using the configuration manager
switch on: Enables the remote access function.
switch off: Disables the remote access function.
LED signalling on the key:
green Voice mailbox remote access is enabled (for a defined assignment).
off Remote access is disabled.
The function key has no defined assignment.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 427
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Remote Access
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Remote Access
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Remote Access
Requirements:
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key you want to assign, select the VMB remote
access function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a name for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key name is used for printing the label.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to enable or disable remote access dependent on its
status.
switch on: Press the key to enable remote access.
428 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Remote Access
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Remote Access
7. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
8. In the VMB telephone number entry field, enter the telephone number of the voice
mailbox which is to be switched with the function key.
9. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
–The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Remote Access
Requirements:
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
switch off: Press the key to disable remote access.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the option.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 429
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Remote Access
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Remote Access
Functions listed alphabetically: VMB remote access.
Functions sorted by group: Voice mailbox > VMB remote access.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
8. In the VMB number entry field, enter the voice mailbox's telephone number.
9. Tap on Assign.
10. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to enable or disable remote access dependent on its
status.
switch on: Press the key to enable remote access.
switch off: Press the key to disable remote access.
decide each time a key is pressed: Press the key to open the dialogue in
which you select the options.
430 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Message List
Opening the Message List of a Voice Mailbox
Message List
Message list of the voice mailbox
The message list of the voice mailbox is where the messages recorded by the voice mailbox
and/or voice memos, with the time and date of their recording, and also the telephone number
of the caller/communication partner are saved. The recordings are numbered consecutively.
The last/latest recording is assigned the number 1.
You can return the call of someone who has called you directly from the message list.
From the message list you can also access the following functions:
Call up the voice mailbox archive
Record announcements for the voice mailbox
Record memos
Message list of the fax box
The message list of the fax box is where the messages received by the fax box, with the time
and date of their receipt, and also the telephone number of the sender are saved. The telefaxes
are numbered consecutively. The last/latest telefax is assigned the number 1.
From the message list you can also access the following functions:
Call up the fax box archive
Opening the Message List of a Voice Mailbox
Open the message list of a voice mailbox to retrieve, play back and delete recordings
(messages and voice memos) or move them to an archive. You can also record announce-
ments.
The message key LED shows you that there are recordings present in the message list.
LED signalling on the message key:
Off No recordings present.
Red (blinking) New recordings are present.
The fill level of a voice mailbox has exceeded the warning threshold.
Red No new messages are present. Only recordings that have already been
listened to are present.
The fill level of a voice mailbox has exceeded the warning threshold and has
already been acknowledged.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 431
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Message List
Opening the Message List of a Voice Mailbox
You can open the message list as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mail box has been configured and assigned in the PBX
To open the message list, press the function key that has been configured to open the
message list or tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Apps > Functions > VMB open .
Functions sorted by group: Apps > Functions > Voice mailbox > VMB
open.
Note: If a new recording is present, you can also open the message list by
tapping on in the Status Info widget.
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Press the Message key.
This displays the available lists (this function is skipped if the other lists are empty).
2. Select the message list for the required fax box.
This displays the fax box‘s message list.
Notes:
If you have enabled automatic playback under Apps > Settings >
Auerswald > Answering machine, new recordings will be played back
automatically after the voice mailbox has been opened. The latest recording
is played back first.
You can also enable or disable automatic playback from the message list by
pressing the Menu key and tapping on Settings tippen.
3. In the list field on the left, above the message list, select one of the following options:
All entries: Displays all the entries saved in the message list.
Messages only: Displays only the messages saved in the message list.
Voice memos only: Displays only the voice memos saved in the message list.
Archive: Displays the voice mailbox archive.
432 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Message List
Opening the Message List of a Fax Box
4. Select a message.
5. Select one of the following options:
Opening the Message List of a Fax Box
Open the message list of a fax box to download telefaxes to your telephone, delete them or
move them into an archive. In addition, you cen forward telefaxes by e-mail.
Note: Your telephone saves telefaxes in the *.pdf file format. To read the
telefaxes, you need to install a suitable app on your telephone (see chapter
Introduction to the Telephone > Apps > All Apps > Installing Additional Apps).
You can open the message list as follows:
Announcements: Displays the saved and free announcements for the voice
mailbox.
Record voice memo: Starts the recording of a voice memo.
Starts the recording playback.
Distributes the recording to another voice mailbox.
Moves the recording to the archive.
Fetches the recording from the archive.
Marks the recording as already listened to.
Marks the recording as new.
Deletes the displayed recording. To delete all the recordings apart from the
announcements from the message list, press the Menu key and tap on
Delete all messages, then tap on OK.
Calls the telephone number of the caller who has left the message.
LED signalling on the message key:
Off No recordings present.
Red (blinking) New recordings are present.
The fill level of a fax box has exceeded the warning threshold.
Red No new messages are present. Only recordings that have already been
listened to are present.
The fill level of a fax box has exceeded the warning threshold and has already
been acknowledged.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 433
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Message List
Opening the Message List of a Fax Box
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The fax box has been configured and assigned in the PBX
To open the message list, press the function key that has been configured to open the
message list or tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: Apps > Functions > VMB open .
Functions sorted by group: Apps > Functions > Voice mailbox > VMB
open .
Alternatively, proceed as described below.
1. Press the Message key.
This displays the available lists (this function is skipped if the other lists are empty).
2. Select the message list for the required fax box.
This displays the fax box‘s message list.
3. In the list field on the left, above the message list, select one of the following options:
4. Select a message.
5. Select one of the following options:
All faxes: Displays all telefaxes saved in the message list.
Sent faxes: Displays only the sent telefaxes.
Received faxes: Displays only the received telefaxes.
Archive: Displays the archive of the fax box.
Saves the telefax to the telephone.
Distributes the telefax to another fax box.
Moves the telefax into the archive.
Fetches the telefax from the archive.
Marks the telefax as already downloaded.
Marks the telefax as new.
Deletes the displayed telefax. To delete all telefaxes from the message list,
press the Menu key and tap on Delete all messages, then tap on OK.
Sends the telefax to the e-mail address entered for e-mail forwarding.
434 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Message List
Listening to Messages
Listening to Messages
You can listen to messages in the voice mailbox as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the PBX
1. Open the message list of the voice mailbox.
2. In the list field on the left, above the message list, select one of the following options:
3. Select a message.
4. Tap on to listen to the message.
5. Select one of the following options:
Note: The and buttons are only active while the recorded voice memo
is being played back, not while the call information is being played back.
All entries: Displays all the entries saved in the message list.
Messages only: Displays only the messages saved in the message list.
Voice memos only: Displays only the voice memos saved in the message list.
Archive: Displays the voice mailbox archive.
Announcements: Displays the saved and free announcements for the voice
mailbox.
Record voice memo: Starts the recording of a voice memo.
Interrupts the recording playback.
Jumps backwards 5 seconds when the recording is being played back.
Ends the recording playback.
Jumps forwards 5 seconds when the recording is being played back.
Deletes the selected recording.
Ends the recording playback and closes the menu.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 435
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Message List
Distributing Messages
Distributing Messages
The messages in a voice mail/fax box can be distributed to other voice mail/fax boxes.
You can distribute messages as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mail/fax box has been configured and assigned in the PBX
1. Open the message list of the voice mail/fax box.
2. Only for voice mailboxes: In the list field on the left, above the message list, select one
of the following options:
3. Only for fax boxes: In the list field on the left, above the message list, select one of
the following options:
4. Select a message.
5. Tap on and enter a telephone number.
6. Select one of the following options:
All entries: Displays all the entries saved in the message list.
Messages only: Displays only the messages saved in the message list.
Voice memos only: Displays only the voice memos saved in the message list.
Archive: Displays the voice mailbox archive.
Announcements: Displays the saved and free announcements for the voice
mailbox.
Record voice memo: Starts the recording of a voice memo.
All faxes: Displays all telefaxes saved in the message list.
Sent faxes: Displays only the sent telefaxes.
Received faxes: Displays only the received telefaxes.
Archive: Displays the archive of the fax box.
Move: Moves the message to the selected voice mail/fax box.
Copy: Copies the message to the selected voice mail/fax box.
436 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Message List
Dialling from the Message List
Dialling from the Message List
You can return the call of a caller who left a specific message directly from the message list.
You can dial from the voice mailbox message list as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the PBX
1. Open the voice mailbox's message list.
2. In the list field on the left, above the message list, select one of the following options:
3. Select a message.
4. Tap on .
The telephone number of the caller who left the message is called.
Deleting Messages from the Message List
You can delete messages from a voice mail/fax box either singly or all at once (together with
the voice memos).
You can delete messages as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mail/fax box has been configured and assigned in the PBX
All entries: Displays all the entries saved in the message list.
Messages only: Displays only the messages saved in the message list.
Voice memos only: Displays only the voice memos saved in the message list.
Archive: Displays the voice mailbox archive.
Announcements: Displays the saved and free announcements for the voice
mailbox.
Record voice memo: Starts the recording of a voice memo.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 437
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Message List
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Opening a Message List
1. Open the message list of the voice mail/fax box.
2. Only for voice mailboxes: In the list field on the left, above the message list, select one
of the following options:
3. Only for fax boxes: In the list field on the left, above the message list, select one of
the following options:
4. Select the message you want to delete.
5. Tap on .
The message is deleted.
Note: To delete all the recordings (messages and voice memos) from the
message list at the same time, press the Menu key, tap on Delete all
messages and then tap on OK.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Opening a Message List
Press the key generally assigned for VMB open to open a list of the voice mail/fax boxes that
are assigned to that key.
Press the key specifically assigned for VMB open to open the message list of the voice mail/
fax box that was set up for this function key.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
All entries: Displays all the entries saved in the message list.
Messages only: Displays only the messages saved in the message list.
Voice memos only: Displays only the voice memos saved in the message list.
Archive: Displays the voice mailbox archive.
Announcements: Displays the saved and free announcements for the voice
mailbox.
Record voice memo: Starts the recording of a voice memo.
All faxes: Displays all telefaxes saved in the message list.
Sent faxes: Displays only the sent telefaxes.
Received faxes: Displays only the received telefaxes.
Archive: Displays the archive of the fax box.
438 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Message List
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Opening a Message List
You can configure a function key for opening a message list as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Opening a Message
List
Requirements:
– The voice mail/fax box has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
LED signalling on the key:
red A connection to the specified voice mail/fax box is present.
red (blinking) Only for voice mailboxes: A message is currently being recorded in the
specified voice mailbox. Simply pick up the receiver to take the call.
yellow The fill level of the specified voice mail/fax box has exceeded the warning
threshold.
yellow
(blinking)
The specified voice mail/fax box is full.
green No new messages are present in the voice mail/fax box, the only messages
present have already been listened to or downloaded.
green
(blinking)
New messages are present in the specified voice mail/fax box.
off The specified voice mail/fax box is empty.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 439
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Message List
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Opening a Message List
4. In the list field next to the function key you want to define, select the VMB open
function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a name for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key name is used for printing the label.
6. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
7. In the VMB telephone number entry field, enter the telephone number of the box
which is to be switched with the function key.
8. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
–The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Opening a Message List
Requirements:
– The voice mail/fax box has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
440 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Message List
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Opening a Message List
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: VMB open.
Functions sorted by group: Voice mailbox > VMB open.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
7. In the VMB telephone number entry field, enter the telephone number of the box
which is to be switched with the function key.
8. Tap on Assign.
9. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 441
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Announcements
Recording an Announcement
Announcements
You can record announcements via the telephone for each assigned voice mailbox. You can
play, enable/disable and delete your own announcements. In addition to the default
announcement from the language files, you can store a maximum of 10 of your own announce-
ments for each voice mailbox.
Recording an Announcement
You can record an announcement as follows:
Using the configuration manager on the PBX (see Instructions for the PBX).
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the PBX
1. Press the Message key.
2. Select the message list for the required voice mailbox.
3. In the list field on the left, above the message list, select the Announcements option.
4. Select a free announcement.
5. Tap on , to start the recording.
You now see the entry field in which you enter the announcement's name.
6. Enter a name for the announcement. Possible entries:
7. Tap on OK.
The recording starts.
8. Record your announcement.
9. Tap on to stop recording the announcement.
Up to 16 digits
Numbers and characters
442 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Announcements
Switching Your Own Announcement On/Off
Notes:
You have the option of re-recording the recorded announcement ( ) or
listening to it again ( ).
To set the new announcement as the default announcement, tap on .
If you press , the announcement is no longer used as the default
announcement.
Recordings whose recording time is shorter than 3 seconds are not saved.
Switching Your Own Announcement On/Off
You can switch your own announcement on or off as follows:
Using the configuration manager on the PBX (see Instructions for the PBX).
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the PBX
– You have recorded your own announcement
1. Press the Message key.
2. Select the message list for the required voice mailbox.
3. In the list field on the left, above the message list, select the Announcements option.
4. Select a recorded announcement.
5. Tap:
to use this announcement instead of the PBX's default announcement.
to switch off this announcement and replace it with the PBX's default
announcement.
The selection you make here is then used by the PBX.
Note: If you have not recorded and enabled your own announcement, the
PBX's default announcement is played when a call is received.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 443
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Announcements
Deleting an Existing Announcement
Deleting an Existing Announcement
You can delete an existing announcement as follows:
Using the configuration manager on the PBX (see Instructions for the PBX)
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the PBX
1. Press the Message key.
2. Select the message list for the required voice mailbox.
3. In the list field on the left, above the message list, select the Announcements option.
4. Select the announcement you want to delete.
5. Tap on to delete the recording.
444 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Voice Memos
Recording Memos
Voice Memos
You can use the voice mailbox to save your own voice memos. It can store up to 250 voice
memos along with the date and time at which they were recorded. The recordings are
numbered consecutively. The last/latest recording is assigned the number 1.
You can listen to, edit, and delete voice memos like any other messages.
Recording Memos
You can record a memo as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the PBX
To record a voice memo, press a function key that has been configured for the recording of
voice memos.
Alternatively:
1. Press the Message key.
2. Select the message list for the required voice mailbox.
3. In the list field on the left, above the message list, select the Record voice memo
option.
4. Record your voice memo:
Speak into the telephone's microphone.
Alternatively, pick up the receiver and speak into its microphone to improve the
sound quality of the voice memo.
5. Tap on to stop recording the announcement.
Note: Recordings whose recording time is shorter than 3 seconds are not
saved.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 445
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Voice Memos
Listening to Voice Memos
Listening to Voice Memos
You can listen to voice memos in the voice mailbox as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the PBX
1. Open the voice mailbox's message list.
2. In the list field on the left, above the message list, select the Voice memos option.
3. Select a voice memo.
4. Tap on .
5. Select one of the following options:
Note: The and buttons are only active while the recorded voice memo
is being played back, not while the voice memo information is being played
back.
Distributing Voice Memos
You can distribute the voice memos in one voice mailbox to other voice mailboxes.
You can distribute the voice memos to other voice mailboxes as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
Interrupts the recording playback.
Jumps backwards 5 seconds when the recording is being played back.
Ends the recording playback.
Jumps forwards 5 seconds when the recording is being played back.
Deletes the selected recording.
Ends the recording playback and closes the menu.
446 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Voice Memos
Deleting Voice Memos
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the PBX
1. Open the voice mailbox's message list.
2. In the list field on the left, above the message list, select the Voice memos option.
3. Select a voice memo.
4. Tap on and enter a telephone number.
5. Select one of the following options:
Deleting Voice Memos
You can delete voice memos from a voice mailbox either singly or all at once (together with the
messages).
You can delete voice memos as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the PBX
1. Open the voice mailbox's message list.
2. In the list field on the left, above the message list, select the Voice memos option.
3. Select the voice memo you want to delete.
4. Tap on .
The voice memo is deleted.
Note: To delete all the recordings (messages and voice memos) from the
message list at the same time, press the Menu key, tap on Delete
all messages and then tap on OK.
Move: Moves the voice memo to the selected voice mailbox.
Copy: Copies the voice memo to the selected voice mailbox.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 447
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Voice Memos
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Recording Voice Memos
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Recording Voice Memos
Press the key generally assigned for VMB voice memo to open a dialogue where you can
select the voice mailbox in which you want to record a voice memo.
Press the key specifically assigned for VMB voice memo to start recording a voice memo in
the voice mailbox for which this function key has been configured.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function key for recording voice memos as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Note: The function can only be set up on a programmable function key that
has an LED (not on a touch function key).
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Recording Voice
Memos
Requirements:
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
LED signalling on the key:
yellow
(blinking)
The connection to the voice mailbox has been created.
green The voice mailbox is in recording mode.
off No recording is being carried out in the voice mailbox.
448 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Voice Memos
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Recording Voice Memos
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key you want to assign, select the VMB voice
memo function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a name for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key name is used for printing the label.
6. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
7. In the VMB telephone number entry field, enter the telephone number of the voice
mailbox which is to be switched with the function key.
8. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Requirements for using the function:
–The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Recording Voice Memos
Requirements:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 449
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Voice Memos
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Recording Voice Memos
– The voice mailbox has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap:
Functions listed alphabetically: VMB voice memo.
Functions sorted by group: Voice mailbox > VMB voice memo.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Account list field, select the system telephony account.
7. In the VMB telephone number entry field, enter the telephone number of the voice
mailbox which is to be switched with the function key.
8. Tap on Assign.
9. Tap on Exit.
Requirements for using the function:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
450 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Archive
Moving a Message into an Archive
Archive
Messages which you wish to remove from the message list of a voice mail or fax box without
deleting them can be moved to the archive.
Moving a Message into an Archive
You can move a message into an archive as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mail/fax box has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
1. Open the message list of the voice mail/fax box.
2. Tap on the required message.
3. Tap on to move the message into the archive.
Opening an Archive
You can open an archive as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mail/fax box has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
1. Open the message list of the voice mail/fax box.
2. In the list field on the left, above the message list, select the Archive option.
Note: To move a message from the archive to the inbox, tap on the required
message and then tap on .
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 451
Voice Mailboxes on the PBX
Archive
Deleting Messages from the Archive
Deleting Messages from the Archive
You can delete messages as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– The telephone is a system telephone in an Auerswald PBX
– The voice mail/fax box has been configured and assigned in the Auerswald PBX
1. Open the message list of the voice mail/fax box.
2. In the list field on the left, above the message list, select the Archive option.
3. Tap on the required message.
4. Tap on to delete the message.
452 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Settings
This section describes how to configure and manage your telephone.
Topics
Providers and PBXs (page 453)
Accounts (page 497)
Bluetooth (only COMfortel 3600 IP) (page 525)
Network (page 529)
Sound (page 552)
Display and LEDs (page 564)
Apps (page 579)
Emergency Numbers (page 582)
Location (page 584)
IP Camera (page 586)
Permissions (page 604)
Security (page 607)
Language and Input (page 615)
App Accounts (page 618)
Date and Time (page 622)
Telephone Information (page 628)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 453
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Providers and PBXs
In a local network (LAN), the telephone can operate as an Auerswald VoIP system telephone
and/or as a standard VoIP telephone.
Provider
A VoIP provider is an Internet service provider that offers Internet telephony (VoIP, meaning
"Voice over Internet Protocol").
There are many providers that issue each customer their own telephone number, which can be
called from a land line, as well as over the Internet. Depending on the provider used, and the
telephone number called, these types of telephone connections may extremely cheap, if not
free of charge.
Some providers give the impression that Internet telephony is totally free of charge. However,
it is important to research the actual costs incurred by checking the tariff tables of the particular
provider. As the connection to a land line connection is established over a gateway, the location
of the gateway may affect any charges associated with the call. This applies especially to inter-
national calls that may be more expensive than simple calls on a public switched network if the
gateway is located domestically.
PBXs
PBXs connect different internal end devices with different public telecoms networks, enabling
users to make external and internal calls. The PBXs make different ports/interfaces available
for this.
To operate this as an Auerswald system telephone, you require one of the following Auerswald
PBXs:
COMpact 4000
COMpact 5010 VoIP
COMpact 5020 VoIP
COMpact 5000/R
COMmander 6000/R/RX
COMmander Basic.2/19"
COMmander Business/19"
Moreover, the telephone can also be used as a standard VoIP telephone in the following
Auerswald PBXs:
COMpact 3000 analog/ISDN/VoIP
454 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Providers and PBXs
New Provider/PBX
Important:
New Provider/PBX
Some providers/PBXs are already pre-configured in the factory settings. In total you can
configure up to 10 providers/PBXs.
Do so as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Create a Provider/PBX
1. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
2. Click on New.
3. Select the required profile from the Profile list field.
The configuration screen for the provider/PBX opens.
Further steps:
– Make further settings on the configuration screen.
Note: You will receive the settings data directly from your provider.
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
To support the system telephone, the PBX needs at least the following
firmware versions:
COMpact 5010 VoIP, COMpact 5020 VoIP, COMmander Basic.2/19",
COMmander Business/19": 4.2F
COMpact 4000, COMpact 5000/R: 6.4D
COMmander 6000/R/RX: 6.0C
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 455
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Deleting a Provider/PBX
Using the Telephone to Create a Provider/PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
2. Tap on New provider/PBX.
3. Select the required profile from the Profile list field.
A dialogue showing the available settings for the provider/PBX is displayed.
Further steps:
– Make further settings.
Note: You will receive the settings data directly from your provider.
Deleting a Provider/PBX
You can delete providers/PBXs that are no longer required.
Important: You can only restore deleted providers/PBX if you have backed
up their data to the SD card in the telephone.
You can delete providers/PBXs as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Delete a Provider/PBX
1. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
2. Click on the provider/PBX you want to delete.
3. Click on Delete.
Using the Telephone to Delete a Provider/PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
456 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Registering New Accounts
2. Tap and keep pressing the name of the provider/PBX.
3. Tap on Delete.
Registering New Accounts
If required you can reregister the account with the provider/on the PBX.
You can register a new account as follows:
Separately for the provider or PBX
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– A registrar set up for the provider/PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
2. Tap and keep pressing the name of the provider/PBX.
3. Tap on Register all accounts.
Note: You can also register accounts individually by tapping Apps >
Settings > Accounts.
Entering a Name for the Provider/PBX
The provider/PBX name is used to identify it.
You can enter the provider/PBX name as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Enter a Name for the Provider/PBX
1. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 457
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring the VoIP Provider or PBX Type
2. In the line that contains the provider/PBX, click Configure.
The provider/PBX configuration screen opens.
3. Enter the name of the provider/PBX in the Name entry field under Providers &
exchange systems settings. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Enter a Name for the Provider/PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
2. Tap on the name of the provider/PBX.
3. Tap on Name and then enter the name of the provider/PBX in the entry field. Possible
entries:
4. Tap on OK.
Configuring the VoIP Provider or PBX Type
When you configure the provider/PBX you can also select the type of the PBX or VoIP
provider.
You can configure the VoIP Provider or PBX Type as follows:
Separately for the provider or PBX
Using the telephone
Requirements:
Auerswald profile not selected
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
2. Tap on the name of the provider/PBX.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
458 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring a Domain
3. Tap on Type.
4. Select one of the following options from the Type list field:
Configuring a Domain
The domain (also known as a "SIP domain" or "SIP realm") is required for the VoIP address.
The VoIP address of a subscriber consists of the VoIP telephone number and the domain,
separated by the @ character: <subscriber>@domain.
You can configure a domain as follows:
Separately for the provider or PBX
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Domain
Requirements:
– Set DNS server
1. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
2. In the line that contains the provider/PBX, click on Configure.
The provider/PBX configuration screen opens.
3. Enter the domain in the Domain entry field under Providers & exchange systems
settings. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
PBX: Selects PBX as the type.
VoIP provider: Selects VoIP provider as the type.
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 114.188.1.125)
URL (example: sipprovider.uk)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 459
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring the Registrar
Using the Telephone to Configure a Domain
Requirements:
– Set DNS server
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
2. Tap on the name of the provider/PBX.
3. Under SIP settings, tap on Domain and then enter the domain in the entry field.
Possible entries:
4. Tap on OK.
Configuring the Registrar
The registrar (also known as the SIP registrar, SIP server or SIP registry server) is the IP
address or URL of the provider/PBX with whom/on which the telephone is registered. If the
registrar is enabled, REGISTER requests are sent to the registrar.
Notes:
The registrar should only be disabled if the provider requires this.
No NAT Keep Alive is performed if the registrar is disabled.
An internal network is usually protected from external manipulation by,
for example, a firewall integrated in the router. Without NAT Keep Alive, the
firewall's security functions will defend you against attempted accesses from
the Internet.
That is why you may need to set up port forwarding for incoming SIP packets
in the router for the SIP port set up in the provider's/PBX's configuration.
Important: Every port opening on the router is a security risk. Apply the
appropriate security measures.
You can configure the registrar as follows:
Separately for the provider or PBX
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 114.188.1.125)
URL (example: sipprovider.uk)
460 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring the Registrar
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the Registrar
Requirements:
– Set DNS server
1. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
2. In the line that contains the provider/PBX, click Configure.
The provider/PBX configuration screen opens.
3. Under Registrar settings, select or clear the Registrar check box.
4. Under Registrar settings, enter the SIP port in the Registrar address entry field.
Possible entries:
5. Under Registrar settings, enter the port number in the Registrar port entry field.
Possible entries:
6. Under Registrar settings, enter a value in the Registration interval (min.) entry
field. Possible entries:
Note: In the test phase, after you have set up the provider/PBX, we
recommend you enter a low value (e.g. three minutes). After completing the
test phase, you can enter a much higher value.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the Registrar
Requirements:
– Set DNS server
Switches the registrar On.
Switches the registrar Off. (No further action is required.)
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 103.103.103.103)
URL (example: registrar.uk)
1 to 65535
1 to 60: The telephone then registers itself again with the provider/to the PBX
after this specified interval (1 to 60 minutes).
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 461
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring the Outbound Proxy
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
2. Tap on the name of the provider/PBX.
3. Under SIP settings, tap on Registrar.
4. Select or clear the Registrar check box.
5. Tap on Registrar address and then enter the registrar. Possible entries:
6. Tap on OK.
7. Tap on Registrar port and then enter the port number (port). Possible entries:
8. Tap on OK.
9. Tap on Registration interval (min) and enter a value. Possible entries:
Note: In the test phase, after you have set up the provider/PBX, we
recommend you enter a low value (e.g. three minutes). After completing the
test phase, you can enter a much higher value.
10. Tap on OK.
Configuring the Outbound Proxy
The outbound proxy is an intermediate server that processes all VoIP requests and connec-
tions going to the provider (except for registration).
You can configure the outbound proxy as follows:
Separately for the provider or PBX
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Switches the registrar On.
Switches the registrar Off. (No further action is required.)
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 103.103.103.103)
URL (example: registrar.uk)
1 to 65535
1 to 60: The PBX then registers itself again with the provider/on the PBX after
this specified interval (1 to 60 minutes).
462 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring the Outbound Proxy
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the Outbound Proxy
Requirements:
– Set DNS server
1. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
2. In the line that contains the provider/PBX, click on Configure.
The provider/PBX configuration screen opens.
3. Under Outbound proxy, select one of the following options:
4. Under Outbound proxy, enter the outbound proxy in the Outbound proxy IP/URL
entry field. Possible entries:
5. Under Outbound proxy, enter the port number in the Outbound proxy port entry
field. Possible entries:
Note: The port 5060 is configured in the factory settings.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the Outbound Proxy
Requirements:
– Set DNS server
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
2. Tap on the name of the provider/PBX.
Outbound proxy is disabled: Disables the outbound proxy. (No further action
is required.)
Outbound proxy assigned automatically: Automatically determines an
outbound proxy. (No further action is required.)
Outbound proxy assigned manually: Enables you to enter an outbound
proxy.
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 123.123.123.123)
URL (example: www.outboundproxy.uk)
1 to 65535
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 463
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring the SIP Port
3. Under SIP settings, tap on Outbound proxy.
4. In the Outbound proxy list field, select one of the following options:
5. Tap on Outbound proxy IP/URL and then enter the outbound proxy in the entry field.
Possible entries:
6. Tap on OK.
7. Tap on Outbound proxy port and then enter the port number (Port) in the entry field.
Possible entries:
8. Tap on OK.
Configuring the SIP Port
The SIP port is a port on the local system that is used as a starting point for the SIP transfer.
Note: A different SIP port must be specified for each provider/PBX.
You can configure the SIP port as follows:
Separately for the provider or PBX
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the SIP Port
1. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
Outbound proxy is disabled: Disables the outbound proxy. (No further action
is required.)
Outbound proxy assigned automatically: Automatically determines an
outbound proxy. (No further action is required.)
Outbound proxy assigned manually: Enables you to enter an outbound
proxy.
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 123.123.123.123)
URL (example: www.outboundproxy.uk)
1 to 65535
464 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring the SIP Session Timer
2. In the line that contains the provider/PBX, click Configure.
The provider/PBX configuration screen opens.
3. Click on the SIP tab.
4. Under SIP settings, enter the SIP port in the SIP port entry field. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the SIP Port
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
2. Tap on the name of the provider/PBX.
3. Under SIP settings, tap on SIP.
4. Tap on SIP port and then enter the SIP port in the entry field. Possible entries:
5. Tap on OK.
Configuring the SIP Session Timer
The telephone/PBX cannot tell if the provider interrupts the call connection. The SIP session
timer regularly checks whether the connection is still present.
You can configure the SIP session timer as follows:
Separately for the provider or PBX
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the SIP Session Timer
1. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
1 to 65535
1 to 65535
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 465
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring the SIP Session Timer
2. In the line that contains the provider/PBX, click Configure.
The provider/PBX configuration screen opens.
3. Click on the SIP tab.
4. Under SIP settings, select or clear the SIP session timer check box.
5. Under SIP settings, enter a value in the SIP session timer interval (min) entry field.
Possible entries:
Note: When the SIP session timer is switched on, this can result in increased
breaks in conversations after the set interval, if a provider has not imple-
mented the renewal of the session cleanly. In this case, you should disable
the SIP session timer.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the SIP Session Timer
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
2. Tap on the name of the provider/PBX.
3. Under SIP settings, tap on SIP.
4. Select or clear the SIP session timer check box.
5. Tap Interval for SIP session timer (min) and then enter a value in the entry field.
Possible entries:
Enables the SIP session timer.
Disables the SIP session timer. (No further action is required.)
5 to 60: The SIP session timer checks at intervals of between 5 minutes and 60
minutes to see if the connection is still present.
Enables the SIP session timer.
Disables the SIP session timer. (No further action is required.)
5 to 60: The SIP session timer checks at intervals of between 5 minutes and 60
minutes to see if the connection is still present.
466 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring the SIP Transport Protocol
Note: When the SIP session timer is switched on, this can result in increased
breaks in conversations after the set interval, if a provider has not imple-
mented the renewal of the session cleanly. In this case, you should disable
the SIP session timer.
6. Tap on OK.
Configuring the SIP Transport Protocol
The SIP transport protocol shows which protocol is used for the SIP transfer.
Important: If encryption is enabled by SIPS, the TCP transport protocol is
used. Manual settings are overwritten.
You can configure the SIP transport protocol as follows:
Separately for the provider or PBX
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the SIP Transport Protocol
Requirements:
– switched-off SIPS
1. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
2. In the line that contains the provider/PBX, click Configure.
The provider/PBX configuration screen opens.
3. Click on the SIP tab.
4. Under SIP transport protocol, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
UDP: Selects UDP as the SIP transport protocol.
TCP: Selects TCP as the SIP transport protocol.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 467
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring SIPS and Switching It On/Off
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the SIP Transport Protocol
Requirements:
– switched-off SIPS
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
2. Tap on the name of the provider/PBX.
3. Under SIP settings, tap on SIP.
4. Tap on SIP transport protocol.
5. Select one of these options from the SIP transport protocol list field:
Configuring SIPS and Switching It On/Off
To prevent anyone from listening in to VoIP conversations, you can encrypt these connections.
The connection setup and termination, and also signalling, are encrypted with SIPS. The call
data is encrypted with SRTP.
Important: If you are using this on an Auerswald PBX, the PBX specifies the
encryption method. The PBX overwrites manual settings.
You can configure SIPS as follows:
Separately for the provider or PBX
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure SIPS and Switch It On/Off
Requirements:
– SIP account: A certificate, saved on the hard disk
UDP: Selects UDP as the SIP transport protocol.
TCP: Selects TCP as the SIP transport protocol.
468 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring SIPS and Switching It On/Off
1. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
2. In the line that contains the provider/PBX, click Configure.
The provider/PBX configuration screen opens.
3. Click on the SIP tab.
4. Select or clear the Session Initiation Protocol Security (SIPS) check box under
Security.
5. Configure the settings you want:
PBX account: Under Security, enter the fingerprint in the Fingerprint for SIPS
certificate entry field.
Note: If you have saved a root certificate for encrypting calls in your PBX, this
is uploaded automatically to the telephone. You must enter the root certificate
fingerprint in the telephone so that the root certificate can be verified.
SIP account: Under Certificate upload, tap on Select, select the required file,
click Open and then click Save.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure SIPS and Switch It On/Off
Requirements:
–SIP account: SD card inserted into slot
–SIP account: A certificate, saved in the root directory of the SD card
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
2. Tap on the name of the provider/PBX.
3. Under SIP settings, tap on SIP.
4. Select or clear the Session Initiation Protocol Security (SIPS) check box under
Security.
Switches SIPS on.
Switches SIPS off. (No further action is required.)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 469
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring NAT Traversal
5. Configure the settings you want:
PBX account: Under Security, tap on Fingerprint for SIPS certificate. Enter the
fingerprint in the entry field, and then tap on OK.
Note: If you have saved a root certificate for encrypting calls in your PBX, this
is uploaded automatically to the telephone. You must enter the root certificate
fingerprint in the telephone so that the root certificate can be verified.
SIP account: Under Security, tap on Certificate and then tap on the certificate
name under Install certificates from SD card.
Note: To delete the certificate, tap on Delete certificate under Manage
certificates.
Configuring NAT Traversal
NAT (Network Address Translation) enables you to convert a particular IP address that is used
within a network (e.g. a local network) into a different IP address that can be used by a different
network (e.g. the public switched telephone network). If NAT traversal is switched on and a
query is sent from a local IP address to the public network, the sending IP address is swapped
with the public IP address. This function is performed in the reverse direction for the reply.
Important: Every port opening on the NAT router is a security risk. Apply the
appropriate security measures.
You can configure NAT traversal as follows:
Separately for the provider or PBX
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure NAT Traversal
Requirements:
Switches SIPS on.
Switches SIPS off. (No further action is required.)
470 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring NAT Traversal
– Set DNS server
– STUN server set up for the provider/PBX, if the Enabled with STUN option has been
selected
– If the checked option has been selected: the registrar enabled for the provider/PBX
1. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
2. In the line that contains the provider/PBX, click Configure.
The provider/PBX configuration screen opens.
3. Click on the NAT tab.
4. Under SIP NAT-Traversal, select one of the following options:
Note: If Enabled is selected: if there are problems with unilateral call connec-
tions, a STUN server should be used (activated when you are using
STUN).
5. Under RTP NAT-Traversal, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure NAT Traversal
Requirements:
– Set DNS server
Enabled: NAT traversal is performed by the provider/PBX. The SIP request
also contains an "rport" part in which the IP addresses used here (local, public)
are transported.
Disabled: NAT traversal is not performed by the provider/PBX. The router,
which connects the Local Area Network with the Internet, should be a properly
functioning, SIP-aware router which performs NAT traversal.
Enabled with STUN: NAT traversal is performed by the provider/PBX. To
achieve this, you must also enter a STUN server under Settings.
Disabled: NAT traversal is not performed by the provider/PBX. The router,
which connects the Local Area Network with the Internet, should be a properly
functioning, SIP-aware router which performs NAT traversal.
Enabled with STUN: NAT traversal is performed by the provider/PBX. To do
this, you must also specify a STUN server.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 471
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring NAT Traversal
– STUN server set up for the provider/PBX, if the Enabled with STUN option has been
selected
– If the checked option has been selected: the registrar enabled for the provider/PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
2. Tap on the name of the provider/PBX.
3. Under NAT, tap on NAT.
4. Tap on SIP NAT traversal.
5. In the SIP NAT traversal list field, select one of the following options:
Note: If Enabled is selected: if there are problems with unilateral call connec-
tions, a STUN server should be used (activated when you are using
STUN).
6. Tap on RTP NAT traversal.
7. In the RTP NAT traversal list field, select one of the following options:
Disabled: NAT traversal is not performed by the provider/PBX. The router,
which connects the Local Area Network with the Internet, should be a properly
functioning, SIP-aware router which performs NAT traversal.
Enabled with STUN: NAT traversal is performed by the provider/PBX. To do
this, you must also go to Settings and enter the name of a STUN server.
Enabled: NAT traversal is performed by the provider/PBX. The SIP request
also contains an "rport" part in which the IP addresses used here (local, public)
are transported.
Disabled: NAT traversal is not performed by the provider/PBX. The router,
which connects the Local Area Network with the Internet, should be a properly
functioning, SIP-aware router which performs NAT traversal.
Enabled with STUN: NAT traversal is performed by the provider/PBX. To do
this, you must also specify a STUN server.
472 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring the STUN Server
Configuring the STUN Server
A STUN server provides information on request to subscribers on a private network. This infor-
mation includes the IP address and port outside their private network that is viewed as the
source of their data. This information is entered in the requests, instead of the actual private IP
address/port.
Note: If you encounter problems with unilateral call connections, enabling the
RTP might help.
Important: Each port forwarding constitutes a security risk. For this reason
we recommend you use this functionality as little as possible.
You can configure the STUN server as follows:
Separately for the provider or PBX
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the STUN Server
Requirements:
– Set DNS server
1. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
2. In the line that contains the provider/PBX, click Configure.
The provider/PBX configuration screen opens.
3. Click on the NAT tab.
4. In the STUN server IP/URL entry field, enter the STUN server. Possible entries:
5. In the STUN server port entry field, enter the port number. Possible entries:
6. Enter a value in the Interval for STUN server query (in minutes) entry field.
Possible entries:
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 103.103.103.103)
URL (example: www.stunserver.uk)
1 to 65535
1 to 60: A STUN server request is performed every 1 to 60 minutes.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 473
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring the STUN Server
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
– Enable the STUN server under SIP NAT traversal/RTP NAT traversal on the provider/PBX
configuration screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the STUN Server
Requirements:
– Set DNS server
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
2. Tap on the name of the provider/PBX.
3. Under NAT, tap on NAT.
4. Tap on STUN server.
5. Tap on STUN server IP/URL and then enter the STUN server in the entry field.
Possible entries:
6. Tap on OK.
7. Tap on STUN server port and then enter the port number (port) in the entry field.
Possible entries:
8. Tap on OK.
9. Tap Interval for STUN server request (min) and then enter a value in the entry field.
Possible entries:
10. Tap on OK.
Further steps:
– Enable the STUN server under SIP NAT traversal/RTP NAT traversal.
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 103.103.103.103)
URL (example: www.stunserver.uk)
1 to 65535
1 to 60: A STUN server request is performed every 1 to 60 minutes.
474 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring NAT Keep Alive
Configuring NAT Keep Alive
The interval for NAT Keep Alive shows how often (in seconds) NAT Keep Alive packets are sent
to maintain the NAT mapping in the firewall.
You can configure NAT Keep Alive as follows:
Separately for the provider or PBX
Using the telephone
Using the configuration manager
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure NAT Keep Alive
1. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
2. In the line that contains the required provider/PBX click Configure.
3. Select the tab NAT.
4. Under NAT keep alive select or clear the NAT keep alive check box.
5. Click on NAT keep alive interval (s) and then enter a value in the entry field. Possible
entries:
Note: Some providers lock accounts if the NAT keep alive interval is too
short. As a rule, this is reported with error message 503 during SIP regis-
tration. If this problem occurs, we recommend you reduce the value (e.g. to
180).
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure NAT Keep Alive
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
2. Tap on the name of the provider/PBX.
Enables NAT Keep Alive.
Disables NAT Keep Alive. (No further action is required.)
1 to 255: NAT Keep Alive packets are sent every 1 to 255 seconds.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 475
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring Codecs
3. Under NAT, tap on NAT.
4. Select or clear the NAT keep alive check box.
5. Tap on NAT keep alive interval (s) and then enter a value in the entry field. Possible
entries:
Note: Some providers lock accounts if the NAT keep alive interval is too
short. As a rule, this is reported with error message 503 during SIP regis-
tration. If this problem occurs, we recommend you reduce the value (e.g. to
180).
6. Tap on OK.
Configuring Codecs
The G.722, G.711 and iLBC codecs can be used to transfer data. The selection of a codec
affects the quality of a VoIP call. Depending on the bandwidth of the connection, you can
specify a codec to give the best possible VoIP call quality (high band width) or a codec to give
the best possible compression rate (low bandwidth).
Which codec is actually used to handle a call is defined in your negotiations with the provider.
Notes:
If using a codec with high bandwidth (e.g. G.711) produces too much inter-
ference in the call quality, it is possible that the connection bandwidth is not
sufficient. If these types of disruptions happen frequently, we recommend
you select codecs with a lower band width.
Not every codec is supported by every provider.
You can configure codecs as follows:
Separately for the provider or PBX
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Enables NAT Keep Alive.
Disables NAT Keep Alive. (No further action is required.)
1 to 255: NAT Keep Alive packets are sent every 1 to 255 seconds.
476 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Switching Music On Hold On/Off
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure Codecs
1. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
2. In the line that contains the provider/PBX, click Configure.
The provider/PBX configuration screen opens.
3. Click on the RTP tab.
4. Under Codecs, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure Codecs
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
2. Tap on the name of the provider/PBX.
3. Under RTP settings, tap on RTP settings.
4. In the Codecs list field, select one of the following options:
Switching Music On Hold On/Off
If the music on hold option is selected, the caller will hear music played whilst they are waiting
for their call to be answered.
Best available quality: Codec G.722 has priority level 1, Codec G.711 has
priority level 2 and Codec iLBC has priority level 3.
Best possible compression: Codec iLBC has priority level 1, Codec G.722
has priority level 2 and Codec G.711 has priority level 3.
Force G711: Codec G.711 is required.
Best available quality: Codec G.722 has priority level 1, Codec G.711 has
priority level 2 and Codec iLBC has priority level 3.
Best possible compression: Codec iLBC has priority level 1, Codec G.722
has priority level 2 and Codec G.711 has priority level 3.
Force G711: Codec G.711 is required.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 477
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Switching Music On Hold On/Off
You can enable or disable the music on hold option as follows:
Separately for the provider or PBX
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch Music on Hold On/Off
Requirements:
Auerswald profile not selected
1. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
2. In the line that contains the provider/PBX, click Configure.
The provider/PBX configuration screen opens.
3. Click on the RTP tab.
4. Select or clear the Music on hold check box.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch Music On Hold On/Off
Requirements:
Auerswald profile not selected
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
2. Tap on the name of the provider/PBX.
3. Under RTP settings, select or clear the Music on hold check box.
Switches the on-hold music on.
Switches the on-hold music off.
Switches the on-hold music on.
Switches the on-hold music off.
478 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring DTMF Signalling
Configuring DTMF Signalling
You can configure how DTMF signals are sent to the provider.
Do so as follows:
Separately for the provider or PBX
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure DTMF Signalling
1. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
2. In the line that contains the provider/PBX, click Configure.
The provider/PBX configuration screen opens.
3. Click on the RTP tab.
4. In the DTMF signalling list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure DTMF Signalling
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
2. Tap on the name of the provider/PBX.
3. Under RTP settings, tap on RTP settings.
Outband, with local response in acc. with RFC2833: The telephone uses
different channels to transfer DTMF signals and voice data. The DTMF signals
are filtered out of the voice data. You hear a confirmation tone to confirm that
the DTMF signals have been sent successfully.
Inband, DTMF signals sent through the audio channel: The telephone uses
the same channel (DTMF tones) to transfer DTMF signals and voice data.
Outband, in acc. with RFC2833: The telephone uses different channels to
transfer DTMF signals and voice data. The DTMF signals are filtered out of the
voice data.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 479
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring the Jitter Buffer
4. Tap on DTMF signalling.
5. In the DTMF signalling list field, select one of the following options:
Configuring the Jitter Buffer
The size of the jitter buffer indicates how many RTP packets can be cached, to buffer disrup-
tions or compensate for them.
You can configure the jitter buffer as follows:
Separately for the provider or PBX
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the Jitter Buffer
1. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
2. In the line that contains the provider/PBX, click Configure.
The provider/PBX configuration screen opens.
3. Click on the RTP tab.
4. Enter a value in the Jitter buffer entry field. Possible entries:
Outband, with local response in acc. with RFC2833: The telephone uses
different channels to transfer DTMF signals and voice data. The DTMF signals
are filtered out of the voice data. You hear a confirmation tone to confirm that
the DTMF signals have been sent successfully.
Inband, DTMF signals sent through the audio channel: The telephone uses
the same channel (DTMF tones) to transfer DTMF signals and voice data.
Outband, in acc. with RFC2833: The telephone uses different channels to
transfer DTMF signals and voice data. The DTMF signals are filtered out of the
voice data.
480 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring SRTP
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the Jitter Buffer
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
2. Tap on the name of the provider/PBX.
3. Under RTP settings, tap on RTP settings.
4. Tap on Jitterbuffer (ms) and then enter a value in the entry field. Possible entries:
5. Tap on OK.
Configuring SRTP
To prevent anyone from listening in to VoIP conversations, you can encrypt these connections.
The connection setup and termination, and also signalling, are encrypted with SIPS. The call
data is encrypted with SRTP.
Important: If you are using this on an Auerswald PBX, the PBX specifies the
encryption method. The PBX overwrites manual settings.
You can configure SRTP as follows:
Separately for the provider or PBX
40 to 160: Size of the jitter buffer in milliseconds (duration of the audio signal).
Lower values: A lower number of RTP packets can be cached in order to buffer
disruptions or to compensate for them.
Greater values: A greater number of RTP packets can be cached in order to
buffer disruptions or to compensate for them.
40 to 160: Size of the jitter buffer in milliseconds (duration of the audio signal).
Lower values: A lower number of RTP packets can be cached in order to buffer
disruptions or to compensate for them.
Greater values: A greater number of RTP packets can be cached in order to
buffer disruptions or to compensate for them.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 481
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring SRTP
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure SRTP
1. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
2. In the line that contains the provider/PBX, click Configure.
The provider/PBX configuration screen opens.
3. Click on the RTP tab.
4. Under Security, select one of the following options from the SRTP list field displayed:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure SRTP
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
2. Tap on the name of the provider/PBX.
3. Under RTP settings, tap on RTP settings.
4. Tap on SRTP.
5. In the SRTP list field, select one of the following options:
Disabled: Forces de-activation of call data encryption by SRTP. The
connection is not established if the call partner (VoIP provider, other PBX in the
sub-system operation, external VoIP subscriber) requires call data to be
encrypted by SRTP.
Preferred: Switches on negotiation for the encryption of call data by SRTP.
When a call is made, the call partner will be asked if encryption is possible. If
so, the call data will be encrypted and then transmitted, if not, the call data will
not be encrypted.
Mandatory: Forces activation of call data encryption by SRTP. The connection
is not established if the call partner (VoIP provider, other PBX in the sub-
system operation, external VoIP subscriber) does not support the encryption of
call data by SRTP.
482 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Switching the Use of Exchange Line Numbers On/Off
Switching the Use of Exchange Line Numbers On/Off
Exchange line numbers must be used for PBXs which allow you to dial external telephone
numbers without preceding exchange line access numbers or characters (e. g. 0 or **). Such
PBXs automatically detect whether exchange line access is required or not.
Note: This function is currently not available on Auerswald PBXs.
If the use of exchange line numbers for an internal subscriber is enabled, rules for internal and
external calls, e. g. for the answering machine, are taken into account when a call comes in. In
addition, you can forward an incoming call to an external telephone number without having to
dial the exchange line access number.
You can configure the use of exchange line numbers as follows:
Separately for the provider or PBX
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch the Use of Exchange Line Numbers On/Off
Requirements:
– Not operable on Auerswald PBXs
– Set type PBX
1. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
Disabled: Forces de-activation of call data encryption by SRTP. The
connection is not established if the call partner (VoIP provider, other PBX in the
sub-system operation, external VoIP subscriber) requires call data to be
encrypted by SRTP.
Preferred: Switches on negotiation for the encryption of call data by SRTP.
When a call is made, the call partner will be asked if encryption is possible. If
so, the call data will be encrypted and then transmitted, if not, the call data will
not be encrypted.
Mandatory: Forces activation of call data encryption by SRTP. The connection
is not established if the call partner (VoIP provider, other PBX in the sub-
system operation, external VoIP subscriber) does not support the encryption of
call data by SRTP.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 483
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Entering Exchange Line Access Numbers
2. In the line that contains the provider/PBX, click Configure.
The provider/PBX configuration screen opens.
3. Click on the Numbers tab.
4. Under Special numbers, select or clear the Use of public exchange subscriber
numbers check box.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch the Use of Exchange Line Numbers On/Off
Requirements:
– Not operable on Auerswald PBXs
– Set type PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
2. Tap on the name of the provider/PBX.
3. Under Number settings, tap on Special numbers.
4. Select or clear the Use of public exchange subscriber numbers check box.
Entering Exchange Line Access Numbers
The exchange line access number is required to request an external line via the account Publ.
exchange.
Switches the use of exchange call numbers on.
Switches the use of exchange call numbers off.
Switches the use of exchange line numbers on.
Switches the use of exchange line numbers off.
484 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Entering Exchange Line Access Numbers
Note:
After you dial the exchange line access number, the external dial tone
indicates that an external line is free. The external telephone number can
then be dialled.
You can also request an exchange line from the telephony app. Tap on
to display the list of external contacts and dial an external account
(public exchange). Tap on to display the list of internal contacts. Only
internal telephone numbers can be dialled.
You can enter an exchange line access number as follows:
Separately for the provider or PBX
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Enter Exchange Line Access Numbers
1. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
2. In the line that contains the provider/PBX, click Configure.
The provider/PBX configuration screen opens.
3. Click on the Numbers tab.
4. Under Special numbers, enter the exchange line access number in the Exchange
line access number entry field. Possible entries:
Note: In the factory settings, the PBX's exchange line access number is "0",
but it can be changed in some PBXs (refer to the instructions for the PBX).
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Enter Exchange Line Access Numbers
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
Numbers
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 485
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Entering Keypad Sequences
2. Tap on the name of the provider/PBX.
3. Under Number settings, tap on Special numbers.
4. Tap on Exchange line access number and then enter the exchange line access
number in the entry field. Possible entries:
Note: In the factory settings, the PBX's exchange line access number is "0",
but it can be changed in some PBXs (refer to the instructions for the PBX).
5. Tap on OK.
Entering Keypad Sequences
Keypad sequences enable you to control performance features by entering characters and
number sequences via the phone keys, e.g. to make pick-ups or InterCom OneWay announce-
ments.
Important: If operated as a system telephone on an Auerswald PBX, the
keypad sequences are predefined by the PBX. The PBX overwrites any
keypad sequences you have entered manually.
The following keypad sequences are available when the telephone is running on a PBX:
Pick-up
The keypad sequence is required to carry out pick-ups on PBXs where a pick-up
sequence is mandatory for this function. Information from SIP notify messages are
not taken into consideration.
InterCom OneWay
The keypad sequence is required to make an InterCom OneWay announcement.
InterCom OneWay announcements can also be made on accounts where the
telephone is not used as system telephone.
InterCom speaker phone
The keypad sequence is required to enable Intercom hands-free calling at a desti-
nation which does not support automatic call acceptance.
Alarm confirmation
The keypad sequence is required to acknowledge an alarm call with the keypad.
You can enter keypad sequences as follows:
Numbers
486 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Entering Keypad Sequences
Separately for the provider or PBX
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Enter Keypad Sequences
1. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
2. In the line that contains the provider/PBX, click Configure.
The provider/PBX configuration screen opens.
3. Click on the Numbers tab.
4. Under Special numbers, enter the keypad sequences in the Keypad sequence ...
entry fields. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Enter Keypad Sequences
Requirements:
– Set type PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
2. Tap on the name of the provider/PBX.
3. Under Number settings, tap on Special numbers.
4. Tap on the name of the relevant keypad sequence and then enter the keypad
sequence in the entry field. Possible entries:
5. Tap on OK.
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 487
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring the Evaluation of Incoming SIP Messages
Configuring the Evaluation of Incoming SIP Messages
The telephone numbers of incoming VoIP calls listed in the caller list usually need to be
converted before they can be used for callbacks. The following options are available here:
Evaluation method: The following options are available:
Internationalise unknown telephone numbers: If this function is enabled, telephone
numbers which are not transferred in the usual format: (e. g. +445306… or 00445306…)
are converted into this format.
You can configure an evaluation method as follows:
Separately for the provider or PBX
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Evaluate Incoming SIP Messages
1. Check the format in which the telephone numbers issued by the provider are trans-
mitted and displayed in the caller list (Message key > Caller list).
2. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
3. In the line that contains the provider/PBX, click Configure.
Standard: Selects an evaluation method for telephone numbers which will
work for most providers.
Standard (use From headers as screened number): Selects an evalu-
ation method for telephone numbers which will work for most providers. The
user provided number (unscreened number, corresponds to CLIP no
screening) of the header “From“ will be taken over into the network provided
number (screened number). The telephone numbers can, for example, be
used for Call Through via VoIP.
Caution: If you have selected this option, your telephone and your PBX are
vulnerable to attacks, for example by transmission of a telephone number
manipulated by the attacker.
As described in RFC3325: Selects a telephone number evaluation method
in accordance with RFC 3325 (http://www.ietf.org/RFC/rfc3325.txt). This
method of evaluating telephone numbers is used if the number presentation
is guaranteed by security mechanisms.
User-defined: If the Default and As described in RFC3325 options are
unsuccessful, you can also define your own method of evaluating a
telephone number within certain limits.
488 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring the Evaluation of Incoming SIP Messages
The provider/PBX configuration screen opens.
4. Click on the Numbers tab.
5. Select or clear the Internationalise unknown numbers check box under Evaluation
of incoming SIP messages.
6. Under Evaluation of incoming SIP messages select the Default option from the
Method of evaluation list field.
7. Check the settings using incoming exchange line calls in the telephone, e.g. with a
mobile phone, and display in the caller list (Message key > Caller list).
8. If the number presentation does not function satisfactorily, repeat steps 2 to 4.
9. Under Evaluation of incoming SIP messages select the Standard (use From
headers as screened number option from the Method of evaluation list field.
10. Check the settings using incoming exchange line calls in the telephone, e.g. with a
mobile phone, and display in the caller list (Message key > Caller list).
11. If the number presentation does not function satisfactorily, repeat steps 2 to 4.
12. Under Evaluation of incoming SIP messages select the As described in RFC3325
option from the Method of evaluation list field.
13. Check the settings using incoming exchange line calls in the telephone, e.g. with a
mobile phone, and display in the caller list (Message key > Caller list).
14. If number presentation does not function satisfactorily, record an incoming call and
examine it with the Wireshark programme.
15. Repeat steps 2 to 4.
16. Under Evaluation of incoming SIP messages select the User-defined option from
the Method of evaluation list field.
17. Configure the settings you want.
Notes:
The telephone number to be evaluated should preferably be canonical
(+445306.... or 00445306…). Otherwise it is not used for evaluation.
Enables the conversion of the transmitted telephone numbers into a canonical
format.
Disables the conversion of the transmitted telephone numbers.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 489
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring the Evaluation of Incoming SIP Messages
The designations used for the settings match the designations used in
Wireshark.
Network Provided Number: Network-verified incoming telephone number:
The sequence entered in the invite is searched for the telephone number
which can be analysed.
User Provided Number: Non-verified incoming telephone number (corre-
sponds to CLIP no screening): The sequence entered in the invite is
searched for the telephone number which can be analysed. Optional: is not
transferred by all providers.
User Provided Name: Caller's name in plain text. Optional: is not trans-
ferred by all providers.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Evaluate Incoming SIP Messages
1. Check the format in which the telephone numbers issued by the provider are trans-
mitted and displayed in the caller list (Message key > Caller list).
2. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
3. Tap on the name of the provider/PBX.
4. Under Number settings, tap on Evaluate incoming SIP messages.
5. Select or clear the Internationalise unknown numbers check box.
6. Tap on Method of evaluation.
7. In the Method of evaluation list field, select the Standard option.
8. Check the settings using incoming exchange line calls e.g. with the mobile phone and
display in the caller list (Message key > Caller list).
9. If the number presentation does not function satisfactorily, repeat steps 2 to 6.
Enables the conversion of the transmitted telephone numbers into a canonical
format.
Disables the conversion of the transmitted telephone numbers.
490 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring the Evaluation of Incoming SIP Messages
10. In the Method of evaluation list field, select the Standard (use From headers as
screened number option.
11. Check the settings using incoming exchange line calls e.g. with the mobile phone and
display in the caller list (Message key > Caller list).
12. If the number presentation does not function satisfactorily, repeat steps 2 to 6.
13. In the Method of evaluation list field, select the As described in RFC3325 option.
14. Check the settings using incoming exchange line calls e.g. with the mobile phone and
display in the caller list (Message key > Caller list).
15. If number presentation does not function satisfactorily, record an incoming call and
examine it with the Wireshark programme.
16. Repeat steps 2 to 6.
17. In the Method of evaluation list field, select the User-defined option.
18. Configure the settings you want.
Notes:
The telephone number to be evaluated should preferably be canonical
(+445306.... or 00445306…). Otherwise it is not used for evaluation.
The designations used for the settings match the designations used in
Wireshark.
Network Provided Number: Network-verified incoming telephone number:
The sequence entered in the invite is searched for the telephone number
which can be analysed.
User Provided Number: Non-verified incoming telephone number (corre-
sponds to CLIP no screening): The sequence entered in the invite is
searched for the telephone number which can be analysed. Optional: is not
transferred by all providers.
User Provided Name: Caller's name in plain text. Optional: is not trans-
ferred by all providers.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 491
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring the Presentation of Subscriber Numbers (Outgoing)
Configuring the Presentation of Subscriber Numbers (Outgoing)
You need to input the following information to ensure that the telephone transfers the data
(e.g. the called telephone number, its own telephone number) to the provider in the correct
format:
Format of called party number: Format, in which the provider requires the telephone
number of the called party number to transfer the call.
Note: The telephone automatically converts called telephone numbers into
this format when it makes calls via the provider. If you dial a number without
a prefix, the local area code therefore applies (Settings > Accounts >
Country and local area code).
Format of own telephone number: Format in which your own telephone number, that is
to be transmitted, is to be supplied to the provider.
Note: Your own telephone number is automatically converted into the
selected format. If you have entered your own telephone numbers in the
telephone without prefixes, the local area code applies to them during
conversion (Settings > Accounts > Country and area code).
Method for calling line identity restriction: Calling line identity restriction by the provider
with or without display text.
Manner of number presentation: Range in which the provider expects to receive
telephone numbers from the telephone.
Important: If you are using an Auerswald PBX, the PBX specifies how
subscriber numbers are presented. The PBX overwrites manual settings.
You can configure the presentation of subscriber numbers as follows:
Separately for the provider or PBX
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the Presentation of Subscriber Numbers
(Outgoing)
1. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
492 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring the Presentation of Subscriber Numbers (Outgoing)
2. In the line that contains the provider/PBX, click Configure.
The provider/PBX configuration screen opens.
3. Click on the Numbers tab.
4. Under Call transfer (outbound), select one of the following options from the Format
of called party number list field:
5. Under Call transfer (outbound), select one of the following options from the Format
of own number list field:
6. Under Call transfer (outbound), select one of the following options from the Method
for calling line identity restriction list field:
With country code and area code (0044 5306): The called telephone number
is sent to the provider along with its entire country code (e.g. 0044).
With country code and area code (+44 5306): The called telephone number
is sent to the provider with a plus sign (+) and the entire country code (e.g.
+44).
With country code and area code (44 5306): The called telephone number is
sent to the provider with a shortened country code (without international prefix
(number) e.g. 44).
With area code (05306): The called telephone number is sent to the provider
without a country code.
Unchanged (as dialled): The called telephone number is sent to the provider
unchanged.
With country code and area code (0044 5306): Your own telephone number
is sent to the provider along with its entire country code (e.g. 0044).
With country code and area code (+44 5306): Your own telephone number is
sent to the provider with a plus sign (+) and the entire country code (e.g. +44).
With country code and area code (44 5306): Your own telephone number is
sent to the provider with a shortened country code (without international prefix
(number), e.g. 44).
With area code (05306): Your own telephone number is sent to the provider
without a country code.
Only port number (MSN / DDI + main number): Only your own connection
number (MSN/DDI main number + DDI) is to sent to the provider.
dial (DDI): Only your own extension (DDI) is sent to the provider.
No display text: If calling line identity restriction is enabled, no display text is
sent to the called telephone number by the provider.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 493
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring the Presentation of Subscriber Numbers (Outgoing)
7. Under Call transfer (outbound), select one of the following options from the Manner
of number presentation list field:
Notes: The Custom option requires additional settings:
From
Settings for setting up the "From" header.
P-Asserted-Identity
Settings for setting up the P-Asserted-Identity" header.
P-Preferred-Identity
Settings for setting up the "P-Preferred-Identity" header.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the Presentation of Subscriber Numbers (Outgoing)
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
2. Tap on the name of the provider/PBX.
Anonymous: If calling line identity restriction is enabled, the display text
"anonymous" is sent to the called telephone number by the provider.
User Anonymous: If calling line identity restriction is enabled, the display text
"user anonymous" is sent to the called telephone number by the provider.
In the display text: Your own external telephone number, which is to be trans-
mitted to the called telephone number, is transferred to the provider in the
"Display text" field.
In the username: Your own external telephone number, which is to be trans-
mitted to the called telephone number, is transferred to the provider in the
"Username" field.
As described in RFC3325 with P-Asserted-Identity: Your own external
telephone number, which is to be transmitted to the called telephone number,
is transferred to the provider in the "P-Asserted-Identity" field.
As described in RFC3325 with P-Preferred-Identity: Your own external
telephone number, which is to be transmitted to the called telephone number,
is transferred to the provider in the "P-Preferred-Identity" field.
Custom: Uses user-defined settings for number presentation.
494 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring the Presentation of Subscriber Numbers (Outgoing)
3. Under Number settings, tap on Call transfer (outbound).
4. Tap on Format of called party number.
5. In the Format of called party number list field, select one of the following options:
6. Tap on Format of own number.
7. In the Format of own number list field, select one of the following options:
8. Tap on Method for calling line identity restriction.
9. In the Method for calling line identity restriction list field, select one of the following
options:
With country code and area code (0044 5306): The called telephone number
is sent to the provider along with its entire country code (e.g. 0044).
With country code and area code (+44 5306): The called telephone number
is sent to the provider with a plus sign (+) and the entire country code (e.g.
+44).
With country code and area code (44 5306): The called telephone number is
sent to the provider with a shortened country code (without international prefix
(number), e.g. 44).
With area code (05306): The called telephone number is sent to the provider
without a country code.
Unchanged (as dialled): The called telephone number is sent to the provider
unchanged.
With country code and area code (0044 5306): Your own telephone number
is sent to the provider along with its entire country code (e.g. 0044).
With country code and area code (+44 5306): Your own telephone number is
sent to the provider with a plus sign (+) and the entire country code (e.g. +44).
With country code and area code (44 5306): Your own telephone number is
sent to the provider with a shortened country code (without international prefix
(number), e.g. 44).
With area code (05306): Your own telephone number is sent to the provider
without a country code.
Only port number (MSN / DDI + main number): Only your own connection
number (MSN/DDI main number + DDI) is to sent to the provider.
dial (DDI): Only your own extension (DDI) is sent to the provider.
No display text: If calling line identity restriction is enabled, no display text is
sent to the called telephone number by the provider.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 495
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring the Network Interface Type
10. Tap on Manner of number presentation.
11. In the Manner of number presentation list field, select one of the following options:
Notes: The Custom option requires additional settings:
From
Settings for setting up the "From" header.
P-Asserted-Identity
Settings for setting up the P-Asserted-Identity" header.
P-Preferred-Identity
Settings for setting up the "P-Preferred-Identity" header.
Configuring the Network Interface Type
Setting the network interface type allows you to operate the telephone on different networks,
for example, VLANs or VPNs.
You can configure the network interface type as follows:
Separately for the provider or PBX
Anonymous: If calling line identity restriction is enabled, the display text
"anonymous" is sent to the called telephone number by the provider.
User Anonymous: If calling line identity restriction is enabled, the display text
"user anonymous" is sent to the called telephone number by the provider.
In the display text: Your own external telephone number, which is to be trans-
mitted to the called telephone number, is transferred to the provider in the
"Display text" field.
In the username: Your own external telephone number, which is to be trans-
mitted to the called telephone number, is transferred to the provider in the
"Username" field.
As described in RFC3325 with P-Asserted-Identity: Your own external
telephone number, which is to be transmitted to the called telephone number,
is transferred to the provider in the "P-Asserted-Identity" field.
As described in RFC3325 with P-Preferred-Identity: Your own external
telephone number, which is to be transmitted to the called telephone number,
is transferred to the provider in the "P-Preferred-Identity" field.
Custom: Uses user-defined settings for number presentation.
496 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Providers and PBXs
Configuring the Network Interface Type
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the Network Interface Type
1. Open the Settings > Providers & PBXs screen.
2. In the line that contains the provider/PBX, click Configure.
The provider/PBX configuration screen opens.
3. Under Providers & exchange systems settings, select one of the following options
from the Network interface type list field:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
– Depending on which interface type you have selected, enable VLAN (Settings> Network
screen) or VPN (Settings> Network> VPN screen).
Using the Telephone to Configure the Network interface type
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Providers & PBXs.
2. Tap on the name of the provider/PBX.
3. Tap on Network interface type.
4. In the Network interface type list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Depending on which interface type you have selected, enable VLAN ( Apps >
Settings > Network > Network > VLAN) or VPN ( Apps > Settings > Network
> Network > VPN).
Default network: The default network is used as the network interface type.
VLAN: The VLAN network interface type is used.
VPN: The VPN network interface type is used.
Default network: The default network is used as the network interface type.
VLAN: The VLAN network interface type is used.
VPN: The VPN network interface type is used.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 497
Settings
Accounts
Creating an Account
Accounts
You can create up to 100 accounts with VoIP providers or on PBXs on your telephone.
However, before you can get the access data you need to make VoIP calls, you first need to
set up accounts with one or more VoIP providers. To do this, use your name and address data
to register on the provider's website. After that, you will be assigned one or more telephone
numbers that can be reached from the land line and the Internet, and also an account with a
username and password. The registered connection usually becomes active within a few
minutes and can be used very soon after that.
The Account overview under Settings > Accounts shows two different types of account:
Own accounts:
These are your own telephone accounts that you created on the telephone or by using
its configuration manager with the VoIP provider or on a PBX.
PBX accounts:
These are additional accounts created by the PBX when you set up your own account
and which are used for direct or specific exchange line access.
Note: Additional PBX accounts are only generated if an exchange line
access number has been entered when the provider/PBX was being created.
Creating an Account
To create an account, you require the following settings:
Account name
Providers & PBXs
Username
Password
Authentication ID (if assigned by the provider/PBX)
Country and local area code (if the telephone is configured as a system telephone)
Connection type
Telephone Numbers
You can create an account as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
498 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Accounts
Creating an Account
Using the Configuration Manager to Create an Account
Requirements:
– At least one configured provider/PBX
– You need to know the internal telephone number for the telephone entered in the PBX config-
uration, or the user name assigned by the VoIP provider
– You need to know the password entered in the PBX configuration, or assigned by the VoIP
provider
– You need to know the Authentication ID assigned by the VoIP provider, if required
1. Open the Settings > Accounts screen.
2. Click on New.
The configuration screen for the account opens.
Further steps:
– Make further settings on the configuration screen.
– Register the account.
– Enable use of the account if necessary.
– If necessary, enable the use of the telephone as a system telephone on an Auerswald PBX.
– If necessary, enable the use of the account as a default account.
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Create An Account
Requirements:
– At least one configured provider/PBX
– You need to know the internal telephone number for the telephone entered in the PBX config-
uration, or the user name assigned by the VoIP provider
– You need to know the password entered in the PBX configuration, or assigned by the VoIP
provider
– You need to know the Authentication ID assigned by the VoIP provider, if required
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Accounts.
2. Tap on New account.
This opens a dialogue which displays the settings that are available for the account.
Further steps:
– Make further settings.
– Register the account.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 499
Settings
Accounts
Deleting an Account
– Enable use of the account if necessary.
– If necessary, enable the use of the telephone as a system telephone on an Auerswald PBX.
– If necessary, enable the use of the account as a default account.
Deleting an Account
You can delete accounts that are no longer required.
Important: You can only restore deleted accounts if you have backed up their
data to the SD card in the telephone.
You can delete an account as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Delete an Account
1. Open the Settings > Accounts screen.
2. Click on the account you want to delete.
3. Click on Delete.
The selected account is deleted.
Using the Telephone to Delete An Account
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Accounts.
2. Tap and keep pressing the name of the account.
3. Tap on Delete Account.
500 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Accounts
Registering an Account
Registering an Account
To enable you to use an account you must register with the provider/on the PBX.
You can register an account as follows:
Using the telephone
Note: If you use the configuration manager to create an account, this account
is registered automatically, as soon as you have made a complete and
correct set of settings, and left the configuration screen by selecting Save
and then Back.
Using the Telephone to Register an Account
Requirements:
– A registrar configured for the provider/PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Accounts.
2. Tap and keep pressing the name of the account.
3. Tap on Register account.
The current account status is displayed in the Account overview and appears in the
Account settings dialogue like this:
Note: You can also register all the accounts together under Apps >
Settings > Providers & PBXs.
Further steps:
– Make further settings.
Account is disabled.
Account is registered.
Account has successfully been registered.
Could not register account.
Account registered and telephone is the system telephone on this
account.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 501
Settings
Accounts
Enabling/Disabling Use of an Account
Enabling/Disabling Use of an Account
If the use of the account is enabled, the PBX can use this account for external calls.
You can enable or disable the use of an account as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Enable/Disable Use of the Account
1. Open the Settings > Accounts screen.
2. In the line that contains the required account, click Configure.
3. Under Account settings, select or clear the Usage check box.
Further steps:
– Make further settings on the configuration screen.
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Enable/Disable Use of the Account
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Accounts.
2. In the Account overview, tap on the required account.
3. Select or clear the Usage check box.
Further steps:
– Make further settings.
Switches use of the account on.
Switches use of the account off.
Switches use of the account on.
Switches use of the account off.
502 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Accounts
Entering an Account Name
Entering an Account Name
The account's name is used to identify it.
You can enter an account name as follows:
Separately for each account
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Enter an Account Name
1. Open the Settings > Accounts screen.
2. In the line that contains the required account, click Configure.
3. Under Account settings, enter a name in the Account name entry field. Possible
entries:
Further steps:
– Make further settings on the configuration screen.
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Enter An Account name
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Accounts.
2. In the Account overview, tap on the required account.
3. Tap on Account name and then enter a name in the entry field. Possible entries:
4. Tap on OK.
Further steps:
– Make further settings.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 503
Settings
Accounts
Selecting a Provider/PBX
Selecting a Provider/PBX
You can set up accounts with different providers/PBXs and then select them.
You can use the telephone or configuration manager to create profiles for providers/PBXs as
described below:
Under Settings > Providers & PBXs > New Provider/PBX (see section Settings >
Providers & PBXs).
Under Settings > Accounts > Account overview > Account name > Providers & PBXs
> New Provider/PBX.
Note: Some providers/PBXs are already pre-configured in the factory
settings. In total you can configure up to 10 providers/PBXs.
You can select providers/PBXs as follows:
Separately for each account
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Select a Provider/PBX
Requirements:
– At least one provider/PBX profile has already been set up
1. Open the Settings > Accounts screen.
2. In the line that contains the required account, click Configure.
3. Under Account settings, open the Providers & PBXs list field.
4. Select the required provider/PBX.
Note: To create new providers/PBXs and their profiles, open the Settings >
Providers & PBXs screen.
Further steps:
– Make further settings on the configuration screen.
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
504 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Accounts
Enabling/Disabling Use as a System Telephone
Using the Telephone to Select a Provider/PBX
Requirements:
– At least one provider/PBX profile has already been set up
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Accounts.
2. In the Account overview, tap on the required account.
3. Tap on Providers & PBXs.
4. Follow these steps:
Select existing provider/existing PBX: Tap on the required provider/PBX.
Configure new provider/PBX: You can also configure new providers/PBX and their
profiles here and then select them (see chapter Settings> Provider and PBX).
Further steps:
– Make further settings.
Enabling/Disabling Use as a System Telephone
The telephone can be used as a system telephone on no more than one account and so control
the following functions in an Auerswald PBX:
External line transfer
Boss/secretary function
Targeted exchange line access
Group
Group function off
Configuration Switchover
Relay
Call forwarding for external subscribers
Announcement before answering for group
Door function
Note: If the telephone is enabled as a system telephone for an account, all
the PINs and passwords, and also the prefixes entered for this account are
overwritten by the PBX.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 505
Settings
Accounts
Enabling/Disabling Use as a System Telephone
To operate this as an Auerswald system telephone, you require one of the following Auerswald
PBXs:
COMpact 5010 VoIP
COMpact 5020 VoIP
COMpact 5000/R
COMmander 6000/R/RX
Important:
You can enable or disable use as a system telephone as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Enable Use as a System Telephone
Requirements:
– Connection to one of the following Auerswald PBXs: COMpact 5010 VoIP, COMpact 5020
VoIP with firmware version 4.2E or higher, COMpact 5000/R with firmware version 6.2A or
higher, COMmander 6000/R/RX with firmware version 6.0C or higher
1. Open the Settings > Accounts screen.
2. In the line that contains the required account, click Configure.
3. Under Account settings, select or clear the Auerswald system telephone check
box.
The current account status is displayed in the Account overview and appears in the
Account settings dialogue like this:
To support the system telephone, the PBX needs at least the following
firmware versions:
COMpact 5010 VoIP, COMpact 5020 VoIP: 4.2E
COMpact 5000/R: 6.2A
COMmander 6000/R/RX: 6.0C
Enables use as a system telephone.
Disables use as a system telephone.
Auerswald system telephony enabled.
Auerswald system telephony disabled.
506 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Accounts
Enabling/Disabling Use as a System Telephone
If the telephone is not a system telephone on any account, only the additional PBX
accounts, which allow direct exchange line access, are available. It is no longer
possible to access a specific exchange line.
Note: The changed account status is displayed after you have saved the
changes and left the screen.
Further steps:
– Make further settings on the configuration screen.
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Enable/Disable Use as a System Telephone
Requirements:
– Connection to one of the following Auerswald PBXs: COMpact 4000, COMpact 5010 VoIP,
COMpact 5020 VoIP with firmware version 4.2E or higher, COMpact 5000/R with firmware
version 6.2A or higher, COMmander 6000/R/RX with firmware version 6.0C or higher
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Accounts.
2. In the Account overview, tap on the required account.
3. Select or clear the Auerswald system telephone check box.
The current account status is displayed in the Account overview and appears in the
Account settings dialogue like this:
If the telephone is not a system telephone on any account, only the additional PBX
accounts, which allow direct exchange line access, are available. It is no longer
possible to access a specific exchange line.
Further steps:
– Make further settings.
Enables use as a system telephone.
Disables use as a system telephone.
Auerswald system telephony enabled.
Auerswald system telephony disabled.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 507
Settings
Accounts
Enabling Use as the Default Account
Enabling Use as the Default Account
When you set up the telephone you must specify which account is to be used as the default
account. Only one account can be used as a default account. Its use as the default account is
disabled as soon as another account becomes the default account.
Note: To use a different account from the default account for a single call,
pick up the receiver or press the hook key. Tap on the VoIP account
field in the selection window and then select the required account in the list.
You can switch the default account on as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Enable Use as a Default Account
1. Open the Settings > Accounts screen.
2. In the line that contains the required account, click Configure.
3. Select the Default account (default) check box under Settings for the selected
account.
The Default account (standard) setting is shown in grey to show that the account is
now to be used by default. Its use as the default account can only be disabled by
enabling a different account as the default account.
Further steps:
– Make further settings on the configuration screen.
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Enable Use as a Default Account
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Accounts.
2. In the Account overview, tap on the required account.
3. Select the Default account (standard) check box.
This account will then be used as the default account.
To use this account, it has to be selected manually.
508 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Accounts
Entering a User Name for the Account
The Default account (standard) setting is shown in grey to show that the account is
now to be used by default. Its use as the default account can only be disabled by
enabling a different account as the default account.
Further steps:
– Make further settings.
Entering a User Name for the Account
Your VoIP provider will supply you with your user name along with all the other data you require
to access your account. If your telephone is connected to an Auerswald PBX, the username
entered when configuring the PBX is the same as the telephone's internal telephone number
(MSN).
You can enter a user name as follows:
Separately for each account
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Enter a Username for the Account
Requirements:
– You need to know the internal telephone number for the telephone entered in the PBX config-
uration, or the user name assigned by the VoIP provider
1. Open the Settings > Accounts screen.
2. In the line that contains the required account, click Configure.
3. Under Account settings, enter the user name (the internal telephone number regis-
tered in the PBX or the user name assigned by the VoIP provider) in the Username
entry field. Possible entries:
Further steps:
This account will then be used as the default account.
To use this account, it has to be selected manually.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 509
Settings
Accounts
Entering a Password for the Account
– Make further settings on the configuration screen.
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Enter a Username for the Account
Requirements:
– You need to know the internal telephone number for the telephone entered in the PBX config-
uration, or the user name assigned by the VoIP provider
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Accounts.
2. In the Account overview, tap on the required account.
3. Tap on the User name and then enter the user name (the internal telephone number
set in the PBX or the user name assigned by the VoIP provider) in the relevant entry
field. Possible entries:
4. Tap on OK.
Further steps:
– Make further settings.
Entering a Password for the Account
Your VoIP provider will supply you with your password along with all the other data you require
to access your account. If your telephone is connected to an Auerswald PBX, the password
you entered when configuring the PBX is the same as the password for the telephone.
However, if you did not enter a password for the telephone in the PBX configuration, simply
leave this field empty.
You can enter a password for an account as follows:
Separately for each account
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
510 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Accounts
Entering a Password for the Account
Using the Configuration Manager to Enter a Password for the Account
Requirements:
– You need to know the password entered in the PBX configuration, or assigned by the VoIP
provider
1. Open the Settings > Accounts screen.
2. In the line that contains the required account, click Configure.
3. Under Account settings, enter the password in the Password entry field. Possible
entries:
Further steps:
– Make further settings on the configuration screen.
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Enter a Password for the Account
Requirements:
– You need to know the password entered in the PBX configuration, or assigned by the VoIP
provider
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Accounts.
2. In the Account overview, tap on the required account.
3. Tap on Password and then enter the password in the entry field. Possible entries:
4. Tap on OK.
Further steps:
– Make further settings.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 511
Settings
Accounts
Entering an Authentication ID
Entering an Authentication ID
The authentication ID (authentication identification) is assigned by some VoIP providers when
you set up an account. You need this ID to enable you to access the account.
However, if your VoIP provider did not issue you with an authentication ID, or if your telephone
is connected directly to an Auerswald PBX, simply leave this field empty.
You can enter the authentication ID as follows:
Separately for each account
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Enter an Authentication ID
Requirements:
– You need to know the Authentication ID assigned by the VoIP provider, if required
1. Open the Settings > Accounts screen.
2. In the line that contains the required account, click Configure.
3. Under Account settings, enter the authentication ID in the Authentication ID entry
field. Possible entries:
Note: You can only input the authentication ID if you have been assigned one
by your VoIP provider.
Further steps:
– Make further settings on the configuration screen.
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Enter an Authentication ID
Requirements:
– You need to know the Authentication ID assigned by the VoIP provider, if required
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
512 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Accounts
Entering the Country and Local Area Code
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Accounts.
2. In the Account overview, tap on the required account.
3. Tap on Authentication ID and then enter the Authentication ID in the relevant entry
field. Possible entries:
Note: You can only input the authentication ID if you have been assigned one
by your VoIP provider.
4. Tap on OK.
Further steps:
– Make further settings.
Entering the Country and Local Area Code
If your telephone is not connected to a PBX as a system telephone, you must enter the country
and local area code of your PBX's location or the country and local area code of the VoIP
telephone number assigned by your VoIP provider when you set up your account.
Note: The country and area code of this account are replaced by the prefixes
stored in the PBX as soon as the use of this telephone as a system telephone
on an Auerswald PBX is enabled.
You can enter a country code and area code as follows:
Separately for each account
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Enter a Country and Local Area Code
Requirements:
– Use as system telephone not enabled
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 513
Settings
Accounts
Entering the Country and Local Area Code
1. Open the Settings > Accounts screen.
2. In the line that contains the required account, click Configure.
3. Under Country and area code, enter the local area code of your PBX site or the VoIP
telephone number (with 0) assigned to it by the VoIP provider in the Area code entry
field. Possible entries:
4. Open the Country list field and select a country from the list.
The prefix of the selected country is displayed in the Country prefix field.
Note: You can also enter the country code directly in the Country code field
(with 00, and a maximum of six digits). However, this entry is overwritten as
soon as you select a different country.
Further steps:
– Make further settings on the configuration screen.
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Enter a Country and Local Area Code
Requirements:
– Use as system telephone not enabled
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Accounts.
2. In the Account overview, tap on the required account.
3. Tap on Country and area code.
4. Tap on Area code and then enter the local area code for the location of your PBX, or
the VoIP telephone number assigned by your VoIP provider (with 0), in the entry field.
Possible entries:
5. Tap on Country and then select a country from the list.
The prefix of the selected country is displayed in the Country prefix field.
Up to 12 digits
Numbers
Up to 12 digits
Numbers
514 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Accounts
Configuring the Connection Type
Note: You can also enter the country code directly in the Country code field
(with 00, and a maximum of six digits). However, this entry is overwritten as
soon as you select a different country.
Further steps:
– Make further settings.
Configuring the Connection Type
An account can be operated with the following connection types:
Standard connection: corresponds to a Point-to-Multipoint Connection with several
internal telephone numbers (MSNs).
SIP trunking: is the same as a Point-to-Point Connection with a direct dial-in option. The
VoIP provider assigns a DDI main number with a direct dial-in (DDI), e. g. 92 00 - 0.
You can configure the connection type as follows:
Separately for each account
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Set the Type of Connection
1. Open the Settings > Accounts screen.
2. In the line that contains the required account, click Configure.
3. Under Type of connection, select one of the following options:
Note: If you have selected the SIP trunking connection type, you must then
enter a DDI main number. The DDI main number setting is now shown as
enabled (no longer greyed out).
Further steps:
– For SIP trunking, enter the DDI main number.
– Make further settings on the configuration screen.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 515
Settings
Accounts
Entering a DDI Main Number
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the Connection Type
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Accounts.
2. In the Account overview, tap on the required account.
3. Tap on Type of connection.
4. Select the required connection type.
Note: If you have selected the SIP trunking connection type, you must then
enter a DDI main number. The DDI main number setting is now shown as
enabled (no longer greyed out).
Further steps:
– For SIP trunking, enter the DDI main number.
– Make further settings.
Entering a DDI Main Number
If you selected the SIP trunking connection type, this is where you enter the DDI main number
(main number, header, base number) without a prefix assigned by the VoIP provider, e. g. 92
00.
You can enter a DDI main number as follows:
Separately for each account
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Enter the DDI Main Number
Requirements:
– Set connection type SIP-Trunking
1. Open the Settings > Accounts screen.
516 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Accounts
Entering Telephone Numbers
2. In the line that contains the required account, click Configure.
3. Under Account settings, enter the DDI main telephone number assigned by your
VoIP provider. in the DDI main number entry field. e.g. 92 00, without a prefix.
Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Make further settings on the configuration screen.
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Enter the DDI Main Number
Requirements:
– Set connection type SIP-Trunking
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Accounts.
2. In the Account overview, tap on the required account.
3. Tap on DDI main number and then enter the DDI main number assigned by your
VoIP provider, e.g. 92 00, without a prefix. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Make further settings.
Entering Telephone Numbers
Depending on whether you have selected Standard connection or SIP trunking as the
connection type, this is where you input the internal telephone numbers (MSNs) or the exten-
sions (DDIs) of your telephone. You can also assign every telephone number its own ring tone.
You can enter telephone numbers as follows:
Separately for each account
Using the configuration manager
Up to 40 digits
Numbers
Up to 40 digits
Numbers
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 517
Settings
Accounts
Entering Telephone Numbers
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Enter Telephone Numbers
1. Open the Settings > Accounts screen.
2. In the line that contains the required account, click Configure.
3. Click on the Numbers tab.
4. Click on Configure.
5. In the Name entry field, enter a name for the telephone number. Possible entries:
6. In the Number entry field, enter the telephone number without prefixes. (Internal
telephone number (MSN) for the standard connection, DDI or MSN for SIP trunking).
Possible entries:
7. Select or clear the Default subscriber number check box.
8. In the Subscriber number type list field (only active if the configured connection type
is SIP trunking), select the telephone number type.
Note: If you have selected the SIP Trunking connection type, you must
specify here whether the telephone number involved is the extension (DDI)
to the DDI main number, or a multiple subscriber telephone number (MSN)
adopted from an earlier ISDN connection to the VoIP connection.
9. Select the ringtone you want to use from the Ringtone list field.
Further steps:
– Make further settings on the configuration screen.
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and characters
Telephone number is used as the default for outgoing calls.
Telephone number is not used as the default number.
518 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Accounts
Entering Telephone Numbers
Using the Telephone to Enter Telephone Numbers
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Accounts.
2. In the Account overview, tap on the required account.
3. Tap on Subscriber numbers.
4. Tap on New number.
5. Tap on Number and then enter the telephone number without prefixes in the entry
field. (internal telephone number (MSN) for the default connection, DDI or MSN for
SIP trunking). Possible entries:
6. Tap on OK.
7. Tap on Name and then enter a name for the telephone number in the entry field.
Possible entries:
8. Tap on OK.
9. Select or clear the Default subscriber number check box.
10. Tap Subscriber number type (only active if the selected connection type is SIP
trunking).
Note: If you have selected the SIP Trunking connection type, you must
specify here whether the telephone number involved is the extension (DDI)
to the DDI main number, or a multiple subscriber telephone number (MSN)
adopted from an earlier ISDN connection to the VoIP connection.
11. Select the subscriber number type.
12. Tap on Ringtone.
13. Select the ringtone you want to use from the Ringtone list field.
14. Tap on OK.
Up to 40 digits
Numbers
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Telephone number is used as the default for outgoing calls.
Telephone number is not used as the default number.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 519
Settings
Accounts
Creating a BLF Resource List Subscription
Further steps:
– Make further settings.
Creating a BLF Resource List Subscription
You can create a BLF resource list subscription for every VoIP account that has DDI exten-
sions. You can monitor the engaged status of other extensions with DDI extension numbers
that are grouped together into a specific Resource List, and use LEDs to represent the corre-
sponding speed dialling keys. Using this list method of performing queries reduces both costs
and the load on the server in comparison to making a separate query to access status infor-
mation about each individual extension. The VoIP provider provides the appropriate
subscription URI for this purpose.
Important: The BLF Resource List Subscription function (BLF according to
RFC 4662) is currently not available on Auerswald PBXs.
You can create a BLF resource list subscription as follows:
Separately for each account
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Set the BLF Resource List Subscription
Requirements:
– You need to know the VoIP provider's subscription URI
1. Open the Settings > Accounts screen.
2. In the line that contains the required account, click Configure.
3. Select or clear the Enable BLF resource list subscription check box.
4. If you have activated the list for busy lamp fields, enter the user part of the
subscription URI in the User part of subscription URI entry field.
BLF resource list subscription is active.
BLF resource list subscription is not active.
520 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Accounts
Creating a BLF Resource List Subscription
Note: You will receive the subscription URI from your VoIP provider. Its
structure is similar to an e-mail address. The user part is the character string
before the @ character.
Further steps:
– Make further settings on the configuration screen.
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Set the BLF Resource List Subscription
Requirements:
– You need to know the VoIP provider's subscription URI
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Accounts.
2. In the Account overview, tap on the required account.
3. Tap on the BLF resource list subscription.
4. Select or clear the Enable BLF resource list subscription check box.
5. If you have activated the list for busy lamp fields, enter the user part of the
subscription URI in the User part of subscription URI entry field.
Note: You will receive the subscription URI from your VoIP provider. Its
structure is similar to an e-mail address. The user part is the character string
before the @ character.
6. Tap on OK.
Further steps:
– Make further settings.
BLF resource list subscription is active.
BLF resource list subscription is not active.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 521
Settings
Accounts
Configuring the Voice Mailbox (SIP Account)
Configuring the Voice Mailbox (SIP Account)
To use the voice mailbox functions of a standard VoIP account you must make the settings
specified by the VoIP provider. With these settings you can, for example, use the Message
Waiting Indication (MWI) to monitor the voice mailbox's status and see the status from the LEDs
on the message key.
Note: The voice mailbox (SIP account) is only available on the PBXs
COMpact 4000, COMpact 5000/R and COMmander 6000/R/RX (as of PBX
firmware version 6.4A
You can configure a voice mailbox as follows:
Separately for each account
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the Voice Mailbox
1. Open the Settings > Accounts screen.
2. In the line that contains the required account, click Configure.
3. Select the tab Voice mailboxes.
4. Click New.
5. Tap on Voice mailbox name and enter the name of the voice mailbox in the relevant
entry field. Possible entries:
6. Tap on Voice mailbox number and enter the voice mailbox's telephone number in
the relevant entry field. Possible entries:
Note: Each status message is assigned a telephone number to enable you
to identify the associated voice mailbox. You must enter the a telephone
number to ensure that the status message is uniquely assigned to a single
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
522 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Accounts
Configuring the Voice Mailbox (SIP Account)
voice mailbox. This telephone number does not have to match the telephone
number you use to listen to messages.
7. Tap on Number for fetching voice messages and enter the telephone number for
retrieving messages in the entry field. Possible entries:
Note: This telephone number is used to fetch messages, by pressing the
message key and, if required, a function key to which the MWI function is
assigned. If you do not enter a telephone number for fetching messages, the
mailbox's telephone number is used instead.
8. Select or clear the Explicit Message Waiting Indication subscription check box.
Note: Some VoIP providers do not send status messages until they have
been explicitly requested by the telephone. Disable this option if the VoIP
provider sends status messages without you having to request them.
9. If you have enabled explicit MWI subscription, click on MWI subscription number
and enter the MWI subscription number in the entry field. Possible entries:
10. Select or clear the Personal voice mailbox check box.
Note: If a VoIP account has several voice mailboxes, the LEDs on the
message key always display the status of all the configured voice mailboxes.
It is not possible to switch on the display just for one particular voice mailbox
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
Explicit MWI subscription is active.
Explicit MWI subscription is not active.
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
Switches the use as a personal voice mailbox on. The status of the voice
mailbox is displayed in the status widget.
Switches the use as a personal voice mailbox off. The status of the voice
mailbox is not displayed in the status widget.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 523
Settings
Accounts
Configuring the Voice Mailbox (SIP Account)
on a VoIP account. In this case use the "Personal voice mailbox" function to
display the status of a particular voice mailbox in the status line.
11. Click Save.
Using the Telephone to Configure the Voice Mailbox
Requirements:
– This function is not being used on an Auerswald PBX.
– You need to know the VoIP provider's MWI subscription
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Accounts.
2. In the Account overview, tap on the required account.
3. Tap on Voice mailboxes.
4. Tap on New voice mailbox.
5. Tap on Voice mailbox name and enter the name of the voice mailbox in the relevant
entry field. Possible entries:
6. Tap on OK.
7. Tap on Voice mailbox number and enter the voice mailbox's telephone number in
the relevant entry field. Possible entries:
Note: Each status message is assigned a telephone number to enable you
to identify the associated voice mailbox. You must enter the a telephone
number to ensure that the status message is uniquely assigned to a single
voice mailbox. This telephone number does not have to match the telephone
number you use to listen to messages.
8. Tap on OK.
9. Tap on Number for fetching voice messages and enter the telephone number for
retrieving messages in the entry field. Possible entries:
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
524 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Accounts
Configuring the Voice Mailbox (SIP Account)
Note: This telephone number is used to fetch messages, by pressing the
message key and, if required, a function key to which the MWI function is
assigned. If you do not enter a telephone number for fetching messages, the
mailbox's telephone number is used instead.
10. Tap on OK.
11. Select or clear the Explicit Message Waiting Indication subscription check box.
Note: Some VoIP providers do not send status messages until they have
been explicitly requested by the telephone. Disable this option if the VoIP
provider sends status messages without you having to request them.
12. If you have enabled explicit MWI subscription, tap on MWI subscription number and
enter the MWI subscription number in the entry field. Possible entries:
13. Tap on OK.
14. Select or clear the Personal voice mailbox check box.
Note: If a VoIP account has several voice mailboxes, the LEDs on the
message key always display the status of all the configured voice mailboxes.
It is not possible to switch on the display just for one particular voice mailbox
on a VoIP account. In this case use the "Personal voice mailbox" function to
display the status of a particular voice mailbox in the status line.
Further steps:
– Make further settings.
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
Explicit MWI subscription is active.
Explicit MWI subscription is not active.
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
Switches the use as a personal voice mailbox on. The status of the voice
mailbox is displayed in the status widget.
Switches the use as a personal voice mailbox off. The status of the voice
mailbox is not displayed in the status widget.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 525
Settings
Bluetooth (only COMfortel 3600 IP)
Switching Bluetooth On/Off and Configuring It
Bluetooth (only COMfortel 3600 IP)
The wireless Bluetooth technology enables you to connect a keyboard, a headset, or a mobile
phone, e.g. for automated call forwarding. Data can also be exchanged between the mobile
phone and the telephone via the Bluetooth interface. The maximum range in the Bluetooth
network is 10 m.
Switching Bluetooth On/Off and Configuring It
Requirements:
– Bluetooth dongle plugged into the exclusive USB port (see chapter Indroduction to the
telephone > Device overview > Overview of connections).
If the bluetooth function has been enabled, a pairing request from the telephone can be send
to or accepted from another device.
Note: In sensitive areas, in which the use of Bluetooth is generally prohibited,
you can also remove the Bluetooth dongle from the telephone, in addition to
switching Bluetooth off.
You can switch Bluetooth on and off, and configure it, as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch Bluetooth On/Off
Requirements:
– Bluetooth dongle plugged into the exclusive USB port (see chapter Indroduction to the
telephone > Device overview > Overview of connections).
1. Open the Settings > Network > Bluetooth screen.
2. Under Bluetooth, select or deselect the Bluetooth check box.
Further steps:
Switches Bluetooth on.
Switches Bluetooth off.
526 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Bluetooth (only COMfortel 3600 IP)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Bluetooth
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch Bluetooth On/Off
Requirements:
– Bluetooth dongle plugged into the exclusive USB port (see chapter Indroduction to the
telephone > Device overview > Overview of connections).
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Network > Bluetooth.
2. Enable or disable the Bluetooth toggle button.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Bluetooth
Press the key to switch Bluetooth on or off or to change it.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function key for Bluetooth as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for Bluetooth
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
LED signalling on the key:
green Bluetooth is enabled.
off Bluetooth is disabled.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 527
Settings
Bluetooth (only COMfortel 3600 IP)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Bluetooth
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key that you would like to define, select the
Bluetooth.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press the key to enable or disable Bluetooth, depending on its current
state.
switch on: Press the key to enable Bluetooth.
switch off: Press the key to disable Bluetooth.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
528 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Bluetooth (only COMfortel 3600 IP)
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for Bluetooth
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for Bluetooth
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap on Bluetooth.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. Tap on Assign.
8. Tap on Exit.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press a key to switch Bluetooth on or off, depending on its initial state.
switch on: Press the key to enable Bluetooth.
switch off: Press the key to disable Bluetooth.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 529
Settings
Network
Switching the DHCP Client On/Off
Network
A network is a combination of more than one computer and other communication devices. This
enables multiple users to access common resources such as files, printers, etc.
Switching the DHCP Client On/Off
If the DHCP client function has been enabled, the DHCP server automatically assigns the
telephone an IP address.
You can switch the DHCP client on and off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch the DHCP Client On/Off
1. Open the Settings > Network > Network screen.
2. Under Ethernet settings, select or deselect the DHCP check box.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch the DHCP Client On/Off
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Network > Network.
2. Select or clear the DHCP check box.
Switches the DHCP client on.
Switches the DHCP client off.
Switches the DHCP client on.
Switches the DHCP client off.
530 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Network
Configuring the Telephone's IP Address Manually
Configuring the Telephone's IP Address Manually
The telephone's IP address is used to uniquely identify that telephone on the network.
You can configure the telephone's IP address manually as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the Telephone's IP Address
Requirements:
– switched-off DHCP client
1. Open the Settings > Network > Network screen.
2. Under Ethernet settings, enter the telephone's IP address in the IP address entry
field. Possible entries:.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the Telephone's IP Address
Requirements:
– switched-off DHCP client
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Network > Network.
2. Tap on IP address and then enter the IP address of the telephone. Possible entries:
3. Tap on OK.
Configuring the Subnet Mask
You can configure the subnet mask as follows:
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 192.168.0.240)
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 192.168.0.240)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 531
Settings
Network
Configuring a Gateway
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the Subnet Mask
Requirements:
– switched-off DHCP client
1. Open the Settings > Network > Network screen.
2. Under Network settings, enter the subnet mask in the Subnet mask entry field.
Possible entries:.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the Subnet Mask
Requirements:
– switched-off DHCP client
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Network > Network.
2. Tap on Net mask and then enter the net mask in the entry field. Possible entries:
3. Tap on OK.
Configuring a Gateway
A gateway is a PC or router that acts as an intermediary between two different networks. The
Internet service provider is the gateway for direct Internet dial-up connections. If you use a
router, this is the gateway in a local network.
You can configure a gateway as follows:
Using the configuration manager
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 255.255.255.0)
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 255.255.255.0)
532 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Network
Configuring the DNS Server
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Gateway
Requirements:
– switched-off DHCP client
1. Open the Settings > Network > Network screen.
2. Under Network settings, enter the gateway's IP address in the Gateway entry field.
Possible entries:.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure a Gateway
Requirements:
– switched-off DHCP client
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Network > Network.
2. Tap on Gateway and then enter the gateway's IP address. Possible entries:
3. Tap on OK.
Configuring the DNS Server
The DNS server is required for Internet access (for example, for Voice over IP or online name
search). The data is specified by the Internet service provider or the network's system admin-
istrator.
You can configure the DNS server as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 192.168.0.2)
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 192.168.0.2)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 533
Settings
Network
Configuring an HTTP Proxy
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the DNS Server
Requirements:
– switched-off DHCP client
1. Open the Settings > Network > Network screen.
2. Under Ethernet settings, enter the IP address of a DNS server in each of the DNS
server 1 and DNS server 2 entry fields. Possible entries:.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the DNS Server
Requirements:
– switched-off DHCP client
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Network > Network.
2. Tap on DNS server 1 and then enter the IP address of the DNS server. Possible
entries:
3. Tap on OK.
4. If you want to configure a second DNS server, tap on DNS server 2 and then enter
the IP address of that DNS server. Possible entries:
5. Tap on OK.
Configuring an HTTP Proxy
An HTTP proxy is a proxy for the HTTP protocol, which is used to access Internet pages or
download files.
In a system telephone the HTTP proxy is needed, for example, to perform firmware updates
via the update server.
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 192.168.0.12)
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 192.168.0.12)
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 192.168.0.12)
534 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Network
Configuring an HTTP Proxy
You can configure an HTTP proxy as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure an HTTP Proxy
1. Open the Settings > Network > Network screen.
2. Select or clear the Proxy check box under Proxy settings.
3. Under Proxy settings, enter the corresponding port number in the Port entry field.
Possible entries:
4. Under Proxy settings, enter the HTTP proxy in the Proxy hostname entry field.
Possible entries:
5. Under Proxy settings, enter the address of the local host for which the proxy is to be
bypassed, in the Bypass proxy for entry field. You can make the following entries
(use commas to separate them):
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure an HTTP Proxy
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Network > Network.
2. Tap on HTTP proxy.
3. Select or clear the HTTP proxy check box.
Switches the HTTP proxy on.
Switches the HTTP proxy off. (No further action is required.)
1 to 65535
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 123.123.123.123)
Fully Qualified Domain Name (for example: hostname.domainname)
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 123.123.123.123)
Host name)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 535
Settings
Network
Switching DiffServ On/Off
4. Tap on Proxy hostname and enter the HTTP proxy in the relevant entry field.
Possible entries:
5. Tap on OK.
6. Tap on Port and then enter the associated port number (port) in the entry field.
Possible entries:
7. Tap on OK.
8. Tap on Bypass proxy for and enter the address of the local host which the proxy is
to bypass in the entry field. You can make the following entries (use commas to
separate them):
9. Tap on OK.
Switching DiffServ On/Off
You can use DiffServ (Differentiated Services Flag) to give preference to language packages
(VoIP) and to achieve better voice quality for VoIP calls. DiffServ can be evaluated in networks
that include active network components such as routers or switches, to enable packets to be
forwarded according to their priority.
Note: DiffServ is not supported by all VoIP providers. When used in a
standard VoIP account, these settings may not be applied in some situations.
You can switch the DiffServ function on and off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Switches the HTTP proxy on.
Switches the HTTP proxy off. (No further action is required.)
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 123.123.123.123)
Fully Qualified Domain Name (for example: hostname.domainname)
1 to 65535
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 123.123.123.123)
Hostname
536 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Network
Configuring the RTP Port
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch the DiffServ Function On/Off
Requirements:
– Available and enabled support for DiffServ in all active network components
1. Open the Settings > Network > Network screen.
2. Under Settings for VoIP,select or deselect the Quality of Service check box.
DiffServ (Differentiated Services).
3. Only if DiffServ is enabled: Restart the telephone.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch the DiffServ Function On/Off
Requirements:
– Available and enabled support for DiffServ in all active network components
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Network > Network.
2. Tap on VoIP.
3. Select or clear the Quality of Service check box. DiffServ (Differentiated
Services).
4. Only if DiffServ is enabled: Restart the telephone.
Configuring the RTP Port
The RTP port is a port on the local system that is used as the outgoing port for RTP transfers.
You can configure the RTP port as follows:
Switches DiffServ on. The following DSCP values are set for VoIP calls (as
proposed in RFC 4594): Signalling (SIP): CS5, Voice (RTP): EF
Switches DiffServ off.
Switches DiffServ on. The following DSCP values are set for VoIP calls (as
proposed in RFC 4594): Signalling (SIP): CS5, Voice (RTP): EF.
Switches DiffServ off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 537
Settings
Network
Configuring the RTP Port
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure an RTP Port
1. Open the Settings > Network > Network screen.
2. Under Settings for VoIP, enter the port number (RTP port) in the Smallest RTP port
entry field. Possible entries:
3. Under Settings for VoIP, enter the corresponding RTP port range in the RTP port
range entry field. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure an RTP Port
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Network > Network.
2. Tap on VoIP.
3. Tap on Smallest RTP port and then enter the port number (RTP port) in the entry
field. Possible entries:
4. Tap on OK.
5. Tap on RTP port range and then enter the associated port range in the entry field.
Possible entries:
6. Tap on OK.
1024 to 65471
64 to 256
1024 to 65471
64 to 256
538 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Network
VLAN
VLAN
A VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) is a logical network within a physical network. You can
use a VLAN to operate several logical networks in the same physical network, to represent a
company's departments within the network in a logical way or to separate traffic streams on the
network, e.g. to separate PC data from voice data and give them different priorities.
To run a VLAN, you require VLAN-enabled network components that comply with the IEEE
802.1Q standard.
Virtual Local Area Network settings
The following VLAN settings are possible:
VLAN switched off, VLAN gateway off:
All data packets are forwarded, unchanged, between the ports (POE port, PC port
and internal port).
VLAN switched on, VLAN gateway off:
The internal port is placed in its own VLAN. The associated data packets are
protected and transported in this VLAN (tagged with the VLAN ID of the internal port
and prioritised with the VLAN priority of the internal port).
All data packets are forwarded, unchanged, between the POE port and the PC port.
You can connect a non-VLAN-enabled device, such as a PC, to the telephone's
external port (PC port) without adding this device to a VLAN. You can also connect
additional telephones to the external port (daisy chain) and use your own VLANs in
the telephones.
VLAN switched on, VLAN gateway switched on:
The internal port is placed in its own VLAN. The associated data packets are
protected and transported in this VLAN (tagged with the VLAN ID of the internal port
and prioritised with the VLAN priority of the internal port).
The external port is also placed in its own VLAN. The associated data packets are
tagged with the VLAN ID of the external port and prioritised with the VLAN priority of
the external port.
You can connect a non-VLAN-enabled device, such as a PC, to the telephone's
external port (PC LAN port) and add this device in the external port VLAN.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 539
Settings
Network
Switching the VLAN On/Off and Configuring It
Switching the VLAN On/Off and Configuring It
You can switch the VLAN on/off and configure it as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch the VLAN On/Off and Configure It
Requirements:
– VLAN provided on the network
– Set up network interface type VLAN (can be configured in the configuration manager under
Settings > Providers & PBXs > name of the provider/PBX > Provider > Network
interface type)
1. Open the Settings > Network > Network screen.
2. Under VLAN Settings, select or clear the VLAN internal port check box.
3. Under VLAN Settings, enter the VLAN-ID for the internal port in the VLAN-ID
internal port entry field. Possible entries:
4. Under VLAN Settings, enter the priority in the VLAN priority internal port entry
field. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch the VLAN On/Off and Configure It
Requirements:
– VLAN provided on the network
– Set up network interface type VLAN (can be configured in the telephone under Apps >
Settings > Providers & PBXs > Name of Provider/PBX > Network interface type)
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Network > Network.
Switches on VLAN on the internal port.
Switches off VLAN on the internal port. (No further action is required.)
1 to 4094
0 (lowest priority) to 7 (highest priority)
540 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Network
Switching the VLAN Gateway On/Off and Configuring It
2. Tap on VLAN.
3. Select or clear the VLAN internal port check box.
4. Tap on VLAN ID internal port and enter the VLAN ID for the internal port in the entry
field. Possible entries:
5. Tap on OK.
6. Tap on VLAN priority internal port and enter the priority for the internal port in the
entry field. Possible entries:
7. Tap on OK.
Switching the VLAN Gateway On/Off and Configuring It
You can switch the VLAN gateway on/off and configure it as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch the VLAN Gateway On/Off and Configure It
Requirements:
– Switched on VLAN
1. Open the Settings > Network > Network screen.
2. Under VLAN Settings, select or clear the VLAN gateway check box.
3. Under VLAN Settings, enter the VLAN-ID for the external port in the VLAN-ID
external port entry field. Possible entries:
Switches on VLAN on the internal port.
Switches off VLAN on the internal port. (No further action is required.)
1 to 4094
0 (lowest priority) to 7 (highest priority)
Switches the VLAN gateway on.
Switches the VLAN gateway off. (No further action is required.)
1 to 4094
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 541
Settings
Network
Switching the VLAN Gateway On/Off and Configuring It
Important: Assign different values to the VLAN-ID internal port and the
VLAN-ID external port.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch the VLAN Gateway On/Off and Configure It
Requirements:
– Switched on VLAN
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Network > Network.
2. Tap on VLAN.
3. Select or clear the VLAN gateway check box.
4. Tap on VLAN ID external port and enter the VLAN ID for the external port in the entry
field. Possible entries:
Important: Assign different values to the VLAN-ID internal port and the
VLAN-ID external port.
5. Tap on OK.
Switches the VLAN gateway on.
Switches the VLAN gateway off. (No further action is required.)
1 to 4094
542 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Network
VPN
VPN
A VPN (Virtual Private Network) is a private, closed network within an open network, such as
the Internet. Data packets are encrypted, and VPN subscribers can be required to authenticate
themselves, to ensure that the data packets are transferred between subscribers without being
vulnerable to eavesdropping or manipulation.
The telephone uses OpenVPN libraries to establish a VPN over a TLS/SSL-encrypted
connection.
However, you must make the following settings before you can use the telephone to set up a
VPN:
configure the VPN network interface type (Settings > Providers & PBXs)
OpenVPN configuration file, saving in the telephone
OpenVPN certificate, saving in the telephone
OpenVPN, enabling
Important: When you restart the telephone, its time is reset unless it is
updated automatically by a time server (NTP server). As data packets are
given a time stamp when they are encrypted, it is important that the current
time is set on the telephone ( Apps > Settings > System > Date
& Time). A connection cannot be established via a VPN if a data packet time
stamp is different from the time on the telephone.
Saving the OpenVPN Configuration File in the Telephone
The OpenVPN configuration file contains all the settings needed to establish a VPN
connection, such as the encryption type and references to the required certificates.
You can save this configuration file as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Requirements:
– an OpenVPN configuration file (openvpn.cfg) saved on the hard disk
1. Open the Settings > Network > VPN screen.
2. Under Config file, click Search.
A file selection dialogue opens.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 543
Settings
Network
Saving OpenVPN Certificates in the Telephone
3. Select the configuration file (openvpn.cfg) and click Open (this text varies according
to which operating system is in use).
The path and the file are displayed under Config file.
4. Click Save.
5. Click OK.
The OpenVPN configuration file is now saved in the telephone.
Saving OpenVPN Certificates in the Telephone
The certificate is used to authenticate VPN subscribers.
You can save the OpenVPN certificates as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Requirements:
– a certificate, saved on the hard disk
1. Open the Settings > Network > VPN screen.
2. Under OpenVPN certificate, click Search.
A file selection dialogue opens.
3. Select the required certificate (*.crt) and click Open (this text varies according to
which operating system you are using).
The path and the file are displayed under OpenVPN certificate.
4. Click Save.
5. Click OK.
The certificate is now saved in the telephone.
Switching OpenVPN On/Off
You can switch OpenVPN on/off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
544 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Network
Opening the OpenVPN Log File
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch OpenVPN On/Off
Requirements:
– OpenVPN provided on the network
– Set VPN network interface type (can be set in the configuration manager under Settings >
Provider & PBXs > Name of Provider/PBX > Provider > Network interface type)
1. Open the Settings > Network > VPN screen.
2. Under VPN settings, select or clear the OpenVPN check box.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch OpenVPN On/Off
Requirements:
– OpenVPN provided on the network
– Set VPN network interface type (can be set in the telephone under Apps > Settings
> Provider & PBXs > Name of Provider/PBX > Network interface type )
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Network > Network.
2. Tap on VPN.
3. Select or clear the OpenVPN check box.
Opening the OpenVPN Log File
All the operations performed when OpenVPN is enabled are recorded in the OpenVPN log file.
Switches OpenVPN on.
Switches OpenVPN off.
Switches OpenVPN on.
Switches OpenVPN off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 545
Settings
Network
Deleting the OpenVPN Configuration File
You can open the OpenVPN log file as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Open an OpenVPN Log File
1. Open the Settings > Network > VPN screen.
2. Under OpenVPN log file, click on Read.
Using the Telephone to Open an OpenVPN Log File
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Network > Network.
2. Tap on VPN.
3. Tap on Open OpenVPN log file.
Deleting the OpenVPN Configuration File
You can delete the OpenVPN configuration file that is saved in the telephone.
Do so as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Delete an OpenVPN Configuration File
1. Open the Settings > Network > VPN screen.
2. Under OpenVPN configuration file click on Delete.
3. Click OK.
546 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Network
Deleting OpenVPN Certificates
Using the Telephone to Delete an OpenVPN Configuration File
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Network > Network.
2. Tap on VPN.
3. Tap on Delete OpenVPN Configuration File.
4. Tap on OK.
Deleting OpenVPN Certificates
You delete the OpenVPN certificates that are saved in the telephone.
Note: This action deletes all the OpenVPN certificates that are saved in the
telephone.
You can delete OpenVPN certificates as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Delete an OpenVPN Certificate
1. Open the Settings > Network > VPN screen.
2. Under OpenVPN certificate, click on Delete.
3. Click OK.
Using the Telephone to Delete an OpenVPN Certificate
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Network > Network.
2. Tap on VPN.
3. Tap on Delete OpenVPN certificate.
4. Tap on OK.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 547
Settings
Network
IP Blacklist and Whitelist as Protection Against Attacks from the Internet
IP Blacklist and Whitelist as Protection Against Attacks from the Internet
As soon as the phone is connected to the Internet, it is at risk of being attacked, for example,
by DoS (Denial of Service) attacks, or attacks aimed at the internal SIP server, that come via
the Internet.
To prevent this, you can enable an IP blacklist.
Notes:
Switching IP Blacklist and Whitelist On/Off
If the PBX's IP blacklist is enabled, it monitors and evaluates network-based access
attempts, such as the number of data packets per second or SIP authentication failures.
If traffic from a particular IP address is judged as being too high - and therefore probably
malicious- this IP address is blocked. This means accesses from this IP address to the
telephone are blocked (block time). Initially this block lasts for five minutes. A note appears in
the status line on the Home screen. During the block time the telephone continues to monitor
traffic from this IP address. If traffic from this IP address to the PBX continues to be too high,
the single block time is extended (block time restarts).
Important: Switching off the IP blacklist and whitelist or restarting the
telephone deletes all the entries in the locking list.
You can switch the IP blacklist and whitelist functions on and off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
You can display and delete blacklists that were set up automati-
cally:
in the telephone, under Apps > Settings > Network >
Network > IP blacklist
in the configuration manager on the Settings > Network >
Blacklist and whitelist settings screen
You can also enter IP addresses which should not be blocked
even though they receive a lot of data traffic:
in the telephone, under Apps > Settings > Network >
Network > IP whitelist
in the configuration manager on the Settings > Network >
Blacklist and whitelist settings screen
548 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Network
Viewing and Deleting IP Restrictions
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch the IP Blacklist and Whitelist Functions On/
Off
1. Open the Settings > Network > Blacklist and whitelist settings screen.
2. Select or clear the Blacklist and whitelist settings check box.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch the IP Blacklist and Whitelist Functions On/Off
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Network > Network.
2. Select or clear the Blacklist and whitelist settings check box.
Viewing and Deleting IP Restrictions
You can view and delete IP restrictions as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to View and Delete IP Restrictions
1. Open the Settings > Network > Blacklist and whitelist settings screen.
2. Under IP blacklist, click on the IP address you want to delete, and the click on
Delete.
Switches the IP blacklist and whitelist on.
Switches the IP blacklist and whitelist off.
Switches the IP blacklist and whitelist on.
Switches the IP blacklist and whitelist off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 549
Settings
Network
Configuring an IP Whitelist
Using the Telephone to View and Delete IP Restrictions
Requirements:
– Enabled blacklist and whitelist settings
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Network > Network > IP Blacklist.
2. You can delete an IP address from the IP blacklist or move it to the IP whitelist:
Delete: Touch and hold the required IP address and then tap on Delete.
Move: Touch and hold the required IP address and then tap on Move to IP
whitelist.
Configuring an IP Whitelist
You can configure an IP whitelist as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure an IP Whitelist
Requirements:
– Enabled blacklist and whitelist settings
1. Open the Settings > Network > Blacklist and whitelist settings screen.
2. Click on New.
3. Enter the IP address in the IP Address entry field. Possible entries:
4. Select the network prefix in the Network prefix (CIDR) list field. The following
network prefixes can be used here:
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 192.168.0.240)
Network prefix with ranges of 0 to 32
550 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Network
Configuring an IP Whitelist
Notes:
The telephone supports the IPv4 Internet protocol, with a prefix length of 0
to 32 bits. The network prefix provides the net mask for the IP address and
specifies how many IP addresses are released in a network range. The
larger the network prefix, the fewer the number of IP addresses that are
released.
Example:
Important: Only release as many IP address ranges as necessary. The
larger the released address range, the greater the danger of attacks.
5. Click Save.
6. Click OK.
Note: To delete an IP address from the IP whitelist, go to IP whitelist, click
on the IP address you want to delete, and then click on Delete.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure an IP Whitelist
Requirements:
– Enabled blacklist and whitelist settings
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Network > Network > IP Whitelist.
2. Tap on Add entry.
3. Tap on IP address and enter the IP address. Possible entries:
IP address: 192.196.0.240
Network
prefix
Released address range
8 192.x.x.x
16 192.168.x.x
24 192.168.0.x
32 192.168.0.240 (only the explicitly entered IP address is
released.)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 551
Settings
Network
Configuring an IP Whitelist
4. Tap on OK.
5. Tap on Network prefix (CIDR) and enter the network prefix. Possible entries:
Notes:
The telephone supports the IPv4 Internet protocol, with a prefix length of 0
to 32 bits. The network prefix provides the net mask for the IP address and
specifies how many IP addresses are released in a network range. The
larger the network prefix, the fewer the number of IP addresses that are
released.
Example:
Important: Only release as many IP address ranges as necessary. The
larger the released address range, the greater the danger of attacks.
6. Tap on OK.
7. Tap on Confirm.
Note: To delete an IP address from the IP whitelist, touch and hold the
required IP address and then tap on Delete.
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 192.168.0.240)
Network prefix with ranges of 0 to 32
IP address: 192.196.0.240
Network
prefix
Released address range
8 192.x.x.x
16 192.168.x.x
24 192.168.0.x
32 192.168.0.240 (only the explicitly entered IP address is
released.)
552 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Sound
Setting the Volume
Sound
The telephone uses sound to tell you about phone calls, notifications, alarms and selections on
the display. You can select the sounds you want, set their volume and also mute specific
sounds as required. You can also add other, additional ringtones to the telephone.
Setting the Volume
You can set the following volume levels on the telephone:
Ringtone
Media
Alarm
You can set the volume as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Set the Volume
Requirements:
– Silent mode switched off
1. Open the Settings > Device > Sound screen.
2. Under Settings for tones click on the relevant slider and drag the handle to the
required position.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Set the Volume
Requirements:
– Silent mode switched off
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 553
Settings
Sound
Setting a Default Ringtone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Sound.
2. Under General, tap on Volume.
3. Tap the relevant slider and drag the handle to the required position.
4. Tap on OK.
Setting a Default Ringtone
You can set a default ringtone as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Set a Default Ringtone
1. Open the Settings > Device > Sound screen.
2. Under Settings for tones, select the ringtone you want from the Default ringtone list
field.
Note: You can add additional ringtones to the telephone. To do this, remove
the SD card and use the SD card reader to connect the card to a PC. On the
SD card, create a folder called ringtones and copy the ringtone file (*.wav)
into that folder. After you have inserted the SD card in the telephone again,
the ringtone is displayed in the Default ringtone list field.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Set a Default Ringtone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Sound.
2. Under Call ringtone, tap onRing tone and select the required ring tone from the list
field.
554 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Sound
Setting a Notification Ringtone
Note: You can add additional ringtones to the telephone. To do this, remove
the SD card and use the SD card reader to connect the card to a PC. On the
SD card, create a folder called ringtones and copy the ringtone file (*.wav)
into that folder. After you have inserted the SD card in the telephone again,
the ringtone is displayed in the Ringtone list field.
3. Tap on OK.
Setting a Notification Ringtone
You can set a notification ringtone as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Sound.
2. Under System, tap on Default notification.
3. Select the ringtone you want from the Default notification list field.
4. Tap on OK.
Switching Touch Sounds On/Off
If the touch sounds function is switched on, you hear a tone when you touch a button, symbol
etc. on the display.
You can touch sounds on or off as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Sound.
2. Under System, select or clear the Touch sounds check box.
Switches on the sound when the user touches the display.
Switches off the sound when the user touches the display.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 555
Settings
Sound
Setting the Headset Microphone Gain
Setting the Headset Microphone Gain
If required you can set the headset microphone gain and adjust the volume of your voice to suit
your call partner.
You can set the headset microphone gain as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Set the Headset Microphone Gain
1. Open the Settings > Device > Sound screen.
2. Under Volume, click on the Headset microphone gain slider and drag the handle to
the required position.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Set the Headset Microphone Gain
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Sound > More.
2. Tap on Headset-microphone gain.
3. Tap on the slider and then drag the handle to the required position.
4. Tap on OK.
Setting Receiver Microphone Gain
If required you can set the receiver microphone gain and adjust the volume of your voice to suit
your call partner.
You can set the receiver microphone gain as follows:
Using the telephone
556 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Sound
Switching Headset Ringing On/Off
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Sound > More.
2. Tap on Maximum gain handset micro.
3. Tap on the slider and then drag the handle to the required position.
4. Tap on OK.
Switching Headset Ringing On/Off
If you are using a headset (headset switched on), three types of call signalling are possible:
1. Ringing through the loudspeaker (as for receiver operation)
2. Ringing through the loudspeaker + a short attention tone on the headset
3. Short attention tone on the headset
In the 2nd and 3rd operating modes, switch on headset ringing as described here. In the 3nd
operating mode, you must also switch off the ringtone.
You can switch headset ringing on or off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch Headset Ringing On/Off
1. Open the Settings > Device > Sound screen.
2. Under Settings for tones, select or deselect the Headset ringing check box.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch Headset Ringing On/Off
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Sound > More.
Switches headset ringing on.
Switches headset ringing off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 557
Settings
Sound
Call Differentiation
2. Select or clear the Headset ringing check box.
Call Differentiation
You can use different ringtones to differentiate the incoming calls.
These ringtones can be assigned to the different call types, group telephone numbers, account
telephone numbers and callers. You can make these assignments depending on which infor-
mation you think is the most important. Configure the required settings as follows.
If you would like to use different ringtones to identify individual call types or the group
telephone numbers selected by the caller, make the settings described in this section, using
the telephone or the configuration manager.
If you would like to use different ring tones to identify the account telephone numbers
selected by the caller, assign a ringtone to these account telephone numbers (see
Settings> Accounts> Entering Telephone Numbers).
If you would like to use different ringtones to identify different callers, assign a ringtone to
the relevant contacts under Apps > Contacts > Name the contact > Menu key >
Options. However, this function only works if the caller's telephone number is transferred).
As external, internal and door calls can be affected by more than one of these settings, they
are signalled in a predefined sequence (list of priorities). The caller is always identified first. If
no specific sound has been assigned to the caller, the ringtone for the call type is used.
Priority List for External Calls
1. The ringtone specified in the telephone book, if the caller can be identified as a telephone
book entry
2. The ringtone defined for a specific account telephone number, if the telephone number was
dialled by the caller
3. The ringtone defined for a particular group telephone number, if the group is called
4. The ringtone defined for the group call type, if an undefined group is called
5. The ringtone defined for the external calls call type
Priority List for Internal Calls
1. The ringtone defined for the alarm calls call type
2. The ringtone defined for the wake-up calls call type
3. The ringtone specified in the telephone book, if the caller can be identified as a telephone
book entry
Switches headset ringing on.
Switches headset ringing off.
558 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Sound
Setting a Call Type-Dependent Ringtone
4. The ringtone defined for the InterCom call type
5. The ringtone defined for the internal priority calls call type
6. The ringtone defined for a specific account telephone number, if the telephone number was
dialled by the caller
7. The ringtone defined for a particular group telephone number, if the group is called
8. The ringtone defined for the group call type, if an undefined group is called
9. The ringtone specified in the telephone book, if the caller can be identified as an internal
calls call type
Priority List for Door Calls
1. The ringtone specified in the telephone book, if the door can be identified as a telephone
book entry
2. The ringtone defined for the door call call type
Setting a Call Type-Dependent Ringtone
You can assign a specific ringtone to each of the different call types. The following kinds of calls
can be identified here:
Unknown calls
Internal calls
Internal priority calls
External calls
Group calls (calls intended for a group)
Alarm calls
InterCom
Wake-up calls
Door calls
You can assign a call type-dependent ringtone as follows:
Using the telephone
Using the Telephone to Set a Call Type-Dependent Ring Tone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Sound > More.
2. Tap on Call type-dependent ring tone.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 559
Settings
Sound
Setting a Group-Dependent Ringtone
3. Tap on the relevant call type.
4. In the Choose ringtone list field, select the required ringtone.
5. Tap on OK.
Setting a Group-Dependent Ringtone
You can assign a specific ringtone to each of the different groups.
You can assign a group-dependent ringtone as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Assign a Group-Dependent Ringtone
1. Open the Settings > Device > Sound screen.
2. Under Special groups, click Configure in the line of the group you require.
3. Enter the telephone number in the Group number entry field. Possible entries:
4. Select the ringtone you want to use from the Ringtone list field.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Assign a Group-dependent Ringtone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Sound > More.
2. Tap on Group-dependent ring tone.
3. Tap on the relevant group.
4. Tap on Group telephone number and enter the telephone number in the entry field.
Possible entries:
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
560 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Sound
Switching the Ringtone On/Off
5. Tap on OK.
6. Tap on Ringtone and select the ringtone you want to use from the list field.
7. Tap on OK.
Switching the Ringtone On/Off
If the ringtone is switched on, you hear a sound signal when a phone call is received. If you
don't want to be disturbed by the ringer on the telephone, you can switch off the ringtone.
The difference between this function and the do-not-disturb function on the PBX is that you can
still receive phone calls here. However, you are not notified about calls with an audible ringtone,
just a visual display.
You can switch the ringtone on or off as follows:
Using the telephone
To switch a ringtone on or off, press the function key that has been configured for the ringtone.
Alternatively:
1. Tap on Apps > Functions > Ringtone.
2. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
3. Tap on Execute.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Ringtone
Press the key to switch the ringtone on or off or to change it.
Press the key during an incoming call to switch the ringtone on or off for this call or to switch it
over.
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
switch on: Enables the ringtone.
switch off: Disables the ringtone.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 561
Settings
Sound
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Ringtone
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function key for the ringtone as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for the Ringtone
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key that you would like to define, select the
Ringtone.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
LED signalling on the key:
off The ringtone is enabled.
red The ringtone is disabled.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
562 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Sound
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Ringtone
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for the Ringtone
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap on Ringtone.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
toggle: Press the key to enable or disable the ringtone, depending on its
current state.
switch on: Press the key to enable the ringtone.
switch off: Press the key to disable the ringtone.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 563
Settings
Sound
Switching Silence on User Proximity On/Off (only COMfortel 3600 IP)
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Operation list field, select one of the following options:
7. Tap on Assign.
8. Tap on Exit.
Switching Silence on User Proximity On/Off (only COMfortel 3600 IP)
If the silence on user proximity function is switched on, the ringtone generated by a hand
gesture made in front of the proximity sensor during a call (e.g. waving) is disabled.
You can switch silence on user proximity on or off as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Sound > More.
2. Select or clear the Silence on user proximity check box.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
toggle: Press a key to switch the ringtone on or off, depending on its initial
state.
switch on: Press the key to enable the ringtone.
switch off: Press the key to disable the ringtone.
Switches on the silence on user proximity function.
Switches off the silence on user proximity function.
564 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Display and LEDs
Setting the Brightness of the Display
Display and LEDs
You can configure the telephone to suit the needs of the user by setting the display.
Setting the Brightness of the Display
You can customise the display screen's brightness.
COMfortel 3600 IP: If the automatic brightness adjustment function is switched on, the
brightness sensor is used to adjust the display lighting to the brightness of the telephone's
surroundings.
Note: Under Apps > Settings > Device > Display > More you
can specify that the display is completely switched off in power save mode.
You can set the brightness of the display screen as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Set the Brightness of the Display
1. Open the Settings > Device > Display screen.
2. Only COMfortel 3600 IP: Select or clear the Automatic brightness check box.
If you have disabled the automatic brightness adjustment function, the slider is activ.
3. Under Brightness, click on the slider and set the required level of brightness.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Set the Brightness of the Display
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Display > Brightness.
Switches the automatic brightness adjustment function on.
Switches the automatic brightness adjustment function off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 565
Settings
Display and LEDs
Configuring the Wallpaper
2. Only COMfortel 3600 IP: Enable or disable the button Auto.
If you have disabled the automatic brightness adjustment function, the slider is activ.
3. Tap on the slider and set the required brightness.
4. Tap on OK.
Configuring the Wallpaper
You can set the Home screen wallpaper.
Do so as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Display > Background. Alterna-
tively, touch and hold any free place on the Home screen.
2. You may need to make additional settings, depending on the source of the image you
want to use:
Wallpapers: Tap on Wallpapers, tap on the wallpaper you want to use and then
tap on Set wallpaper.
Gallery: Tap on Gallery and tap on the wallpaper you want to use. Define the cut
range and then tap on Save.
566 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Display and LEDs
Idle State (Sleep) and Power Save Mode
Idle State (Sleep) and Power Save Mode
In its idle state (sleep), the display no longer reacts to touch and the selected screen candy is
displayed ( Apps > Settings > Device > Sound > Screen candy).
In power save mode, the display's backlight is dimmed or switched off and the LEDs are not
active (with the exception of the message LED which blinks for missed calls). The power save
mode is switched on and of depending on the idle state (sleep).
The idle state (sleep) can be switched on automatically after a specified waiting time or
manually if the user presses a function key.
If operated on an Auerswald PBX, the configuration set up in the PBX can be used to switch
the idle state (sleep) on and off (time control).
The idle state (sleep) is switched off automatically if, for example, an incoming call is signalled,
or if the alarm rings.
Notes:
If the screen lock has been set, it is enabled automatically when the idle
state (sleep) is enabled ( Apps > Settings > Personal >
Security > Screen lock).
Configuring the Idle State (Sleep)
The waiting time specifies how much time must elapse after the last action (e. g. pressing a
key, tapping the display, making a telephone call) before the screen lock is enabled.
You can configure automatic screen lock in power save mode as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Set the Idle State (Sleep)
1. Open the Settings > Device > Display screen.
2. Under Sleep select one of the following options:
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 567
Settings
Display and LEDs
Configuring the Power Save Mode
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Set the Idle State (Sleep)
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Display.
2. Tap on Sleep and select one of the following options from the list field:
Configuring the Power Save Mode
The waiting time specifies after which interval the power save mode is switched on in the idle
state (sleep).
You can configure the power save mode as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the Power Save Mode
1. Open the Settings > Device > Display screen.
2. Under Power save mode behaviour select one of the following options:
Not automatically: No idle state (sleep).
15 seconds to 30 minutes: Switches on the idle state (sleep) after the
selected time.
Not automatically: No idle state (sleep).
15 seconds to 30 minutes: Switches on the idle state (sleep) after the
selected time.
never: No power save mode.
without timeout: Switches on the power save mode together with the idle
state (sleep), without delay.
after 5 minutes to after two hours: Switches on the power save mode after
the set time.
568 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Display and LEDs
Switching Configuration-Dependent Idle State (Sleep) On/Off
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the Power Save Mode
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Display > More.
2. Tap on Power save mode behaviour and select one of the following options from the
list field:
Switching Configuration-Dependent Idle State (Sleep) On/Off
If the configuration-dependent idle state (sleep) is enabled, the telephone goes into its idle state
when you switch to a specific PBX configuration (for example, night configuration).
Note: If the power save mode is enabled, it will be activated together with the
idle state (sleep) ( Apps > Settings > Device > Display > More
> Power save mode behaviour).
You can switch the configuration-dependent idle state (sleep) on and off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the Configuration-Dependent Idle State
(Sleep)
Requirements:
– Operation on Auerswald PBX
– At least two configurations have been set up in the PBX
1. Open the Settings > Device > Display screen.
never: No power save mode.
without timeout: Switches on the power save mode together with the idle
state (sleep), without delay.
after 5 minutes to after two hours: Switches on the power save mode after
the set time.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 569
Settings
Display and LEDs
Enabling/Disabling Automated Switching Off of the Display in Power Save Mode
2. Under Configuration-dependent power save, enter the identification number of the
required configuration in the Configuration ID entry field.
Note: To switch off the configuration-dependent idle state (sleep), delete the
configuration ID in the Configuration-ID entry field.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the Configuration-Dependent Idle State (Sleep)
Requirements:
– Operation on Auerswald PBX
– At least two configurations have been set up in the PBX
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Display > More.
2. Under Configuration-dependent power save, tap on Configuration ID and then
input the ID number of the required configuration in the entry field.
3. Tap on OK.
Note: To switch off the configuration-dependent idle state (sleep), delete the
configuration ID in the Configuration ID entry field and then tap on OK.
Enabling/Disabling Automated Switching Off of the Display in Power Save Mode
If the power save mode of the telephone is switched on, the display automatically switches
completely off after a certain time.
You can configure the display in power save mode as follows:
Using the telephone
Using the configuration manager
570 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Display and LEDs
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Idle State (Sleep)
Using the Configuration to Switch On/Off Automated Switching Off of the Display in
Power Save Mode
Requirements:
– Idle state (sleep) and power save mode must be set
1. Open the Settings > Device > Display screen.
2. Under Brightness select or clear the Display off check box.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch On/Off Automated Switching Off of the Display in Power
Save Mode
Requirements:
– Idle state (sleep) and power save mode must be set
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Display > More.
2. Select or clear the Display off check box.
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Idle State (Sleep)
If you press the key you switch the idle state (sleep) on immediately.
Notes:
If the power save mode is enabled, it will be switched on together with the
idle state (sleep) ( Apps > Settings > Device > Display > More
> Power save mode behaviour).
As the function key LEDs are switched off in power save mode, you cannot
use them to tell you which status the functions currently have.
Switches the display off completely in power save mode.
Dims the display in power save mode.
Switches the display off completely in power save mode.
Dims the display in the power save mode.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 571
Settings
Display and LEDs
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Idle State (Sleep)
You can configure a function key as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Note: The function can only be assigned to a programmable function key that
has an LED (not on a touch function key).
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for the Idle State (Sleep)
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key you would like to assign a function to, select
the Sleep function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
572 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Display and LEDs
Configuring and Operating a Function Key for the Idle State (Sleep)
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for the Idle State (Sleep) Power Save
Mode and Screen Lock
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap on Sleep.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. Tap on Assign.
7. Tap on Exit.
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 573
Settings
Display and LEDs
Switching Off the Idle State (Sleep)
Switching Off the Idle State (Sleep)
Notes:
The idle state (sleep) is switched off automatically if, for example, an
incoming call is signalled, or if the alarm rings. If the screen lock is set, the
idle state is enabled again immediately after the event.
Simply press a key to switch off the idle state.
You can switch off the idle state as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– Screen lock: Password
1. Press any key on the telephone (apart from the function keys).
The idle state (sleed) without screen lock is disabled. (No further action is required.)
If the idle state (sleep) with screen lock is enabled, a dialogue opens so you can enter
the password.
2. Only with screen lock: Enter the screen lock password and tap on OK.
The idle state (sleep) is disabled.
Configuring Screen Candy
You can configure the screen candy whilst the telephone is in power save mode (idle state,
sleep).
You can configure screen candy as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Display > Screen Candy.
2. Depending on what type of screen candy you select, you may need to make
additional settings:
Tap on Clock to display a clock in the display. To make additional settings for the
clock, tap on .
574 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Display and LEDs
Setting the Font Size
Tap on Colours to display animated colours on the display.
Setting the Font Size
You can set the font size of the display.
Do so as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Display.
2. Tap on Font size and select the required font size from the list field.
Configuring the Display Profile
You can configure the display profile to customise the viewing angle of the display to make it
easier to read if the device is being used on a table or mounted on a wall.
You can configure the display profile as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Display > More.
2. Tap on Display profile and select the display profile you want from the list field.
Setting the Message Key LED
T message key LED shows the status of the lists you can access by pressing this key.
If you find the LED signals disruptive or annoying, they can be switched off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 575
Settings
Display and LEDs
Setting the Message Key LED
You can configure the LED for the message key as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the LED for the Message Key
1. Open the Settings > Device > Display screen.
2. Under Message LED, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the LED for the Message Key
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Display > More.
2. Under LED settings, tap on Message LED and select one of the following options
from the list field:
LED signalling on the key:
red No new entries are present. All the entries in the list have been viewed, but
have not yet been deleted.
red (blinking) The list contains new entries that have not yet been viewed.
off LED is switched off.
Flashing and always on: Indicates new (red (blinking) entries, or entries that
have already been viewed (lit in red).
Flashing only: Indicates new entries (red (blinking).
Off: LED is always switched off.
Flashing and always on: Indicates new (red (blinking) entries, or entries that
have already been viewed (lit in red).
Flashing only: Indicates new entries (red (blinking).
Off: LED is always switched off.
576 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Display and LEDs
Configuring the Display LED (only COMfortel 1400 IP and COMfortel 3600 IP)
Configuring the Display LED (only COMfortel 1400 IP and COMfortel 3600 IP)
The display LED signal is used to shows the telephone's operational state, missed calls and
new messages.
If you find the LED signals disruptive or annoying, they can be switched off. A number of
different settings are available here:
You can configure the display LED as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the Display LED
1. Open the Settings > Device > Display screen.
2. Under Display LED, select one of the following options:
LED signalling for the following setting: Display calls, conversations and new
messages
red The telephone is engaged.
red (blinking) You have new messages.
red (flashing +
alternating pauses)
The telephone is being called.
off The telephone is neither engaged nor being called, and no new
messages are present.
LED signalling for the following setting: Display calls and conversations
red The telephone is engaged.
red (flashing +
alternating pauses)
The telephone is being called.
off The telephone is neither engaged nor being called.
LED signalling for the following setting: LED always off
off LED is switched off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 577
Settings
Display and LEDs
Setting the Sensitivity of the Proximity Sensors (only COMfortel 3600 IP)
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the Display LED
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Display > More.
2. Under LED settings, tap on Display LED and select one of the following options from
the list field:
Setting the Sensitivity of the Proximity Sensors (only COMfortel 3600 IP)
The proximity sensors detect for example user proximity or a motion in front of the telephone.
You can configure the sensitivity of the proximity sensors as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Display > More > Proximity sensor.
2. Tap on the slider and set the required sensitivity.
You can tell which proximity range you are currently located in by the colour of the two
stars.
Both stars grey: You are currently outside the proximity range.
Show alerting and calls: Indicates the status of the call.
Show alerting, calls and headset activation: Indicates the status of the call
and the headset activation (only COMfortel 3600 IP).
Show alerting, calls and new messages: Indicates the status of the call and
also new messages.
Off: LED is always switched off.
Show alerting and calls: Indicates the status of the call.
Show alerting, calls and headset activation: Indicates the status of the call
and the headset activation (only COMfortel 3600 IP).
Show alerting, calls and new messages: Indicates the status of the call and
also new messages.
Off: LED is always switched off.
578 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Display and LEDs
Configuring the Display
Only one star orange: You are currently at the extreme limit of the proximity range.
Both stars orange: You are within the proximity range.
3. Tap on OK.
Configuring the Display
If the telephone display does not react as you expect when you touch it, you must configure it.
You can configure the display as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Display > More > Touch calibration.
A cross appears in the top left-hand part of the screen.
2. Tap on the middle of the cross.
A cross appears in the lower right-hand part of the screen.
3. Tap on the middle of the cross.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 579
Settings
Apps
Managing Apps
Apps
You can manage applications and display details about the applications installed on your
telephone and its active services, for example, memory use and the corresponding application
modules. You can also stop faulty apps.
Managing Apps
You can view and manage the apps that are installed on your telephone.
You can manage apps as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Press the Menu key.
2. Tap on Manage applications.
This opens the App administration.
3. Make the settings you need (see Settings> Apps> Managing memory use).
Managing Running Services
You can view and manage the active or buffered services.
You can manage running services as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Press the Menu key.
2. Tap on Manage applications.
This opens the App administration.
3. Make the settings you need (see Settings> Apps> Managing memory use).
580 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Apps
Managing Memory Use
Managing Memory Use
You can view and manage how much "storage" (memory) is being used by applications and
active services, for example, you can display detailed information about particular applications,
delete applications that are no longer required or move applications that have been installed
retrospectively from the telephone's internal memory to an SD card.
Note: The telephone's operating system automatically manages the amount
of memory being used by apps and services. We recommend that these
options are only set for advanced users.
You can manage memory (storage) use as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Press the Menu key.
2. Tap on Manage applications.
This opens the App administration. It has four tabs with lists of apps, services, and
their associated components. In addition, you can see how much memory is being
used by each particular app and services at the bottom of each tab.
3. Tap on the required tab:
Downloaded: Displays all the applications installed on the telephone (internal
memory).
On SD card: Displays all the apps installed on the SD card.
Active: Displays all the active or buffered services currently running in the
telephone's RAM.
•All: Displays all the apps installed on the telephone (internal memory).
4. Only with Apps: Tap on the name of the app. Depending on the app, you can make
different settings which will stop or delete it:
Force stop: Stops an app that is currently running.
•Deinstall: Removes an app that was installed at a later date from the telephone.
•Clear data: Deletes the data used by a particular application, e.g. configuration
settings or data records.
Move to SD card: Moves an app that was installed at a later date from the
telephone's internal memory to the SD card.
Clear cache: Deletes the data stored by an app from the telephone's RAM.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 581
Settings
Apps
Managing Memory Use
Clear defaults: Returns an application to its default settings, for example, links a
particular file type with the application.
Note: You can view more detailed information about an app under Memory,
Cache, Launch by default and Permissions.
5. Only for services: Tap on the name of the service. Depending on the service, you can
make different settings which will stop the service or send a report.
Settings: Opens the settings for a service.
•Exit: Ends an active service.
Report: Sends a report to a developer about a faulty app.
Note: You can view more detailed information about a service underSer-
vices and Processes.
582 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Emergency Numbers
Configuring Emergency Call Numbers
Emergency Numbers
You can still make emergency calls, even if you have enabled the screen lock (by dialling the
emergency call numbers saved in the telephone/PBX).
Configuring Emergency Call Numbers
You can store up to 10 additional emergency call numbers on your telephone, in addition to the
emergency call numbers entered in the PBX.
Note: The emergency call numbers you set up in the telephone are not
synchronised with the PBX's telephone book.
You can configure emergency numbers as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > Emergency numbers.
2. Tap on the name of an emergency call number.
A dialogue with the entries for the emergency call numbers is displayed.
3. Tap on Emergency call number and enter the telephone number in the entry field.
Possible entries:
Important: Enter telephone numbers exactly as when dialling, for example,
always enter external telephone numbers with a leading exchange line
access number. In the factory settings, the PBX's exchange line access
number is "0", but it can be changed in some PBXs (refer to the instructions
for the PBX).
4. Tap on OK.
5. Tap on Emergency call number name and enter the name of the telephone number
in the entry field. Possible entries:
Up to 40 digits
Numbers and the characters * and #
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 583
Settings
Emergency Numbers
Configuring Emergency Call Numbers
6. Tap on OK.
7. Tap on Account to use and select an account to which the emergency number is to
be assigned (default Undefined).
Note: When selecting a telephone number, any account assigned to that
number will only be used if you dial a telephone number using the Contacts
app.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
584 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Location
Configuring the Location
Location
Some apps and web pages need the location of the telephone (GPS co-ordinates) to enable
them to execute location-related functions.
To use these functions, even without a GPS receiver, you can set the location in the telephone
and allow the access to the location data.
Configuring the Location
You can configure the location as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Telephone to Configure the Location
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > My Location.
2. To allow apps access to the location data, enable the Access to my location switch.
3. Tap on Latitude and enter the GPS co-ordinates in the entry field. Possible entries:
Note: You can find out your exact location from the relevant Internet sites or
with a GPS receiver or smart phone.
4. Tap on OK.
5. Tap on Longitude and enter the GPS coordinates in the relevant entry field. Possible
entries:
6. Tap on OK.
7. Tap on Altitude and enter the altitude in the relevant entry field. Possible entries:
8. Tap on OK.
GPS coordinates in decimal places (example: 52.271598)
GPS coordinates in decimal places (example: 10.685660)
Height above ground in m (example: 142)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 585
Settings
Location
Configuring the Location
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the Location
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > My location screen.
2. Enter the GPS coordinates in the Latitude and Longitude entry fields. Possible
entries:
Note: You can find out your exact location from the relevant Internet sites or
with a GPS receiver or smart phone.
3. Enter the altitude in the Altitude entry field. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
GPS coordinates in decimal places (example: 52.271598)
Height above ground in m (example: 142)
586 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
IP Camera
Configuring an IP Camera
IP Camera
The telephone supports the connection of IP cameras, for example for monitoring and
controlling door stations.
Note: A fee is charged for activating the IP camera at the Auerswald Upgrade
Center (see Service and Maintenance > Extending the Telephone section).
You can display an IP camera as follows:
In the IP camera app
Automatically in the telephony app, as soon as you receive a call from a contact linked with
the IP camera or call the contact yourself
By sending DTMF signals you can open a door and switch on the accompanying stairwell light
(connection between the IP camera and a door station in the telephone book).
Configuring an IP Camera
To configure an IP camera, you must make the following settings:
Name
IP address
Username
Password
If necessary, you can also make additional setting, such as, picture scaling or the image
frequency.
Important: The telephone only supports IP cameras which send single
images in *.jpg file format directly via a static IP address/URL. It does not
support IP cameras that are embedded in web pages, dynamic IP addresses/
URLs (e.g. via JavaScript) and streaming formats.
You can configure an IP camera as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 587
Settings
IP Camera
Deleting an IP Camera
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure an IP Camera
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > IP camera screen.
2. Click on New.
The IP camera configuration screen opens.
Further steps:
– Make further settings on the configuration screen.
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure an IP Camera
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > IP camera.
2. Tap on Configure IP Camera.
A dialogue with the settings for an IP camera is displayed.
Further steps:
– Make further settings.
Deleting an IP Camera
You can delete IP cameras that are no longer required.
Important: You can only restore deleted IP cameras if you have backed up
their data to the SD card in the telephone.
You can delete IP cameras as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Delete an IP Camera
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > IP camera screen.
588 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
IP Camera
Entering an IP Camera Name
2. Click on the name of the IP camera you would like to delete.
3. Click on Delete.
The selected IP camera is deleted.
Using the Telephone to Delete an IP Camera
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > IP camera.
2. Tap and hold the name of the IP camera.
3. Tap on Delete IP camera.
Entering an IP Camera Name
You can enter a name for the IP camera as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Enter a Name for the IP Camera
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > IP camera screen.
2. In the line containing the required IP camera, click Configure.
3. Enter the name of the IP camera in the Name entry field. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Enter a Name for the IP Camera
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > IP camera.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 589
Settings
IP Camera
Configuring the IP Address of an IP Camera
2. Tap on the name of the IP camera.
3. Tap on Name and enter the name of the IP camera in the entry field. Possible entries:
4. Tap on OK.
Configuring the IP Address of an IP Camera
The IP camera's IP address is used to identify it on the network.
You can configure this IP address as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the IP Address of an IP Camera
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > IP camera screen.
2. In the line containing the required IP camera, click Configure.
3. Enter the IP address/URL of the IP camera in the IP/URL entry field. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the IP Address of an IP Camera
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > IP camera.
2. Tap on the name of the IP camera.
3. Tap on IP camera IP/URL and enter the IP address/URL of the IP camera in the entry
field. Possible entries:
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 192.168.0.240)
URL (example: ipcamera.uk)
590 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
IP Camera
Switching Full Screen Mode On/Off
4. Tap on OK.
Switching Full Screen Mode On/Off
If full screen mode is switched on, the IP camera's picture is displayed in full screen mode in
the telephony app for both incoming and outgoing calls.
If the full screen mode is switched off, the IP camera's picture is displayed, but greatly reduced.
Note: In the telephony app you tap to switch on full screen mode for
the duration of the call or tap on to switch off full screen mode.
You can switch full screen mode on and off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch Full Screen Mode On and Off
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > IP camera screen.
2. In the line containing the required IP camera, click Configure.
3. Select or clear the Fullscreen check box.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch Full Screen Mode On and Off
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > IP camera.
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 192.168.0.240)
URL (example: ipcamera.uk)
Switches on full screen mode.
Switches off full screen mode.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 591
Settings
IP Camera
Configuring Picture Scaling
2. Tap on the name of the IP camera.
3. Select or clear the Fullscreen check box.
Configuring Picture Scaling
You can configure picture scaling for the IP camera to enlarge or reduce the image that is
displayed.
You can configure picture scaling as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure Picture Scaling
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > IP camera screen.
2. In the line containing the required IP camera, click Configure.
3. Enter the picture scaling you want to use in the Picture scaling in % entry field.
Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure Picture Scaling
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > IP camera.
2. Tap on the name of the IP camera.
3. Tap on Image scale in % and then enter the required picture scaling in the entry field.
Possible entries:
Switches on full screen mode.
Switches off full screen mode.
10 (reduced) to 400 (greatly enlarged)
10 (reduced) to 400 (greatly enlarged)
592 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
IP Camera
Switching Picture Centring On/Off
4. Tap on OK.
Switching Picture Centring On/Off
If picture centring is switched on, the screen window is centred.
If picture centring is switched off, the screen window is displayed starting from the upper left-
hand corner of the camera picture.
You can switch picture centring on and off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch the Picture Centring Function On/Off
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > IP camera screen.
2. In the line containing the required IP camera, click Configure.
3. Select or clear the Picture centring check box.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch the Picture Centring Function On/Off
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > IP camera.
2. Tap on the name of the IP camera.
3. Select or clear the Picture centring check box.
Switches picture centring on.
Switches picture centring off.
Switches picture centring on.
Switches picture centring off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 593
Settings
IP Camera
Configuring the Image Frequency
Configuring the Image Frequency
You can configure the image frequency. The image frequency defines the number of the
pictures per second/minute that can be sent by the IP camera to the telephone.
You can configure the image frequency as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the Image Frequency
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > IP camera screen.
2. In the line containing the required IP camera, click Configure.
3. In the Image frequency list field, select the image frequency you want to use.
Notes:
If the only one image image frequency is selected, only one picture is sent
and the display is not updated.
The value of the images actually transferred depends on which type of IP
camera is used.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the Image Frequency
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > IP camera.
2. Tap on the name of the IP camera.
3. Tap on Image frequency and select the required image frequency from the list field.
Notes:
If the only one image image frequency is selected, only one picture is sent
and the display is not updated.
594 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
IP Camera
Entering a User Name for the IP Camera
The value of the images actually transferred depends on which type of IP
camera is used.
4. Tap on OK.
Entering a User Name for the IP Camera
You can enter a user name for the IP camera as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Enter a User Name for the IP Camera
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > IP camera screen.
2. In the line containing the required IP camera, click Configure.
3. Enter the username in the Username entry field. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Enter a User Name for the IP Camera
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > IP camera.
2. Tap on the name of the IP camera.
3. Tap on Username and enter the username in the entry field. Possible entries:
4. Tap on OK.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 595
Settings
IP Camera
Entering a Password for the IP Camera
Entering a Password for the IP Camera
You can enter a password for the IP camera as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Enter a Password
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > IP camera screen.
2. In the line containing the required IP camera, click Configure.
3. Enter the password in the Password entry field. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Enter a Password
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > IP camera.
2. Tap on the name of the IP camera.
3. Tap on Password and then enter the password in the entry field. Possible entries:
4. Tap on OK.
Switching Increased Security On/Off
If increased security is enabled, the picture from the IP camera is only displayed in the
telephony app when an incoming call is received.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
596 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
IP Camera
Configuring the IP Camera Control
If increased security is disabled, the picture from the IP camera is displayed in the telephony
app and on the IP camera app.
You can switch increased security on and off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch Increased Security On/Off
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > IP camera screen.
2. In the line containing the required IP camera, click Configure.
3. Select or clear the Increased security check box.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch Increased Security On/Off
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > IP camera.
2. Tap on the name of the IP camera.
3. Under Access data, select or clear the Increased security check box.
Configuring the IP Camera Control
You can use the telephone's directional pad to control tiltable and zoomable PTZ (pan-tilt-
zoom) cameras.
Switches increased security on.
Switches increased security off.
Switches increased security on.
Switches increased security off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 597
Settings
IP Camera
Configuring the IP Camera Control
Note: You must make a number of camera-specific settings before you can
use your telephone to control the IP (see PTZ interface documentation for the
IP camera).
You can configure IP camera control as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure IP Camera Control
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > IP camera screen.
2. In the line containing the required IP camera, click Configure.
3. Enter the required settings in the entry fields under IP camera control:
Further steps:
Left: If the user presses the directional pad on the left, the IP camera moves to
the left.
Example: http://root:pass@192.168.0.240/cam-cgi/com/ptz.cgi?move=left
Right: If the user presses the directional pad on the right, the IP camera moves
to the right.
Example: http://root:pass@192.168.0.240/cam-cgi/com/ptz.cgi?move=right
Up: If the user presses the top of the directional pad, the IP camera moves up.
Example: http://root:pass@192.168.0.240/cam-cgi/com/ptz.cgi?move=up
Down: If the user presses the bottom of the directional pad, the IP camera
moves down.
Example: http://root:pass@192.168.0.240/cam-cgi/com/ptz.cgi?move=down
Zoom in: Enlarges the screen window when you press the plus key (zoom in).
Example: http://root:pass@192.168.0.240/cam-cgi/com/ptz.cgi?zoom=9999
Zoom out: Reduces the screen window when you press the minus key (zoom
out).
Example: http://root:pass@192.168.0.240/cam-cgi/com/ptz.cgi?zoom=1
OK key: If the user presses the OK key on the directional pad, the IP camera
moves to a preset position.
Example: http://root:pass@192.168.0.240/cam-cgi/com/ptz.cgi?gotoserverpre-
setno=1
598 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
IP Camera
Configuring the IP Camera Control
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure IP Camera Control
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > IP camera.
2. Tap on the name of the IP camera.
3. Tap on IP camera control.
4. Tap on one of the following setting options and input the settings you want in the entry
field:
5. Tap on OK.
Left: If the user presses the directional pad on the left, the IP camera moves to
the left.
Example: http://root:pass@192.168.0.240/cam-cgi/com/ptz.cgi?move=left
Right: If the user presses the directional pad on the right, the IP camera moves
to the right.
Example: http://root:pass@192.168.0.240/cam-cgi/com/ptz.cgi?move=right
Up: If the user presses the top of the directional pad, the IP camera moves up.
Example: http://root:pass@192.168.0.240/cam-cgi/com/ptz.cgi?move=up
Down: If the user presses the bottom of the directional pad, the IP camera
moves down.
Example: http://root:pass@192.168.0.240/cam-cgi/com/ptz.cgi?move=down
Zoom in: Enlarges the screen window when you press the plus key (zoom in).
Example: http://root:pass@192.168.0.240/cam-cgi/com/ptz.cgi?zoom=9999
Zoom out: Reduces the screen window when you press the minus key (zoom
out).
Example: http://root:pass@192.168.0.240/cam-cgi/com/ptz.cgi?zoom=1
OK key: If the user presses the OK key on the directional pad, the IP camera
moves to a preset position.
Example: http://root:pass@192.168.0.240/cam-cgi/com/ptz.cgi?gotoserverpre-
setno=1
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 599
Settings
IP Camera
Configuring Motion Detection and Switching It On/Off
Configuring Motion Detection and Switching It On/Off
If you have an IP camera which supports motion detection, it can be used to switch on the IP
camera app automatically.
Note: You must make camera-specific settings to enable motion detection on
the camera (see instructions for the IP camera).
You can configure motion detection as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure Motion Detection and Switch IT On/Off
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > IP camera screen.
2. In the line containing the required IP camera, click Configure.
3. Select or clear the Motion Detection check box under IP camera Motion Detection.
4. In the TCP port (for all IP cameras) entry field, enter the associated port number.
Possible entries:
5. In the TCP message entry field, enter the TCP message set for the IP camera (TCP
trigger). Possible entries:
6. In the Attention tone list field, select the required attention tone.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure Motion Detection and Switch IT On/Off
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > IP camera.
Switches motion detection on.
Switches motion detection off. (No further action is required.)
1 to 65535
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
600 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
IP Camera
Configuring a Link Between an IP Camera and a Contact
2. Tap on the name of the IP camera.
3. Tap on Motion Detection.
4. Select or clear the Motion Detection check box.
5. Tap on TCP port (for all IP cameras and enter the associated port number in the
entry field. Possible entries:
6. Tap on TCP message and enter the TCP message (TCP trigger) specified for the IP
camera in the entry field. Possible entries:
7. Tap on Attention tone and the attention tone you want to use from the list field.
8. Tap on OK.
Configuring a Link Between an IP Camera and a Contact
If the link from the IP camera to a contact is active, the IP camera is automatically displayed in
the telephony app as soon as you receive a call from the contact or call the contact yourself.
By sending DTMF signals you can open a door and switch on the accompanying stairwell light
(connection between the IP camera and a door station in the telephone book).
You can configure a link between an IP camera and a contact as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Press the Contact/Telephone book key.
2. Scroll to the required contact or enter the first letter of their name using the keypad.
3. Tap on the name of the contact.
4. Press the Menu key.
5. Tap on Options.
Switches motion detection on.
Switches motion detection off. (No further action is required.)
1 to 65535
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 601
Settings
IP Camera
Configuring the Function Key for an IP Camera
6. Tap on IP camera.
7. In the IP camera list field, select the required IP camera.
8. Only for a link to a door station: Tap on DTMF signal door and enter the DTMF signal
for opening the door in the entry field. Possible entries:
9. Tap on OK.
10. Only for a link to a door station: Tap on DTMF signal light and enter the DTMF signal
for turning on the stairwell light in the entry field. Possible entries:
11. Tap on OK.
Note: When you receive a door call, tap on to open the door and tap
on to switch on the stairwell light.
Configuring the Function Key for an IP Camera
Press the key to start an app to display the IP camera.
In addition, when functions are assigned on the first key level, the status of the function is
indicated by the corresponding LED.
You can configure a function key for an IP camera as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Function Key for an IP Camera
1. Open the Apps > Function keys screen.
Numbers and the characters * and #
Numbers and the characters * and #
LED signalling on the key:
green The IP camera app is switched on.
off The IP camera app is switched off.
602 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
IP Camera
Configuring the Function Key for an IP Camera
2. Only COMfortel 2600/3600 IP: In the Key selection list field, select the key group
whose keys you would like to define.
Note: Keys 16 to 105 are not available until you connect COMfortel
Xtension300 key extension modules (not included in the scope of delivery) to
the telephone.
3. Click one of the following tabs:
4. In the list field next to the function key that you would like to define, select the IP
Camera function.
Note: To change the settings for a function key that already has a function
assigned to it, click on that key.
The current settings for the key assignment are shown in the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the IP camera list field, select the required IP camera.
7. In the Permission level list field, select one of the following options:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
User: The function key can be changed by users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function key can only be changed by sub-adminis-
trators and administrators.
Administrator: The function key can only be changed by administrators.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 603
Settings
IP Camera
Configuring the Function Key for an IP Camera
Using the Telephone to Configure a Function Key for an IP Camera
1. Tap on Apps > Function keys.
2. Press the function key you want to define.
Note: The LEDs of the function keys that are already filled on one level light
up yellow. If a function key is assigned on both levels, the LED is red.
3. Select one of the following options:
The list of available functions is displayed.
4. Tap on IP camera.
The current settings for assigning the key are shown on the display.
5. In the Description entry field, enter a description for the key. Possible entries:
Note: The key description is used for printing the label and in the display.
6. In the IP camera list field, select the required IP camera.
7. Tap on Assign.
8. Tap on Exit.
Level 1: Keys are assigned on the first key level.
Level 2: Keys are assigned on the second key level.
Up to 64 digits
Numbers and characters
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 605
Settings
Permissions
Configuring Permissions for Functions
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure Permissions for Settings
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More... > Permissions for
settings.
2. Tap on the setting to be locked.
3. Select one of the following options from the list field:
Configuring Permissions for Functions
The functions that can be selected under Apps > Settings can be locked against
unauthorised access. You need to be logged in as administrator to see these locked functions
in the list. Open the list, press the Menu key and tap on Change permission level.
You can configure permissions as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure Permissions for Functions
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Permissions > Permissions for functions.
None: No lock, the setting is available to users, sub-administrators and admin-
istrators.
Sub-administrator: The setting is available to sub-administrators and admin-
istrators.
Administrator: The setting is only available to administrators.
None: No lock, the setting is available to users, sub-administrators and admin-
istrators.
Sub-administrator: The setting is available to sub-administrators and admin-
istrators.
Administrator: The setting is only available to administrators.
606 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Permissions
Configuring Permissions for Functions
2. Select on of the following options for the function to be locked:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure Permissions for Functions
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More... > Permissions for
functions.
2. Tap on the function to be locked.
3. Select one of the following options from the list field:
None: No lock, the function is available to users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function is available to sub-administrators and admin-
istrators.
Administrator: The function is only available to administrators.
None: No lock, the function is available to users, sub-administrators and
administrators.
Sub-administrator: The function is available to sub-administrators and admin-
istrators.
Administrator: The function is only available to administrators.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 607
Settings
Security
Configuring Call Logging and Switching It On/Off
Security
The security settings enable you to manage configure call logging and set up the screen lock.
You can also use them to make a variety of settings for managing the device and the credential
storage. In addition, you can permit the installation of apps of unknown origin on your
telephone.
Configuring Call Logging and Switching It On/Off
Call logging can be enabled and disabled separately for incoming and outgoing calls.
If call logging is enabled, the calls are saved in the call log. If call logging is disabled, the calls
are not saved in the call log.
You can also specify which incoming calls are saved in the call log:
Unknown calls
External calls
Internal calls
Alarm calls
Door calls
Other calls
You can configure the call logging function and enable/disable it as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure Call Logging and Switch It On/Off
1. Open the Settings > Personal > Privacy & Security > Call logging screen.
2. Select or clear the Log outgoing calls check box.
3. Select or clear the Log incoming calls check box.
Switches call logging for outgoing calls on.
Switches call logging for outgoing calls off.
Switches call logging for incoming calls on.
Switches call logging for incoming calls off.
608 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Security
Screen Lock
If you have switched on call logging for incoming calls, you can specify which calls are
saved in the call log.
4. Select or clear the check box for the required call type.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure Call Logging and Switch It On/Off
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > Call log.
2. Under Outgoing call log, select or clear the Log outgoing calls check box.
3. Under Incoming call log, select or clear the Log incoming calls check box.
If you have switched on call logging for incoming calls, you can specify which calls are
saved in the call log.
4. Under Incoming call log by call type, select or clear the check box for the required
call type.
Screen Lock
You can use the screen lock to protect the telephone against unauthorised use.
Notes:
If the screen lock has been enabled, it is switched on together with the idle
state (sleep) ( Apps > Settings > Device > Display).
Switches call logging on for the call type.
Switches call logging off for the call type.
Switches call logging for outgoing calls on.
Switches call logging for outgoing calls off.
Switches call logging for incoming calls on.
Switches call logging for incoming calls off.
Switches call logging on for the call type.
Switches call logging off for the call type.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 609
Settings
Security
Entering a Password/PIN for the Screen Lock
After the screen lock has been switched on, you can still receive incoming
calls and initiate emergency calls (only manual dialling of entered
emergency numbers).
Entering a Password/PIN for the Screen Lock
You can enter a password/PIN as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Personal > Security > Screen lock.
2. If a password/PIN has already been entered for the screen lock: Enter the password/
PIN and press the OK key.
3. Select the password/PIN:
Enter a PIN: Tap on Screen lock with own PIN.
Enter a PIN. Possible entries:
Tap on OK.
Enter the PIN again and tap on OK.
Enter a password: Tap on Screen lock with own password.
Enter a password. Possible entries:
Tap on OK.
Enter the password again and tap on OK.
Take over the password (only for system telephones): Tap on Screen lock with
PBX user password.
4 - 16 digits
Numbers
4 - 16 digits
Numbers and characters
At least one character
610 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Security
Configuring the Automatic Screen Lock
Configuring the Automatic Screen Lock
The set time specifies after which interval the screen lock is switched on when the telephone
is in its idle state (sleep).
You can configure the automatic screen lock as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Personal > Security > Automatic scr.
2. In the Automatic screen lock, select one of the following options:
Disabling the Screen Lock
You can disable the screen lock as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Personal > Security > Screen lock.
2. Enter the password/PIN and tap OK.
3. Tap on Slide.
Making Passwords Visible
You can make passwords visible to simplify their entry.
You can make passwords visible as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Personal > Security.
2. Under Passwords, select or clear the Make passwords visible check box.
Immediately: Immediate screen lock when switching to the idle state (sleep).
5 seconds to 10 minuten: Screen lock is switched on after the set time.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 611
Settings
Security
Device Administrators
Device Administrators
Device administrators are apps to which you have given this authorisation, e. g. e-mail and
calendar apps. Normally, the authorisation is demanded when an account is configured for the
app, i. e., when the app must configure server-specific security directives on the telephone.
When you configure an e-mail account, for example, setting the screen lock can be enforced
to prevent unauthorised persons from accessing your e-mails. For the necessary information
about device administrators contact your system administrator.
You can enable/disable the authorisation as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Personal > Security > Device administrors.
The Device administrators list opens.
2. Select or clear the check boxes next to the individual device administrators and
confirm your action in the dialogue.
Note: If authorisation is disabled, some functions of the account within the
corresponding app will normally be lost, e. g. the option to synchronise e-
mails or calendar entries. Watch the status bar for messages from the app.
The functions will only be available again after you have enabled the device
administrator.
Permitting the Installation of Apps of Unknown Origin
In the App Shop you can install apps of unknown origin, which you accessed, for example, via
the App Shop, from web pages, e-mails or other sources, on your telephone.
Makes passwords visible during entry.
Makes passwords invisible during entry.
The authorisation of the app as device administrator is enabled.
The authorisation of the app as device administrator is disabled.
612 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Security
Permitting the Installation of Apps of Unknown Origin
You can grant permission for the installation of apps of unknown origin as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Permit the Installation of Apps of Unknown Origin
1. Open the Settings > Device > Apps screen.
2. Select or clear the Allow installation of apps from unknown sources check box.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Permit the Installation of Apps of Unknown Origin
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Personal > Security.
2. Select or clear the Unknown sources check box.
Caution: Apps and files downloaded from the Internet may contain
viruses which can damage your telephone.
To protect your telephone and your personal data, we strongly
recommend you only download apps and files from trustworthy
sources.
Note: Click on Apps > Settings > Device > Apps > <app
name> to check, which of your telephone's functions and which
personal data an app can access.
Important: If you install additional apps, the telephone's functionality
may be affected, including loss of use. When the Auerswald service
team checks the telephone, it is reset to its factory settings. This
process removes any previously installed apps and data, so these
must then be reinstalled separately.
Permits the installation of apps of unknown origin.
Prevents the installation of apps of unknown origin.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 613
Settings
Security
Trusted Credentials
Trusted Credentials
You can grant apps access to the credentials storage of the telephone. Encrypted certificates
with the corresponding passwords and other credentials for network connections can be stored
in the credentials storage. For information about the necessary credentials contact your system
administrator.
You can grant access as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– Password entered for the credentials storage
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Personal > Security > Credentials storage
> Trusted credentials.
2. Select or clear the check box next to the individual credentials and confirm your action
in the dialogue.
Installing from SD Card
You can save encrypted certificates from the SD card to the telephone's credential storage.
You can save encrypted certificates as follows:
Using the telephone
Requirements:
– SD card inserted into slot
– A certificate, saved in the root directory of the SD card
Permits the installation of apps of unknown origin.
Prevents the installation of apps of unknown origin.
Apps have access to the credentials storage and can call up certificates and
credentials.
Apps do not have access to the credentials storage.
614 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Security
Deleting Credentials
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Personal > Security > Credential storage >
Install from SD card.
2. Tap on the certificate to be installed.
Note: Only certificates which are not yet saved on the telephone are
displayed.
3. Enter a name for the certificate.
4. In the Credential use list field, select a how the certificate is to be used.
5. Tap on OK.
6. If necessary, make the additional security settings specified by your system adminis-
trator, e. g. enable the screen lock if you are prompted to do so.
The certificate is saved in the telephone's credential storage and can then be used,
for example, to establish a secure network connection.
Deleting Credentials
All certificates and credentials stored in the crediantials storage and the password of the
storage can be deleted.
You can delete credentials as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Personal > Security > Credentials storage
> Clear credentials.
2. Tap on OK.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 615
Settings
Language and Input
Configuring the Language on the Telephone
Language and Input
You can configure the telephone to suit the particular local language by setting the language
for the display and the keyboard. You can also create your own dictionary to make it easier for
you to input text on the telephone.
You can use the keyboard settings to specify whether the Android keyboard (onscreen
keyboard) is enabled or disabled, and set the keyboards to suit the needs of the user.
Configuring the Language on the Telephone
This setting specifies which language is used in the telephone display.
You can configure the language that is used in the telephone display as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the Language on the Telephone
1. Open the Settings > Personal > Language & input screen.
2. Select the language you require from the Language list field.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the Language on the Telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Personal > Language & input > Language.
2. Select the required language.
616 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Language and Input
Setting up a Dictionary
Setting up a Dictionary
You can set up a dictionary for your telephone. All words which are included in the dictionary
are used for following functions under Apps > Settings > Personal > Language
& input:
Text correction under Android keyboard settings: If you select a word when you are
editing text, it is marked in orange in the entry field on the Android keyboard. If similar words
are found in the dictionary they are displayed under the Android keyboard entry field. If you
tap on the suggested word it is then used instead of the word selected in the text.
Show correction suggestions under Android keyboard settings: When you are
entering text using the Android keyboard, it checks whether the word you entering matches
a word in the dictionary. If similar words are found in the dictionary these appear under the
Android keyboard entry field so you can select them if you want.
Word correction under Android keyboard settings
Add words to the dictionary whilst you are entering text, or proceed as described below.
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Personal > Language & input > Personal
dictionaries > <Dictionary name>.
The words in the dictionary are listed in alphabetical order.
2. Tap on Add.
3. In the entry field, enter the required word.
4. Select the dictionary you want to use from the Language list field.
5. Tap on Add to dictionary.
The word is displayed in the dictionary.
Onscreen Keyboard Settings
The telephone includes an Android screen keyboard. You can use this keyboard to enter text.
You can customise the Android keyboard under Apps > Settings > Personal >
Language & input > Keyboard & input methods > Android keyboard (AOSP) . You can
make the following settings:
Input languages: If you have selected more than one language, press the space key on
the Android keyboard to select the language you want.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 617
Settings
Language and Input
Onscreen Keyboard Settings
Note: If no languages have been specified, the language selected for the
telephone is used ( Apps > Settings > Personal > Language &
input > Language).
Auto-capitalisation: A letter after a full stop "." is automatically written in capitals.
Sound on keypress: Tap on a key on the Android keyboard to briefly display the selected
character in a larger font size.
Pop-up with keystroke: Tap on a key on the Android keyboard to briefly display the
selected character in a larger font size.
Auto-correction (only in connection with User dictionary)
Show correction suggestions (only in connection with User dictionary)
618 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
App Accounts
Adding an Account
App Accounts
Accounts serve to store messages, contacts and other data on your telephone.
Synchronising the accounts allows you to compare data from the telephone with data from
other sources of synchronisation, e. g. PBXs or servers of providers.
You can define which accounts and data are to be synchronised, e. g.:
Telephone book of the PBX (contacts)
Calendar (Calendar Sync), contacts (Contacts Sync)
Exchange ActiveSync-, IMAP and POP3 accounts (e-mail)
Data used by apps
Notes:
Some account, for example, the telephone book of the PBX (contacts), can
only be synchronised in one direction. Synchronised contacts cannot be
edited on the telephone.
Other accounts can be synchronised in both direction. Changes to data on
the telephone will also be taken over for data at the source of synchroni-
sation.
In order to synchronise Exchange ActiveSync accounts, calendar (Calendar
Sync) and contacts (Contacts Sync) need to be unblocked in the Auerswald
Upgrade Center for a fee (see Service and Maintenance > Extending the
Telephone Functionality).
Adding an Account
You can use more than one account on your telephone. Depending on the type of the account,
you can add an account manually or with the help of the app that uses the account. You can
add an e-mail account with the e-mail app, for example.
Note: When the telephone is operated on an Auerswald PBX, accounts for
synchronisation with the PBX will be added automatically. The telephone
book of the PBX will automatically be synchronised with the contacts app.
You can add an account as follows:
Using the telephone
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 619
Settings
App Accounts
Deleting an Account
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > App account > Add account.
2. Follow the instructions on the display, depending on the type of account.
Further steps:
– Make further settings for synchronisation of the account.
Deleting an Account
You can delete an account and all its messages, contacts or other data from the telephone.
You can delete an account as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings.
2. Under App accounts, tap on the name of the account.
3. Press the Menu key.
4. Tap on Remove account.
Note: Deleting an account also deletes all its messages, contacts and other
data from the telephone.
A dialogue to confirm the deletion opens.
5. Tap on Remove account.
Switching Synchronisation of an Account on/off
If synchronisation of an account has been switched on, the account will synchronised automat-
ically, depending on the account settings.
If synchronisation of an account has been switched off, you can synchronise the account
manually, when required.
You can switch synchronisation on/off as follows:
620 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
App Accounts
Synchronising an Account Manually
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings.
2. Under App accounts, tap on the name of the account.
The current status of the account is displayed:
3. Tap on the name of the account.
Note: Depending on the account, different account elements which can be
synchronised for this account will be displayed, e. g. contacts. You can switch
synchronisation on and off separately for each account.
4. Select or clear the check box of the required account element.
Note: Switching the synchronisation off will not delete any data from the
telephone that have been synchronised until now.
5. Tap on Account settings and make further settings for synchronisation.
Synchronising an Account Manually
If synchronisation of an account is switched off, you can synchronised the account manually,
when required.
You can synchronise an account manually as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings.
2. Under App accounts, tap on the name of the account.
The current status of the account is displayed:
Account will be synchronised automatically.
Account will not be synchronised automatically.
Switches synchronisation of the account element on.
Switches synchronisation of the account element off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 621
Settings
App Accounts
Synchronising an Account Manually
3. Tap on the name of the account.
4. Press the Menu key.
5. Tap on Sync now.
Account will be synchronised automatically.
Account will not be synchronised automatically.
622 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Date and Time
Setting the Date and Time Manually
Date and Time
The telephone's status line shows the calendar week, date and time. If the telephone is in its
idle state (sleep), the date and time are also displayed on the display.
The date and time are needed to log incoming and outgoing calls and to control the telephone
functions, e. g. automatic updates.
Note: The time is converted automatically from winter time to summer time
and vice versa (GMT +1:00 or GMT +2:00) on the appropriate dates.
Setting the Date and Time Manually
If the function that automatically updates the phone time is disabled, you can set the date and
time manually.
You can set the date and time manually as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Set the Date and Time Manually
1. Open the Settings > System > Date & Time screen.
2. If necessary, clear the NTP (Network Time Protocol) check box.
The Date and Time entry fields are displayed.
3. Enter the date in the Date entry field.
4. Enter the time in the Time entry field. Possible entries:
Use 24-hour format check box selected:
Use 24-hour format check box not selected:
Time using the hh:mm format
00 to 23: Hours ("hh")
00 to 59: Minutes ("mm")
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 623
Settings
Date and Time
Setting the Date and Time Manually
5. If you have deselected the 24-hour format check box, then, in the Time list field, also
select the AM option for in the morning, or PM for in the afternoon.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Set the Date and Time Manually
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > System > Date & Time.
2. If necessary, clear the NTP (Network Time Protocol) check box.
The Date and Time settings are displayed.
3. Tap on Date and then set the date.
4. Tap on Save.
5. Tap on Time and set the time. You can make the following settings:
Use 24-hour format check box selected:
Use 24-hour format check box not selected:
6. Tap on Save.
Time using the hh:mm format
00 to 12: Hours ("hh")
00 to 59: Minutes ("mm")
Time using the hh:mm format
00 to 23: Hours ("hh")
00 to 59: Minutes ("mm")
Time using the hh:mm format
00 to 12: Hours ("hh")
00 to 59: Minutes ("mm")
AM or PM.
624 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Date and Time
Switching Automatic Update of the Phone Time over the Network On/Off
Switching Automatic Update of the Phone Time over the Network On/Off
If you have input a time server (NTP server) address and enabled the automatic time update
function, the telephone accesses the exact time from the Internet. This means you no longer
need to correct the time manually.
You can switch automatic update of the phone time over the network on or off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch Automatic Update of the Phone Time over
the Network On/Off
1. Open the Settings > System > Date & Time screen.
2. Select or clear the NTP (Network Time Protocol) check box.
3. In the NTP server entry field, enter the IP address of a time server.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch Automatic Update of the Phone Time over the Network
On/Off
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > System > Date & Time.
2. Select or clear the NTP (Network Time Protocol) check box.
The Time server (NTP server) setting is displayed.
3. Tap on Time server (NTP server) and then enter the IP address of a time server in
the entry field.
4. Tap on OK.
Switches the automatic synchronising of the phone time on.
Switches the automatic synchronising of the phone time off.
Switches the automatic synchronising of the phone time on.
Switches the automatic synchronising of the phone time off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 625
Settings
Date and Time
Configuring the Time Zone
Configuring the Time Zone
You should set the current time zone to ensure that all the data on the telephone that has a time
stamp, such a s calendar entries or e-mails, is displayed with the correct time.
Note: If you change the time zone, the time stamp used for data on the
telephone is modified to suit the new time zone.
You can configure the time zone as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Set the Time Zone
1. Open the Settings > System > Date & Time screen.
2. Select the required time zone from the Time zone list field.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Set the Time Zone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > System > Date & Time > Time zone.
2. Tap on the required time zone.
Switching 24-hour Format On/Off
Time can be displayed in two different formats:
24-hour format: Hours are represented by the digits 0 to 23.
12-hour format: Hours are represented by the digits 1 to 12. Use the AM and PM options to
identify mornings and afternoons.
When you switch 24-hour format on or off, you toggle between the two formats.
You can switch 24-hour format on/off as follows:
626 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Date and Time
Configuring the Date Format
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch 24-hour Format On/Off
1. Open the Settings > System > Date & Time screen.
2. Select or clear the Use 24-hour format check box.
3. If you have deselected the 24-hour format check box, then, in the Time list field, also
select the AM option for in the morning, or PM for in the afternoon, to specify whether
the time is to apply in the morning or in the afternoon.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch 24-hour Format On/Off
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > System > Date & Time.
2. Select or clear the Use 24-hour format check box.
If you have cleared the Use 24-hour format and NTP (Network Time Protocol)
check boxes, the PM and AM buttons are displayed under ?Time.
3. Under Time you can then specify whether the time is in the morning or in the
afternoon.
4. Tap on Save.
Configuring the Date Format
You can display the date in a number of different formats.
You can configure the date format as follows:
Switches 24-hour format on.
Switches 24-hour format off.
Switches 24-hour format on.
Switches 24-hour format off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 627
Settings
Date and Time
Configuring the Date Format
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the Date Format
1. Open the Settings > System > Date & Time screen.
2. In the Date format list field, select the date format you want to use.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the Date Format
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > System > Date & Time.
2. Tap on Date format and then select the required date format.
628 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Settings
Telephone Information
Displaying Telephone Information
Telephone Information
If required you can display detailed information about your telephone:
Legal information (Open Source licenses)
Hardware (power supply, serial number, MAC address, upgrades)
Availability (call forwarding, answering machine, voice mailbox)
Firmware version
Android version
PBX (name, firmware version, serial number)
Kernel version
Build number
Bootloader CPU board
Displaying Telephone Information
You can display telephone information as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Display Telephone Information
1. Click on Information and one of the following options:
Using the Telephone to Display Telephone Information
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > System > About the telephone.
2. Tap on the name of an item of telephone information in the selection list.
Device: Displays information about the telephone's hardware and software.
Availability: Displays information about the availability of the telephone.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 629
Service and Maintenance
Service and Maintenance
This chapter describes functions that are useful for servicing. They include functions for
deleting, saving and restoring data, either if a disruption occurs, or when the telephone or the
PBX is replaced.
Topics
Backup and Reset (page 630)
Update and Provisioning (page 634)
Storage (SD Card Memory) (page 653)
Shutting Down and Restarting the Telephone (page 655)
Extending the Telephone Functionality (page 656)
Service Data (page 662)
630 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Service and Maintenance
Backup and Reset
Creating a Backup
Backup and Reset
During a data backup, a backup file is created that contains the configuration and other data
for the telephone. If necessary, the backup file can be restored to the telephone.
Resetting the telephone to the factory settings will delete all data on the telephone.
Creating a Backup
When you create a data backup, a backup file (Backup) will be generated on the chosen
medium.
You can create a backup as follows:
Using the configuration manager (for saving on a PC)
Using the telephone (for saving on a SD card, internal memory or USB stick)
Note: The internal memory and the USB port is only available on a COMfortel
3600 IP.
Important: If you reset to factory settings, a backup on the internal memory
will be deleted.
Using the Configuration Manager to Create a Backup
1. Open the Settings > Personal > Backup & reset screen.
2. Under Create backup, click on Read (after Create a backup of your data on your
PC).
The dialogue in which you save the backup file opens.
3. Click on Save file (this text depends on which browser you are using).
4. Click on OK.
The backup file is saved in the folder configured for downloads on the PC.
Using the Telephone to Create a Backup
Requirements:
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 631
Service and Maintenance
Backup and Reset
Saving a Backup to the Telephone
– COMfortel 1400/2600 IP: SD card inserted into slot
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Personal > Backup & reset.
2. Tap on Create backup.
The Create backup dialogue opens.
3. Enter a file name or accept the suggested file name. Possible entries:
4. Tap on OK.
The backup file is saved to the SD card.
Saving a Backup to the Telephone
If required, you can restore the backup file saved on the SD card or the PC to the telephone.
You can save a backup to the telephone as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Save a Backup in the Telephone
Requirements:
– A backup file saved on the hard disk
1. Open the Settings > Personal > Backup & reset screen.
2. Under Restore backup, click on Search.
The dialogue in which you upload the backup file opens.
3. Open the folder in which the backup file has been saved, and select the backup file.
4. Under Restore backup, click Save.
5. If necessary, enter the user name and password and then tap on OK.
The data is saved in the telephone.
Numbers and characters
632 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Service and Maintenance
Backup and Reset
Resetting to Factory Settings
Using the Telephone to Save a Backup in the Telephone
Requirements:
– SD card inserted into slot
– A backup file, saved on the SD card
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Personal > Backup & reset.
2. Tap on Save backup to the telephone.
The list of data backups saved on the SD card is displayed.
3. Tap on the required backup file.
4. Tap on OK.
The data is saved in the telephone.
Resetting to Factory Settings
If you reset the telephone to factory settings you can delete any data and settings saved in it.
This includes, for example, deleting downloaded apps, personal data (e.g. contacts), function
key assignments and your customised configuration of the Home screens.
You can also delete data that is stored on the memory card, e. g music and photos.
You can reset the telephone to factory settings as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Restore Factory Settings
1. Open the Settings > Personal > Backup & reset screen.
2. Select or clear the Erase SD card check box.
3. Click Reset phone.
A dialogue box opens.
The data on the memory card is deleted.
The data on the memory card is not deleted.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 633
Service and Maintenance
Backup and Reset
Resetting to Factory Settings
4. Click Delete.
The telephone is shut down and then restarted. This can take some time.
Note: All your personal data and downloaded apps are deleted. You cannot
undo this action.
Further steps:
- Put the telephone into operation (see Setup Guide).
Using the Telephone to Reset It to Factory Settings
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Personal > Backup & reset.
2. Under Personal data, tap onFactory data reset.
A dialogue box opens.
3. Tap on Reset phone.
4. Tap on Clear all.
The telephone is shut down and then restarted. This can take some time.
Note: All your personal data and downloaded apps are deleted. You cannot
undo this action.
Further steps:
- Put the telephone into operation (see Setup Guide).
634 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Service and Maintenance
Update and Provisioning
Update and Provisioning Variants
Update and Provisioning
Update
An update involves installing a new version of the firmware to solve problems and integrate new
features. Here, the device sets up a connection with an update server, over which it receives
the latest firmware. (The settings on the device remain unchanged.) Except for the charges for
the required server connection, the update is free of charge.
Provisioning
Provisioning involves the automated configuration of the telephone from a provisioning server.
Here, the device sets up a connection with a provisioning server, over which it receives the
necessary configuration data. Following that the firmware is updated.
Note: You will find further information about the provisioning process on the
Internet (see www.auerswald.de/service under Developer.)
Update and Provisioning Variants
There are several different ways to perform an update or provisioning. These vary as follows:
Manual update
If a manual update is performed, a firmware file (*.rom) is loaded into the telephone from the
configuration manager or an SD card, enabling the new firmware to be saved to the telephone.
After you perform the update you must reboot the telephone.
Automatic update from update server
In the case of an automatic update from the update server, a regular (e.g. weekly) automatic
update can be configured. You can set the weekday and time.
Automatic provisioning
In the case of automatic provisioning from the provisioning server, regular (e.g. weekly)
automatic provisioning can be configured. You can set the weekday and time.
There are several different ways to perform an automatic provisioning. These vary as follows:
Provisioning with DHCP data
Provisioning via the redirect server
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 635
Service and Maintenance
Update and Provisioning
Triggering a Manual Update
Provisioning via a set provisioning server
Triggering a Manual Update
If no update server is available, you can trigger an update by loading a firmware file onto the
telephone from your hard disk or from an SD card.
Note: The automatic installation of updates is switched off when you perform
a manual update. You can switch the automatic installation of updates on
again under Apps > Settings > System > Update & provi-
sioning > Automatic update.
You can initiate a manual update as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Trigger a Manual Update
Requirements:
– Firmware file (*.rom) saved on the hard disk
– SD card inserted into slot (min 128 MB of free memory )
Notes:
You will find the required firmware file on the Internet (see
www.auerswald.de/service).
To get information about the firmware version that is currently saved in the
telephone, select Apps > Settings > System > About phone
or, in the configuration manager, click on the Auerswald logo with the left-
hand mouse button.
1. Open the Settings > System > Update & provisioning > Update screen.
2. Under Manual update, click Search.
A file selection dialogue opens.
636 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Service and Maintenance
Update and Provisioning
Triggering a Manual Update
3. Select the required file (*.rom) and then click Open (this text varies according to which
operating system is in use).
The file path is displayed under Manual update.
4. Click Save.
The message Please wait, firmware is being updated is displayed.
As soon as the firmware is installed in the telephone, a dialogue opens.
5. To activate the new firmware, click Reboot.
Note: To restart the telephone at a later point in time, tap on Cancel and then,
under Settings > System > Update & provisioning > Reboot, tap on
Reboot when you want to restart the telephone.
The telephone is restarted.
Further steps:
– After a firmware update you usually require a new version of the instructions. You will find up-
to-date instructions on the Internet (see www.auerswald.de).
– In order to use the new features after the telephone's firmware has been updated, you often
may need to update the PBX firmware (see PBX operation instructions).
Using the Telephone to Initiate a Manual Update
Requirements:
– SD card inserted into slot
– A firmware file (*.rom), saved in the root directory of the SD card
– SD card inserted into slot (min 128 MB of free memory )
Notes:
You will find the required firmware file on the Internet (see
www.auerswald.de/service).
To get information about the firmware version that is currently saved in the
telephone, select Apps > Settings > System > About phone
or, in the configuration manager, click on the Auerswald logo with the left-
hand mouse button.
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > System > Update & provisioning.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 637
Service and Maintenance
Update and Provisioning
Configuring the Schedule for Updates and Provisioning
2. Tap on the firmware file displayed under Update SD card.
3. Tap on Update.
As soon as the firmware is installed in the telephone, a dialogue opens.
4. To activate the new firmware, tap on Reboot.
Note: To restart the telephone at a later point in time, tap on Cancel and then,
under Apps > Settings > System > Shutdown/Reboot, tap on
Reboot when you want to restart the telephone.
The telephone is restarted.
Further steps:
– After a firmware update you usually require a new version of the instructions. You will find up-
to-date instructions on the Internet (see www.auerswald.de/service).
– In order to use the new features after the telephone's firmware has been updated, you often
may need to update the PBX firmware (see PBX operation instructions).
Configuring the Schedule for Updates and Provisioning
The schedule specifies the weekday and time at which the update and provisioning are to be
performed.
Note: To avoid overloading of the provisioning server, the automatic update
and provisioning starts within a time slot of 60 minutes after the set time.
You can configure the schedule for updates and provisioning as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure the Schedule for Updates and Provi-
sioning
1. Open the Settings > System > Update & provisioning > Update screen.
2. In the Time entry field, under Schedule, enter the required time. Possible entries:
638 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Service and Maintenance
Update and Provisioning
Switching Automatic Provisioning On/Off
3. Under Schedule, select or clear the check box for the planned weekdays.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure the Schedule for Updates and Provisioning
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > System > Update & provisioning.
2. Under Time Schedule, tap on Planned weekdays.
3. Select or clear the check box for the planned weekdays.
4. Tap on OK.
5. Under Schedule, tap on the Time entry field, and then enter the required time.
Possible entries:
6. Tap on Done.
Switching Automatic Provisioning On/Off
During automatic provisioning the configuration data is automatically loaded onto the telephone
from the provisioning server, at the set point in time. The system then checks if a new firmware
update is available on the update server. If an update is available, the new firmware is also
loaded into the telephone if the automatic installation of updates is selected.
Time using the format hh:mm
00 to 24: Hours ("hh")
00 to 59: Minutes ("mm")
Switches on automatic update and provisioning for this weekday.
Switches off automatic update and provisioning for this weekday.
Switches on automatic update and provisioning for this weekday.
Switches off automatic update and provisioning for this weekday.
Time using the format hh:mm
00 to 23: Hours ("hh")
00 to 59: Minutes ("mm")
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 639
Service and Maintenance
Update and Provisioning
Switching Automatic Provisioning On/Off
You can switch automatic provisioning of configuration data on or off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch Automatic Provisioning On/Off
Requirements:
– The PBX or telephone must be connected to a broadband Internet connection
– Address of the DNS server entered on the Settings > Network > Network screen
– The set schedule must be entered on the Settings > System > Update & provisioning >
Update screen
– The address of the provisioning server must be entered on the Settings > System > Update
& provisioning > Provisioning screen
– When automatic provisioning is performed: SD card inserted into slot (min 128 MB of free
memory )
1. Open the Settings > System > Update & Provisioning > Provisioning screen.
2. Select or clear the Automatic provisioning check box.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch Automatic provisioning On/Off
Requirements:
– The PBX or telephone must be connected to a broadband Internet connection
– The address of the DNS server must be entered in Apps > Settings > Network >
Network
– The set schedule must be entered under Apps > Settings > System > Update
& provisioning
– The address of the provisioning server must be entered under Apps > Settings >
System > Update & provisioning > Automatic provisioning
– When automatic provisioning is performed: SD card inserted into slot (min 128 MB of free
memory )
Switches on automatic provisioning.
Switches off automatic provisioning.
640 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Service and Maintenance
Update and Provisioning
Switching Provisioning with DHCP Data On/Off
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > System > Update & provisioning.
2. Select or clear the Automatic provisioning check box under Automatic provi-
sioning.
Switching Provisioning with DHCP Data On/Off
If provisioning with DHCP data is switched on, the telephone will receive the IP address of the
provisioning server from a DHCP server. In addition to IP addresses, it is also possible to
transmit further data to control the provisioning process.
You can switch provisioning with DHCP data on and off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch Provisioning with DHCP Data On/Off
1. Open the Settings > System > Update & provisioning > Provisioning screen.
2. Select or clear the Provisioning with DHCP data check box.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch Provisioning with DHCP Data On/Off
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > System > Update & porovisioning.
2. Under Automatic provisioning, select or clear the Provisioning with DHCP data
check box.
Switches on automatic provisioning.
Switches off automatic provisioning.
Switches provisioning with DHCP data on.
Switches provisioning with DHCP data off.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 641
Service and Maintenance
Update and Provisioning
Switching Provisioning via Redirect Server On/Off
Switching Provisioning via Redirect Server On/Off
If provisioning via redirect server is switched on, the telephone receives the IP address of the
provisioning server from the Auerswald redirect server.
You switch provisioning via redirect server on and off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch Provisioning via Redirect Server On/Off
1. Open the Settings > System > Update & provisioning > Provisioning screem.
2. Select or clear the Redirect Server.
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch Provisioning via Redirect Server On/Off
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > System > Update & provisioning.
2. Under Automatic provisioning, select or clear the Redirect Server check box.
Switches provisioning with DHCP data on.
Switches provisioning with DHCP data off.
Switches provisioning via redirect server on.
Switches provisioning via redirect server off.
Switches provisioning via redirect server on.
Switches provisioning via redirect server off.
642 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Service and Maintenance
Update and Provisioning
Entering the Address of the Provisioning Server
Entering the Address of the Provisioning Server
If automatic provisioning of the configuration data is not carried out via DHCP data or via a
redirection server, you must enter the address of the provisioning server.
You can enter the address of the provisioning server as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Enter the Address of the Provisioning Server
1. Open the Settings > System > Update & provisioning > Provisioning screen.
2. In the Provisioning server URL entry field, under Automatic Provisioning, enter
the address of the update server. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Enter the Address of the Provisioning Server
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > System > Update & provisioning.
2. Under Automatic provisioning, tap on Provisioning server URL.
3. Enter the address of the provisioning server in the Provisioning server URL entry
field. Possible entries:
4. Tap on OK.
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 103.103.103.103)
URL (example: provisioningserver.uk)
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 103.103.103.103)
URL (example: provisioningserver.uk)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 643
Service and Maintenance
Update and Provisioning
Triggering a Provisioning Test
Triggering a Provisioning Test
If you have configured automatic provisioning, and entered the address of a provisioning
server, you can check the provisioning settings, and the way the server works, by triggering a
one-time provisioning test.
You can trigger a provisioning test as follows:
Using the telephone
Using the Telephone to Trigger a Provisioning Test
Requirements:
– The PBX or telephone must be connected to a broadband Internet connection
– The address of the DNS server must be entered in Apps > Settings > Network >
Network
– Under Apps > Settings > System > Update & provisioning > Automatic
Update, enable the Check for updates check box
– On the Apps > Settings > System > Update & provisioning > Automatic provi-
sioning, enable the Automatic provisioning check box
– The address of the provisioning server must be entered under Apps > Settings >
System > Update & provisioning > Automatic provisioning
– SD card inserted into slot (min 128 MB of free memory )
Important: As soon as you tap on Provisioning test, this may delete the
existing configuration and firmware data, which will then be replaced by new
data. The telephone is restarted.
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > System > Update & provisioning.
2. Under Automatic provisioning, tap on Provisioning test.
If the update and provisioning settings for the telephone are correct, and configuration
and firmware data is present on the servers, this data is loaded onto the telephone.
The firmware is then activated by an immediate restart of the telephone.
If the update and provisioning settings for the telephone are incorrect, or no data is
present on the servers, a message that provisioning has failed is displayed in the
status line on the telephone.
Further steps:
– After a firmware update you usually require a new version of the instructions. You will find up-
to-date instructions on the Internet (see www.auerswald.de/service).
644 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Service and Maintenance
Update and Provisioning
Entering the Address of the Update Server
– In order to use the new features after the telephone's firmware has been updated, you often
may need to update the PBX firmware (see PBX operation instructions).
Entering the Address of the Update Server
To automatically update the firmware you must enter the address of the update server. The
address of the update server is already entered in the factory settings. However, if it is not
present, or if you would like to change the address, follow the instructions below.
You can enter the address of the update server as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Enter the Address of the Update Server
1. Open the Settings > System > Update & provisioning > Update screen.
2. In the Update server URL entry field, under Automatic Update, enter the address of
the update server. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Enter the Address of the Update Server
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > System > Update & provisioning.
2. Under Automatic update, tap on Update server.
3. In the Update server entry field, enter the update server's address. Possible entries:
4. Tap on OK.
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 103.103.103.103)
URL (example: www.auerswald-update.uk)
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 103.103.103.103)
URL (example: www.auerswald-update.uk)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 645
Service and Maintenance
Update and Provisioning
Configuring Automatic Update via the Update Server
Configuring Automatic Update via the Update Server
When performing an automatic update the system checks whether a new firmware update is
available on the update server, at the set point in time. If an update is available, the new
firmware is loaded into the telephone if the automatic installation of updates is selected.
You can configure an automatic update via the update server as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Automatically Perform an Update via the Update
Server
Requirements:
– The PBX or telephone must be connected to a broadband Internet connection
– Address of the DNS server entered on the Settings > Network > Network screen
– The set schedule must be entered on the Settings > System > Update & provisioning >
Update screen
– The address of the update server must be entered on the Settings > System > Update &
provisioning > Update screen
– When the automatic update is performed: SD card inserted into slot (min 128 MB of free
memory )
1. Open the Settings > System > Update & provisioning > Update screen.
2. Select or clear the Check for updates check box.
Note: If only the Check for updates check box is selected, the system only
checks for the availability of a new firmware version and, if there is one, it
displays it. The firmware is not updated until the Automatically install
update check box is selected.
3. Select or clear the Automatically install update check box.
The availability of a new firmware version is checked. If a new firmware version is
available, it is uploaded to the telephone and the telephone is restarted.
Switches on the check for availability of a new firmware version.
Switches off the check for availability of a new firmware version.
Switches on automatic update.
Switches off automatic update.
646 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Service and Maintenance
Update and Provisioning
Configuring Automatic Update via the Update Server
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
– After a firmware update you usually require a new version of the instructions. You will find up-
to-date instructions on the Internet (see www.auerswald.de).
– In order to use the new features after the telephone's firmware has been updated, you often
may need to update the PBX firmware (see PBX operation instructions).
Using the Telephone to Automatically Perform an Update via the Update Server
Requirements:
– The PBX or telephone must be connected to a broadband Internet connection
– The address of the DNS server must be entered in Apps > Settings > Network >
Network
– The set schedule must be entered under Apps > Settings > System > Update
& provisioning
– The update server's address must be entered under Apps > Settings > System >
Update & provisioning > Automatic update
– When the automatic update is performed: SD card inserted into slot (min. 128 MB of free
memory )
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > System > Update & provisioning.
2. Select or clear the Check for updates check box under Automatic update.
Note: If only the Check for updates check box is selected, the system only
checks for the availability of a new firmware version and, if there is one, it
displays it. The firmware is not updated until the Automatically install
update check box is selected.
3. Select or clear the Automatically install update check box.
The availability of a new firmware version is checked. If a new firmware version is
available, it is uploaded to the telephone and the telephone is restarted.
Further steps:
– After a firmware update you usually require a new version of the instructions. You will find up-
to-date instructions on the Internet (see www.auerswald.de).
Switches on the check for availability of a new firmware version.
Switches off the check for availability of a new firmware version.
Switches on automatic update.
Switches off automatic update.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 647
Service and Maintenance
Update and Provisioning
Triggering an Update Test
– In order to use the new features after the telephone's firmware has been updated, you often
may need to update the PBX firmware (see PBX operation instructions).
Triggering an Update Test
If you have entered the address of an update server, you can check the update settings and
the functioning of the server by performing an update.
You can trigger an update test as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Initiate an Update Test
Requirements:
– The PBX or telephone must be connected to a broadband Internet connection
– The address of the DNS server must be entered in Settings > Network > Network
– The address of the update server must be entered in Settings > System > Update & provi-
sioning > Update
– SD card inserted into slot (min 128 MB of free memory )
1. Open the Settings > System > Update & provisioning > Update screen.
2. Click on Firmware Update.
3. Click Update.
The check for new firmware is carried out.
If no firmware file is available on the update server, a warning message is displayed
to tell you that no new firmware is available.
If the telephone's update settings are incorrect, a warning message is displayed to tell
you that the check for new firmware was unsuccessful.
If the update settings of the telephone are correct and a firmware file is available on
the update server, the new firmware is installed. The telephone is restarted, and the
login window opens.
Note: To restart the telephone at a later point in time, tap on Cancel and then,
under Settings > System > Update & provisioning > Reboot, tap on
Reboot when you want to restart the telephone.
648 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Service and Maintenance
Update and Provisioning
Triggering an Update Test
4. Log in with you username and password and tap on OK.
Further steps:
– After a firmware update you usually require a new version of the instructions. You will find up-
to-date instructions on the Internet (see www.auerswald.de/service.
– In order to use the new features after the telephone's firmware has been updated, you often
may need to update the PBX firmware (see PBX operation instructions).
Using the Telephone to Trigger an Update Test
Requirements:
– The PBX or telephone must be connected to a broadband Internet connection
– The address of the DNS server must be entered in Apps > Settings > Network >
Network
– The update server's address must be entered under Apps > Settings > System >
Update & provisioning > Automatic update
– SD card inserted into slot (min 128 MB of free memory )
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > System > Update & provisioning.
2. Under Automatic update, tap on Firmware update.
If the update settings of the telephone are correct and a firmware file is available on
the update server, a dialogue opens.
If no firmware file is present on the update server, a warning message is displayed to
tell you that no new firmware is available.
If the telephone's update settings are incorrect, a note appears in the telephone's
status line to tell you that the check for new firmware was unsuccessful.
3. Tap on Download.
As soon as the firmware is saved in the telephone, a dialogue opens.
4. Tap on Install.
As soon as the firmware is installed in the telephone, a dialogue opens.
5. To activate the new firmware, tap on Reboot.
Note: To restart the telephone at a later point in time, tap on Cancel and then,
under Apps > Settings > System > Shutdown/Reboot, tap on
Reboot when you want to restart the telephone.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 649
Service and Maintenance
Update and Provisioning
Restoring Previous Firmware
The telephone is now restarted.
Further steps:
– After a firmware update you usually require a new version of the instructions. You will find up-
to-date instructions on the Internet (see www.auerswald.de/service.
– In order to use the new features after the telephone's firmware has been updated, you often
may need to update the PBX firmware (see PBX operation instructions).
Restoring Previous Firmware
If you have carried out a firmware update, and the firmware proves to be faulty, you can restore
the previous firmware installation.
You can restore previous firmware as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the Configuration Manager to Restore Firmware
Requirements:
– Firmware file (*.rom) saved on the hard disk
– SD card inserted into slot (min 128 MB of free memory )
Notes:
You will find the required firmware file on the Internet (see
www.auerswald.de).
To get information about the firmware version that is currently saved in the
telephone, select Apps > Settings > System > About phone
or, in the configuration manager, click on the Auerswald logo with the left-
hand mouse button.
To restore the previous firmware, proceed as follows.
1. Remove the telephone from the power supply, by detaching the PoE cable.
2. Press the hook key and the query key simultaneously. Keep both keys
pressed.
3. While keeping both keys pressed, reconnect the telephone using the PoE cable.
650 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Service and Maintenance
Update and Provisioning
Configuration via SIP Messages
The LEDs on the loudspeaker and Message key begin to flash green quickly for
approximately 4 seconds.
After that the LEDs flash more slowly for approximately 4 seconds.
4. As soon as the LEDs start flashing more slowly, release the hook key and the
query key.
5. Open the configuration manager.
6. Click onSelect file.
A file selection dialogue opens.
7. Select the required file (*.rom) and then click Open (this text varies according to which
operating system is in use).
8. Click Upload.
As soon as the firmware is installed in the telephone, a new screen opens.
9. To activate the new firmware, click Reboot.
The telephone is restarted.
Configuration via SIP Messages
You can configure the telephone via incoming SIP messages. Apart from the configuration of
the telephone, other tasks, for example the configuration of programmable function keys and
touch function key, can also be carried out centrally by a system administrator.
In order to configure the telephone via SIP messages, you need to switch on configuration via
SIP messages and configure a configuration server in the whitelist for configuration via SIP
messages.
Note: You will find further information about configuration via SIP messages
on the Internet (see www.auerswald.de/service under Developer.)
Switching Configuration via SIP Messages On/Off
You can switch configuration via SIP messages on and off as follows:
Using the configuration manager
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 651
Service and Maintenance
Update and Provisioning
Configuring a Whitelist for Configuration via SIP Messages
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Switch Configuration via SIP Messages On/Off
1. Open the Settings > System > Update & provisioning > Provisioning screen.
2. Under Configuration via SIP messages, select or clear the Permit remote config-
uration via SIP messages check box.
Further steps:
– Configure a configuration server in the whitelist for configuration via SIP messages.
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Switch Configuration via SIP Messages On/Off
1. Tap Apps > Settings > System > Update & provisioning > Configu-
ration via SIP.
2. Select or clear the Permit remote configuration via SIP messages check box.
Further steps:
– Configure a configuration server in the whitelist for configuration via SIP messages.
Configuring a Whitelist for Configuration via SIP Messages
You can configure up to 5 configuration servers for the configuration via SIP messages in the
whitelist.
You can configure a whitelist as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Switches configuration via SIP messages on.
Switches configuration via SIP messages off.
Switches configuration via SIP messages on.
Switches configuration via SIP messages off.
652 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Service and Maintenance
Update and Provisioning
Configuring a Whitelist for Configuration via SIP Messages
Using the Configuration Manager to Configure a Whitelist for Configuration via SIP
Messages
Requirements:
– Configuration via SIP messages enabled under Settings > System > Update & provi-
sioning > Provisioning
1. Open the Settings > System > Update & provisioning > Provisioning screen.
2. In the IP address of configuration server entry field under Configuration via SIP
messages, enter the address of the configuration server. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Configure a Whitelist for Configuration via SIP Messages
Requirements:
– Configuration via SIP messages enabled under Apps > Settings > System >
Update & provisioning > Configuration via SIP messages
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > System > Update & provisioning.
2. Under Configuration via SIP, tap on Configuration via SIP messages.
3. Under Whitelist, tap on IP address of configuration server and enter the address
of the configuration server in the entry field. Possible entries:
4. Tap on OK.
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 103.103.103.103)
URL (example: Konfigurationsserver.de)
IP address with a range of 0 to 255 (example: 103.103.103.103)
URL (example: Konfigurationsserver.de)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 653
Service and Maintenance
Storage (SD Card Memory)
Removing and Mounting an SD card
Storage (SD Card Memory)
The telephone can be fitted with an SD card on which additional multimedia files and
downloads from apps can be saved. The amount of storage (memory) available is displayed
under Apps > Settings > Device > Storage. A file management system is not
provided in the telephone's operating system, but you can set one up by installing an appro-
priate app.
The version of the SD card used by the telephone is shown on the underside of the telephone.
Removing and Mounting an SD card
To avoid data loss you should remove the SD card in the proper manner.
Note: If the SD card is removed unexpectedly, it is write-protected when it is
inserted into the telephone again. Follow these steps to remove write
protection after the SD card was removed unexpectedly.
You can safely remove the SD card as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Storage.
2. Tap on Unmount SD card.
3. Tap on OK.
You can now remove the SD card. Under SD card you now see Mount SD card.
4. After you have inserted the SD card again, tap on Mount the SD card to make the
SD card available again.
Formatting an SD card
When you swap the SD card, the new SD card must be formatted with a compatible file system.
654 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Service and Maintenance
Storage (SD Card Memory)
Formatting an SD card
Note: While the inserted SD card is being formatted with the compatible file
system, all the data present on it is deleted.
You can format an SD card as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Device > Storage.
2. Tap on Format SD card.
The SD card is formatted, and all the data on it is overwritten with the compatible file
system.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 655
Service and Maintenance
Shutting Down and Restarting the Telephone
Formatting an SD card
Shutting Down and Restarting the Telephone
The telephone can be switched to an idle state (sleep). It can also be restarted when required.
You can shut down and restart the telephone as follows:
Using the telephone
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > System > Shutdown/Reboot.
2. Select one of the following options:
Note: After you have shut down the telephone as described above, it goes
into idle state (sleep), but continues to use power. To save electricity, you can
shut down it completely by removing the PoE cable.
Cancel: cancels the operation.
Restart: restarts the telephone.
Shutdown: shuts down the telephone.
656 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Service and Maintenance
Extending the Telephone Functionality
Purchasing and Activating Extra Functions in the Upgrade Center
Extending the Telephone Functionality
The telephone can be extended by adding the functions listed below. However, a fee is charged
for their activation at the Auerswald Upgrade Center.
Answering machine function COMfortel Voicemail (for COMfortel 2600/3600 IP included in
the scope of delivery)
COMfortel Synchronisation via ActiveSync, CalDAV and CardDAV (for COMfortel 3600 IP
included in the scope of delivery)
IP camera App (for COMfortel 3600 IP included in the scope of delivery)
MP3 support (for COMfortel 3600 IP activation is free of charge)
You can add extra functionality in a number of different ways:
Purchase and immediate activation via the configuration manager (see chapter Service and
Maintenance > Purchasing and Activating Extra Functions in the Upgrade Center).
Purchase from the Upgrade Center (see chapter Service and Maintenance > Purchase
Extra Functions) for activation later on via the configuration manager or by telephone (see
chapter Service and Maintenance > Activating Extra Functions).
Purchasing and Activating Extra Functions in the Upgrade Center
When you log in to the Upgrade Center, the system uses your telephone's serial number and
its range of functions to suggest a number of activation options to you.
Note: You can also ask your specialist dealer to activate your new functions
in the Upgrade Center.
Registering/Creating an Account for the Upgrade Center
Requirements:
– PC with existing Internet connection
1. Call the Auerswald Upgrade Center:
Open a browser (for example, Mozilla Firefox): In the browser's address field,
enter http://auerswald.de/upgradecenter.
In the configuration manager (administration> dongle releases): Click Open
Upgrade Center.
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 657
Service and Maintenance
Extending the Telephone Functionality
Purchasing and Activating Extra Functions in the Upgrade Center
2. Click My account.
The User administration screen opens.
3. Click Registration (create user account).
This opens a form in which you can enter personal data.
4. Enter the required data and click Save data.
You receive an e-mail containing the registration data.
Using the Configuration Manager to Purchase and Activate Extra Functions
Requirements:
– User account in the Upgrade Center
– PC with existing Internet connection
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Activation screen.
2. Under UNLOCK CODE, click Buying in the Upgrade Center.
The Upgrade Center opens in another window. The Other Device-S/N entry field is
automatically filled with your telephone's serial number. An overview of the articles
available for your telephone is displayed.
3. Enter the data for your account in the Username and Password (PIN) entry fields
under My Account.
4. Click Log-in.
The Upgrade Center opens. The available categories are displayed.
5. Enter the telephone's serial number in the Other: Device-S/N entry field, under Type
of device.
6. Click Accept.
7. Under Category, click on the category of functions you would like to purchase, or go
to All items for this device: and click on View to see which articles are available for
this telephone.
The available articles are displayed.
8. Click in the Shop column to place the required article in the shopping basket.
9. Once you have selected all the articles you want, click Basket under Basket.
The selected articles are displayed in the basket.
658 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Service and Maintenance
Extending the Telephone Functionality
Purchasing and Activating Extra Functions in the Upgrade Center
10. Select the payment type.
11. If you have made all your changes, click on:
Proceed to the TOB: Before you place your first order and, after every update to
the general terms of business (Terms and Conditions), you must accept
Auerswald & Co KG's Terms and Conditions.
Proceed to customer data
12. Follow these additional instructions.
You will receive the order confirmation for your order and the 20-figure activation code
after your purchase is complete.
13. Transfer the activation code to your telephone:
The payment types are Credit card Debit card orInvoice: The order confirmation
(with the activation code) is displayed at the end of the ordering process in the
Upgrade Center. Click Transfer all activation codes to the telephone with the
IP XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX.
The new functions are activated automatically in the telephone. The new state of
the activation is displayed under Settings > Auerswald > Activation.
Notes: If the Upgrade Center recognises your e-mail address, the order
confirmation is sent out again to you by e-mail. If you have not entered an e-
mail address, you can print out the order confirmation displayed at the end of
the ordering process.
Payment method Cash on delivery: The order confirmation (with the activation
code) is sent to you by parcel service.
Activate the extra functions in the configuration manager or in the telephone (see
chapter Service and maintenance> Activate extra functions).
Purchase Extra Functions
Requirements:
– User account in the Upgrade Center
– You need to know the serial number of the telephone
– PC with existing Internet connection
1. Go to the Auerswald Upgrade Center in the Internet (see www.auerswald.de/upgra-
decenter).
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 659
Service and Maintenance
Extending the Telephone Functionality
Purchasing and Activating Extra Functions in the Upgrade Center
2. Enter the data for your account in the Username and Password (PIN) entry fields
under My Account.
3. Click Log-in.
The Upgrade Center opens. The available categories are displayed.
4. Enter the telephone's serial number in the Other: Device-S/N entry field, under Type
of device.
5. Click Accept.
6. Under Category, click on the category of functions you would like to purchase, or go
to All items for this device: and click on View to see which articles are available for
this telephone.
7. Click in the Shop column to place the required article in the shopping basket.
8. Once you have selected all the articles you want, click Basket under Basket.
The selected articles are displayed in the basket.
9. Select the payment type.
The payment types are Credit card Debit card orInvoice: The order confirmation
(with the activation code) is displayed at the end of the ordering process in the
Upgrade Center.
Note: If the Upgrade Center recognises your e-mail address, the order confir-
mation is sent out again to you by e-mail. If you have not entered an e-mail
address, you can print out the order confirmation displayed at the end of the
ordering process.
Payment method Cash on delivery: The order confirmation (with the activation
code) is sent to you by parcel service.
10. If you have made all your changes, click on:
Proceed to the TOB: Before you place your first order and, after every update to
the general terms of business (Terms and Conditions), you must accept
Auerswald & Co KG's Terms and Conditions.
Proceed to customer data
11. Follow these additional instructions.
You will receive the order confirmation for your order and the 20-figure activation code
after your purchase is complete.
660 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Service and Maintenance
Extending the Telephone Functionality
Activating Extra Functions
Further steps:
– Activate the functions using the configuration manager or the telephone.
Activating Extra Functions
You can activate extra functions as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Using the telephone
Using the Configuration Manager to Activate Extra Functions
Requirements:
– Activation code purchased from the Upgrade Center
1. Open the Settings > Auerswald > Activation screen.
A list of the possible functional extensions with their activation status (activated/not
activated) is displayed.
2. Enter the activation code in the Enter activation code entry field. Possible entries:
Further steps:
– Save your settings before you leave the screen.
Using the Telephone to Activate Extra Functions
Requirements:
– Activation code purchased from the Upgrade Center
1. Tap on Apps > Settings > Auerswald > More > Activation.
A list of the possible functional extensions with their activation status (activated/not
activated) is displayed.
2. Tap on Enter activation code and enter it in the entry field. Possible entries:
3. Tap on OK.
20-digit unblocking code (example: 36207715423136841100)
20-digit unblocking code (example: 36207715423136841100)
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 661
Service and Maintenance
Extending the Telephone Functionality
Activating Extra Functions
The function is activated and its status changes.
662 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Service and Maintenance
Service Data
Creating a Service Data Backup
Service Data
If the telephone fails to operate correctly, you can record this behaviour in a number of logs.
These can then be sent to the technical departments (Service, Development) so that the cause
of the fault can be investigated.
Creating a Service Data Backup
If the telephone does not function correctly, and this is not the result of incorrect use or external
effects, you can use the service data to check the fault.
You can create a service data backup as follows:
Using the configuration manager
1. Open the Settings > Personal > Backup & reset screen.
2. Under Create backup, click on Read (after Service data).
A dialogue opens for downloading the "ServiceData.log" file.
3. Click on Save file (this text depends on which browser you are using).
4. Click on OK.
The backup file is saved in the folder configured for downloads on the PC.
Further steps:
– The technical departments (Service and Development) can use this file to perform trouble-
shooting.
Logging the Network Data Stream
You can record a network log in PCAP format so that you can log the Ethernet data stream.
This log can then be evaluated later on (e.g. with Wireshark/Ethereal), to find out the cause of
any errors that may have occurred.
The recorded network data stream can include the following components:
Data streams from other computers in the network
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 663
Service and Maintenance
Service Data
Logging the Network Data Stream
Connection data sets containing the destination, source, and time information for a telecom-
munication connection
The spoken word of both ends of a telecommunication connection
Telephone configuration data, along with the corresponding PINs and passwords
Important:
Prior to recording, every subscriber on the telecommunication connection
must be informed that the contents are going to be recorded and be told who
will process the data that is retrieved.
If you want to provide the recorded data to your specialist dealer or to
Auerswald for the purpose of error analysis, you have to ensure that the
applicable legal requirements are met.
You can log the network data stream as follows:
Using the configuration manager
Requirements:
– Pop-up blocker which is disabled in the browser or a defined exception rule
1. Click on Information > Network data stream.
2. In the entry field, tap Ok to accept the legal terms and conditions.
3. Click Start trace.
This starts recording the network log.
4. To stop recording the network log, click Stop trace.
A dialogue opens for downloading the "servicetrace.pcap" file.
5. Click on Save file (this text depends on which browser you are using).
6. Click on OK.
The backup file is saved in the folder configured for downloads on the PC.
Further steps:
– The technical departments (Service and Development) can use this file to perform trouble-
shooting.
664 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Index
Index
A
account ............................................................................................................................................. 618
account name ............................................................................................................................ 502
adding ......................................................................................................................................... 618
authorization ID ..........................................................................................................................511
BLF resource list subscription ................................................................................................. 519
connection type ......................................................................................................................... 514
country prefix ............................................................................................................................. 512
creating ....................................................................................................................................... 497
DDI main number ...................................................................................................................... 515
default account .......................................................................................................................... 507
deleting ............................................................................................................................... 499, 619
local area code .......................................................................................................................... 512
password .................................................................................................................................... 509
provider/PBX .............................................................................................................................. 503
registering .......................................................................................................................... 456, 500
synchronisation on/off .............................................................................................................. 619
synchronisation, manual .......................................................................................................... 620
system telephone ...................................................................................................................... 504
telephone number ..................................................................................................................... 516
use .............................................................................................................................................. 501
username ................................................................................................................................... 508
voice mailbox, SIP account ..................................................................................................... 521
accounts ........................................................................................................................................... 497
activation
telephone, extending functionality
.......................................................................................... 656
ActiveSync account (Exchange)
configuring
.................................................................................................................................. 386
creating ....................................................................................................................................... 384
adding
app
................................................................................................................................................ 50
all apps ............................................................................................................................................... 50
Android keyboard .............................................................................................................................. 56
settings ....................................................................................................................................... 616
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 665
Index
Android version ................................................................................................................................ 628
announcement (InterCom) ............................................................................................................. 196
announcement before answering
function key
................................................................................................................................ 265
more detailed information ........................................................................................................ 264
types ........................................................................................................................................... 264
announcement before answering for group ................................................................................ 264
on/off ........................................................................................................................................... 264
announcements ....................................................................................................................... 371, 441
default announcement (answering machine) ........................................................................ 371
deleting (answering machine) ................................................................................................. 376
deleting (voice mailbox) ........................................................................................................... 443
on/off (answering machine) ..................................................................................................... 376
own announcement on/off ....................................................................................................... 442
recording (voice mailbox) ......................................................................................................... 441
recording (voicemail) ........................................................................................................ 375, 377
uploading (answering machine) ...................................................................................... 372, 373
666 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Index
answering machine
activating
.................................................................................................................................... 656
answering machine list ............................................................................................................. 362
answering machine list, opening ............................................................................................. 362
attaching of incoming messages as files, on/off ................................................................... 332
basic settings ............................................................................................................................. 297
call acceptance .......................................................................................................................... 307
call acceptance readiness ....................................................................................................... 302
call acceptance rules ................................................................................................................ 309
call acceptance time ......................................................................................................... 307, 316
call recording ............................................................................................................................. 320
call recording, announcement ......................................................................................... 327, 329
call recording, automatic .......................................................................................................... 323
call type ...................................................................................................................................... 309
caller information ....................................................................................................................... 298
calls for group ............................................................................................................................ 308
deleting an announcement ...................................................................................................... 376
deleting recordings ................................................................................................................... 367
e-mail in html format, sending,on/off ...................................................................................... 331
e-mail internationalisation ........................................................................................................ 346
e-mail recipient .......................................................................................................................... 334
e-mail sender ............................................................................................................................. 339
e-mail settings ........................................................................................................................... 339
forwarding recordings by e-mail .............................................................................................. 365
incoming call, forwarding ......................................................................................................... 295
listening in .................................................................................................................................. 300
listening to recordings .............................................................................................................. 364
marking sent messages as read on answering machine, on/off ........................................ 333
messages, forwarding by e-mail ............................................................................................. 330
messages, forwarding by e-mail, on/off ................................................................................. 330
outgoing mail server, authentication ....................................................................................... 341
outgoing mail server, encryption ............................................................................................. 344
outgoing mail server, IP address ............................................................................................ 340
outgoing mail server, password .............................................................................................. 343
outgoing mail server, port ........................................................................................................ 340
outgoing mail server, username .............................................................................................. 342
playback, automatic .................................................................................................................. 297
quick remote access number .................................................................................................. 355
readiness .................................................................................................................................... 302
recording an announcement ............................................................................................ 375, 377
recording time, door calls ......................................................................................................... 318
remote access ........................................................................................................................... 352
remote access, configuring ...................................................................................................... 353
remote access, performing ...................................................................................................... 357
separator tone ........................................................................................................................... 299
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 667
Index
standard announcement, language ........................................................................................ 371
switching an announcement on or off .................................................................................... 376
switching readiness on/off ....................................................................................................... 302
test e-mail, sending ................................................................................................................... 335
uploading an announcement ........................................................................................... 372, 373
voice memo ................................................................................................................................ 378
voice memo, listening to .......................................................................................................... 379
voice memo, recording ............................................................................................................. 378
answering machine list ................................................................................................................... 362
deleting recordings ................................................................................................................... 367
forwarding recordings by e-mail .............................................................................................. 365
listening to recordings .............................................................................................................. 364
opening ....................................................................................................................................... 362
668 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Index
app ...................................................................................................................................................... 60
access to credentials storage .................................................................................................. 613
adding ........................................................................................................................................... 50
app shop ....................................................................................................................................... 65
browser ......................................................................................................................................... 65
calculator ...................................................................................................................................... 70
calendar ........................................................................................................................................ 70
calendar sync .............................................................................................................................. 65
clock .............................................................................................................................................. 70
configuring .................................................................................................................................. 579
contact .......................................................................................................................................... 70
contacts sync ...............................................................................................................................65
control by external app ............................................................................................................. 256
data, deleting ............................................................................................................................. 580
deleting ......................................................................................................................................... 51
device administrator ..................................................................................................................611
downloading ................................................................................................................................. 70
downloads .................................................................................................................................... 65
e-mail ............................................................................................................................................ 65
function keys ................................................................................................................................ 67
functions ....................................................................................................................................... 66
gallery ........................................................................................................................................... 69
home screen ................................................................................................................................ 49
installing ........................................................................................................................................ 70
Instant Messaging ....................................................................................................................... 69
IP camera ..................................................................................................................................... 69
managing .............................................................................................................................. 42, 579
managing running services ...................................................................................................... 579
moving .......................................................................................................................................... 51
moving to SD card .................................................................................................................... 580
music ............................................................................................................................................. 70
permitting installation of apps of unknown origin ...................................................................611
removing ..................................................................................................................................... 580
searching for ................................................................................................................................ 70
settings ......................................................................................................................................... 65
setup assistant ............................................................................................................................. 60
stop, forcing ...............................................................................................................................580
storage (memory), managing use ........................................................................................... 580
telephony ...................................................................................................................................... 61
appearance
configuration manager
................................................................................................................ 81
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 669
Index
application (app) ................................................................................................................................ 60
assignment
touch function key
....................................................................................................................... 51
attacks on the SIP server (protection) .......................................................................................... 547
automatic bandwidth amplification ................................................................................................ 159
function key ................................................................................................................................ 160
on/off ........................................................................................................................................... 159
automatic word correction .............................................................................................................. 616
availability
information
................................................................................................................................. 628
B
Back key ............................................................................................................................................. 43
backup .............................................................................................................................................. 630
bandwidth amplification .................................................................................................................. 159
on/off ........................................................................................................................................... 159
basic knowledge
telephone
...................................................................................................................................... 35
BLF resource list subscription ....................................................................................................... 519
Bluetooth
function key
................................................................................................................................ 526
bluetooth ........................................................................................................................................... 525
boss/secretary function .................................................................................................................. 163
boss key, configuring on secretary telephone ....................................................................... 167
secretary key, configuring on boss telephone ....................................................................... 164
brightness sensor .............................................................................................................................. 44
browser ............................................................................................................................................... 50
busy signal
initiating power dialling
............................................................................................................. 224
priority call (do-not-disturb) ...................................................................................... 100, 101, 102
query call, ending ...................................................................................................................... 106
C
calendar
synchronisation, activating
....................................................................................................... 656
670 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Index
calibration ......................................................................................................................................... 578
call ..................................................................................................................................................... 103
accepting ...................................................................................................................................... 92
anonymous ................................................................................................................................ 230
caller, putting on hold .................................................................................................................. 93
call-waiting call, accepting ......................................................................................................... 95
call-waiting call, forwarding ........................................................................................................ 95
external, accepting (pick-up) ................................................................................................... 219
finishing ...................................................................................................................................... 104
forwarding .................................................................................................................................... 93
hands-free calling .......................................................................................................................116
hands-free calling, off ................................................................................................................117
hands-free calling, on ................................................................................................................117
headset ........................................................................................................................................119
ignoring the call-waiting call ....................................................................................................... 96
information ................................................................................................................................. 103
interrupting for pick-up .............................................................................................................. 219
loudspeaker listening .................................................................................................................118
loudspeaker listening, off ..........................................................................................................118
loudspeaker listening, on ..................................................................................................118, 119
muting ......................................................................................................................................... 104
pick-up ........................................................................................................................................ 219
rejecting ........................................................................................................................................ 92
rejecting a call-waiting call ......................................................................................................... 94
sending DTMF signals .............................................................................................................. 104
subscriber, changing ................................................................................................................. 107
to the boss telephone ............................................................................................................... 163
transferring ................................................................................................................................. 109
transferring without announcement ......................................................................... 110, 111, 113
call acceptance readiness .............................................................................................................. 302
call acceptance time ............................................................................................................... 307, 316
call forwarding .................................................................................................................................. 234
external telephone numbers .................................................................................................... 249
immediately ................................................................................................................................ 236
on busy ....................................................................................................................................... 236
on no reply ................................................................................................................................. 236
subscriber ................................................................................................................................... 236
subscriber, in PBX ..................................................................................................................... 244
types ........................................................................................................................................... 236
variant, external telephone numbers ...................................................................................... 234
variant, subscriber ..................................................................................................................... 234
variants ....................................................................................................................................... 234
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 671
Index
call forwarding (call deflection) ........................................................................................................ 93
call forwarding for subscribers in PBX
function key
................................................................................................................................ 245
on/off ........................................................................................................................................... 244
call forwarding, external telephone number
function key
................................................................................................................................ 250
on/off ........................................................................................................................................... 249
call log ................................................................................................................................. 49, 121, 138
call logging, on/off ..................................................................................................................... 607
dialling ......................................................................................................................................... 139
entries, deleting ......................................................................................................................... 139
opening ....................................................................................................................................... 138
call logging
switching on/off and configuring
.............................................................................................. 607
call pick-up
pick-up
........................................................................................................................................ 219
pick-up, during call .................................................................................................................... 219
call recording ................................................................................................................................... 320
announcement ................................................................................................................... 327, 329
automatic .................................................................................................................................... 323
automatic, function key ............................................................................................................ 325
function key ................................................................................................................................ 321
call transfer ....................................................................................................................................... 109
options ........................................................................................................................................ 109
to waiting loop .............................................................................................................................111
with announcement ....................................................................................................................110
without announcement .............................................................................................. 110, 111, 113
call types (group) ............................................................................................................................. 179
call waiting ........................................................................................................................................ 149
call-waiting call, ignoring ............................................................................................................ 96
call-waiting call, rejecting ........................................................................................................... 94
call-waiting calls .......................................................................................................................... 94
call-waiting, forwarding ............................................................................................................... 95
door knock .................................................................................................................................. 272
function key ................................................................................................................................ 150
on/off ........................................................................................................................................... 149
switching off call-waiting tone .................................................................................................... 96
waiting call, accepting ................................................................................................................ 95
672 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Index
call, initiating ...................................................................................................................................... 97
from the answering machine list ............................................................................................. 366
from the call log ......................................................................................................................... 139
from the caller list ...................................................................................................................... 142
from the contacts ....................................................................................................................... 124
from the redial list ...................................................................................................................... 136
from the voice mailbox message list ...................................................................................... 436
in hands-free calling mode ........................................................................................................116
via targeted exchange line ....................................................................................................... 175
with Calling Line Identity Restriction ........................................................................................ 99
with dial preparation .................................................................................................................... 98
caller list .................................................................................................................................... 121, 141
configuring .................................................................................................................................. 607
dialling ......................................................................................................................................... 142
opening ....................................................................................................................................... 141
caller, putting on hold ........................................................................................................................ 93
calling anonymously ....................................................................................................................... 230
Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR)
function key
................................................................................................................................ 231
on/off ........................................................................................................................................... 230
calling line identity restriction (CLIR) ............................................................................................ 230
CE mark, see "Warranty terms, information service" leaflet
certificate, encrypted
installing from SD card
............................................................................................................. 613
changing the active call partner (transferring) ............................................................................. 107
CLIR
function key
................................................................................................................................ 231
on/off ........................................................................................................................................... 230
CLIR (Calling Line Identity Restriction) ........................................................................................ 230
codecs
configuring
.................................................................................................................................. 475
comparison, data ............................................................................................................................. 618
completing words automatically .................................................................................................... 616
conference call .................................................................................................................................113
connecting the other two conference call partners to each other .......................................114
ending completely ......................................................................................................................115
ending with a conference call partner .....................................................................................114
options .........................................................................................................................................113
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 673
Index
configuration
functions
..................................................................................................................................... 144
via SIP messages ..................................................................................................................... 650
via SIP messages, on/off ......................................................................................................... 650
configuration manager ...................................................................................................................... 73
appearance .................................................................................................................................. 81
entry fields .................................................................................................................................... 77
language ....................................................................................................................................... 81
legibility ......................................................................................................................................... 81
list fields ........................................................................................................................................ 77
logging out .................................................................................................................................... 77
navigation ..................................................................................................................................... 77
opening ......................................................................................................................................... 73
operating instructions ................................................................................................................. 76
password ...................................................................................................................................... 82
password, deleting ...................................................................................................................... 84
selection fields ............................................................................................................................. 77
symbol .......................................................................................................................................... 80
table entries ................................................................................................................................. 78
username ..................................................................................................................................... 81
configuration switchover ................................................................................................................. 209
function key ................................................................................................................................ 209
manually ..................................................................................................................................... 209
674 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Index
connections ........................................................................................................................................ 46
contact ................................................................................................................................ 50, 121, 122
creating ....................................................................................................................................... 124
default telephone number ........................................................................................................ 122
deleting ....................................................................................................................................... 127
display options ........................................................................................................................... 132
displaying ................................................................................................................................... 122
editing ......................................................................................................................................... 126
exporting ..................................................................................................................................... 135
Favourites .................................................................................................................................. 131
forwarding call to answering machine .................................................................................... 128
hiding .......................................................................................................................................... 130
importing ..................................................................................................................................... 135
linking with IP camera .............................................................................................................. 600
merging ....................................................................................................................................... 126
option .......................................................................................................................................... 128
photo ........................................................................................................................................... 124
ringtone ....................................................................................................................................... 128
searching for .............................................................................................................................. 122
selecting for display .................................................................................................................. 131
separating .................................................................................................................................. 126
sharing ................................................................................................................................ 127, 135
synchronisation, activating ....................................................................................................... 656
telephone number, adopting from a list .................................................................................. 133
telephone number, adopting from dial preparation ............................................................... 133
telephone number, dialling ....................................................................................................... 124
telephone number, transferring to other dialogues .............................................................. 134
contact/telephone book key ............................................................................................................. 41
control by external app ................................................................................................................... 256
function key ................................................................................................................................ 256
credential storage
certificate, encrypted
................................................................................................................ 613
credentials
deleting
....................................................................................................................................... 614
credentials storage
access by apps
.......................................................................................................................... 613
D
data backup
creating
....................................................................................................................................... 630
saving to the telephone ............................................................................................................ 631
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 675
Index
date ................................................................................................................................................... 622
date format ................................................................................................................................. 626
setting manually ........................................................................................................................ 622
Declaration of conformity, see "Warranty terms, information service" leaflet
default account
................................................................................................................................ 507
Delete key .......................................................................................................................................... 43
deleting ............................................................................................................................................... 79
app ................................................................................................................................................ 51
device .................................................................................................................................................. 36
device administrator .........................................................................................................................611
DHCP
client, on/off
................................................................................................................................ 529
dial preparation .................................................................................................................................. 98
telephone number, adopting .................................................................................................... 133
dialling
DTMF digits in call
.................................................................................................................... 104
from a conversation (query) ..................................................................................................... 105
from the answering machine list ............................................................................................. 366
from the call log ......................................................................................................................... 139
from the caller list ...................................................................................................................... 142
from the contacts ....................................................................................................................... 124
from the redial list ...................................................................................................................... 136
from the voice mailbox message list ...................................................................................... 436
telephone number ....................................................................................................................... 97
dictionary .......................................................................................................................................... 616
DiffServ
on/off
........................................................................................................................................... 535
676 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Index
directional pad ................................................................................................................................... 43
display ......................................................................................................................................... 44, 564
all apps ......................................................................................................................................... 50
brightness ................................................................................................................................... 564
browser ......................................................................................................................................... 50
call log ........................................................................................................................................... 49
configuring .................................................................................................................................. 578
contact .......................................................................................................................................... 50
display LED, configuring .......................................................................................................... 576
display profile ............................................................................................................................. 574
figure ............................................................................................................................................. 44
font size ...................................................................................................................................... 574
idle state ..................................................................................................................................... 566
language ..................................................................................................................................... 615
off ................................................................................................................................................. 569
power save mode ...................................................................................................................... 566
screen candy ............................................................................................................................. 573
sensitivity of the proximity sensors ......................................................................................... 577
sleep ........................................................................................................................................... 566
status info ..................................................................................................................................... 49
touch function key ....................................................................................................................... 51
using the directional pad ............................................................................................................ 43
using the touch function ............................................................................................................. 45
wallpaper .................................................................................................................................... 565
display elements ................................................................................................................................ 49
display LED ........................................................................................................................................ 36
display profile
configuring
.................................................................................................................................. 574
DNS
server, configuring
..................................................................................................................... 532
domain .............................................................................................................................................. 458
do-not-disturb ................................................................................................................................... 154
function key ................................................................................................................................ 155
ignoring (urgency call) .............................................................................................. 100, 101, 102
on/off ........................................................................................................................................... 154
door
call waiting (knock) at the door
............................................................................................... 272
door call, accepting ................................................................................................................... 271
door, opening ............................................................................................................................. 271
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 677
Index
door function .................................................................................................................................... 270
function key ................................................................................................................................ 272
performing .................................................................................................................................. 270
DoS attacks (protection) ................................................................................................................. 547
DTMF signalling .............................................................................................................................. 478
E
e-mail ........................................................................................................................................ 383, 388
account ............................................................................................................................... 383, 384
deleting ....................................................................................................................................... 388
forwarding .................................................................................................................................. 388
internationalisation .................................................................................................................... 346
language template .................................................................................................................... 346
messages, forwarding .............................................................................................................. 330
option, configuring ..................................................................................................................... 386
reading ........................................................................................................................................ 388
replying ....................................................................................................................................... 388
sending ....................................................................................................................................... 389
writing ......................................................................................................................................... 389
e-mail account
configuring
.................................................................................................................................. 386
creating ....................................................................................................................................... 384
deleting ....................................................................................................................................... 387
emergency numbers ....................................................................................................................... 582
encryption
SIPS
............................................................................................................................................ 467
SRTP .......................................................................................................................................... 480
ending a conversation
during a conference call
............................................................................................................115
during a query call ..................................................................................................................... 107
entries
creating
......................................................................................................................................... 78
deleting ......................................................................................................................................... 79
searching for ................................................................................................................................ 79
sorting ........................................................................................................................................... 79
678 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Index
entry field ............................................................................................................................................ 58
Environment, see "Warranty terms, information service" leaflet
environmental tips
............................................................................................................................. 34
Exchange ActiveSync account
configuring
.................................................................................................................................. 386
creating ....................................................................................................................................... 384
synchronisation, activating ....................................................................................................... 656
exchange line access number ....................................................................................................... 483
exchange line access, transferring ............................................................................................... 145
exchange line numbers
use, on/off
.................................................................................................................................. 482
external line transfer ....................................................................................................................... 145
function key ................................................................................................................................ 145
process ....................................................................................................................................... 145
external waiting field
function key
................................................................................................................................ 280
F
factory settings ................................................................................................................................ 630
factory settings reset ....................................................................................................................... 632
Favourites
contact
........................................................................................................................................ 131
Favourites bar .................................................................................................................................... 49
fax box .............................................................................................................................................. 395
archive ........................................................................................................................................ 450
archive, moving a message ..................................................................................................... 450
archive, opening ........................................................................................................................ 450
automatic operation .................................................................................................................. 400
automatic operation, on ............................................................................................................ 400
basic settings ............................................................................................................................. 396
message list ...............................................................................................................................430
message list, opening ............................................................................................................... 432
messages, deleting ................................................................................................................... 436
messages, distributing .............................................................................................................. 435
notification by e-mail ................................................................................................................. 419
notification by e-mail on/off ...................................................................................................... 419
readiness .................................................................................................................................... 404
readiness on/off ......................................................................................................................... 404
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 679
Index
faxbox
archive, deleting messages
..................................................................................................... 451
firmware version .............................................................................................................................. 628
follow-me .......................................................................................................................................... 171
function key ................................................................................................................................ 172
on/off ........................................................................................................................................... 171
680 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Index
function key ........................................................................................................................................ 40
announcement before answering ........................................................................................... 265
answering machine list ............................................................................................................. 367
answering machine, call acceptance rule .............................................................................. 313
answering machine, forwarding by e-mail ............................................................................. 335
answering machine, readiness ............................................................................................... 303
automatic bandwidth amplification .......................................................................................... 160
Bluetooth .................................................................................................................................... 526
boss key ..................................................................................................................................... 167
call forwarding for subscribers in PBX ................................................................................... 245
call forwarding, external telephone number .......................................................................... 250
call recording ............................................................................................................................. 321
call recording, automatic .......................................................................................................... 325
call waiting .................................................................................................................................. 150
Calling Line Identity Restriction ............................................................................................... 231
CLIR ............................................................................................................................................ 231
configuration switchover .......................................................................................................... 209
control by external app ............................................................................................................. 256
display ........................................................................................................................................... 51
do-not-disturb ............................................................................................................................ 155
door function .............................................................................................................................. 272
external line transfer ................................................................................................................. 145
fax box, automatic operation ................................................................................................... 401
fax box, message list ................................................................................................................ 437
fax box, notification by e-mail .................................................................................................. 420
follow-me .................................................................................................................................... 172
functions ....................................................................................................................................... 67
group ........................................................................................................................................... 181
group function ............................................................................................................................ 181
group state ................................................................................................................................. 188
headset ....................................................................................................................................... 192
idle state ..................................................................................................................................... 570
InterCom OneWay .................................................................................................................... 197
InterCom permission ................................................................................................................ 205
InterCom speaker phone ......................................................................................................... 202
IP camera ................................................................................................................................... 601
level 2 ........................................................................................................................................... 41
logging out from all groups ...................................................................................................... 185
macro .......................................................................................................................................... 214
pick-up ........................................................................................................................................ 220
programmable ............................................................................................................................. 41
relay ............................................................................................................................................ 227
ringtone ....................................................................................................................................... 560
secretary key ............................................................................................................................. 164
sleep ........................................................................................................................................... 570
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 681
Index
speed dialling ............................................................................................................................. 289
subscriber call forwarding ........................................................................................................ 238
targeted exchange line access ................................................................................................ 176
telephone line ............................................................................................................................ 259
voice mailbox, automatic operation ........................................................................................ 401
voice mailbox, message forwarding ....................................................................................... 415
voice mailbox, message list ..................................................................................................... 437
voice mailbox, notification by e-mail ....................................................................................... 420
voice mailbox, readiness .......................................................................................................... 405
voice mailbox, remote access ......................................................................................... 358, 426
voice mailbox, substitute function ........................................................................................... 410
voice memo, recording ..................................................................................................... 379, 447
waiting field (external) .............................................................................................................. 280
waiting field reception telephone ............................................................................................ 284
function key assignment
selection field
...............................................................................................................................67
functions ..................................................................................................................................... 66, 144
additional, buying .............................................................................................................. 657, 658
control by external app ............................................................................................................. 256
function groups ............................................................................................................................ 59
function key .................................................................................................................................. 67
function lists ................................................................................................................................. 59
selection field ...............................................................................................................................66
G
gateway
configuring
.................................................................................................................................. 531
GPS coordinates ............................................................................................................................. 584
group ................................................................................................................................................. 179
announcement before answering ........................................................................................... 264
call types .................................................................................................................................... 179
function key ................................................................................................................................ 181
information about function ....................................................................................................... 179
group functions ................................................................................................................................ 179
call types .................................................................................................................................... 179
function key ................................................................................................................................ 181
logging out from all groups ...................................................................................................... 181
more detailed information ........................................................................................................ 179
telephone, logging in/out .......................................................................................................... 180
682 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Index
group state
function key
................................................................................................................................ 188
logging on/off ............................................................................................................................. 180
H
hands-free calling .............................................................................................................................116
InterCom ..................................................................................................................................... 196
headset
automatic call acceptance
....................................................................................................... 191
call, making .................................................................................................................................119
function key ................................................................................................................................ 192
microphone gain, setting .......................................................................................................... 555
operation, on/off ........................................................................................................................ 191
ringing, on/off ............................................................................................................................. 556
type ............................................................................................................................................. 191
headset connection
technical data
...............................................................................................................................29
headset operation ........................................................................................................................... 191
headset socket
pinout
............................................................................................................................................ 29
help ...................................................................................................................................................... 85
Index ............................................................................................................................................. 86
navigation ..................................................................................................................................... 85
opening ......................................................................................................................................... 85
printing .......................................................................................................................................... 88
scrolling ........................................................................................................................................ 87
searching for ................................................................................................................................ 87
symbol .......................................................................................................................................... 89
Table of Contents ........................................................................................................................ 85
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 683
Index
help topics .......................................................................................................................................... 77
Home key ........................................................................................................................................... 43
home screen ...................................................................................................................................... 49
adding an app .............................................................................................................................. 50
app ................................................................................................................................................ 49
app, deleting ................................................................................................................................ 51
app, moving ................................................................................................................................. 51
display elements ......................................................................................................................... 49
Favourites bar .............................................................................................................................. 49
overview ....................................................................................................................................... 44
touch function key ....................................................................................................................... 51
widget ........................................................................................................................................... 49
hook key ............................................................................................................................................. 41
HTTP
proxy, configuring
...................................................................................................................... 533
I
idle state ........................................................................................................................................... 566
configuration-dependent .......................................................................................................... 568
configuring .................................................................................................................................. 566
off ................................................................................................................................................. 573
important information ........................................................................................................................ 20
importing
language file
.............................................................................................................................. 372
incoming call ...................................................................................................................................... 91
information ......................................................................................................................................... 20
instant messaging ........................................................................................................................... 391
app, configuring ......................................................................................................................... 391
reading and replying ................................................................................................................. 392
writing and sending ................................................................................................................... 392
InterCom OneWay .......................................................................................................................... 196
function key ................................................................................................................................ 197
performing .................................................................................................................................. 196
process ....................................................................................................................................... 196
InterCom permission ....................................................................................................................... 205
function key ................................................................................................................................ 205
684 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Index
InterCom speaker phone ............................................................................................................... 196
function key ................................................................................................................................ 202
performing .................................................................................................................................. 201
process ....................................................................................................................................... 201
IP address
configuring
.................................................................................................................................. 530
IP blacklist ........................................................................................................................................ 547
on/off ........................................................................................................................................... 547
IP camera ......................................................................................................................................... 586
activating .................................................................................................................................... 656
configuring motion detection & switching on/off ................................................................... 599
control, configuring ................................................................................................................... 596
creating ....................................................................................................................................... 586
deleting ....................................................................................................................................... 587
DTMF signal .............................................................................................................................. 600
full screen mode, on/off ............................................................................................................ 590
function key ................................................................................................................................ 601
image frequency ........................................................................................................................ 593
IP address .................................................................................................................................. 589
linking with contact .................................................................................................................... 600
name ........................................................................................................................................... 588
password .................................................................................................................................... 595
picture centring .......................................................................................................................... 592
picture scaling ............................................................................................................................ 591
switching increased security on/off ......................................................................................... 595
username ................................................................................................................................... 594
IP lock
deleting
....................................................................................................................................... 548
displaying ................................................................................................................................... 548
IP whitelist ................................................................................................................................ 547, 549
J
jitter buffer ........................................................................................................................................ 479
K
keyboard ........................................................................................................................................... 615
Android ......................................................................................................................................... 56
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 685
Index
keypad ................................................................................................................................................ 40
keypad sequence ............................................................................................................................ 485
alarm confirmation .................................................................................................................... 485
InterCom OneWay .................................................................................................................... 485
InterCom speaker phone ......................................................................................................... 485
pick-up ........................................................................................................................................ 485
keys ..................................................................................................................................................... 36
Back key ....................................................................................................................................... 43
contact/telephone book key ....................................................................................................... 41
Delete key .................................................................................................................................... 43
directional pad ............................................................................................................................. 43
displayled ..................................................................................................................................... 44
function key .................................................................................................................................. 40
Home key ..................................................................................................................................... 43
hook key ....................................................................................................................................... 41
keypad .......................................................................................................................................... 40
LED ............................................................................................................................................... 36
loudspeaker key .......................................................................................................................... 40
menu key ...................................................................................................................................... 42
message key ................................................................................................................................ 41
Microphone key ........................................................................................................................... 40
Minus key ..................................................................................................................................... 41
Plus key ........................................................................................................................................ 41
programmable function key ....................................................................................................... 41
query key ...................................................................................................................................... 41
redial list key ................................................................................................................................ 41
sensors ......................................................................................................................................... 44
L
language ........................................................................................................................................... 615
configuration manager ................................................................................................................ 81
display ......................................................................................................................................... 615
telephone .................................................................................................................................... 615
language file
voice mail function
.................................................................................................................... 372
686 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Index
language template
configuring
.................................................................................................................................. 347
e-mail .......................................................................................................................................... 346
exporting ..................................................................................................................................... 349
importing ..................................................................................................................................... 348
language, configuring ............................................................................................................... 350
logo, importing ........................................................................................................................... 350
reading ........................................................................................................................................ 346
LED
display
........................................................................................................................................... 36
display LED, configuring .......................................................................................................... 576
keys ............................................................................................................................................... 36
loudspeaker key .......................................................................................................................... 40
message key ................................................................................................................................ 41
message key LED, setting ....................................................................................................... 574
Microphone key ........................................................................................................................... 40
power save mode ...................................................................................................................... 566
legibility
configuration manager
................................................................................................................ 81
list ........................................................................................................................................................ 59
list entries
creating
......................................................................................................................................... 78
deleting ......................................................................................................................................... 79
searching for ................................................................................................................................ 79
sorting ........................................................................................................................................... 79
listening in ........................................................................................................................................ 300
location ............................................................................................................................................. 584
log file ................................................................................................................................................ 662
network data stream ................................................................................................................. 662
service data ................................................................................................................................ 662
logging in to a group ....................................................................................................................... 180
logging out from all groups
function key
................................................................................................................................ 185
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 687
Index
logging out of a group ..................................................................................................................... 180
loudspeaker key ................................................................................................................................ 40
loudspeaker listening .......................................................................................................................118
M
macro
function key
................................................................................................................................ 214
process ....................................................................................................................................... 213
macro function ................................................................................................................................. 213
mail ............................................................................................................................................ 383, 388
main menu ......................................................................................................................................... 42
managing running services ............................................................................................................ 579
menu ................................................................................................................................................... 42
apps, managing ........................................................................................................................... 42
notifications .................................................................................................................................. 43
settings ......................................................................................................................................... 43
wallpaper ...................................................................................................................................... 42
menu key ............................................................................................................................................ 42
message key ...................................................................................................................................... 41
message list ..................................................................................................................................... 430
fax box messages, distributing ................................................................................................ 435
fax box, opening ........................................................................................................................ 432
messages in voice mailbox, listening to ................................................................................. 434
messages, deleting from fax lbox ........................................................................................... 436
messages, deleting from voice mailbox ................................................................................. 436
voice mailbox messages, distributing .................................................................................... 435
voice mailbox, opening ............................................................................................................. 430
Message Waiting Indication (MWI) (voice mailbox) ................................................................... 521
Microphone key ................................................................................................................................. 40
microphone, off ................................................................................................................................ 104
Minus key ........................................................................................................................................... 41
moving
app
................................................................................................................................................ 51
MP3 support
activating
.................................................................................................................................... 656
688 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Index
music on hold
on/off
........................................................................................................................................... 476
provider ....................................................................................................................................... 476
muting ............................................................................................................................................... 104
N
NAT
keep alive, configuring
.............................................................................................................. 474
traversal, configuring ................................................................................................................ 469
navigation
configuration manager
................................................................................................................ 77
directional pad ............................................................................................................................. 43
help ............................................................................................................................................... 85
network ............................................................................................................................................. 529
data stream ................................................................................................................................ 662
interface type ............................................................................................................................. 495
MAC address ............................................................................................................................. 628
network data stream, logging ........................................................................................................ 662
notification sound ............................................................................................................................ 552
notifications ........................................................................................................................................ 43
number of telephones on PBX ........................................................................................................ 29
number presentation
provider
....................................................................................................................................... 491
suppressing .................................................................................................................................. 99
O
off (telephone) .................................................................................................................................. 655
operating instructions
configuration manager
................................................................................................................ 76
telephone ...................................................................................................................................... 56
operation
functions
..................................................................................................................................... 144
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 689
Index
outbound proxy ................................................................................................................................ 461
outgoing call ....................................................................................................................................... 97
overview
connections
.................................................................................................................................. 46
display ........................................................................................................................................... 44
home screen ................................................................................................................................ 44
sockets .......................................................................................................................................... 46
underside ...................................................................................................................................... 46
P
password
visible
.......................................................................................................................................... 610
PBX ................................................................................................................................................... 453
codecs ........................................................................................................................................ 475
creating ....................................................................................................................................... 454
deleting ....................................................................................................................................... 455
domain ........................................................................................................................................ 458
DTMF signalling ........................................................................................................................ 478
evaluation of incoming SIP messages ................................................................................... 487
exchange line numbers, use, on/off ....................................................................................... 482
jitter buffer .................................................................................................................................. 479
name ........................................................................................................................................... 456
NAT Keep Alive ......................................................................................................................... 474
NAT traversal ............................................................................................................................. 469
network interface type .............................................................................................................. 495
number presentation (outgoing) .............................................................................................. 491
outbound proxy .......................................................................................................................... 461
registrar ...................................................................................................................................... 459
SIP port ....................................................................................................................................... 463
SIP session timer ...................................................................................................................... 464
SIP transport protocol ............................................................................................................... 466
SIPS ............................................................................................................................................ 467
SRTP .......................................................................................................................................... 480
STUN server .............................................................................................................................. 472
type ............................................................................................................................................. 457
permission ........................................................................................................................................ 604
functions ..................................................................................................................................... 605
settings ....................................................................................................................................... 604
pick-up .............................................................................................................................................. 219
during call ................................................................................................................................... 219
function key ................................................................................................................................ 220
performing .................................................................................................................................. 219
690 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Index
pinout
headset socket
............................................................................................................................ 29
playback, automatic ........................................................................................................................ 297
Plus key .............................................................................................................................................. 41
power dialling ................................................................................................................................... 224
cancelling ................................................................................................................................... 225
initiating ...................................................................................................................................... 224
process ....................................................................................................................................... 224
power save mode ............................................................................................................................ 566
automatic .................................................................................................................................... 567
configuration-dependent .......................................................................................................... 568
display, off .................................................................................................................................. 569
function key ................................................................................................................................ 570
printing
help
............................................................................................................................................... 88
priority call
initiating
...................................................................................................................... 100, 101, 102
product details ................................................................................................................................... 25
programme (app) .............................................................................................................................. 60
proper use .......................................................................................................................................... 24
protection
attacks on the SIP server
......................................................................................................... 547
DoS attacks ................................................................................................................................ 547
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 691
Index
provider ............................................................................................................................................. 453
codecs ........................................................................................................................................ 475
creating ....................................................................................................................................... 454
deleting ....................................................................................................................................... 455
domain ........................................................................................................................................ 458
DTMF signalling ........................................................................................................................ 478
evaluation of incoming SIP messages ................................................................................... 487
jitter buffer .................................................................................................................................. 479
music on hold ............................................................................................................................ 476
name ........................................................................................................................................... 456
NAT Keep Alive ......................................................................................................................... 474
NAT traversal ............................................................................................................................. 469
network interface type .............................................................................................................. 495
number presentation (outgoing) .............................................................................................. 491
outbound proxy .......................................................................................................................... 461
registrar ...................................................................................................................................... 459
SIP port ....................................................................................................................................... 463
SIP session timer ...................................................................................................................... 464
SIP transport protocol ............................................................................................................... 466
SIPS ............................................................................................................................................ 467
SRTP .......................................................................................................................................... 480
STUN server .............................................................................................................................. 472
type ............................................................................................................................................. 457
provisioning ...................................................................................................................................... 634
automatic .................................................................................................................................... 638
configuration server .................................................................................................................. 651
configuration via SIP messages ............................................................................................. 650
configuration via SIP messages on/off ................................................................................... 650
DHCP data ................................................................................................................................. 640
provisioning server URL ........................................................................................................... 642
provisioning test ........................................................................................................................ 643
redirect server ............................................................................................................................ 641
schedule ..................................................................................................................................... 637
variants ....................................................................................................................................... 634
whitelist ....................................................................................................................................... 651
proximity sensor ................................................................................................................................ 44
Q
query call .......................................................................................................................................... 105
connecting the other two call partners to each other ........................................................... 107
ending a call ...............................................................................................................................107
initiating ...................................................................................................................................... 105
person being called is busy/does not respond ...................................................................... 106
692 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Index
query call, ending ............................................................................................................................ 106
query key ............................................................................................................................................ 41
quick remote access number ........................................................................................................ 355
R
readiness .......................................................................................................................................... 302
readiness answering machine
on/off
........................................................................................................................................... 302
readiness fax box
on/off
........................................................................................................................................... 404
readiness voice mailbox
on/off
........................................................................................................................................... 404
receiver
microphone gain, setting
.......................................................................................................... 555
recording time
door call
...................................................................................................................................... 318
redial list ................................................................................................................................... 121, 136
dialling ......................................................................................................................................... 136
entries, deleting ................................................................................................................. 137, 142
opening ....................................................................................................................................... 136
redial list key ...................................................................................................................................... 41
registrar ............................................................................................................................................ 459
registration status ............................................................................................................................ 293
rejecting
caller
............................................................................................................................................. 92
call-waiting call ............................................................................................................................ 94
relay .................................................................................................................................................. 226
function key ................................................................................................................................ 227
on/off ........................................................................................................................................... 226
remote access ................................................................................................................................. 352
on/off ........................................................................................................................................... 353
performing .................................................................................................................................. 357
performing, voice mailbox ........................................................................................................ 424
PIN, choosing ............................................................................................................................ 354
setting up .................................................................................................................................... 353
variants ....................................................................................................................................... 352
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 693
Index
reset .................................................................................................................................................. 630
resetting to factory settings ............................................................................................................ 632
restarting (telephone) ..................................................................................................................... 655
ringtone ............................................................................................................................................. 552
function key ................................................................................................................................ 560
on/off ........................................................................................................................................... 560
silence on user proximity ......................................................................................................... 563
RTP
port, configuring
......................................................................................................................... 536
S
safety information .............................................................................................................................. 22
scope of delivery ...............................................................................................................................31
screen keyboard ................................................................................................................................ 56
screen keyboard (Android)
settings
....................................................................................................................................... 616
screen lock ....................................................................................................................................... 608
automatic .................................................................................................................................... 610
off ................................................................................................................................................. 610
password, entering .................................................................................................................... 609
PIN, entering .............................................................................................................................. 609
SD card ..................................................................................................................................... 636, 653
certificate, encrypted ................................................................................................................ 613
formatting ................................................................................................................................... 653
providing ..................................................................................................................................... 653
removing ..................................................................................................................................... 653
search
help
............................................................................................................................................... 87
table entries ................................................................................................................................. 79
secretary function ............................................................................................................................ 163
Secretary key
configuring on boss telephone
................................................................................................ 164
secretary telephone
boss key, configuring
................................................................................................................ 167
694 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Index
security ............................................................................................................................................. 607
selection field ..................................................................................................................................... 58
sensitivity of the proximity sensors ............................................................................................... 577
service data ...................................................................................................................................... 662
backup, creating ........................................................................................................................ 662
Service, see "Warranty terms, information service" leaflet
setting up
dictionary
.................................................................................................................................... 616
settings ............................................................................................................................................. 452
access via menu ......................................................................................................................... 43
Android keyboard ...................................................................................................................... 616
app ................................................................................................................................................ 65
screen keyboard (Android) ...................................................................................................... 616
selection field ...............................................................................................................................65
setup assistant ................................................................................................................................... 60
shutting down (telephone) ............................................................................................................. 655
signal words ....................................................................................................................................... 21
silence on user proximity ............................................................................................................... 563
SIP
configuration via SIP messages
............................................................................................. 650
configuration via SIP messages on/off ................................................................................... 650
domain ........................................................................................................................................ 458
evaluation of incoming SIP messages ................................................................................... 487
network-provided number ........................................................................................................ 487
port .............................................................................................................................................. 463
registrar ...................................................................................................................................... 459
session timer .............................................................................................................................. 464
SIPS, configuring ...................................................................................................................... 467
SRTP, configuring ..................................................................................................................... 480
transport protocol ...................................................................................................................... 466
user-provided name .................................................................................................................. 487
user-provided number .............................................................................................................. 487
SIP server (protection against attacks) ........................................................................................ 547
SIPS
certificate
.................................................................................................................................... 467
configuring .................................................................................................................................. 467
fingerprint ................................................................................................................................... 467
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 695
Index
sleep .................................................................................................................................................. 566
configuration-dependent .......................................................................................................... 568
configuring .................................................................................................................................. 566
off ................................................................................................................................................. 573
slider .................................................................................................................................................... 58
sockets ................................................................................................................................................ 46
sorting
entries
........................................................................................................................................... 79
table entries ................................................................................................................................. 79
sound ................................................................................................................................................ 552
adding more ringtones to the telephone ................................................................................ 553
call differentiation ...................................................................................................................... 557
call type-dependent ringtone, setting ..................................................................................... 558
default ringtone, setting ............................................................................................................ 553
group-dependent ringtone, setting .......................................................................................... 559
headset microphone gain, setting ........................................................................................... 555
headset, ringing on/off .............................................................................................................. 556
on/off by touching ...................................................................................................................... 554
receiver microphone gain, setting ........................................................................................... 555
ringtone, on/off ........................................................................................................................... 560
setting a notification ringtone ................................................................................................... 554
setting account-specific ringtones .......................................................................................... 516
setting caller-dependent ring tone .......................................................................................... 128
silence on user proximity ......................................................................................................... 563
volume, setting .......................................................................................................................... 552
speed dialling ................................................................................................................................... 288
automatic dialling ...................................................................................................................... 292
automatic pick-up ...................................................................................................................... 292
function key ................................................................................................................................ 289
registration status ...................................................................................................................... 293
speed dialling keys
ranges of application
................................................................................................................ 288
SRTP
configuring
.................................................................................................................................. 480
status bar ............................................................................................................................................ 54
figure ............................................................................................................................................. 44
status info ..................................................................................................................................... 49, 55
figure ............................................................................................................................................. 44
696 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Index
storage (memory), managing use ................................................................................................. 580
storage (SD card memory) ............................................................................................................ 653
STUN server
configuring
.................................................................................................................................. 472
subnet mask
configuring
.................................................................................................................................. 530
subscriber call forwarding
function key
................................................................................................................................ 238
on/off ........................................................................................................................................... 236
subscriber, changing (transferring) ............................................................................................... 107
suppressing
number presentation
................................................................................................................... 99
telephone number transmission ................................................................................................ 99
Switching Bluetooth On/Off ............................................................................................................ 525
symbol
caution
.......................................................................................................................................... 21
configuration manager ................................................................................................................ 80
help window ................................................................................................................................. 89
off ................................................................................................................................................... 58
on .................................................................................................................................................. 58
option ............................................................................................................................................ 58
slider ............................................................................................................................................. 58
status bar ...................................................................................................................................... 54
warning ......................................................................................................................................... 21
synchronisation ................................................................................................................................ 618
account, manually ..................................................................................................................... 620
account, on/off ........................................................................................................................... 619
activating .................................................................................................................................... 656
system profile ................................................................................................................................... 209
system requirements ........................................................................................................................ 32
system telephone ............................................................................................................................ 504
T
table entries
creating
......................................................................................................................................... 78
deleting ......................................................................................................................................... 79
searching for ................................................................................................................................ 79
sorting ........................................................................................................................................... 79
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 697
Index
targeted exchange line access ...................................................................................................... 175
function key ................................................................................................................................ 176
initiating ...................................................................................................................................... 175
technical data ..................................................................................................................................... 26
telephone
basic knowledge
.......................................................................................................................... 35
entry field ...................................................................................................................................... 58
information ................................................................................................................................. 628
off ................................................................................................................................................. 655
operating instructions ................................................................................................................. 56
restarting .................................................................................................................................... 655
selection field ...............................................................................................................................58
settings ....................................................................................................................................... 452
shutting down ............................................................................................................................ 655
telephone book ................................................................................................................................ 122
Telephone book key .......................................................................................................................... 41
telephone keyboard settings
automatic speed dialling
.......................................................................................................... 292
telephone line .................................................................................................................................. 259
function key ................................................................................................................................ 259
telephone number
adopting from dial preparation
................................................................................................ 133
adopting from telephone number list ...................................................................................... 133
transfer to other dialogues ....................................................................................................... 134
telephone number list ..................................................................................................................... 121
telephone ringer
on/off
........................................................................................................................................... 560
telephone, buying additional functions
purchasing
.......................................................................................................................... 657, 658
telephone, extending functionality ................................................................................................ 656
telephoning
accepting a call
............................................................................................................................ 92
call-waiting calls .......................................................................................................................... 94
during a conference call ............................................................................................................113
during a query call ..................................................................................................................... 106
incoming call ................................................................................................................................ 91
outgoing call ................................................................................................................................. 97
rejecting caller ............................................................................................................................. 92
698 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Index
telephony app .................................................................................................................................... 61
buttons .......................................................................................................................................... 62
objects .......................................................................................................................................... 61
symbol .......................................................................................................................................... 62
toolbar ........................................................................................................................................... 62
text input
simplifying (dictionary)
.............................................................................................................. 616
time .................................................................................................................................................... 622
24-hour format, using ............................................................................................................... 625
setting manually ........................................................................................................................ 622
summertime and wintertime .................................................................................................... 622
time zone ............................................................................................................................ 622, 625
update, automatic ..................................................................................................................... 624
touch function key ............................................................................................................................. 51
transferring ....................................................................................................................................... 107
connecting the other two call partners to each other ........................................................... 107
ending active call ....................................................................................................................... 107
from query call ........................................................................................................................... 107
initiating from conference call ...................................................................................................114
transferring without announcement ............................................................................... 110, 111, 113
U
update ............................................................................................................................................... 634
automatic .................................................................................................................................... 645
firmware, restoring .................................................................................................................... 649
manually ..................................................................................................................................... 635
schedule ..................................................................................................................................... 637
update server ............................................................................................................................. 644
update test ................................................................................................................................. 647
variants ....................................................................................................................................... 634
Upgrade Center ...............................................................................................................................656
purchasing .......................................................................................................................... 657, 658
user account .............................................................................................................................. 656
user account
Upgrade Center
......................................................................................................................... 656
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 699
Index
user dictionary ................................................................................................................................. 616
V
vCard ........................................................................................................................................ 127, 135
VLAN ................................................................................................................................................. 538
gateway, configuring and switching on/off ............................................................................. 540
operating modes ....................................................................................................................... 538
switching on/off and configuring .............................................................................................. 539
voice mail function
language file
.............................................................................................................................. 372
700 COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015
Index
voice mailbox ................................................................................................................................... 395
announcements ......................................................................................................................... 441
archive ........................................................................................................................................ 450
archive, deleting messages ..................................................................................................... 451
archive, moving a message ..................................................................................................... 450
archive, opening ........................................................................................................................ 450
automatic operation .................................................................................................................. 400
automatic operation, on ............................................................................................................ 400
automatic playback ................................................................................................................... 396
basic settings ............................................................................................................................. 396
call information .......................................................................................................................... 397
deleting an announcement ...................................................................................................... 443
message forwarding ................................................................................................................. 414
message forwarding, on/off ..................................................................................................... 414
message list ...............................................................................................................................430
message list, opening ............................................................................................................... 430
Message Waiting Indication (MWI) ......................................................................................... 521
messages, deleting ................................................................................................................... 436
messages, distributing .............................................................................................................. 435
messages, listening to .............................................................................................................. 434
notification by e-mail ................................................................................................................. 419
own announcement on/off ....................................................................................................... 442
readiness .................................................................................................................................... 404
readiness on/off ......................................................................................................................... 404
recording an announcement .................................................................................................... 441
remote access ........................................................................................................................... 424
remote access, on/off ............................................................................................................... 425
remote access, performing ...................................................................................................... 424
separator tone ........................................................................................................................... 398
SIP account ................................................................................................................................ 521
substitute function ..................................................................................................................... 409
substitute function, on/off ......................................................................................................... 409
switching notification by e-mail on/off ..................................................................................... 419
voice memo ................................................................................................................................ 444
voice memo, deleting ................................................................................................................ 446
voice memo, distributing .......................................................................................................... 445
voice memo, listening to .......................................................................................................... 445
voice memo, recording ............................................................................................................. 444
voice memo .............................................................................................................................. 378, 444
deleting ....................................................................................................................................... 446
distributing .................................................................................................................................. 445
function key ........................................................................................................................ 379, 447
listening to .......................................................................................................................... 379, 445
recording ............................................................................................................................ 378, 444
COMfortel 1400IP/2600IP/3600IP - Firmware V2.2G - Operation and Configuration V03 07/2015 701
Index
VoIP
Internet Service Provider (ISP)
............................................................................................... 453
VPN ................................................................................................................................................... 542
OpenVPN certificate, deleting ................................................................................................. 546
OpenVPN certificate, saving in telephone ............................................................................. 543
OpenVPN configuration file, deleting ..................................................................................... 545
OpenVPN configuration file, saving in telephone ................................................................. 542
OpenVPN log file, opening ...................................................................................................... 544
OpenVPN, on/off ....................................................................................................................... 543
W
waiting field
call acceptance procedure
....................................................................................................... 278
setting up .................................................................................................................................... 277
waiting field (external)
function key
................................................................................................................................ 280
waiting field function ....................................................................................................................... 277
waiting field reception telephone
function key
................................................................................................................................ 284
on/off ........................................................................................................................................... 279
waiting loop .......................................................................................................................................111
wallpaper ............................................................................................................................................ 42
configuring .................................................................................................................................. 565
wallpaper (background) .................................................................................................................... 42
Warranty, see "Warranty terms, information service" leaflet
widget
home screen
................................................................................................................................ 49
status info ..................................................................................................................................... 55
word correction (automatic) ........................................................................................................... 616
word prompts ................................................................................................................................... 616
word, completing (automatically) .................................................................................................. 616
word, replacing (automatically) ..................................................................................................... 616
698


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Auerswald COMfortel 2600 IP at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Auerswald COMfortel 2600 IP in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 3,94 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info